JP6519309B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

BACKGROUND Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed for the purpose of improving the interest of a player by executing various effects .

JP 2007-252534 A

However, in the above-described Yu technique machine, further improvement of interest has been demanded.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of further improving the interest .

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a discriminating means for executing a predetermined discrimination, and a privilege giving means capable of granting a privilege based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a particular discrimination result. A game state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state to which the benefit is easily awarded, and a second gaming state to which the benefit is less likely to be awarded than the first gaming state, and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect And a specific period setting means for setting a specific period in which a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, wherein the effect executing means is configured to set the first gaming state while the specific effect is being executed. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect indicating that it is set, and the suggestion effect may be executed when a discrimination game based on the discrimination is being performed in a state in which the specific period is set. And the said specific State while is not set, or, if the effect of the state in which the discrimination game in a state in which the specific period is set not performed is performed by continues for a predetermined period of time is running, running If the predetermined effect different from the specific effect is being performed by the effect executing means, the specific effect is performed in the state where the specific period is set. It is not executed .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the discrimination means for executing the predetermined discrimination, the privilege giving means capable of offering the privilege based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and the privilege is awarded Game state setting means capable of setting a first game state easy to be played and a second game state to which the benefit is less likely to be awarded than the first game state, effect execution means capable of executing effects, and effect execution A specific period setting means for setting a specific period in which a specific effect is performed by the means, and the effect executing means sets the first gaming state while the specific effect is being performed In the state where the specific period is set, the suggestion effect can be executed when the discrimination game based on the discrimination is being performed, A specific period has been set There state, or, when the effect of the state in which the discrimination game in a state in which the specific period is set not performed is performed by continues for a predetermined time period is running, which is not executed, The specific effect is not executed when the predetermined effect which is different from the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means in a state where the specific period is set. .

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a board and a board lower unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a board lower part unit. (A) is a front view of a base member, a 1st out port, a 2nd out port, a lower left board member, and a lower right board member, (b) is a base member in the XVb-XVb line of Drawing 15 (a) And FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view of the lower left plate member. It is a front perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a vertical motion unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of an up-and-down operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical motion unit. It is a front view of a vertical motion unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 7 is a rear exploded perspective view of the combined operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an expansion-contraction production apparatus. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of an expansion-contraction production apparatus. (A) And (b) is a front view of rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a front view of a rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. (A) And (b) is a front view of rotation arm member and a rotation crank member. It is a graph showing the distance from a standard horizontal line of a projection part. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a slide operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a tilting operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a presentation member and a 2nd drive device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the rocking angle of the presentation member with respect to the rocking angle of a transmission member. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. It is a front view of a tilting operation unit and a slide operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and torsion spring in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. (A) And (b) is a front view of the transmission member and torsion spring in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a back perspective view of the transmission member in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a back perspective view of a movement contact member. (A) And (b) is a rear perspective view of a transmission member, (c) and (d) is a top view of a transmission member. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the main body member of a production member typically. It is a front view of a transmission member and a torsion spring. It is a front view of the compound operation unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. It is a front view of a compound operation unit. FIG. 69 (a) is a partial front view of the pivoting arm member in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 (b) is a partial top view of the pivoting arm member in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. ) Is a partial front view of a pivoting arm member. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a switching device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a compound operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the tilting operation unit in 7th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in a 1st control example, a special symbol holding ball storage area, a special symbol holding ball execution area, and a normal symbol holding ball storage area. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example FIG. (A) is a schematic view showing a first random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example FIG. 6C is a schematic view showing a first hit type selection table, and FIG. 6C is a schematic view showing a second hit random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) is set in the variation pattern selection table, It is the figure which showed the fluctuation pattern table for jackpots typically, (c) is the figure which showed the fluctuation pattern table for removal (normally) typically, and (d) is the fluctuation pattern for loss (probability change) It is the figure which showed the table typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the ball entering presentation selection table in the 1st example of control. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the work RAM of the display control apparatus in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the correction information table in the first control example is there. It is the figure which showed the setting coordinate of the display territory in the 1st control example. (A) to (c) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of power activation in the first control example. (A) From (b), it is the figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in a 1st control example, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display data table in the 1st example of control. It is the figure which showed typically the transfer data table in the 1st example of control. It is the figure which showed the drawing list in the 1st example of control typically. It is an example of the timing chart of the change display mode in the time saving game in the 1st control example. (A) to (b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device during the time saving in the first control example. (A) to (b) is an example of the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device during the time saving in the first control example. It is a timing chart in which the time production in the first control example is set. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the stop setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indicator setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selective processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flow chart which showed the synchronous production management processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the specific time production processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the ball entering presentation setting processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the boot processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st example of control. (A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. It is the flow chart which showed the special production amendment processing performed by MPU in the display control device in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is the flowchart which showed round number command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is the flowchart which showed the advance command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a ball entering effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is the flowchart which showed the specific time production command processing which is done. (A) is a flowchart showing effect mode change command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is an MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flowchart showing stop command processing executed by It is the flowchart which showed the error command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer renewal processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the presentation information revision processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control in the 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) to (b) are explanatory drawings about control of the stepping motor in the first control example. (A) from (b) is a figure which showed the detection availability by a slide position detection sensor for every positional relationship of a slide position detection sensor and a light-shielding plate. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a tilting origin sensor and a sensor shielding part, when a presentation member exists in an origin position. (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor and the sensor shielding portion when the effect member swings in the left direction in a front view, and (b) is a front surface of the effect member It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a tilting origin sensor and a sensor shielding part in, when swinging operation | movement is performed to the visual right direction. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 2nd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario table defined in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is an operation scenario table in the second control example. FIG. 16C is a schematic view schematically showing the prescribed content of the slide operation table included, and FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the prescribed content of the tilting operation table included in the operation scenario table in the second control example. is there. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the definition contents of the initial operation table included in the operation scenario table in the second control example, and (b) is a ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the prescription | regulation swing area | region table. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the operation | movement step number of the slide operation | movement in a 2nd control example, and the swingable direction of a presentation member. It is the figure which showed the correspondence of the operation step number of the swing operation | movement in the 2nd control example, and the operation step number of slide operation | movement. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the origin return process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the accessory function setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the execution command processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the initial stage operation processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the addition operation | movement process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the inclination direction setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormality detection processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the slide operation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 3rd example of control. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 3rd control example. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the third control example It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the model which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the timing presentation selection table prescribed | regulated in ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the model which showed typically the structure of the pressing period table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the table for early 3rd difficulty levels contained in the pressing period table in the 3rd control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the sub display during the timing effect, (b) shows an example of the display content when the player succeeds in pressing the frame button in the timing effect FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when a player fails in pressing the frame button in the timing effect, and (b) is a case where the effect mode of high difficulty is selected as the timing effect. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the sub display apparatus in. (A) is a figure which showed the display content of the sub display apparatus in case a player achieves a norm in a timing effect | action, (b) is a sub in the case where a player can not achieve a norm in a timing effect. It is a figure showing the contents of a display of a display. It is the model which showed typically the change of the aspect of the fluctuation production in which the timing production in the 3rd control example was set up. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing which are executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the timing presentation processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the middle setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 3rd control example. It is the flowchart which showed the last stage setting processing which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the information mode setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 3rd example of control. It is the model which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotation lighting unit in the 4th control example, (b) is a side view of the rotation lighting unit in the 4th control example. (A)-(c) is a figure which illustrated the lighting state where appearance quality deteriorates in a case where a rotation member is in a low-speed rotation state in the 4th control example. (A)-(c) is a figure which illustrated the lighting state where appearance quality is good, when a rotation member is a low-speed rotation state in the 4th example of a control. (A)-(e) is the figure which showed an example of the lighting control in, when a rotation member is a high-speed rotation state in a 4th control example. It is the flow chart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 4th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the lighting control processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the low speed performed by MPU in the sound lamp control device in the 4th example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the rotational speed identification process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of acceleration performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in the 4th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the processing at the time of high speed which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control control equipment in the 4th control example. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in case a rotation lighting unit is in a retreat position in the 4th example of control. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in case a rotation lighting unit is in a projection position in the 4th example of control.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is the front frame The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. The first opening 63, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. It is attached to the back side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed by a tapping screw etc. from the front side of 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The first variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base member 310 of the lower panel unit 300 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and at the inner position of the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate is formed similarly to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided and launched). Area where the ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. In addition, a plurality of LEDs may be configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As the jackpot types determined here, a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), a jackpot B (16R hour minors), and a jackpot C (2R probability variation hour minors jackpot) are provided. Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as the stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown .

  Here, "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that the maximum number of rounds transitions to the high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol after the jackpot of 16 rounds and the time saving state of the regular symbol is "2R The term "probable variation present time non hit" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to the high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol after the jackpot of 2 rounds, but the time saving state of the normal symbol is not provided. In addition, “16 R hour short / long hit” transitions to the low probability state of the special symbol after the maximum round number hits 16 rounds, and for a predetermined number of changes (100 changes in this embodiment) is short It is a big hit.

  Also, "special symbol high probability state (probability state)" indicates a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation state (probability state), in other words, special gaming state It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to. The high probability state (probable change state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won to the second winning opening 640 by increasing the probability of hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) described later. The "special symbol low probability state" refers to a time when it is not a definite change state, and a large hit probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the big hit probability is lower than the positive change state. In addition, the time saving state (during time) of the normal symbol means that the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, with the normal state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of the game which is neither in the special variation state of the special symbol nor in the time saving state of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability of the special symbol is also not the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol)) ).

  During the time saving state of the normal symbol, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased, but also the time when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is changed And a long opening time is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, during the time saving state, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640, and the number of times a big hit lottery can be performed can be increased.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the electric winning combination 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during the time saving state of the normal symbol, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is not changed, and the electric combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric combination is performed once and once. At least one of the number of times the object 640a opens may be changed. In addition, during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the time when the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, and the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened at one time is not performed. Only the hit probability of 2 symbols) may be changed to be higher than that of the normal pattern.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winnings (start winnings) to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol A third symbol display device 81 configured of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays a normal symbol (second symbol) triggered by the passage of a ball of through gate 67 And a second symbol display device (not shown). Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a 12-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower three symbol rows Is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

  The time taken for the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed in a short time during the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, in the time saving state, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

  It should be noted that the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the time saving state by other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting during the time saving state, and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized role 640a per hit. When it is in the easy state, the time taken for the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is set shorter than in the normal condition during the time saving state of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Also, the opening time and the opening number of the motorized accessory 640a per hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass Is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a lottery for winning a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is winning in the second winning opening 640 are configured the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball, for example, to the first winning opening 64 The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize may be three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second prize winning hole 640 has won may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

  Here, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win. On the other hand, the second winning opening 640 is provided with a motorized role 640a, and it is difficult for the motored role 640a to be released at normal times (when not in time), and the game ball is made to enter the second winning port 640. Is in a difficult state.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the electric winning combination 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination 640a. Aim the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-hand"), and get a lot of chances for a big hit lottery by winning in the first winning opening 64, the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim to become a player.

  On the other hand, the electric gate 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in the open state by passing the ball through the through gate 67 during definite variation or time, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is shot so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 toward the second winning hole 640 (so-called "right-handed"), and the through gate 67 is passed to open the electric role part 640a. It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a jackpot by obtaining many opportunities for jackpot lottery by winning in the second winning opening 640 while making it into the state.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a first specified winning opening 65a is provided substantially at the center thereof. In addition, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed on the left side of the variable display device 80, and a second central portion of the second variable winning device 650 has a circular shape similar in size to the other winning openings 63, 64 and 640. A specific winning hole 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a which are normally closed are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a, 650a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a can be repeated, for example, 16 times (16 rounds) at maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the first specified winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid 65b for opening / closing drive to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis See FIG. 15, only the outline is shown). The first specified winning combination opening 65 a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid 65b is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the front side, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the first specified winning opening 65a is easy to win, and the open state and normal time It operates so as to alternately repeat the state with the closed state of.

  Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed on the left and right of the second specified winning opening 650a on the left and right sides of the opening and closing plate of the front view triangular shape and the lower side of the opening and closing plate. And a large open port solenoid (not shown). The second specified winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the left, and the ball temporarily forms an open state in which the second specified winning opening 650a is easy to win, and the open state and normal time It operates so as to alternately repeat the state of the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to make the second variable winning device 650 win a ball by performing left hitting, so eliminating the hassle of switching between left hitting and right hitting whenever the gaming state changes. can do.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, and the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are for a predetermined time when the LED corresponding to the large hit is lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. When the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is opened, the large opening opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a, 650a during a predetermined time. A gaming state opened a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning hole 65a, 650a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, or Not limited to the left side of the variable display device 80, for example, it may be below the first winning opening 64.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 314 and a second out port 315. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is discharged through the first out port 314 or the second out port 315. You will be guided to the road. The first out port 314 is disposed below the left side of the first winning port 64, while the second out port 315 is disposed below the right side of the first prize port 64. That is, the second out port 315 is disposed on the opposite side of the first out port 314 with the first winning port 64 interposed therebetween.

  Therefore, a ball flowing down the game area, which reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 2) of the first winning opening 64 in the front view is the inner rail 61 Alternatively, it is flowed down along the slope of the outer edge member 73 and guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 315, while the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side in front view than the first winning port 64. The ball reached is flowed down along the slope (curve) of the inner rail 61 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 314.

  A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device by the MPU 201 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 102), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 100) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive and a solenoid for driving an electric part is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. To the input / output port 225, a main control unit 110, a display control unit 114, an audio output unit 226, a lamp display unit 227, other units 228, a frame button 22 and the like are connected. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 431 for upper and lower, a drive motor 466 for opening and closing, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, and 751.

  Here, various drive motors (upper and lower drive motor 431, open / close drive motor 466, and other drive motors 531, 561, 631, 661, and 751) will be described. These various drive motors are, for example, configured by known stepping motors, and in order to operate the respective products mounted on the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of such motors are provided in association with the respective products. The various drive motors are driven by corresponding motor control ICs (motor drivers). Specifically, a command including at least the number of rotation steps, the rotational direction (positive direction or negative direction), and the rotational speed from the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC (motor driver) Output The control IC (motor driver) drives corresponding various drive motors based on the output command. As the motor control IC (motor driver), a single IC capable of setting the operation to a plurality of drive motors may be adopted, or a plurality of motor control ICs (motor driver) are provided. Alternatively, drive motors corresponding to different items may be operated. When adopting a motor control IC (motor driver) capable of setting the operation to a plurality of drive motors, the command for transmitting the number of rotation steps etc. includes information for specifying the type of the drive motor. You just need to output it.

  Here, the operation of the drive motor will be described by taking the vertical drive motor 431 as an example. When the control IC (motor driver) operates the vertical drive motor 431 based on the set command, the operation is performed to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 each time the operation of one step is performed. A signal (execution signal) for notifying that it has been made is output. By this execution signal, the MPU 221 can grasp the progress of the set operation. The RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with a step counter (not shown). The step counter is provided for each character and is a counter that counts how many steps each character has operated from the origin (retraction) position. That is, with the origin (retraction) position as the position of 0 step, the value is updated by one each time the execution signal from the control IC is received. More specifically, the value is incremented by one each time the accessory is operated in one step in the direction (positive direction) from the origin (retraction) position to the end point (overhang) position. In addition, each time one step operation is performed in the direction (negative direction) from the end point (overhang) position to the origin (retraction) position, the value is decremented by one. Therefore, the operating position of each bonus item can be easily grasped based on the value of the step counter.

  Here, the origin position refers to a specific position set for each character, and is a position at which a transition is made in origin return based on power-on. Specifically, each prize is provided with an origin sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not it is an origin position, and if the origin sensor is not on when the power is turned on, the origin sensor is on. The character is varied until it is detected (ie, various drive motors are driven). This origin position is the reference position of the motion of each item. The above-described step counter is reset to 0 when the accessory becomes the home position due to the home position return (that is, when the home position sensor detects the on state). Then, as described above, the value of the step counter is updated one by one based on the execution signal output from the motor control IC.

  Next, an example of control of various drive motors (here, the upper and lower drive motors 431) by the motor control IC (motor driver) will be described with reference to FIG. In order to make the description easy to understand, a stepping motor which rotates 90 degrees in one step (that is, makes one rotation in four steps) will be described as an example, but the actual vertical drive motor 431 is one step. The rotation angle can be set more finely. Specifically, it is configured to rotate once in one step.

  First, FIG. 135 (a) is a diagram showing an outline of a vertical drive motor 431 configured by a stepping motor. The upper and lower drive motor 431 is configured such that when the excitation control data is sent from the voice lamp control device 113 to the corresponding motor control IC, the part corresponding to the excitation control data is excited. Specifically, the motor control IC is excited by excitation control data constituted by a 4-digit binary number corresponding to “A, B, C, D” shown in FIG. 135 (a). Specifically, if the excitation control data corresponding to each part (that is, any of A, B, C, D) of the upper and lower drive motor 431 is "1", the excitation control data is "0". If it is, it is not excited. For example, if the data of excitation control is “1100”, A and B are excited and C and D are not excited. The excitation control data is defined in an excitation table (see FIG. 135 (b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 includes an excitation counter used to select and set one excitation control data from among a plurality of excitation control data defined in the excitation table (see FIG. 135 (b)). It is provided. This excitation counter can be updated one by one in the positive direction starting from "0", and a loop counter whose value returns to "0" when the value is updated after the value of the excitation counter becomes "3" It has become. Each time the excitation counter value is updated, the corresponding excitation control data is read and set. When the excitation control data is set, the excitation of each part based on the excitation control data is immediately performed (that is, the upper and lower drive motor 431 operates with no time lag from the setting of the excitation control data). Furthermore, the excitation counter can also be updated in the negative direction. That is, the value can be updated in the order of “0” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0” starting from “0”. When updating in the negative direction, the direction of rotation of the vertical drive motor 431 is opposite to that in the case of updating in the forward direction. The direction in which the excitation counter is updated (positive direction or negative direction) and the update frequency of the excitation counter are determined in advance for each type of accessory for which the operation is set. The maximum value of the excitation counter changes in accordance with the number of steps of the drive motor. Specifically, for example, in the case of a drive motor that rotates once in one step (that is, requires 360 steps for one rotation of the motor), the excitation counter is updated in the range of “0” to “359” It becomes a loop counter.

  Next, a specific example of excitation control data for exciting each part of the upper and lower drive motor 431 will be described with reference to FIG. 135 (b). FIG. 135 (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the excitation table defining the excitation control data and the state of the upper and lower drive motor 431 excited based on the excitation control data defined in the excitation table. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), excitation control data is defined in the excitation table for each value of the excitation counter.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), as sequence data corresponding to the vertical drive motor 431, the excitation control of “1100, 0110, 0011, 1001” in the order of the excitation counters “0” to “3” Each data is specified. In addition, when “1100” which is sequence data corresponding to the excitation counter value “0” is set, the respective positions of A and B of the upper and lower drive motor 431 are excited. Further, when the sequence data "0110" corresponding to the excitation counter value "1" is set, the respective positions B and C of the upper and lower drive motor 431 are excited, so the excitation counter value is "0". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. In addition, when the sequence data “0011” corresponding to the excitation counter value “2” is set, the positions of C and D of the upper and lower drive motor 431 are excited and the excitation counter value is “1”. Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from. When the sequence data "1001" corresponding to the excitation counter value "3" is set, the respective positions of A and D of the upper and lower drive motor 431 are excited, so the excitation counter value is "2". Rotate 90 degrees clockwise from the state of. Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates 90 degrees clockwise each time the value of the excitation counter is updated by 1 in the positive direction. As described above, when the value of the excitation counter is updated in the negative direction, the vertical drive motor 431 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees.

  As described above, the control of the upper and lower drive motor 431 has been described using a simplified operation model, but the upper and lower drive motor 431 actually used in the present embodiment has one step per step (that is, one excitation counter). Each update can be rotated once. That is, when making each item variable, the value of the excitation counter is updated one by one the number of times corresponding to the number of steps to be changed, and excitation control data corresponding to the excitation counter is set for each update of the excitation counter. It is possible to accurately change each part.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by setting a command to the motor driver, various drive motors can be driven at the rotation speed, the rotation direction, and the number of rotation steps designated by the command. Therefore, it is possible to realize a variety of rendering operations using the characters.

  In addition, a unique operation pattern corresponding to the effect is set for each role. This operation pattern defines the command set for the motor control IC (motor driver) described above for each elapsed time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed is determined based on the number of steps at which the various drive motors are operated based on the command set for the motor driver. That is, based on the number of steps set by the command and the number of receptions of the execution signal output from the motor driver each time the motor driver sets the operation one step, whether the operation set to the various drive motors is completed Although it is judged whether or not it is not limited to this. For example, an elapsed time after setting a command for operating various drive motors may be measured, and it may be determined based on the elapsed time whether or not the operation of the various drive motors is completed. .

  Here, control of the upper and lower drive motor 431 and the open / close drive motor 466 controlled in coordination in this embodiment will be described. Although the details will be described in a first control example described later, in the present embodiment, the vertical movement unit device (falling character) 400 is an effect (falling character scenario) in which the vertical movement unit device (falling character) 400 is movable. An effect is provided in which the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the front view downward direction (falling direction) by the drive of the vertical drive motor 431. In the effect (drop product scenario), after the lens member 460 and the door member 470 are moved in the front view downward direction (dropping direction), the effect that the door member 470 is opened by the opening and closing drive motor 466 and There is an effect that is not

  The sound lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment uses the opening / closing drive motor 466 for opening / closing the door member 470 when the effect of opening the door member 470 is being performed in the effect (drop character scenario). On the other hand, control is performed (energization stop control) so that the excitation for all the positions A to D is turned off (see S1706 in FIG. 108). When the excitation for all positions is off, the stationary torque (so-called detent torque) of the opening / closing drive motor 466, that is, the torque for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized. In this case, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven to move the slide member 450 in the dropping direction and the movement is completed, an inertial force downward in a front view is generated on the door member 470.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the torque (static torque) for maintaining the above-described door member 470 in the closed state is configured to be smaller than the inertial force generated to the door member 470. Thus, when the slide member 450 is moved in the front view downward direction (dropping direction) without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466 in order to open the door member 470, the inertia force acting on the door member 470 causes the door The member 470 can be open. That is, when the door member 470 has been moved downward with the slide member 450 in a front view downward direction (that is, when the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 are disposed at the extended position), Inertial force in the direction (i.e., force to continue moving downward in the front view) acts to open the door member 470. Therefore, power consumption for driving the open / close motor 466 can be reduced.

  If the inertia force generated in the door member 470 with the movement of the slide member 450 is not sufficient to open the door member 470, the open / close drive motor 466 may be driven to open. In this case, by using the inertial force generated in the door member 470 with the movement of the slide member 450, the drive torque of the open / close drive motor 466 can be reduced, thereby reducing the power consumption and the open / close drive motor. The 466 can be miniaturized.

  Further, in accordance with the effect pattern, the opening / closing motor 466 may be driven to open the door member 470 or the opening / closing motor 466 may be opened without opening the door member 470. For example, at the time of execution of the effect pattern with high expectation, the open / close motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to open the door member 470 reliably, while at the time of execution of the effect pattern with low expectation The door member 470 may be configured to be opened without driving the motor 466. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the problem that the door member 470 is not opened despite the effect pattern having a high degree of expectation.

  Furthermore, when the vertical drive motor 431 is driven and the slide member 450 is not moved in the falling direction, that is, when the inertia force does not act on the door member 470, torque (static torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in a closed state ) Is configured to have sufficient torque to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state. For this reason, it is not necessary to excite the opening / closing drive motor 466 to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state even during a period when the dropping product scenario is not executed, and power consumption can be reduced. When the torque (resting torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is insufficient for the torque necessary for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state, for example, a magnet is attached to the tip of the door member 470 By providing it, the torque required to maintain the door member 470 in the closed state may be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the effect that the door member 470 is not opened is performed as the effect (dropper role scenario), the open / close drive motor 466 for opening / closing the door member is controlled so as not to rotate. Specifically, by continuing exciting the corresponding portions (A to D) of the above-described excitation table (FIG. 135 (b) based on the current excitation counter for a certain period of time, the open / close drive motor 466 is stopped. A torque to hold the position (so-called holding torque) is generated, and the door member 470 is maintained in the closed state, whereby the slide member 450 is produced despite the effect that the door member 470 is not opened. The door member 470 can be reliably prevented (restrained) from being opened by the force (inertial force) when it is moved in the falling direction.

  When the opening / closing control of the door member 470 described above does not coincide with the opening / closing state of the door member 470 controlled by the opening / closing control, the effect to be executed thereafter may be changed.

  Specifically, when the effect based on the drop combination scenario in which the door member 470 is opened is being executed, the open / close drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, and thereafter, the door member 470 is opened, The lens member 460 located on the back side of the door member 470 is visible. Then, the player can visually recognize the character of "super heat" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460. By visually recognizing the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the lens member 460, the display is enlarged and displayed, and the player can feel the display more impressive.

  On the other hand, although the drive motor 466 for opening and closing is controlled to stop energization, when the door member 470 is not opened, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed although the letter "super heat" is displayed. Even though the door member 470 is opened and the lens member 460 can be visually recognized, an impression may be given that the door member 470 is not opened. Therefore, in the effect, although the open / close drive motor 466 is controlled to stop turning on, the fact that the door member 470 is not opened is detected by an origin sensor or the like which can detect the state, and in that case, After that, the effect is changed so that the character of "super heat" is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even if the door member 470 is not opened, the third symbol display device 81 does not display the character "super heat", so the player can be made to recognize that the effect that the door member 470 is not opened is performed. It is possible not to give an impression that the above-mentioned failure has occurred. In this case, an employee may be notified of the occurrence of the failure by lighting a specific LED or notifying the hall computer through an external output terminal.

  In addition, as a scenario for dropping the lens member 460 and the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling object) 400, a scenario in which the lens unit 460 and the door unit 470 are moved from the retracted position to the extended position in one operation There may be provided a scenario of moving from the retracted position to the overhanging position in degrees). Thereby, even if the door member 470 is not opened after the opening / closing drive motor 466 is controlled to stop energization, even if the door member 470 is opened in the second operation, it is performed twice. It can be made to feel that the door member 470 is an effect of moving from the retracted position to the extended position by the operation, and the player can be prevented from feeling discomfort.

  Furthermore, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is changed according to the falling symbol scenario in which the door member 470 is opened and the falling symbol scenario in which the door member 470 is not opened, and the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is changed. It may be configured as follows. Specifically, in the drop product scenario where the door member 470 is opened, the drive speed of the vertical drive motor 431 is increased to increase the inertia force acting on the door member 470, while the door member 470 is opened. In the not-falling-drops scenario, the drive speed of the upper and lower drive motor 431 is reduced so that the inertial force acting on the door member 470 is reduced. Thereby, the opening and closing of the door member 470 can be controlled with high accuracy. The driving speed of the upper and lower driving motor 431 is not limited to the one according to the scenario of the falling object, and in the same falling object scenario, for example, the case of moving upward and the case of moving downward The drive speed of the upper and lower drive motor 431 may be changed.

  Further, in accordance with the effect pattern, the opening / closing motor 466 may be driven to open the door member 470 or the opening / closing motor 466 may be opened without opening the door member 470. For example, at the time of execution of the effect pattern with high expectation, the open / close motor 466 is driven to open the door member 470 in order to open the door member 470 reliably, while at the time of execution of the effect pattern with low expectation The door member 470 is opened without driving the motor 466. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the problem that the door member 470 is not opened despite the effect pattern having a high degree of expectation.

  An RTC (real time clock) 292 is connected to the input / output port 225 in the present embodiment. This RTC 292 is used as a clocking means for clocking time, and since a dedicated internal power supply (in the present embodiment, a battery) is provided, clocking can be performed even when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10 It can continue. Here, when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to obtain the same time information in a plurality of pachinko machines 10 by setting the same time (for example, the current time) to the clock means and manufacturing it. .

  By configuring in this way, aside from the normal effects, regardless of the gaming situation of each pachinko machine 10, periodically (5 minutes every hour) a special aspect of the effect according to the elapsed time (time The effect can be executed in synchronization with a plurality of pachinko machines 10. In addition, in a specific time (every time one minute has passed from the start of time rendition) in a period (hereinafter referred to as time rendition period) during which this time rendition is executed (displayed), a specific time rendition that suggests the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 Is executed. Specifically, for a specific time effect (countdown effect), the characters ("3", "2", "1", "0") of the countdown of 4 characters in total are sequentially 3 seconds for each 1 character (12 seconds in total) After being displayed, a character image (such as a girl's image) is displayed for 8 seconds in a total of 20 seconds, and the display (rendering) mode is set according to the elapsed time since the start of the effect. For example, a display (rendering) mode is set in which “3” is displayed as the character of the countdown at the start time of the rendition (when 0 seconds have passed from the start of rendition). Further, at the time point 6 seconds after the start of the effect, a display (effect) mode is set in which “1” is displayed as the character of the countdown. In this specific time effect (countdown effect), when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a definite change state and is not in a short time state (so-called, a latent change state), the characters of the countdown (“3, 2, 1 ... ") is displayed in red (displayed in black if not latent change). Details will be specifically described in the first control example.

  Here, the gaming state is a definite change state and not a short time state (so-called, latent confirmation change state) is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, and the state of the game which is easy to shift to the special game state (ie, the game It is an advantageous condition for the On the other hand, since the latent probability change state is not a short time state, the hit probability of the normal symbol is the same as the normal state, and as described above, when the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is closed. There are many, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. In this case, as in the normal state, a ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 toward the first winning opening 64 without the motorized part 640a (so-called "left-handed") ), It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a jackpot by obtaining many opportunities for a jackpot lottery by winning in the first winning opening 64. As described above, since the latent probability change state is the same operation (gaming method) as the normal state except that the probability of becoming a jackpot as the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 is increased, the player has the current game state It is difficult to determine whether it is a normal state or a latent probability change state. Further, although details will be described later, in the latent definite state, the same effect as in the normal state is selected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol display device 81. It is difficult to determine from the displayed effects whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability change state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the specific time effect performed when there is a latent probability change state in the time effect period, the characters (“3, 2, 1,...”) Of the displayed countdown are normally It is made to be displayed in a color (red) different from the case of the state. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is in the latent certainty state, which is an advantageous state for the player in the specified time effect. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect contents of the specific time effect, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  In order to improve the accuracy of time measurement by the clock means (RTC), correction means (GPS, radio wave clock, etc.) for correcting time information from the outside may be provided.

  Also, correction information (for example, GPS, radio clock, etc.) for correcting time information from the outside is used to correct time information whenever power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up). It is also good. As a result, even if a dedicated internal power supply (in the present embodiment, a battery) is not provided, the time information can be updated by the clocking device each time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up). The manufacturing cost of the clock means and the maintenance cost (such as replacement cost due to deterioration of the internal power supply) can be reduced. The correction of the time information by the correction means is not limited to every time the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 (every time it is started up), and may be performed periodically (for example, every hour).

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear surface image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display the rear surface image according to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  Here, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 will be described. The third symbol is constituted by the main symbols of the numbers "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed, and the variable display The jackpot is configured to occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A" or "big hit C", the variable display of which the main symbols of the odd number "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" are aligned and stopped is lined It will be. Moreover, if it is "big hit B", the variable display in which the main symbols of "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" which is an even number are equal is performed.

  The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the upper 2/3 of the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and the other lower 1/3 of the other is a notice effect, It is the sub display area Ds that displays the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first winning opening 64, and the small area Ds2 is an area The small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) of which the variation has not been executed among the balls entering the second winning opening 640. It is.

  In the actual display screen, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbol displayed in the central part, the main symbols arranged before and after it are displayed visibly, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub display area Ds, one “●” symbol is displayed for one holding ball, and the holding symbols corresponding to up to four holding balls for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed. Is displayed. That is, up to eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, although the same reserved symbol (design) is used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the present invention is not limited thereto, but different symbols (for example, for the special symbol 1, as a symbol "●" The symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as an open square symbol).

  As a result, the holding balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the holding balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily identified and displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the holding ball entering the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the hit type of the normal symbol, the player is allowed to easily discriminate that the holding ball has been generated for a long time be able to.

  In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the main symbol, the hold symbol, etc. described above, the character display and the notice effect display such as the character, etc. The display of the number of changes is appropriately displayed. Also, when the holding symbol is not displayed, it indicates that the number of holding balls is 0, that is, there is no holding ball.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first winning opening 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times). In addition, in place of the display of the number-of-parking balls number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the number of holding balls is divided into a number of parts of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by an amount. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Further, a sub display device 690 is connected to the display control device 114. The sub display device 690 is a display device (for example, a liquid crystal panel) different in resolution from the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 is (horizontal 800 pixels (pixels) × vertical 600 pixels (pixels)), and the resolution of the sub display device 690 is (horizontal 400 pixels (pixels) × vertical It is 300 pixels (pixel) (see FIG. 82). The resolutions of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 may be different from those described above, and the resolution of the sub display device 690 and the third symbol display device 81 have the same resolution. The resolution of the sub display device 690 may be higher than that of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the display method that can be adopted as the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is not limited to the method using a liquid crystal panel, and a display of any method (for example, PDP method, CRT method, organic An EL system, a MEMS shutter system or the like may be adopted.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 81, the display control device 114 in this embodiment is different from the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. Display control is performed using one image data (in the present embodiment, image data having a resolution of 1200 pixels (pixels) × 600 pixels (pixels) in resolution) including an image to be displayed. The image data (an area of 800 pixels (pixels) x 600 pixels (pixels) area) corresponding to the resolution of the third symbol display device 81 among the one image data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The image data (an area of 400 pixels (pixels) × 300 pixels (pixels) area) of a portion corresponding to the resolution of the sub display device 690 in the remaining portion is displayed on the sub display device 690. The remaining data (an area of 400 pixels (pixels) × 300 pixels (pixels) in width) is not used.

  This makes it easy to synchronize the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 deviate from each other. It is possible to suppress the problem of

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 12, the gaming board 13 and the operation unit 200 will be described. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 700 in the back case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7.

  FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operating unit 200, and FIGS. 6 and 7 are exploded front perspective views of the operating unit 200 in a front view of the operating unit 200 disassembled. Note that FIG. 7 illustrates the combined operation unit 500 mounted on the back case 210.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, one side (the front side of the sheet of FIG. 6) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A rear case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The rear case 210 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 211 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  In the operation unit 200, the vertical operation unit 400, the combined operation unit 500, the tilting operation unit 600, and the slide operation unit 700 are accommodated in the inner space of the rear case 210, and are configured as one unit.

  Specifically, combined operation unit 500 is disposed in the upper right portion of the region formed by the inner side surface of outer wall portion 212 of rear case 210 (see FIG. 7). With respect to the state shown in FIG. 7, tilting operation unit 600 and slide operation unit 700 are disposed below the area formed by the inner side surface of outer wall portion 212 of rear case 210. Further, with respect to the state shown in FIG. 7, the vertical movement unit 400 is disposed on the front side of the combined movement unit 500 in a stacked state in which the vertical movement unit 400 is stacked and accommodated in the rear case 210 (see FIG. 5).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, another operation unit (for example, the vertical operation unit 400) is disposed in a stacked state in which the predetermined operation unit (for example, the combined operation unit 500) is superimposed on the front side. Therefore, in front view, a given operation unit can be shielded by another operation unit.

  In other words, when the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is formed of a light transmitting material, and the operation unit disposed on the back side of the game board 13 can be viewed by the player, the predetermined operation unit It is possible to make the player visually recognize only the necessary part of and to shield other parts from the player by other operation units. As a result, it is not necessary to design a predetermined effect member shielded by another operation unit on the premise that the whole is viewed by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 10, outlines of operation modes of the vertical movement unit 400, the combined movement unit 500, the tilting movement unit 600, and the slide movement unit 700 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 8 to 10, FIGS. 5 to 7 will be referred to as appropriate.

  8 to 10 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 8, the state in which the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) of the vertical movement unit 400 is disposed at the extended position is the expansion state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 26) of the combined movement unit 500 in FIG. 9. The formed state is illustrated in FIG. 10 in which the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed substantially at the center in the width direction.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the vertical movement unit 400 operates the arm member 440 (see FIG. 18) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the arm member 440 is retracted above the opening 211 a of the back case 210 and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 8, the arm member 440 is lowered, and the lens member 460 (see FIG. 18) is at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (ie, the front of the third symbol display device 81; Placed in).

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the combined operation unit 500, the pivoting arm member 550 (see FIG. 22) is disposed at the downward projecting position, and the front plate member 546 is at the center of the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (ie, 2), and the front plate member 546 is disposed at the opening 211a of the rear case 210, to the retracted position where the pivoting arm member 550 is retracted upward. It is possible to form a contracted state (see FIG. 5) which is retracted upward. In the contracted state shown in FIG. 5, the front plate member 546 is retracted above the opening 211a of the back case 210, and is invisible to the player (see FIG. 2).

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the tilting operation unit 600, the support member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the slide operation unit 700 is slid to the left and right, so that the retracted position shown in FIG. It is movable between positions. In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the tilting operation unit 600 is retracted to the right of the opening 211a of the back case 210, and viewed from the player inside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2). On the other hand, in the extended position shown in FIG. 10, the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display 81, see FIG. 2).

  In FIG. 10, the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 46) are opened, and a state in which the internal sub display device 690 is viewed is illustrated. That is, when the tilting operation unit 600 is arranged in the state of FIG. 10, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) visually recognized through the opening 211a and the sub display inside the tilting operation unit 600. Both of the effects displayed on the device 690 can be viewed by the player.

  Each of the operation units 400 to 700 is formed to be independently operable and, as described above, disposed in a stacked (stacked) state, and therefore, among the operation units 400 to 700, With regard to those disposed in different layers, even if the operation member is a mode in which the operation member projects inward of the opening 211a of the back case 210, it can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 8 to FIG. 10, not only the respective operation units 400 to 700 can be operated alone, but also these operations can be combined, so that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit 200. FIG. In FIG. 11, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the expanded state, and the arm member 440 and the lens member 460 of the up and down operation unit 400 are disposed at the extended position. Form an open state.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the front plate member 546 of the combined operation unit 500 is visually recognized through the lens member 460 of the vertical movement unit 400. Since the lens processing is formed on the lens member 460 as described later, the front plate member 546 is viewed in an enlarged manner.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 11, the rotary plate 520 (see FIG. 24) of the combined operation unit 500 is pivoted about the first shaft 512 (see FIG. 24), and the front plate member 546 is moved up and down. The front plate member 546 is visually recognized in a normal size when it is moved from the lens member 470 to a position (see FIG. 39) separated in a front view. As a result, it is possible to switch between the state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in a normal size and the state in which the front plate member 546 is viewed in an enlarged manner (see FIG. 11), thereby improving rendering effects.

  FIG. 12 is a front view of the operation unit 200. In FIG. 12, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 22) of the combined operation unit 500 is in the extended state, and the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position and is in the tilting state. The state immediately before the point of contact is illustrated. By further tilting the tilting unit 600, the tilting unit 600 and the front plate member 546 are brought into contact with each other. In this case, by swinging the compound operation unit 500 clockwise in a front view (see FIG. 39), it is possible to produce an effect that makes it appear that the force is applied from the tilting operation unit 600 to the compound operation unit 500. (It is possible to associate the operations of the units and perform more complicated effects). Thereby, the rendering effect can be improved.

  Next, the lower board unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a front exploded perspective view of the board 13 and the lower board unit 300. As shown in FIG. 13, at the lower part of the game board 13, there is formed a receiving opening 13a which is opened along the lower edge of the inner rail 61 and into which the board lower unit 300 is inserted.

  FIG. 14 is a front exploded perspective view of the lower board unit 300. As shown in FIG. 14, the lower board unit 300 has a base member 310 internally fitted and fixed to the receiving opening 13 a of the game board 13 and a ball disposed at the lower left of the base member 310 in a front view. A lower left plate member 320 guiding to 314, a lower right plate member 330 disposed on the lower right of the base member 310 in a front view and guiding a ball to the second out port 315, and a left lower plate fastened and fixed to the base member 310 from the front The front lid member 340 mainly supported by the member 320 and the lower right plate member 330 by the insertion shaft 343.

  The base member 310 has a plate-like main portion 311 which has a shape substantially the same as the shape of the receiving opening 13a of the game board 13 and formed in a slightly smaller cross-sectional shape than the receiving opening 13a. It is formed on the left of front view of the decoration front plate part 312 formed in thin plate shape in the covering aspect, the movable effect member 313 attached to the width direction approximate center part of the decoration front plate part 312, and the movable effect member 313 And a second out port 315 which is a rectangular shaped hole formed on the right side in a front view of the movable effect member 313.

  The movable effect member 313 is provided at the lower edge in the width direction center of the game board 13 and includes a rotation effect member 313 a which is rotated by a drive device (not shown). Here, when the out port is disposed at the center lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction, the movable effect member 313 can not be disposed at the center lower edge of the game board 13 in the width direction. In the present embodiment, the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are disposed at positions separated leftward and rightward from the center of the game board 13 without arranging the out port at the lower center of the game board 13 in the width direction. Thus, it is possible to secure a space for disposing the movable effect member 313 at the lower edge in the width direction center of the game board 13.

  The shapes of the first out port 314, the second out port 315, the lower left plate member 320, and the lower right plate member 330 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig.15 (a) is a front view of the base member 310, the 1st out port 314, the 2nd out port 315, the lower left board member 320, and the lower right board member 330, FIG.15 (b) is FIG. And a lower left plate member 320 taken along line XVb-XVb of FIG. In FIG. 15A, the outer shape of the front lid member 340 fastened and fixed to the base member 310 and the nail formed above the first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are illustrated.

  The first out port 314 and the second out port 315 are openings through which balls are discharged from the game area. The formed length in the width direction of the second out port 315 is shortened as compared to the first out port 314. The reason will be described later. In addition, a guide rib 315 a extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper inner surface of the second out port 315. The guide rib 315a allows the ball flowing into the second out port 315 to be highly splashed, thereby suppressing the resistance applied to the ball when the ball collides with the upper bottom surface of the second out port 315. Further, the flow of the balls discharged from the second out port 315 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, and the variation in the direction of the discharged balls can be suppressed.

  Also, the buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 described later is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 13) (see FIG. 15A). Thus, even in the present embodiment in which the vertical width of the game area increases toward the center of the game board 13 in the width direction, the effect of suppressing the bounce of the ball falling on the lower left plate member 320 is not impaired. That is, since the falling height of the ball becomes higher as it is closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13, there is a possibility that the impact when the falling ball collides with the lower left plate member 320 may increase. On the other hand, since the buffer rib 322 is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is bent closer to the center in the width direction of the game board 13 to cushion the impact of falling. The degree can be increased.

  Here, the relationship between the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 and the landing frequency of the falling ball will be described. For example, if the falling height of the ball landing on the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is high, but the frequency of arrival of the ball to the position is extremely low, failure to discharge the other balls without intentionally suppressing the bouncing of the ball. It may not be. In this case, if the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is increased, the space of the game area is unnecessarily reduced. Therefore, it is preferable that the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 be set not only by the drop height of the ball but also by the drop height and the frequency with which the ball lands at that position.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the balls flowing down above the buffer ribs 322 and 332 are started to flow down in the paths c1 and c2, and then reach the landing areas z0 to z4 through the plurality of branches b1 to b10. In the following description, when the probability that the sphere flows down is equal (1/2) in the paths c1 and c2 and the left and right branches in the branches b1 to b10 are equally left and right (1/2), respectively. Explain. It is assumed that the ball does not flow down from the upper right.

  The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z0 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z0, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b5 to reach the path c11. The branch b5 may be reached from the path c1 via the branch b1 or from the path c2. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the path c11 and the ball reaches the landing area z0 is 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2), the probability of the ball flowing down from the path c1; Since it is represented by the sum of the probability 1⁄4 (= 1⁄2 × 1⁄2) of the spheres flowing down from the path c 2, it is 3⁄8 (“^” means a power). That is, each probability is the product of the probability 1⁄2 that the sphere flows down paths c 1 and c 2, and the number of powers 1⁄2 of the number of branches b 1 to b 10 that the sphere passes before reaching the landing area z 0 Is represented by

  The probability that the ball reaches the landing area z1 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z1, the left side is branched down at branch b3 to reach path c15, the left side is branched down at branch b4 to path c16, or the right side is branched off at branch b6 path c14 Or the right side at branch b7 to reach path c13.

  Up to the branch b3 is considered only when the sphere flows down from the path c1, and there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c15, so the probability that the sphere reaches the path c15 is 1/16 (= It is 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3). In addition, it is conceivable that only the case in which the ball flows down from the path c1 up to the branch b4 and there are four branches before the ball reaches the path c16, so the probability that the ball reaches the path c16 is 1/32 It is (= 1/2 x (1 x 2) ^ 4). In addition, until the branch b6, only the case where the sphere flows down from the path c1 is considered, and there are three branches before the sphere reaches the path c14, so the probability that the sphere reaches the path c14 is 1/16 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 3).

  Up to the branch b7, both the case where the sphere is dropped from the path c1 and the path c2 are considered, and there are four branches before the sphere dropped from the path c1 reaches the path c13, and three branches. May exist. There are two branches before the ball flowing down from the path c2 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the path c13 is the probability 3/32 (= 1/2 x (1/2) ^ 4 + 1/2 x (1/2) ^ 3) of the sphere flowing down from the path c 1; It is 7/32 because it is represented by the sum of the probability 1/8 (= 1/2 × (1/2) ^ 2) of the sphere flowing down from the path c2.

  Here, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z1 is 12/32 because it is the sum of the probabilities that the sphere reaches the above-described paths c13 to c16.

  The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z2 will be described. The probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z2 can be expressed by the probability that the sphere reaches the path c12, which is equal to the probability that the sphere reaching the branch b7 reaches the path c13. Therefore, the probability that the ball reaches the landing area z2 is 7/32.

  The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z3 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z3, it is necessary to flow down the left side at the branch b9 to reach the path c17 or to flow the left side at the branch b10 to reach the path c18.

  Until the branch b9, there is only a case in which the sphere flows down from the path c1, and there are six branches before the sphere reaches the path c17, so the probability of the sphere reaching the path c17 is 1/128 (= It is 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 6). In addition, it is only considered that the ball flows down from the path c1 until the branch b10, and there are seven branches before the ball reaches the path c18, so the probability that the ball reaches the path c18 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  The probability of the sphere reaching the landing area z3 is 3/256 since it is the sum of the probabilities of the sphere reaching the paths c17 and c18 described above.

  The probability of the ball reaching the landing area z4 will be described. In order to reach the landing area z4, it is necessary to flow down the right side at the branch b10 to reach the path c19. In addition, all the balls which flowed down the right side of the branch b10 shall flow down on the path c19. The probability that the sphere reaches the path c19 is equal to the probability that the sphere reaching the branch b10 reaches the path c18. Therefore, the probability that the sphere reaches the landing area z4 is 1/256 (= 1/2 × (1 × 2) ^ 7).

  From these facts, the rate at which the sphere reaches each landing area z0 to z4 is (z0: z1: z2: z3: z4) = (96: 96: 56: 3: 1). This ratio is correlated with the buffer ribs 322 and 332.

  For example, when the landing area z1 and the landing area z3 are compared, the heights of the balls falling to the landing areas z1 and z3 are equal but the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is the landing area for the landing area z3. Less than z1. This is because the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing area z3 is 1/32 of the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing area z1. That is, even if the bounding of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as the landing area z1, in the landing area z3, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed. Therefore, in the landing area z3, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 compared to the landing area z1.

  For example, when the landing area z2 and the landing area z4 are compared, the aspect ratio of the buffer ribs 322 and 332 is the same as the ball falling distance to the landing area z4 is longer than the ball falling distance to the landing area z2. The landing area z2 is larger than the landing area z4. This is because the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing area z4 is 1/56 of the rate at which the sphere reaches the landing area z2. That is, even if the bounding of the falling ball is not suppressed as much as the landing area z2, in the landing area z4, there is little possibility that the discharge of the ball will be delayed. Therefore, in the landing area z4, the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward by reducing the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 332 compared to the landing area z2.

  In addition, although the case where the branch probability of the ball of the branches b1 to b10 is equal left and right (1/2) was described in the above description, the ball is branched at the branches b1 to b10 by changing the width of the nail. It is possible to adjust the branching probability. For example, by making the distance between the nails of the flow path through which the arrow on the left side of the branch b1 passes is as small as the diameter of the sphere, the probability that the ball flows down along the arrow on the right at the branch b1 is greater than 1/2 can do. Also in the other branches b2 to b10, the probability of the branch of the sphere can be similarly adjusted.

  As a result, the frequency at which the sphere reaches the paths c11 to c19 can be adjusted, and the design freedom of the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be improved.

  In addition, the buffer rib 322 is formed to be inclined downward as the upper surface goes to the rear (see FIG. 15B). Thereby, the ball flow to the first out port 314 can be made faster.

  Referring back to FIG. The lower left plate member 320 has a long plate-like main body portion 321 and a buffer rib 322 in which thin plates continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 321 extend in the front-rear direction and the buffer rib A connection front plate 323 formed in such a manner as to connect the front of 322, a step 324 formed by being raised upward at the left end in a front view of the main body 321, and extending leftward from the step 324 The ball flow rail portion 325 is mainly provided, and the axial support hole 326 drilled in the front-rear direction at the front end right end portion of the main body portion 321.

  The buffer rib 322 is a portion through which the ball directed to the first out port 314 passes, and suppresses the rebounding of the ball falling in the vertical direction in the vertical direction. That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed of a thin plate continuously provided in the left and right direction, when impacted by a falling ball, bending in the thickness direction can alleviate the impact of the collision. In addition, when the ball moves in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the buffer rib 322, the ball is engaged between the buffer ribs 322 to brake the ball. In addition, the formation height and the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 are made larger as it goes inward in the width direction of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) in the front view right side.

  The connection front plate 323 improves the strength of the buffer rib 322 by connecting the buffer rib 322.

  The stepped portion 324 is a raised portion for causing the ball flowed down from the ball flow rail portion 325 to fall in the vertical direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the load in the lateral direction from being applied to the buffer rib 322 from the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 325. Thereby, the buffer rib 322 can be prevented from being bent in the left-right direction by receiving a load in the left-right direction.

  That is, since the buffer rib 322 is formed of a thin wall portion extending in the front-rear direction, there is a possibility that the buffer rib 322 may be broken by the load in the left-right direction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a ball rolling on the upper surface of the ball flow rail 325 which has a velocity in the left-right direction and may load the load in the left-right direction to the buffer rib 322 It is formed in the form of falling in the direction. Thus, the position at which the ball lands on the buffer rib 322 can be shifted to the right in the width direction as the speed in the left-right direction of the ball is higher.

  Therefore, when the ball lands on the buffer rib 322, the load applied to the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction can be made smaller toward the left in the width direction (outside). Therefore, the possibility of the occurrence of bending due to the load in the left-right direction of the ball decreases as the buffer rib 322 moves to the left in the width direction, and the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 can be formed smaller than that to the right in the width direction. . In this case, since the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 can be formed along the curved surface formed on the lower surface of the game board 13, the buffer rib 322 is disposed as compared to the case where the buffer rib 322 has the same length in the width direction. The position can be lowered downward.

  Here, the lower surface of the game board 13 while keeping the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322 constant at the left and right positions in the width direction (with the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 formed by the same curve as the lower surface of the buffer rib 322). It is also conceivable to form the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 along the curved surface formed on However, in this case, the disposition position of the step portion 324 becomes high, and the disposition position of the ball flow rail portion 325 formed to be inclined downward toward the step portion 324 also becomes high. In this case, the dead space between the ball flow rail portion 325 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 13) is increased, and the game area is suppressed.

  On the other hand, the larger the aspect ratio of the buffer rib 322, the larger the action of decelerating the ball (deceleration action). Therefore, the buffer rib 322 is formed in such a manner as to increase the aspect ratio from the vicinity of the step 324 toward the center of the game area.

  The upper surface of the buffer rib 322 is formed in the same curve as the curve of the lower surface of the buffer rib 322 to the front of the step 324 so as not to affect the formation height of the step 324 (in the middle of the buffer rib 322 in the left-right direction) It is also conceivable that the height is formed maximally). However, in this case, the ball reaching the landing area z1 is prevented from rolling to the left. Therefore, the balls are easily retained in the landing area z1, and it becomes difficult to discharge the balls smoothly.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the variation in the height of the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 in the width direction of the buffer rib 322 is small, the ball reaching the landing region z1 is easily turned to the left (the landing region z2 side) Move. Therefore, since the balls can be flowed to the landing area z2 before the balls stay in the landing area z1, the balls can be discharged smoothly.

  In addition, the step portion 324 has a function of stopping the ball flowing up and down to the left above the buffer rib 322. This can prevent the ball from bouncing back beyond the width of the first out port 314 after colliding with the front lid member 340 (see FIG. 13).

  The shaft support hole 326 is a portion through which the insertion shaft 343 of the front lid member 340 is inserted and supported.

  The lower right plate member 330 has a long plate-like main body portion 331 and a buffer rib 332 in which thin wall portions continuously provided in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the main body portion 331 extend in the front-rear direction, A connection front plate 333 formed in such a manner as to connect the front surfaces of the buffer ribs 332, a recessed portion 324 formed by being depressed downward at the right end in the front view of the main body 331, and a right side in a front view from the recessed portion 324 It mainly includes a ball flow rail portion 335 extended to the end, and an axial support hole 336 drilled in the front-rear direction at the left end of the main body portion 331 in a front view.

  The configuration of the lower right plate member 330 and the configuration of the lower left plate member 320 are common in many parts. That is, the main body portion 331 is a main body portion 321, the buffer rib 332 is a buffer rib 322, the connection front plate 333 is a connection front plate 323, the ball flow rail portion 335 is a ball flow rail portion 325, and the axial support hole 336 is a shaft The technical idea is common to the support hole 326, so the description of the common part is omitted.

  The buffer rib 332 is formed to have a shorter formation width on the left and right as compared with the buffer rib 322. As a result, the left and right formation width of the second out port 315 can be shortened, and the arrangement position of the second out port 315 can be lowered downward compared to the first out port 314, so that the first variable The arrangement space of the large opening solenoid 65b of the winning device 65 can be secured (the arranging position of the first variable winning device 65 can be lowered).

  Here, the formation width of the buffer rib 332 can be made shorter than that of the buffer rib 322 because the flow path of the ball to the second out port 315 is restricted. That is, as shown in FIG. 14, the first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right of the second out port 315 in front view, so that the ball flows into the first specified winning opening 65a when the opening and closing plate is opened. When the opening and closing plate is closed, the ball is dropped vertically downward on the front side of the first variable winning device 65. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down to the second out port 315 from the upper right of the front view. In other words, in the upper right portion of the second out port 315, a non-falling area in which the flow of the ball is restricted is formed.

  Therefore, the flow-down direction of the ball to the lower right plate member 330 is limited only to the falling in the vertical direction and the flow-down from the width direction (from the ball flow rail portion 335) (flow from the diagonal upper right is restricted) . Therefore, since there is no inflow of the ball from the upper right side, the direction in which the ball bounces can be limited, and the width of the buffer rib 332 can be narrowed and the width of the second out port 315 can be narrowed. As a result, the installation space of the first variable winning device 65 can be secured.

  The recess portion 334 is a recess for causing the ball flowing down the ball flow rail portion 335 to bounce. Therefore, the formation width of the recessed portion 334 is a width that allows the ball to be placed without being in contact with the adjacent buffer rib 332.

  The ball which has flowed down the ball flow rail portion 335 is dropped into the recess portion 334, and when the ball abuts on the upper surface of the recess portion 334, the ball bounces and falls into the buffer rib 332. This prevents the load from being applied to the buffer rib 332 in the width direction, and can prevent the buffer rib 332 from being broken.

  The recessed portion 334 is formed in front of the fastening hole B through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the base member 310 to the game board 13 is inserted. As a result, when the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening hole B in order to fasten and fix the lower panel unit 300 to the game board 13, it is possible to make easy to use a fastening tool such as a driver. That is, the recessed portion 334 has both the effect of preventing the buffer rib 332 from being broken and the effect of facilitating the fastening and fixing of the base member 310.

  The front lid member 340 has a plate-like main portion 341 having the first winning opening 64 formed at the top, and an opening 342 formed at the center of the main portion 341 to allow the rotation effect member 313a to be visible. It mainly includes a pair of insertion shafts 343 that are inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  The main body portion 341 is formed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the flow-down direction of the ball is limited by the side wall portion. That is, the ball that has collided with the main body 341 from the right can not penetrate to the left, while the ball that collides with the main body 341 from the left can not penetrate to the right.

  The insertion shaft 343 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support holes 326 and 336. Therefore, the diameter of the insertion shaft 343 is formed slightly smaller than the shaft support holes 326 and 336.

  Next, the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 17 is a rear perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. 16 and 17, the state in which the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated.

  FIG. 18 is a front exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400, and FIG. 19 is a rear exploded perspective view of the vertical movement unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the vertical movement unit 400 is provided with a base member 410 including a vertical groove portion 414 which is recessed from the rear side to the front side on the right in a rear view and the recess extends in the vertical direction. The rotary crank member 420 is rotated about the connection hole 413 of the base member 410, the driving device 430 for generating the driving force of the rotary crank member 420, and the driving force is transmitted from the rotary crank member 420 to the base member 410. The arm member 440 is pivoted about the shaft portion 412 of the head, and is disposed on the opposite side of the upper and lower groove portions 414 of the base member 410. The sliding member 450 and the sliding hole 443 formed at the tip of the arm member 440 are suspended and interlocked with the swinging of the arm member 440 in the vertical direction A lens member 460 is slidably formed mainly includes a pair of door member 470 which is respectively pivotally supported on the lens member 460, a.

  The base member 410 has a main body 411 which is formed in a plate shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a cylindrical support member 442 of an arm member 440 which protrudes from the right end of the main body 411 toward the front side. It is formed from the back side to the front side in the rear view right side of the main body 411 from the support shaft portion 412 supported, the connection hole 413 in which the rotary crank member 420 and the transmission gear 432 are connected in a circular shape in the longitudinal direction. An upper and lower groove portion 414 is vertically extended, and a concave portion 415 recessed from the front to the back side on both left and right outer sides of the upper and lower groove portions 414 is mainly provided.

  The upper and lower groove portions 414 are portions in which the expansion / contraction rendering device 540 of the combined operation unit 500 is accommodated on the back side in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). In the combined operation unit 500, the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is suppressed as the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves to the reduction state, as described later, so that the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is oscillated. Collisions to the left and right inner side surfaces are prevented. The recessed portion 415 is a portion to which the slide guide portion 452 of the slide member 450 is guided.

  The rotating crank member 420 has a plate-like main body portion 421, and a sliding projection 422 projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side from one end of the main body portion 421 and inserted through the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440. Mainly includes an engaging portion 423 engaged with the fitting portion 432a of the transmission gear 432 and disabling relative rotation between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420.

  The sliding projection 422 is inserted into the insertion portion 444 of the arm member 440 and rotated, whereby the driving force of the drive device 430 is transmitted to the arm member 440, and the arm member 440 is swung about the shaft 412. .

  The driving device 430 includes a vertical drive motor 431 fastened and fixed to the base member 410, a drive gear 431a rotationally driven by the vertical drive motor 431, and a transmission gear 432 meshed with the drive gear 431a. The transmission gear 432 is mainly provided with a fitting portion 432a which is formed on the front side of the transmission gear 432 and has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connection hole 413 and whose inner side is fitted to the engagement portion 423 of the rotating crank member 420. .

  The fitting portion 432a is a portion provided with a recess having a cross-sectional shape in which a circular shape is disposed at each vertex of a triangle, and is inserted into the connection hole 413 of the base member 410 and at the tip end thereof The engagement portion 423 of the is fitted non-rotatably. Thus, the main body 411 of the base member 410 is formed to be sandwiched between the transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420, and as described above, relative rotation between the transmitting gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 is disabled. The transmission gear 432 and the rotating crank member 420 rotate in synchronization with each other. That is, the driving force of the vertical drive motor 431 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 420 via the transmission gear 432.

  The arm member 440 includes a body portion 441 formed in a long rod shape, a shaft support hole 442 which is bored on the base end side (right side in front view) and pivotably supported by the shaft portion 412, and the base end side. The slide hole 443 is formed as an elongated hole on the swinging end side which is the opposite end of the slide member and the slide projection 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the slide projection 422 of the rotating crank member 420 is inserted And an insertion portion 444 in the form of a bottomed hole.

  The shape of the insertion portion 444 is set such that the rotating crank member 420 can rotate once while the sliding projection 422 is inserted through the insertion portion 444. Therefore, the arm member 440 can perform the swing operation regardless of the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 420.

  The slide member 450 has a rectangular plate-like main body 451, a slide guide 452 extending rearward from the left and right ends of the main body 451, and guided in the recessed portion 415 so as to be vertically slidable, and the main body A central guide recessed portion 453 which is a recess extending in the vertical direction formed on the front at the center in the width direction of 451 and into which the sliding projection 463 of the lens member 460 is inserted, and the left and right ends of the main body 451 It mainly includes a both-end guide recessed portion 454 which is a recess formed on the front in the portion and extended in the vertical direction and to which the stable slide portion 464 of the lens member 460 is guided.

  The lens member 460 includes a plate-like main body 461 having a circular opening at its center, a magnifying lens 462 having an enlargement lens processing formed therein and fitted in the opening of the main body 461, and a widthwise center of the main body 461 A sliding projection 463 which is projected to the back side at the upper end and is inserted in the slide hole 443 of the arm member 440 so as to be slidable up and down, and a slide projected to the back side at both widthwise ends of the main body 461 The lower end shaft portion 473 and the upper side of the door member 470 are disposed rotatably in the upper and lower sides of the main body portion 461 in a stable slide portion 464 inserted in the upper and lower slide guide portions of the member 450 so as to be vertically slidable. A pair of rotary cylinders 465 through which the shaft portion 474 is inserted, and an open / close drive motor 466 for rotating the pair of rotary cylinders 465 in opposite directions by a transmission mechanism (not shown) To prepare for.

  The moving operation of the vertical movement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates the closed state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  When the arm member 440 is swung from the retracted position (see FIG. 16) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 20), the sliding of the lens member 460 supported by the sliding hole 443 on the swinging end side of the arm member 440 The movable projection 463 (see FIG. 18) is slid on the central guide recess 453 of the slide member 450. The lens member 460 is vertically guided by the both-end guide concave portion 454 of the slide member 450, and the slide member 450 is vertically guided by the concave portion 415 of the base member 410. The member 460 is slid in the vertical direction.

  Referring back to FIG. 18 and FIG. The door member 470 is configured by dividing a circular plate into upper and lower parts, and is formed on the lower side with a lower main body portion 471, an upper main body portion 472 formed above the lower main body portion 471, and a lower side. A lower shaft portion 473 projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back side at the lower end portion of the main body portion 471 and inserted into the rotary cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to relatively rotate, and a circle on the back side at the lower end portion of the upper main body portion 472 It mainly includes an upper shaft portion 474 which is provided in a columnar shape and which is inserted into the rotary cylinder 465 of the lens member 460 so as not to be relatively rotatable.

  The lower main body 471 is provided with a guide projection 471 a protruding on the side facing the upper main body 472, and the upper main body 472 is on the side facing the lower main body 471. The receiving recess 472a is provided in the The relative positioning between the lower main body 471 and the upper main body 472 in the closed state can be performed by fitting the guide projection 471 a and the receiving recess 472 a. In the present embodiment, since the guide projection 471a is protruded in a tapered shape, the guide projection 471a can be reliably fitted in the receiving recess 472a.

  The operation of the door member 470 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical movement unit 400. FIG. Note that FIG. 21 illustrates the open state of the door member 470 when the arm member 440 of the vertical movement unit 400 is disposed at the extended position.

  The lower shaft portion 473 and the upper shaft portion 474 (see FIG. 19) are rotated by the rotation of the rotary cylinder 465 (see FIG. 18) of the lens member 460. The pair of rotary cylinders 465 are rotated in opposite directions by the driving force of the opening / closing drive motor 466 (see FIG. 19), so the door member 470 is opened from the closed state (see FIG. 20) (see FIG. 21) In this case, the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung outward (opposite direction) from each other. In addition, when the door member 470 is changed from the open state (see FIG. 21) to the closed state (see FIG. 20), the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be swung inwardly.

  Thereby, the time for swinging the lower main body portion 471 and the upper main body portion 472 can be reduced to half as compared with the case where the front side of the lens member 460 is swung to cover a single cover member.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 45. The compound operation unit 500 arranges the telescopic effect device 540 on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 by swinging the pivoting arm member 550 from the retracted position (see FIG. 22) to the extended position (see FIG. 9). It is a unit. In addition, the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 is formed so as to be swingable about the first shaft portion 512 (see FIG. 24) of the base member 510.

  FIG. 22 is a front perspective view of combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 23 is a back perspective view of combined operation unit 500. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate that the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position which is the end position formed on the outside of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  FIG. 24 is a front exploded perspective view of combined operation unit 500, and FIG. 25 is a back exploded perspective view of combined operation unit 500.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the combined operation unit 500 is a unit that effects by sliding and swinging the expansion and contraction rendering device 540, and includes a base member 510 that forms a skeleton and the base member 510. And a first drive device 530 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510 to generate a driving force of the rotary plate 520, and is fastened to the front of the rotary plate 520. One end of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 which is fixed and formed so as to be expandable and contractible in the radial direction of the rotary plate 520 and one end thereof is connected to the expansion / contraction effect device 540 and the other end on the opposite side is pivotally supported by the base member 510 And a pivoting arm member 550 that forms an expansion and contraction operation of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 by a pivoting operation, and a driving force of the pivoting arm member 550 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 510. The second driving device 560 to be generated, the rotating crank member 570 for transmitting the driving force of the second driving device 560 to the rotating arm member 550, and the rotating arm member 550 and the rotation are fastened and fixed from the front of the base member 510. And a front cover 580 for blinding a mechanical portion on the rotary shaft side such as the crank member 570.

  The base member 510 includes a main body portion 511 having a rectangular plate shape, a cylindrical first shaft portion 512 protruding forward from a substantially lower center of the main body portion 511 in the width direction, and the first shaft portion 512. Three rows of circular arc-shaped holes 513 drilled along a central circular arc, and a first through hole 514 drilled adjacent to a second circular arc-shaped hole 513b of the three rows of circular arc-shaped holes 513 , And a cylindrical second shaft 515 protruding forward from the main body 511 at a substantially intermediate position between the shaft 512 and the right end of the main body 511, and adjacent to the second shaft 515. A second through hole 516 to be bored, a cylindrical third shaft 517 projecting forward from the lower right end of the main body 511 in front view, and a bending from the edge of the main body 511 to the front And a bent wall portion 518.

  The first shaft portion 512 is a portion that is inserted into the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520 and becomes the rotation shaft of the rotary plate 520. Therefore, the diameter of the first shaft portion 512 is formed slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 522 of the rotary plate 520.

  The arc-shaped hole 513 includes a first arc-shaped hole 513a, a second arc-shaped hole 513b, and a third arc-shaped hole 513c from the side closer to the first shaft portion 512.

  The first circular arc hole 513 a and the third circular arc hole 513 c are long holes through which the insertion shaft 525 of the rotary plate 520 is inserted and which guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520. Thereby, when the rotating plate 520 is rotated, the load received by the first shaft portion 512 can be reduced, and the durability of the rotating plate 520 can be improved. Although FIGS. 24 and 25 show a state in which the collar is fastened to the tip of the insertion shaft 525, the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c are different from the collar and the main body portion 521. Placed between (inserted before fastening the collar).

  The second arc-shaped hole 513 b is a long hole in which the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 is disposed and moved. The upper side of the substantially central portion is opened, and the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 is disposed in the opened portion. Thus, the toothed portion of the drive motor 531 of the first drive device 530 and the arc-shaped rack 526 of the rotary plate 520 can be disposed in the plate thickness portion of the main body portion 511. The dimension in the longitudinal direction (the dimension in the front-rear direction in FIG. 22) can be suppressed.

  The first through hole 514 and the second through hole 516 are through holes into which the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530 and the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560 are inserted, respectively.

  The second shaft 515 is a cylindrical portion on the front side of which the cover 575 of the rotating crank member 570 is fastened and fixed, and which is the central axis of the rotation of the main body 571. Therefore, the diameter of the second shaft 515 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body 571 of the rotating crank member 570.

  The third shaft portion 517 is a portion that is inserted into the pivot support hole 552 of the pivoting arm member 550 and serves as a central axis of pivoting of the pivoting arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the third shaft portion 517 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the pivot hole 552 of the pivot arm member 550. A torsion spring 517a is wound around the third shaft 517 to generate a biasing force for moving the pivoting arm member 550 toward the retracted position.

  The torsion spring 517 a is formed in such a manner that arms are extended from both ends of the coil portion wound around the third shaft 517. One arm portion is fixed to the lower right portion (in the vicinity of the first stopper portion 518 a) of the bent wall portion 518 in a front view, and the other arm portion on the opposite side of the one arm portion The locking portion 555 is locked.

  The bent wall portion 518 includes a first stopper portion 518 a adjacent to the third shaft portion 517, a second stopper portion 518 b formed on the right side of the first shaft portion 512, and a left side of the first shaft portion 512. And a third stopper portion 518c formed on the main body.

  The first stopper portion 518 a is a portion that regulates the rotation of the rotation arm member 550. That is, when the pivoting arm member 550 is lowered to the extended position (see FIG. 9), it is brought into contact with the first stopper portion 518a, and the lowering is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the second stopper portion 518b is disposed below the third stopper portion 518c. The lower surface of the rotary plate 520 is formed symmetrically with respect to the shaft support hole 522 (see FIG. 37), so that the rotary plate 520 rotates at a larger rotation angle in the direction of rotation toward the second stopper portion 512b. Can. That is, in the expansion / contraction effect device 540 described later, the maximum angle of the clockwise swing in the front view is formed larger than the swing in the counterclockwise direction in the front view.

  The rotary plate 520 has a fan-shaped plate-like main body portion 521, a pivot hole 522 circularly formed in the thickness direction at the base portion of the main body portion 521, and a body slightly wider than the inner diameter of the pivot hole 522 A rail receiving groove 523 which is rectilinearly recessed on the front surface of the portion 521, a pair of expansion and contraction stoppers 524 which are formed to project forward on both sides of the lower end portion of the rail receiving groove 523 An arc-shaped rack having a plurality of (three in this embodiment) insertion shafts 525 projecting from the back surface of the main body 521 in an arc shape centering on the pivot hole 522 and having gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral portion And 526.

  The first shaft portion 512 of the base member 510 is inserted through the shaft support hole 522. Therefore, the rotary plate 520 is swung about the first shaft portion 512.

  The rail receiving groove 523 is a portion to which the slide rail 545 of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 is fastened and fixed, and the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 extends and contracts along the extending direction of the rail receiving groove 523. Therefore, the moving direction of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 is changed by the posture of the rotary plate 520.

  The expansion / contraction stopper 524 is a portion that is vertically abutted against the inner side surface of the slide plate 544 of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and regulates the movement width of the slide plate 544. It is formed on both sides of the rail receiving groove 523 and is abutted with the inner side surface of the slide plate 544 on both sides, thereby suppressing load on the slide rail 545 in a direction orthogonal to the expansion and contraction direction, and improving the durability Can be

  The insertion shaft 525 is a portion which is inserted into the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third arc-shaped hole 513c of the base member 510 and guides the rotation of the rotary plate 520, and has a diameter of the first arc-shaped hole 513a and the third circle. It is formed slightly smaller than the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 513c. In addition, since the collar member having a diameter larger than the width dimension of the first circular arc hole 513a and the third circular arc hole 513c is fastened and fixed to the tip end, the rotary plate 520 is non-extractably connected to the base member 510.

  The arcuate rack 526 is inserted into the second arcuate hole 513 b of the base member 510 and engaged with the drive gear 532 of the first drive device 530. Since the meshing portion between the arc-shaped rack 526 and the first drive device 530 is formed in the area including the thickness portion of the base member 510, the dimension in the thickness direction of the combined operation unit 500 can be suppressed.

  The first drive device 530 mainly includes a drive motor 531 fastened and fixed to the base member 510, and a drive gear 532 inserted into the first through hole 514 of the base member 510 and axially rotated by the drive motor 531.

  Next, the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. 26 is a front exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and FIG. 27 is a rear exploded perspective view of the expansion / contraction effect device 540.

  As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 has a main body member 541 forming a skeleton, and a pair of the main body member 541 is fastened and fixed to the back surface thereof. The first guide member 542 and the second guide member 543 through which the portion 551 is inserted, and the axially movable direction of the first guide member 542 and the insertion holes 542 d of the second guide member 543 are provided. The slide plate 544, the slide plate 544 and the rotary plate 520, and one end of the slide rail 545 which is internally fitted in the rail receiving groove 523 and fastened and fixed; Of the front plate member 546 to be fastened and fixed, the connecting sliding member 547 slidably supported on the shaft support portion 546c of the front plate member 546, and the connecting sliding member 547 Mainly includes a decorative member 548 front drooping portion 548b is formed to be movable in the front of the body member 541 is fixed.

  The main body member 541 includes a plate-like main body portion 541a forming a skeleton, a columnar protrusion 541b protruding toward the back side at the center in the width direction of the main body portion 541a, and a back surface of the protrusion 541b The first bulking fastening portion 541c, which is provided on the left side in a pair, the second bulking fastening portion 541d, which is provided on the right side in the back view of the protrusion 541b, and the top left portion of the body portion 541a in a rear view. Mainly provided are a guide fastening portion 541e which is provided in a protruding manner, and a fastening hole 541f which is formed on the front side of the main body portion 541a in a plurality (in the present embodiment, three places) and the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

  The protrusion 541 b is a portion that is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 554 of the pivoting arm member 550. Therefore, the diameter of the protrusion 541 b is formed to be slightly smaller than the width dimension of the inner circumferential surface of the arc-shaped hole 554. In addition, since the projection 541 b is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 554, when the pivoting arm member 550 is swung, the main body member 541 can be interlocked.

  The first raised fastening portion 541 c is a portion for fastening and fixing the first guide member 542, and the second raised fastening portion 541 d is a portion for fastening and fixing the second guide member 543. The distance by which the second bulky fastening portion 541 d is separated in the vertical direction is longer than the first bulky fastening portion 541 c because a position not interfering with the pivoting arm member 550 is selected and disposed. Here, in the present embodiment, the pivoting arm member does not pass below the front left side of the main body member 541 in its pivoting trajectory (see FIGS. 37, 40 and 44). Therefore, the arrangement interval of the pair of second raised fastening portions 541 d can be increased compared to the first raised fastening portions 541 c, and the rigidity of the second raised fastening portions 541 d can be improved.

  The guide fastening portion 541 e is a portion to which the auxiliary fastening portion 542 e of the first guide member 542 is fastened and fixed, and is a portion to which the upper surface of the pivoting arm member 550 is guided when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in an expanded state. That is, even if the projection 541 b is not guided by the arc-shaped hole 554 of the pivot arm member 550, the guide fastening portion 541 e guides the upper surface of the pivot arm member 550 to pivot the pivot arm member 550 upward. Thus, the pivoting arm member 550 and the telescopic effect member 540 are operated in conjunction with each other.

  The fastening hole 541 f is a through hole in which the fastening portion 546 b of the front plate member 546 is fastened and fixed.

  The first guide member 542 is a fastening plate portion 542a fastened and fixed to the first raised fastening portion 541c, and a back surface restricting portion extending upward from a position where one step up on the back surface side of the fastening plate portion 542a 542b, a guide rail portion 542c protruding in a wall shape from the left and right sides of the back surface restricting portion 542b to the back surface, and a portion protruding to the back surface at the upper end portion of the back surface restricting portion 542b And an auxiliary fastening portion 542 e extending from the back surface regulating portion 542 b and fastened and fixed to the guide fastening portion 541 e.

  The back surface restricting portion 542 b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the pivoting arm member 550 and is a portion that prevents the pivoting arm member 550 from moving back and the projection 541 b from coming off from the arc-shaped hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 542 c guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544 d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 performs expansion and contraction operations, and suppresses the displacement of the posture of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 542.

  The insertion hole 542 d is a hole through which the slide rod 544 e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. The inner diameter of the insertion hole 542d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, so the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 542.

  The second guide member 543 is a fastening plate portion 543a to be fastened and fixed to the second raised fastening portion 541d, and a back surface regulating portion extending upward from a position where the vehicle rides on the top surface of the fastening plate portion 543a. 543b, guide rails 543c protruding in a wall shape from the left and right sides of the back surface restricting portion 543b to the back surface, and a portion of the upper surface of the back surface restricting portion 543b protruding upward in the vertical direction And an insertion hole 543d.

  The back surface regulating portion 543 b is a portion disposed on the back surface of the pivoting arm member 550, and is a portion that prevents the pivoting arm member 550 from moving back to the rear and the projection 541 b falling off from the arc-shaped hole 554. is there.

  The guide rail portion 543 c guides the movement of the rail receiving portion 544 d of the slide plate 544 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 performs the expansion / contraction operation, and suppresses the displacement of the attitude of the slide plate 544 with respect to the first guide member 543.

  The insertion hole 543 d is a hole through which the slide rod 544 e of the slide plate 544 is inserted. The inner diameter of the insertion hole 543d is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the slide rod 544e, so the slide plate 544 is formed to be slidable relative to the first guide member 543.

  The slide plate 544 has a main body portion 544a formed in a rectangular plate shape, a concave portion 544b in which a wide concave portion extending in the vertical direction is formed on the back surface of the main body portion 544a, and the concave portion 544b. Recesses 544c at both ends where recesses extending in the vertical direction are formed in the front of the left and right sides, and rail receivers projecting in a semicircular shape toward the front side at upper and lower end portions of the recesses 544c at both ends A section 544d, a cylindrical slide rod 544e extending in the vertical direction inside the concave sections 544c at both ends, and a production assisting wall 544f projecting toward the front substantially in the vertical center of the main body section 544a; A stopper portion 544g is provided mainly at the upper and lower ends of the recessed portion 544b so as to protrude toward the back surface at both left and right ends.

  The recessed portion 544 b is a portion for guiding the slide plate 544 to the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520. Therefore, the width of the inner side surface of the recessed portion 544b is formed to be slightly larger than the width dimension of the expansion / contraction stopper 524.

  The both end recessed portion 544c is a portion that accommodates a protrusion in which the insertion holes 542d and 543d of the guide members 542 and 543 are formed. Thereby, the projection part by which penetration hole 542d, 543d of guide member 542, 543 is drilled can be guided from the outside.

  The rail receiving portion 544 d is a portion accommodated in the guide rail portions 542 c and 543 c of the guide members 542 and 543. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the guide members 542, 543 with respect to the slide plate 544.

  The slide rod 544 e is a cylindrical rod inserted through the insertion holes 542 d and 543 d of the guide members 542 and 543. Thereby, the guide members 542 and 543 are formed so as to be slidable in the extending direction (vertical direction in FIG. 26) of the slide bar 544e.

  The effect assisting portion 544f is a portion that is in contact with the rear hanging portion 548c of the decoration member 548 when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in an extended state, and moves the decoration member 548. Thereby, the external appearance of the expansion-contraction rendering device 540 can be changed.

  The stopper portion 544 g is a portion that is in contact with the expansion / contraction stopper 524 of the rotary plate 520 and that defines the vertically moving end of the slide plate 544.

  The slide rail 545 is a commercially available mini rail member. One end is fastened and fixed along the rail receiving groove 523 of the rotary plate 520, and the other end opposite to the one end is fastened and fixed to the recessed portion 544b of the slide plate 544.

  The front plate member 546 is an effect portion visually recognized by the player, and is a plate-like main body portion 546a formed in substantially the same shape as the main body member 541 in a front view, and the back surface side from the main body portion 546a It mainly includes a fastening portion 546b protruding in accordance with the formation position of the fastening hole 541f, and a pair of pivoting portions 546c projecting from the upper end portion of the main body portion 546a toward the back side.

  The fastening portion 546b is a portion for fixing the front plate member 546 to the main body member 541, and the fastening portion 546b is fastened and fixed by screwing it through the fastening hole 541f.

  The shaft support portion 546c slidably supports the connection sliding member 547. Therefore, the diameter of the bearing portion 546c is formed slightly smaller than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b of the connecting sliding member 547.

  The connection sliding member 547 is formed in a plate-like body portion 547a, a pair of sliding long holes 547b formed in an elongated hole shape extending vertically and drilled in the longitudinal direction, and a vertical direction A pair of insertion holes 547c are mainly provided.

  The sliding long hole 547 b is a portion through which the pivotal support portion 546 c of the front plate member 546 is inserted. Therefore, the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b is formed slightly larger than the shaft support portion 546c. The coupling sliding member 547 is pivotally supported by the front plate member 546 so as not to be pulled out by fastening and fixing a collar member having an outer shape larger than the width of the inner peripheral surface of the sliding long hole 547b to the front end of the shaft support portion 546c. Ru. The insertion hole 547 c is a circular hole through which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the decorative member 548 is inserted.

  The decorative member 548 is formed in a plate shape, and a main body portion 548a to which the connection sliding member 547 is fastened and fixed from the lower side, a front hanging portion 548b formed to descend downward on the front side of the main body portion 548a, and a main body portion 548a And a rear hanging portion 548c which is formed to hang downward on the rear side of the main body.

  When the connection sliding member 547 moves relative to the front plate member 546, the front drooping portion 548b covers the front plate member 546 (see FIG. 43) and the front plate member 546 is separated and viewed (see FIG. 43). 37) can be formed. Thereby, the appearance of the expansion / contraction effect member 540 can be changed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  The back dripping portion 548c is a portion that is in contact with the rendering assistance wall 544f of the slide plate 544 by the expansion and contraction operation of the telescopic rendering device 540, and the decorative member 548 is made by the back flapping portion 548c being in contact with the rendering assist wall 544f. Is moved relative to the front plate member 546.

  Referring back to FIG. 24 and FIG. The pivoting arm member 550 has a body portion 551 formed in a long rod shape, a pivot hole 552 drilled in the front-rear direction at one end of the body portion 551, and a pivot hole 552 Formed on the back side of the main body 551 and on the front side of the other end which is the opposite end of the one end and the other end of the one end. An arc-shaped hole 554, which is an arc-shaped bottomed long hole, is protruded toward the back side in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 552 of the main body 551 and its tip is bent like a hook and the other arm of the torsion spring 517a is locked Mainly comprises a locking portion 555.

  The bearing hole 552 is a circular hole through which the third shaft 517 of the base member 510 is inserted. Therefore, the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 552 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the third shaft portion 517, whereby the pivoting arm member 550 is formed so as to be pivotable about the third shaft portion 517.

  The deformed long hole 553 is a portion through which the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is inserted. The shape of the deformed long hole 553 will be described later.

  The arc-shaped hole 554 is a long hole through which the protrusion 541 b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 is inserted. Therefore, the width dimension of the arc-shaped hole 554 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 541 b. Further, the arc formed by the arc-shaped hole 554 coincides with the arc formed by the projection 541 b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is swung about the first shaft 512 in the expanded state (FIGS. 37 to 39). Up to see).

  In addition, the circular arc-shaped hole 554 is open at the tip of the other end of the rotary arm member 550, and includes a proboscis 554a whose width widens at the tip.

  The second drive device 560 is a device that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating crank member 570, and is inserted into the drive motor 561 fastened and fixed to the base member 510 and the second through hole 516 of the base member 510. And a drive gear 562 that is axially rotated by the drive motor 561.

  The drive gear 562 is engaged with the transmission gear teeth 572 of the rotating crank member 570. Accordingly, when the drive gear 562 is rotated, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated accordingly.

  The pivoting crank member 570 is a member for transmitting the driving force to the pivoting arm member 550, and is engraved on the ring-shaped main body portion 571 axially supported by the second shaft portion 515 and the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 571. The transmission gear teeth 572 provided, the control umbrella portion 573 formed in such a manner as to cover the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572, and the slide protruding on the front side at a position eccentric to the center of the main body 571 A protrusion 574 and a lid 575 which is formed to have a diameter larger than the inner circumferential diameter of the main body 571 and which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the second shaft 515 are mainly included.

  The transmission gear teeth 572 mesh with the drive gear 562 of the second drive device 560. Thus, the driving force of the drive motor 561 is transmitted to the rotating crank member 570.

  The control umbrella portion 573 suppresses the positional shift of the drive gear 532 to the front side of the transmission gear teeth 572. Thereby, the meshing relationship between the drive gear 532 and the transmission gear teeth 572 can be made appropriate.

  The sliding projection 574 is a portion that is inserted into the deformed elongated hole 553 of the pivoting arm member 550. That is, based on the relationship between the sliding protrusion 574 and the shape of the pivoting arm member 550, it is determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force is formed.

  The lid 575 is a portion for disposing the main body 571 on the base member 510 in a non-extractable manner.

  The relationship between the swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 and the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. First, the shape of the modified long hole 553 of the pivoting arm member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a).

  28 (a) and 29 (a) are front views of the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570. FIG. In FIG. 28A, a state in which the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated, and in FIG. 29A, a state in which the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the projecting position is illustrated. In FIGS. 28 (a) and 29 (a), the deformed long hole 553 and the sliding projection 574 are shown as hidden lines and the front plate member 546 and the projection 541b of the telescopic effect device 540 are shown as imaginary lines. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, in the state where the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, a straight line connecting the rotary shaft of the pivoting crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574 and the pivoting crank member 570 An upward orthogonal state is formed in which the straight line connecting the rotation axis and the shaft support hole 552 is orthogonal.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, in a state where the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position, a straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the pivoting crank member 570 and the sliding projection 574 and the pivoting crank member 570 It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state in which the axis of rotation of and the straight line connecting the shaft support hole 552 are orthogonal. In FIG. 29A, a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated by a predetermined angle in a counterclockwise direction in a front view from the above-described downward orthogonal state is illustrated.

  The deformed long hole 553 is a transmission groove portion 553a in which the driving force is transmitted to the pivot arm member 550 by the movement of the sliding projection 574, and a first non-transmission wall portion connected from the upper end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a. 553b and a second non-transmission wall 553c connected from the lower end of the transmission groove 553a, and a selection wall 553d connecting the first non-transmission wall 553b and the second non-transmission wall 553c Prepare.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the transmission groove portion 553a is a recessed groove linearly extended leftward from the sliding projection portion 574 of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. Transmission groove portion 553a is formed with a length such that sliding projection 574 of rotating crank member 570 can move from the upward orthogonal state to the downward orthogonal state, and the formation width of the inner circumferential surface thereof is slightly smaller than the diameter of sliding projection 574 It is formed large. Therefore, while the sliding projection 574 moves in the transmission groove portion 553a, the driving force is transmitted from the rotating crank member 570 to the rotating arm member 550.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the first non-transmission wall portion 553b slides from the upper wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a around the rotation axis of the rotating crank member 570 in the upward orthogonal state. The wall portion is formed along the circumscribed circle of the portion 574. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the upward orthogonal state, the rotating crank member 570 idles relative to the rotating arm member 550, and the driving force from the rotating crank member 570 is the rotating arm It is not transmitted to the member 550.

  When the pivoting arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state where the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the movement of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b The direction is directed to the rotational axis of the pivoting crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is disposed to face the first non-transmission wall 553b, the load applied to the sliding projection 574 by the rotation of the pivoting arm member 550 is the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570. It is directed to the axis. Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is disposed to face the first non-transmission wall 553b, the rotation of the pivoting arm member 550 is prevented.

  The second non-transmission wall portion 553c is, as shown in FIG. 29A, a rotation crank from the lower side wall surface of the right end portion of the transmission groove portion 553a in a state where the rotation arm member 550 is disposed at the overhang position. The wall portion is formed along the circumscribed circle of the sliding projection 574 centered on the rotation axis of the member 570. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the front view from the orthogonal state (a state where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined amount from the state in FIG. 29A). The pivoting crank member 570 idles relative to the pivoting arm member 550, and the driving force is not transmitted from the pivoting crank member 570 to the pivoting arm member 550.

  When the pivoting arm member 550 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 29A, the moving direction of the second non-transmission wall portion 553b is directed to the rotation shaft of the pivoting crank member 570. Be Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is disposed to face the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 29B), the load applied to the sliding projection 574 by the rotation of the pivot arm member 550. Are directed to the rotational axis of the pivoting crank member 570. Therefore, when the sliding projection 574 is disposed to face the second non-transmission wall 553c, the rotation of the pivoting arm member 550 is prevented.

  The selection wall portion 553d is a wall portion formed of a smooth curved surface connecting the front end right end portion of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b and the front end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. The transfer wall portion 553b is formed on the upper side of the extended curve.

  The selection wall portion 553d is disposed to face the right side portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c, and is formed in such a manner that the distance to the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is increased toward the left end of the selection wall portion 553d. Therefore, for example, when rotating the rotating crank member 570 clockwise in a front view from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), the sliding projection 574 passes the first non-transmission wall 553b and the second non-transmission In the margin D (see FIG. 32B) until the wall 553c is reached, no driving force is transmitted to the pivoting arm member 550, and no restriction of rotation occurs. That is, the driving force is not transmitted from the pivoting crank member 570 to the pivoting arm member 550, and the restriction of the rotation of the pivoting arm member 550 by the sliding projection 574 does not occur.

  The right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along an arc S1 centered on the pivotal support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small), while the right end portion of the selection wall portion 553d is The second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed to intersect the arc S2 centered on the pivot support hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle between the right end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c and the arc S1.

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swing of the pivoting arm member 550, which is necessary to cope with the amount of change, changes. That is, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d abut on each other, the swing amount of the pivot arm member 550 is The amount is smaller than the amount of swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c abut each other in a predetermined amount. Therefore, whether the sliding projection 574 rotates along the second non-transmission wall 553c or along the selection wall 553d, the pivoting arm member 550 swings with respect to the speed of the pivoting crank member 570. You can change the speed.

  Referring back to FIG. 28 to FIG. FIGS. 28 to 31 are front views of the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570 in which the pivoting of the pivoting arm member 550 and the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 are illustrated in time series. In FIG. 28A, the upward orthogonal state described above is formed (the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and in FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, the pivoting crank member 570 is counterclockwise in front view. The rotated state is sequentially illustrated, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated by a hidden line, and the front plate member 546 and the projection 541 b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 are illustrated by an imaginary line. .

  In FIGS. 28 to 31, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is detected by the position detection sensor (not shown) in the posture to expand and contract in the vertical direction, and the swing is stopped in that posture. That is, in FIGS. 28 to 31, the protrusion 541 b moves only in the vertical direction. In this case, the rocking of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 is prevented by the resistance between the first drive device 530 (see FIG. 25) and the drive gear 532.

  In the state of FIG. 28A, the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state. In this case, the reference horizontal line O is set at a position lowered vertically from the projection 541 b by the distance h1. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state, the projection 541 b is disposed at a position vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h1.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 28 (a) (rotated counterclockwise by an angle T1 from the upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28 (a))), A state in which the sliding projection 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the projection 541 is spaced vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2 <h1) (FIG. 28 (b )) To reach. During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the pivoting arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the pivoting arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state of FIG. 28 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front (refer to FIG. 28 (a)), and the angle T2 (T2 ≒ 180 degrees> T1) counterclockwise. And the sliding projection 574 is moved (transmission area) in the transmission groove 553a of the deformed elongated hole 553 and enters the area facing the second non-transmission wall 553c, and the projection 541 is the reference. It reaches the state of the state (see FIG. 29A) arranged at a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h2) vertically upward from the horizontal line O. That is, the pivoting arm member 550 is swung.

  From the state shown in FIG. 28C, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T3 (T3> T2) counterclockwise from the counterclockwise rotation in the front view (see FIG. 28A). And the sliding projection 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 29 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled relative to the pivoting arm member 550, and the pivoting arm The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h3.

  When the pivoting arm member 550 is to be rotated clockwise in a front view from the state of FIGS. 29A and 29B, the sliding projection 574 is directed to the rotation shaft of the pivoting crank member 570 in a second direction. It is pushed by the non-transmission wall portion 553c. In this case, the movement of the sliding projection 574 is restricted, whereby the swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the pivoting arm member 550 is prevented from clockwise rotation in a front view from the state of FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b).

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 29A, it is conceivable to stop the rotation crank member 570. However, if the rotating crank member 570 is rapidly stopped until the rendering speed of the rotating arm member 550 is reached just before reaching the extended position, the second drive device 560 is loaded, and the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is reduced. If it makes it loose, it will be impossible to improve the rendering effect.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the pivoting arm is not rotated in the state of FIG. 29 (a) but is rotated to the state of FIG. 29 (b). The rotation of the member 550 can be stopped in the state of FIG. 29A (the projection 541 can be stopped at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h3). Thereby, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and thereafter, the rotating crank member from the state of FIG. 29 (a) to the state of FIG. 29 (b) The 570 can be slowed down. Therefore, there is no need to stop the rotating crank member 570 rapidly. Therefore, coexistence with the improvement of the rendering effect of the rotation arm member 550 and the improvement of the durability of the 2nd drive device 560 can be aimed at.

  From the state of FIG. 29 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view (refer to FIG. 28 (a)), and then an angle T4 (T44270 degrees> T3). And the sliding projection 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed long hole 553 to reach the state of FIG. 30 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled relative to the pivoting arm member 550, and the pivoting arm The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h3.

  That is, while the turning crank member 570 is rotated by 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 29A, the turning arm member 550 is maintained in the same posture, and the projections 541b are in the same position. Maintained. In the present embodiment, the length at which the pivoting arm member 550 is maintained in the same position and the projection 541b is maintained in the same position is set while the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated by 1⁄4 turn in this embodiment, There is no need to be limited to that. The length by which the front plate member 546 is kept in the lower position can be changed by changing the length of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A) of the deformed elongated hole 553. For example, by making the second non-transmission wall portion 553c longer than the present embodiment, the length by which the front plate member 546 is continuously disposed at the lower position can be made longer than the present embodiment.

  From the state of FIG. 30 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T5 (T5> T4) counterclockwise from the counterclockwise rotation in the front view (see FIG. 28 (a)). State, the sliding projection 574 pushes up the selected wall 553d of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the projection 541 is disposed at a position vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (See FIG. 30 (b)). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the pivoting arm member 550 (transmission area ).

  That is, when the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570 are rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the selective wall portion 553d and the sliding projection 574 are in contact with each other, whereby the pivoting arm member The driving force is transmitted to 550 (transmission area).

  From the state of FIG. 30 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise by an angle T6 (T6> T5) counterclockwise from a front view counterclockwise (see FIG. 28 (a)). And the sliding projection 574 enters the area facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the projection 541 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h1 (h1> h2). A state of being placed at a spaced position (see FIG. 31) is reached. During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the pivoting arm member 550 (transmission area ).

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 31, the sliding projection 574 is moved in the region facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553, as shown in FIG. The state of 28 (a) is reached. During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled relative to the pivoting arm member 550, and the pivoting arm No driving force is transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area).

  When the pivoting arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 31, the sliding projection 574 is pushed by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c toward the rotation shaft of the pivoting crank member 570. . In this case, the movement of the sliding projection 574 is restricted, whereby the swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the pivoting arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG.

  Here, as a method of stopping the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 in the state of FIG. 31, it is conceivable to stop the rotation crank member 570. However, when the rotating crank member 570 is rapidly stopped until the rendering speed of the rotating arm member 550 reaches the retracted position immediately before reaching the retraction position, a load is applied to the second drive device 560 and the speed decrease of the rotating crank member 570 is moderated. If this is the case, it will not be possible to improve the rendering effect.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotation arm member 550 is stopped in the state of FIG. 31 by rotating the rotation crank member 570 to the state of FIG. 28 (a) without stopping in the state of FIG. Can. Thereby, the speed of the rotating crank member 570 is maintained until the rotating arm member 550 reaches the extended position, and thereafter, the rotating crank member 570 is decelerated from the state of FIG. 31 to the state of FIG. It can be done. Therefore, there is no need to stop the rotating crank member 570 rapidly. Therefore, coexistence with the improvement of the rendering effect of the expansion-contraction rendering device 540 interlocked with the rotation arm member 550 and the improvement of the durability of the second drive device 560 can be achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, rotating the rotating crank member 570 once in the same direction enables the rotating arm member 550 to swing back and forth between the retracted position and the extended position.

  From these things, when rotating the rotation crank member 570 at a constant speed counterclockwise as shown in FIGS. 28 to 31, the projection 541b is a reference horizontal line in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotation crank member 570. It is moved downward from a position separated by a distance h1 vertically upward from O to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a period of 1⁄4 of the subsequent rotation period, and in the period of 1⁄4 of the subsequent rotation period, the protrusion 541b is a reference horizontal line O From the position vertically separated by a distance h3 from above, the pressure is raised and moved to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the projection 541 b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  Here, at the retracted position of the pivoting arm member 550, the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570 can form an upward orthogonal state (see FIG. 28A), and the overhang of the pivoting arm member 550 In the position, the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570 can form a downward and orthogonal state (see FIG. 29A). It is possible to form a downward orthogonal state by rotating the rotating crank member 570 a predetermined amount clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 29 (a).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to swing the pivoting arm member 550 from the retracted position to the extended position, the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated by a half turn (180 degrees). Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the time required for the rotating arm member 550 to swing from the retracted position to the extended position (from FIG. 28 (a) to FIG. 29 (a) 29) and the time required to swing from the extended position to the retracted position (see FIG. 29A through FIG. 31A to FIG. 28A) can be equal.

  The relationship between the swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 and the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 35 are front views of the pivoting arm member 550 and the pivoting crank member 570, which illustrate the pivoting of the pivoting arm member 550 and the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 in time series. In FIGS. 32 to 35, a state in which the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view is illustrated, and the deformed elongated hole 553 and a part of the rotating crank member 570 are illustrated as a hidden line. The front plate member 546 and the protrusion 541 b of the effect device 540 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 32A, the above-described upward orthogonal state is formed (the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and from FIG. 32B to FIG. 35, the pivoting arm is from FIG. The state in which the member 550 and the rotation crank member 570 are rotated by a predetermined amount is sequentially illustrated in time series.

  In the state of FIG. 32A, the rotating crank member 570 is in the upward orthogonal state. In this case, the protrusion 541 b is disposed at a position vertically separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1.

  From the state of FIG. 32 (a), the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (rotated clockwise by an angle T11 from the orthogonal upward state (see FIG. 32 (a))). The projection 574 is moved in the area facing the first non-transmission wall 553b of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state of FIG. 32 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled relative to the pivoting arm member 550, and the pivoting arm The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h1.

  When the pivoting arm member 550 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view from the state of FIG. 32 (b), the sliding projection 574 is restricted in movement, so that the pivoting of the pivoting arm member 550 is restricted. Ru. Therefore, the pivoting arm member 550 is prevented from rotating counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 32 (b).

  From the state of FIG. 32 (b), the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (refer to FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T12 (T12> T11). As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the sliding projection 574 is slightly separated from the inner circumferential surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the pivoting arm member 550 is swung downward by the action of gravity. In this case, in the margin D from the state shown in FIG. 32B until the sliding projection 574 passes the first non-transmission wall 553b and reaches the second non-transmission wall 553c, the pivot arm member 550 The driving force is not transmitted (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is disposed at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h4 (h4 <h1).

  From the state of FIG. 33 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (refer to FIG. 32 (a)) and is rotated clockwise by an angle T13 (T13> T12). And as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the sliding projection 574 is brought into contact with the second non-transmission wall portion 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 of the pivot arm member 550 pivoted downward by the action of gravity. Ru. That is, from the state of FIG. 33B to the state of FIG. 34A, the driving force is transmitted to the pivoting arm member 550 (transmission area). In the state of FIG. 33B, the protrusion 541 is disposed at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h5 (h5 <h4).

  From the state of FIG. 33 (b), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (refer to FIG. 32 (a)), only by an angle T14 (T141490 degrees> T13). And the sliding projection 574 is accommodated at the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the projection 541 is disposed at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h3 Is reached (see FIG. 34A). During this time, the inner circumferential surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 abuts in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, and the driving force is transmitted to the pivoting arm member 550 (transmission area).

  Here, the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 shown in FIG. 32 (b) to FIG. 34 (a) and the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 shown in FIG. 30 (a) to FIG. Although the rotation direction of the movable crank member 570 is different, the rotation area (phase) of the rotating crank member 570 is the same.

  In this case, in the rotation of the pivoting crank member 570 shown in FIGS. 32 (b) to 34 (a), the inner periphery of the deformed elongated hole 553 in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 of the pivoting crank member 570. While the surface is not in contact, the driving force is not transmitted to the rotating arm member 550 (non-transmission area), while the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 shown in FIG. 30A to FIG. The driving force is transmitted to the rotation arm member 550 (transmission area).

  Therefore, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the pivoting arm member 550 can be changed according to the rotation direction of the pivoting crank member 570. Thus, by reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, two effects of the rotating arm member 550 can be formed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the sliding projection 574 of the pivoting crank member 570 rotates between FIG. 32A and FIG. 34A, the pivoting crank member 570 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front. When rotated, the pivoting arm member 550 is swung by free fall depending on the gravitational acceleration (non-transmission area) until the sliding projection 574 abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the deformed elongated hole 553. On the other hand, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the rotating arm member 550 is swung at a speed depending on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 (transmission area).

  Thereby, even when the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is equalized, the rotation direction when the rotation crank member 570 is arranged in the same phase by reversing the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570 Variations of the swing speed of the arm member 550 can be increased.

  Further, the variation of the swinging speed of the pivoting arm member 550 is achieved by the shape of the deformed elongated hole 553 (the formation of the margin D), so that the aspect of the transmission of the driving force to the pivoting arm member 550 is It is possible to eliminate the need for another member such as a changeover switch for changing, and to reduce the member cost.

  In the present embodiment, the margin D is formed on the side of the pivotal support hole 552 of the pivoting arm member 550. Therefore, while the sliding projection 574 passes through the margin D by a predetermined distance, as compared with the case where the margin D is formed on the opposite side of the support hole 552 with respect to the rotation shaft of the rotating crank member 570. The distance by which the protrusion 541 b moves downward can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the change of the operation of the pivoting arm member 550 in the case where the rotation direction of the pivoting crank member 570 is made different while suppressing the formation range of the surplus portion D of the pivoting crank member 570.

  From the state of FIG. 34 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (refer to FIG. 32 (a)), and is rotated clockwise by an angle T15 (T15> T14). And the sliding projection 574 is slid on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state shown in FIG. 34 (b). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled relative to the pivoting arm member 550, and the pivoting arm The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h3.

  When the pivoting arm member 550 is to be rotated clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 34 (b), the sliding projection 574 is directed to the rotation axis of the pivoting crank member 570 by the second non-transmission wall portion 553c. It is pushed. In this case, the movement of the sliding projection 574 is restricted, so that the pivoting of the pivoting arm member 550 is restricted. Therefore, the pivoting arm member 550 is prevented from rotating clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 34 (b).

  From the state of FIG. 34 (b), the turning crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view (refer to FIG. 32 (a)), and only by an angle T16 (T16 ≒ 180 degrees> T15). When it is rotated, the sliding projection 574 slides on the second non-transmission wall 553c of the deformed elongated hole 553 to reach the state of FIG. 35 (a). During this time, since the inner peripheral surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 is not disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574, the sliding projection 574 is idled relative to the pivoting arm member 550, and the pivoting arm The driving force is not transmitted to the member 550 (non-transmission area), and the projection 541 is maintained at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h3.

  From the state of FIG. 35 (a), the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front (refer to FIG. 32 (a)), and is rotated clockwise by an angle T17 (T17> T16). And the sliding projection 574 is moved in the transmission groove 553a (transmission area), and the projection 541 is disposed at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h2 (h2> h3) (FIG. 35). (B) see). That is, the pivoting arm member 550 is swung.

  Here, when the rotation of the rotation crank member 570 and the swing of the rotation arm member 550 are always interlocked, it is difficult to shift the start timing of the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550 . Therefore, when the pivoting crank member 570 and the pivoting arm member 550 are started, it is necessary to generate a large force corresponding to the rigidity of the force that overcomes the inertia of each member. Therefore, a drive having a large driving force is required, which may increase the size of the drive.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the start timings of the pivoting crank member 570 and the pivoting arm member 550 can be shifted. That is, for example, from the state of FIG. 34 (b) to the state of FIG. 35 (a), only the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated, and from the state of FIG. 35 (a) to the state of FIG. 35 (b) The rotation arm member 550 can be started by interlocking with the rotation crank member 570.

  Thereby, since the force of the rotating crank member 570 can be utilized for starting the rotating arm member 550, the driving force necessary for the second drive device 560 can be suppressed. Therefore, the second drive device 560 can be miniaturized.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 35 (b), the sliding projection 574 is moved in the transmission groove portion 553a to reach the state of FIG. 32 (a). During this time, the inner peripheral surfaces of the deformed elongated holes 553 are disposed in the moving direction of the sliding projection 574 and are in contact with each other, so that the driving force is transmitted from the sliding projection 574 to the pivoting arm member 550 (transmission area ). That is, the pivoting arm member 550 is swung.

  From these things, as shown in FIGS. 32 to 35, in the case where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at the same speed clockwise, the protrusion 541b is a reference in a period of 1⁄4 of the rotation cycle of the rotating crank member 570. From a position separated by a distance h1 vertically upward from the horizontal line O, it is moved downward to a position separated by a distance h3 (h3 <h1). The protrusion 541b is maintained at a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h3 in a period of 1⁄4 of the subsequent rotation period, and the protrusion 541b is perpendicular to the reference horizontal line O in a period of half the subsequent rotation period. From a position spaced apart by a distance h3 upward, it is moved up to a position spaced by a distance h1 (h1> h3). Thereby, even when the rotating crank member 570 is moved at a constant speed, the moving speed of the projection 541 b (moving speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) can be doubled.

  In addition, the moving speed of the pivoting arm member 550 is partially accelerated by gravity acceleration when it is moved downward, while the moving speed of the rotating arm member 550 is always along the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570 when it is moved upward. Be done. Thereby, the aspect of the speed change of the projection part 541b (the expansion-contraction effect device 540) can be changed by the movement direction of the projection part 541b (the expansion-contraction effect device 540).

  A change in the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541 b (the expansion / contraction effect device 540) when the turning crank member 570 is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

  FIG. 36 is a graph showing the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A). In the graph shown in FIG. 36, the swing angle is shown on the horizontal axis with the upper right angle (see FIG. 28 (a)) of the rotating crank member 570 as the left end and increasing to the right The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541 b is shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 36, the distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541b when the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise is indicated by a curve CC1, and the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated clockwise. The distance from the reference horizontal line O of the protrusion 541 b is indicated by a curve CW1. Curves CC1 and CW1 correspond to the states of the protrusions 541b shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 35, respectively, and for the purpose of comparison when the rotating crank members 570 are arranged in the same phase, A curve obtained by inverting the curve CC1 from side to side is illustrated by an imaginary line as a curve CC2. As described above, the rising speed and the falling speed of the protrusion 541b moved up and down by the rotating arm member 550 are changed by reversing the rotating direction of the rotating crank member 570 as described above by comparing the curves CC1 and CW1. Can.

  As a comparison target of the curve CW1, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates clockwise, the sliding projection 574 rotates until it abuts on the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28A). The case where the arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by a broken line as a curve CW2. This corresponds to the case where the biasing force that causes the torsion spring 517a (see FIG. 23) to swing the pivoting arm member 550 upward is set large. In this case, the period in which the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position can be made longer.

  In the angle range N1 in which the distance from the horizontal reference line O of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 28A) is maintained without being changed in the curves CC1 and CW1, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 550 ( A non-transmission area to which the driving force is not transmitted is formed with respect to FIG. 28 (a). The width of the angular range N1 can be adjusted by the formation width of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c (see FIG. 28A).

  Further, in the curve CW1, an angle until the sliding projection 574 of the pivoting crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) abuts on the deformed elongated hole 553 of the pivoting arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A). In the range N2, a non-transmission area in which the driving force is not transmitted is formed between the rotation crank member 570 and the rotation arm member 550. The width of the angle range N2 can be adjusted by the formation width of the first non-transmission wall portion 553b (see FIG. 28A).

  As shown in FIG. 36, a curve is formed between the angle T11 to the angle T14 and the angle T4 to the angle T6 in the case where the rotating crank members 570 (see FIG. 28A) are arranged in the same phase. The shapes of the CW1 and the curve CC1 are different (the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 obtained by inverting the left and right of the curve CC1 do not overlap).

  That is, the angle when the pivoting crank member 570 (see FIG. 28A) lifts the pivoting arm member 550 (see FIG. 28A) between the angle T4 and the angle T6 is the angle As compared with the case where the pivoting crank member 570 rotates in a mode in which the pivoting arm member 550 is pushed down from 11 to the angle T14, a gentle curve is obtained.

  This is because, in the curve CW1, the sliding projection 574 (see FIG. 28 (a)) abuts on the second non-transmission wall 553c (see FIG. 28 (a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the pivoting arm member 550 (see FIG. FIG. 28 (a) is rotated, and in the curve CC1, the sliding projection 574 abuts on the selected wall 553d (see FIG. 28 (a)) of the deformed elongated hole 553 and the pivoting arm member 550 is rotated. Depends on

  Referring back to FIG. 28 (a), description will be made. As described above, in the deformed long hole 553, the right end of the second non-transmission wall portion 553c is formed along the arc S1 centering on the axial support hole 552 (the formation angle with the arc S1 is small) The right end portion of the selected wall portion 553d is formed to intersect the arc S2 centered on the pivot hole 552 at an angle larger than the formation angle of the right end portion of the second non-transfer wall portion 553c and the arc S1. Ru.

  In this case, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes, the amount of swing of the pivoting arm member 550, which is necessary to cope with the amount of change, changes. That is, when the distance between the sliding projection 574 and the shaft support hole 552 changes by a predetermined amount in a state where the sliding projection 574 and the right end of the selection wall 553d abut on each other, the swing amount of the pivot arm member 550 is The amount is smaller than the amount of swinging of the pivoting arm member 550 when the sliding protrusion 574 and the right end of the second non-transmission wall 553c abut each other in a predetermined amount.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, even when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotating crank members 570 are arranged in the same phase depending on the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570. The moving speed of the protrusion 541 b can be changed.

  Although the case where the rotation crank member 570 is rotated in one direction has been described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 35, it is also possible to reverse the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570 halfway. As the timing to reverse the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the first non-transmission wall 553b (for example, FIG. 28A, FIG. 31 and FIG. 32A) 32 (b), the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position), and the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the second non-transmission wall 553c (for example, FIG. 29 (a), 29 (b), 34 (b) and 35 (a), the pivoting arm member 550 is preferably disposed in the extended position).

  In this case, since the rotation arm member 550 is not in contact with the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570, the resistance applied to the rotation crank member 570 from the rotation arm member 550 when the rotation direction of the rotation crank member 570 is reversed. It can be suppressed. Further, in the present embodiment, a position detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a state in which the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position and a state in which the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the overhang position is disposed. Control in which the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed can be facilitated with the movable arm member 550 disposed at the retracted position or the extended position.

  By reversing the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570, variations of the reciprocating operation of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 in the vertical direction can be increased.

  For example, from the state where the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 28A), the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise a half turn (see FIG. 29A), and then The direction of rotation of the movable crank member 570 is reversed, and the case where the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by being rotated by a half turn clockwise (see FIG. 28A). That is, the sliding projection 574 is moved on the opposite side of the support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541 b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570 by a distance h3 (h3 <h1 Move down to a position separated by). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degrees to 180 degrees. Then, the projection 541 b extends from a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a half period of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570 to a position separated by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from the reference horizontal line O Move up. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 180 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Thus, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved upward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3) and a period in which the projection 541b descends by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). Period can be the same.

  Also, for example, from the state where the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 32A), the pivoting crank member 570 is rotated by 1⁄4 turn clockwise (see FIG. 34A) Then, the direction of rotation of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, and the case where the rotating arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by being rotated by 1⁄4 of the counterclockwise direction (FIG. 32). See (a)). That is, this is the case where the sliding projection 574 moves on the side in which the sliding projection 574 approaches the support hole 552.

  In this case, the protrusion 541 b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is a distance h3 (h3) from the reference horizontal line O from a position separated vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 in a period of 1⁄4 of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570. Move down to a position separated by <h1). In this case, the protrusion 541b moves downward along the curve CW1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is from 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Then, the protrusion 541b is separated from the reference horizontal line O by a distance h1 (h1> h3) from a position separated by a distance h3 vertically upward from the reference horizontal line O in a period of 1⁄4 of the rotation cycle of the rotary crank member 570 Move up to the position. In this case, the protrusion 541b moves upward along a curve CC1 (see FIG. 36) whose horizontal axis is 270 degrees to 360 degrees.

  Thus, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated at a constant speed, the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved downward by a predetermined distance (h1-h3), and is raised by a predetermined distance (h1-h3). The period of movement can be made the same, and the predetermined period can be shortened as compared with the case where the sliding projection 574 is moved on the opposite side of the pivot hole 552.

  In addition, when the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 moves downward, it can be partially dropped (from the angle T11 to the angle T13) as free fall, while the protrusion 541b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 moves upward In this case, it is always moved at a speed in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, even if the rotation speed of the rotation crank member 570 is the same, the movement mode of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the case where the rotation crank member 570 is disposed in the same phase depending on the movement direction of the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 The degree of speed change) can be changed. In other words, the curve CW1 and the curve CC2 in the range from the angle T11 to the angle T13 in FIG. 36 can be made different.

  Next, the difference in the swing angle due to the difference in the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 will be described. First, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an extended state will be described.

  FIGS. 37 to 39 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. Note that FIGS. 37 to 39 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an extended state (when the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the extended position). Further, FIG. 37 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 is disposed on the vertical line of the first shaft 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. The state of being moved in a counterclockwise direction is illustrated, and in FIG. 39, the state of being moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 37 is illustrated. The attitude of the pivoting arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is the same as the attitude of the pivoting arm member 550 shown in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 37 to 39, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h3.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 37 to 39, the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an extended state is formed in an arc shape centering on the first shaft 512 and is rotated. Along the extending direction of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the arm member 550. In other words, the arc-shaped hole 554 is extended along the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541 b. Therefore, the inner surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 is not disposed facing the swing direction of the protrusion 541 b, and the arc-shaped hole 554 does not function as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541 b. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541 b depends on the method of regulating the swing of the rotary plate 520. That is, the rotary plate 520 can be rocked until it abuts on the third stopper portion 518c, and the protrusion 541b can be rocked to the rocking angle θ1 counterclockwise in a front view, and the rotary plate 520 is second The protrusion 541 b can be swung until it abuts against the stopper portion 518 b, and the protrusion 541 b can swing to a swing angle θ 2 clockwise in a front view.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, when the protrusion 541 b is swung leftward in a front view at a swing angle θ 2, the protrusion 541 b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 of the pivot arm member 550. In this case, the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is moved in the expansion / contraction direction independently from the pivoting arm member 550, and the projection 541b can not return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause an operation failure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even when the protrusion 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 of the pivoting arm member 550, the first raised fastening portion 541c and the guide fastening portion 541e of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 are pivoting arm members By being arranged so as to be engageable with 550, alignment between the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 can be performed. That is, the telescopic effect device 540 can be prevented from being moved in the telescopic direction independently of the pivoting arm member 550.

  Thus, the length of the pivoting arm member 550 can be shortened while eliminating the defect that the projection 541 b can not return to the arc-shaped hole 554. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning area | region of rotation arm member 550 can be suppressed, and the arrangement | positioning area | region of another movable member can be ensured by that much. In addition, the material cost of the pivoting arm member 550 can be reduced.

  When the pivoting arm member 550 swings in a state where the projection 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554 (see FIG. 39), the positional relationship between the projection 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 deviates, and the projection 541b is circular. It is difficult to return to the arc-shaped hole 554, which may cause malfunction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the sliding projection 574 abuts on the deformed elongated hole 553 to prevent the pivoting arm member 550 from swinging (see FIG. 39).

  In addition to that, the movement locus of the point (the point furthest from the rotation axis) remote from the rotation axis of the slide projection 574 is formed along the side surface of the deformed elongated hole 553 which is in contact with the slide projection 574 Therefore, the rotating crank member 570 can be rotated counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 39 while maintaining the posture of the rotating arm member 550 (see FIG. 39).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 31, when the rotating crank member 570 rotates counterclockwise, immediately after the rotating arm member 550 is placed at the extended position (FIG. 29 (a 30) the projection 541b is separated from the arc-shaped hole 554, and then the projection 541b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554 until the rotating crank member 570 is disposed in the state shown in FIG. think of. If the projection 541b is returned to the arc-shaped hole 554, the pivoting crank member 570 is further rotated, and even if the pivoting arm member 550 pivots to the state shown in FIG. 30 (b), the projection 541b However, there is no malfunction that the circular hole 554 can not return.

  In this case, when the pivoting arm member 550 and the expansion / contraction effect device 540 are respectively pivoted, stop control or start control of the pivoting crank member 570 is performed according to the positional relationship between the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554. There is no need, and the rotation of the rotating crank member 570 can be continued. In other words, it is only necessary to control the swing timing of the expansion / contraction effect device 540, and the pivoting crank member 570 does not need to be controlled, and may be kept rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the control load of the complicated operation of swinging the telescopic effect device 540 and the pivoting arm member 550 at different timings.

  In the present embodiment, the fore-end portion 554a is formed such that the width of the arc-shaped hole 554 can be increased toward the opening end (the left end of FIG. 39) of the arc-shaped hole 554. Thereby, the positional deviation (positional deviation of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction) when the projection 541 b returns to the arc-shaped hole 554 can be largely tolerated, and the first bulky fastening portion 541 c and the guide fastening portion 541 e A large clearance from the pivoting arm member 550 can be secured.

  Next, a swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state which is a state between an extended state and a reduced state will be described. By swinging the pivoting arm member 550 clockwise from the state in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the expanded state (see FIG. 37), the protrusion 541 b moves corresponding to the arc-shaped hole 554, and the expansion / contraction effect Device 540 forms an intermediate state.

  40 to 42 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. FIGS. 40 to 42 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (when the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed between the overhanging position and the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541 b is shorter than the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an extended state (see FIGS. 37 to 39). That is, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541 b is changed according to the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Further, FIG. 40 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 is disposed on the vertical line of the first shaft 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. The state of being moved in a counterclockwise direction is illustrated, and in FIG. 42, the state of being moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 40 is illustrated.

  The attitude of the pivoting arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 40 to 42 is the same as the attitude of the pivoting arm member 550 shown in FIG. 28 (b). Therefore, in FIGS. 40 to 42, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h2.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven to interlock with the upward movement of the arc-shaped hole 554 by the pivoting arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the circular arc-shaped hole 554 has a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b as described later and a function of interlocking the pivot arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. This makes it possible to centralize the functions.

  As illustrated in FIG. 40 to FIG. 42, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state, and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the pivoting arm member 550 have a curvature radius Although the central axes of the two coincide with each other on the upper side, the radius of curvature and the posture differ from each other. Since the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the formation angle α1 (see FIG. 42), the arc-shaped hole 554 acts as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b (see FIG. 42) .

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the protrusion 541b is not in contact with the arc-shaped hole 554. That is, since the rotary plate 520 can be rocked until it abuts on the third stopper portion 518c, the projection 541b can be rocked to the rocking angle θ3 counterclockwise in a front view (angle θ3 = Angle θ1).

  As shown in FIG. 42, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the protrusion 541 b is abutted by the first stopper surface 554 b of the arc-shaped hole 554. In this state, the guide fastening portion 541e is in contact with the upper side surface of the pivoting arm member 550, and the change in state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction is prevented. Motion is stopped.

  That is, the rotary plate 520 is not rocked until it abuts on the third stopper 518c, and the projection 541b can be rocked clockwise to the rocking angle θ4 in a front view (angle θ4 <angle θ2). . Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541 b can be changed depending on the state of the extension effect device 540 in the extension direction. As a result, by making the expansion and contraction state of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 different, the variation of the swing angle of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 can be increased. In the state shown in FIG. 42, the guide fastening portion 541e is in contact with the main portion 551 of the pivoting arm member 550.

  Next, the swing angle when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a contracted state will be described. By swinging the pivoting arm member 550 clockwise from the state (see FIG. 40) in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is in the intermediate state, the protrusion 541 b moves corresponding to the arc-shaped hole 554, and expansion / contraction effect Device 540 forms a reduced state.

  43 to 45 are front views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. FIGS. 43 to 45 illustrate the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a contracted state (when the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position). In this case, the radius formed by the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541 b is shorter than that in the case where the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms an intermediate state (see FIGS. 40 to 42). That is, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541 b is changed according to the state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 in the expansion / contraction direction.

  Further, FIG. 43 illustrates a state in which the protrusion 541 b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 is disposed on the vertical line of the first shaft 512 of the base member 510, and in FIG. The state of being moved in a counterclockwise direction is illustrated, and in FIG. 45, the state of being moved clockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 43 is illustrated. Note that the attitude of the pivoting arm member 550 shown in FIGS. 43 to 45 is the same as the attitude of the pivoting arm member 550 shown in FIG. Therefore, in FIGS. 43 to 45, the front plate member 546 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the reference horizontal line O by the distance h1.

  At this time, the front plate member 546 is driven to interlock with the upward movement of the arc-shaped hole 554 by the pivoting arm member 550 swinging. Therefore, the arc-shaped hole 554 has a function of changing the swing angle of the protrusion 541b and a function of interlocking the pivot arm member 550 and the front plate member 546. This makes it possible to centralize the functions.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 43 to 45, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b when the expansion / contraction effect device 540 forms a contracted state and the shape of the arc-shaped hole 554 of the pivoting arm member 550 are different from each other, The central axis of the radius of curvature is reversed. That is, the central axis of the radius of curvature of the rocking trajectory of the projection 541 b is below the projection 541 b, and the central axis of the radius of curvature of the arc-shaped hole 554 is disposed above the arc-shaped hole 554. In this case, the swinging trajectory of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554 intersect at the formation angle α2 (angle α2> angle α1), and the arc-shaped hole 554 acts as a stopper for stopping the swing of the protrusion 541b ( 44 and 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, the protrusion 541 b abuts on the second stopper surface 554 c of the arc-shaped hole 554. In this case, the rotary plate 520 is not rocked until it abuts on the third stopper portion 518c (see FIG. 41), and the projection 541b can be rocked counterclockwise to the rocking angle θ5 in a front view. (Angle θ5 <angle θ1 = angle θ3).

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the rotary plate 520 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the protrusion 541 b is abutted by the third stopper surface 554 d of the arc-shaped hole 554. In this case, the rotary plate 520 is not rocked until it abuts on the third stopper 518c, and the projection 541b can be rocked clockwise to the rocking angle θ6 in a front view (angle θ6 <angle θ4 <Angle θ 2). Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541 b can be changed depending on the state of the extension effect device 540 in the extension direction. Thereby, the variation of the rocking width of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 can be increased.

  Here, the movement trajectory of projection 541 b in the contracted state and formation angle α2 of arc-shaped hole 554 are formed larger than the formation angle α1 of the movement trajectory of projection 541 b in the intermediate state and arc-shaped hole 554 Ru.

  In the relationship between the swinging locus of the protrusion 541b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 90 degrees, the protrusion 541b is swung in a mode crossing the arc-shaped hole 554, and the protrusion 541b The rocking angle of is minimized. On the other hand, in the relationship between the swinging locus of the protrusion 541 b and the arc-shaped hole 554, if the formation angle is 0 degree (see FIGS. 37 to 39), the protrusion 541 b extends in the extending direction of the arc-shaped hole 554. As a result, the rocking angle of the projection 541 b is maximized. Therefore, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the reduced state (formation angle α2) can be smaller than the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in the intermediate state (formation angle α1) (formation angle α1 <formation angle α2 ).

  As described above, when the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is changed, the swing angle of the protrusion 541b is changed, and at that time, the inner peripheral surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 (first stopper surface 554b, second The stopper surface 554 c and the third stopper surface 554 d function as a stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion and contraction rendering device 540. Thus, the inner circumferential surface of the arc-shaped hole 554 can be used as a portion that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b in each case where the expansion / contraction state of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is different. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the space for arranging the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the protrusion 541b.

  In addition, the stopper that regulates the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 is retracted from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 when the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position. Therefore, unlike the case where a fixed stopper is disposed on the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the stopper remains on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 even when the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position. Can be prevented. Thereby, when the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the retracted position, another member can be disposed on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81, so that another movable member (for example, the slide operation unit 700). The overhanging space of the support member 720) can be secured.

  The arc-shaped hole 554 of the pivoting arm member 550 has a function as a stopper for restricting the swing angle of the stretching effect device 540 and a second drive of the stretching effect device 540 by swinging the pivoting arm member 550. And a function as a transmission device for transmitting the driving force of the device 560 and causing the expansion / contraction effect device 540 to perform the expansion / contraction operation. Thus, the functions can be consolidated and the number of parts can be reduced.

  The tilt operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57. The tilt operation unit 600 is a unit that swings the effect member 620 (refer to FIG. 12) (see FIG. 12), and the slide operation unit 700 is a unit that slides the tilt operation unit 600 in the left-right direction. 46 is a front perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. 46 and 47, a state in which the tilt operation unit 600 and the column member 720 (see FIG. 47) of the slide operation unit 700 are disposed at the retracted position is illustrated.

  FIG. 48 is a front exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700, and FIG. 49 is a rear exploded perspective view of the slide operation unit 700. In FIGS. 48 and 49, the tilting operation unit 600 is illustrated without being disassembled in order to facilitate understanding.

  The slide operation unit 700 has a base member 710 formed in a plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and one end thereof fastened and fixed to the slide plate 711 of the base member 710, and is formed slidably in the left-right direction A post member 720, and a slide rail 730 at one end of which is fastened and fixed to the post member 720 and at which the other end to which the base member 610 of the tilting operation unit 600 is fastened and fixed is vertically expandable. A connection member 740 is formed slidably on the back rail 716 of the main body 710 and is pivotally supported by the pivoting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600, and generates a driving force for moving the support member 720 in the left-right direction. A driving device 750 and a back cover member 760 formed on the back side of the driving device 750 and fastened and fixed to the base member 710 are mainly included.

  The base member 710 is a member that forms the frame of the slide operation unit 700, and is formed slideably in the left-right direction and the slide plate 711 to which the support member 720 is fastened and fixed from the back side. A shaft support hole 712 recessed in the left lower part with a circular cross section and the fixed shaft portion 753a is pivotally supported, a long hole shape recessed in the right lower portion of the base member 710 in a rear view, a shaft support hole The slide shaft support hole 713 whose upper and lower positions coincide with each other 712 and in which the moving shaft portion 754a is slidably supported, and which is formed swingably in the vertical direction by a solenoid And the upper rolling member 742 of the connecting member 740 is rolled so as to project in a downward arc shape in cross section downward to the front side at the upper end portion of the base member 710. A front rail portion 715, a back rail portion 716 which is recessed from the back side to the front rail portion 715 so that the insertion plate portion 741b of the connecting member 740 is inserted therein The slide origin detection sensor 717 disposed at the position where the support hole 712 and the upper and lower positions coincide and located on the right side of the support hole 712, and the slide shaft support hole 713 and the upper and lower positions And a slide origin detection sensor 718 disposed at a position to the left of the slide shaft support hole 713.

  Since the lever member 714 restricts the slide movement of the support member 720 fixedly fixed to the slide plate 711 in the lateral direction, the driving force of the drive device 750 when maintaining the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position is not necessary. Can.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the tilting operation unit 600 is moved along the formation direction (arc track) of the front rail portion 715 and the back rail portion 716, the left and right of the support members 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600. A sliding movement in the direction can occur by the action of gravity loaded on the tilting movement unit 600. For example, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 46), the moving direction of the tilting operation unit 600 is directed obliquely downward along the shape of the front rail portion 715. Therefore, even if the moving direction of the column member 720 connected to the tilting operation unit 600 is the left and right direction along the moving direction of the slide plate 711, the column member 720 may be moved by gravity. In the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is pivoted downward and engaged with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720, and the movement of the support member 720 in the left and right direction is restricted. It is possible to maintain the support member 720 in the retracted position even if the support member 720 is unnecessary. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

  The slide origin detection sensor 717 is used to detect whether the support member 720 is disposed at the origin position (retraction position) of the slide movement. The slide origin detection sensor 717 has a pair of light emitting units and light receiving units, and the light emitting units and the light receiving units are arranged in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the light emitting unit is disposed to emit light from the back side to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light emitting unit is capable of receiving (detecting) light emitted from the light emitting unit. The light receiving unit is disposed with a 10 mm gap on the front side of the light emitting diode. Although the details will be described later, when the column member 720 movable in the left and right direction is moved to the home position (retracted position), the lower end of the column member 720 is between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the slide origin detection sensor 717 It is configured to be located. Therefore, when the column member 720 is disposed at the home position (retracted position), light traveling from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is blocked by the lower end portion of the column member 720. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the support member 720 is disposed at the origin position (retracted position) by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting portion to the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is blocked. It can be determined.

  The slide position detection sensor 718 is used to detect whether the support member 720 is disposed at the projecting position of the slide movement. The slide position detection sensor 718 has a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit in the same positional relationship as the slide origin sensor 717. Although the details will be described later, the lower end portion of the support member 720 is positioned between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the slide position detection sensor 718 when the support member 720 movable in the left and right direction is moved to the extended position. Is configured as. Therefore, when the support member 720 is disposed at the extended position, light traveling from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit is blocked by the lower end portion of the support member 720. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the support member 720 is disposed at the extended position by determining whether or not the light emitted from the light emitting unit to the light receiving unit of the slide position detection sensor 718 is blocked. Can.

  The support member 720 includes a main body portion 721 formed in a plate shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a slide plate 711 of the base member 710 continuously provided in the left and right direction at the lower end portion of the main body portion 721. The first fastening portion 722 through which the screw fastened and fixed is inserted, and the second fastening in which the slide rail 730 is fastened and secured by being continuously provided vertically in the front end left end portion of the main body portion 721 The slide hole 724 which is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the portion 723 and the second fastening portion 723 and is formed on the right side of the main body 721 in a front view; A lower lid portion in which a belt 755 of the driving device 750 is sandwiched between a hook-like locking portion 725 protruding upward from the lower end and engaged with the lever member 714 and the lower surface of the main body 721 726 and the main unit 7 A rolling portion 727 protruding from the lower surface side of the lower end portion 1 and formed so as to be capable of rolling on the inner peripheral surface of the slide concave portion 764 of the back surface cover member 760 And a coil spring 728 connected to the hook portion 617 of the base member 610 at its lower end.

  The slide rail 730 is fastened and fixed to the support member 720 in a posture in which the slide rail 730 can expand and contract in the connection direction of the second fastening portion 723.

  The slide hole 724 is an elongated hole extending in a direction parallel to the connecting direction of the second fastening portions 723 and is an elongated hole through which the auxiliary member 615 of the tilting operation unit 600 is inserted. Therefore, the slide hole 724 can suppress the positional deviation (the relative rotation of the tilting unit 600 with respect to the column member 720) of the tilting unit 600 moving up and down in the left-right direction.

  The lower lid portion 726 is formed with a tooth shape extending in the front-rear direction on the upper surface side. This tooth profile is shaped to mesh with the tooth profile formed on the inner circumferential surface of the belt 755 of the drive device 750. Thereby, the support member 720 can be prevented from slipping on the belt 755 of the drive device 750.

  In the lower cover 726, a shielding portion 726a for shielding light emitted from the light emitting portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 is provided on the lower surface side. The shielding portion 726a has a rectangular shape elongated in the sliding direction (left and right direction) of the support member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600), and the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the movable direction is the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 The gap (approximately 10 mm) between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion is formed thinner (approximately 1 mm). The shielding portion 726a is movable between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide origin detection sensor 717 or the slide position detection sensor 718 by moving the support member 720 in the left-right direction. When the support member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is at the home position (retracted position), the shielding part 726a is located between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the slide origin detection sensor 717, and the slide origin The light emitted from the light emitting unit of the detection sensor 717 to the light receiving unit is blocked. In addition, when the support member 720 (and the tilting operation unit 600) is at the projecting position, the shielding portion 726a is positioned between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the slide position detection sensor 718, and the slide position detection is performed. The light emitted from the light emitting unit of the sensor 718 to the light receiving unit is blocked. Thus, when it is detected that the light receiving portion (or the light emitting portion) of the slide origin detection sensor 717 is shielded by the shielding portion 726a, it is assumed that the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the origin position (retraction position). It can be determined. In addition, when it is detected that the light receiving unit (or the light emitting unit) of the slide position detection sensor 718 is shielded by the shielding unit 726a, it may be determined that the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the projecting position. it can.

  The rolling portion 727 is inserted into the slide concave portion 764 of the back cover 760 so as to be able to roll, thereby suppressing frictional resistance and suppressing tilting in the front-rear direction around the lower end portion of the support member 720. be able to.

  The coil spring 728 is a biasing force for moving the tilting operation unit 600 upward. Since the biasing force from the coil spring 728 is always loaded on the tilting operation unit 600, the tilting operation unit 600 is suppressed from being dropped downward by gravity.

  The connecting member 740 has a triangular plate-like main body member 741 rotatably supported by the pivotal support projection 612 of the tilting operation unit 600, and a base supported by a rolling shaft 741c projecting from the main body member 741. A pair of cylindrical upper rolling members 742 rolled on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 of the member 710 and a rolling shaft 741 c of the main body member 741 are fastened and fixed from the front side to cover the front side of the front rail portion 715 And the lower half portion of the front cover member 743 disposed in a manner and the lower half portion thereof is externally fitted and held by the front cover member 743 and the upper half portion is the lower surface of the front rail portion 715 And a cylindrical lower rolling member 744 to be moved.

  The main body member 741 is a member formed in a triangular plate shape, and is a circular recess recessed from the rear surface at the upper end portion, and a shaft rotatably supported by the pivoting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 A support portion 741a, a plate-like member protruding toward the front side at the lower end portion, and a through plate portion 741b slidably inserted in the back rail portion 716 of the base member 710, and a through plate portion from the shaft support portion 741a It mainly includes a pair of rolling shafts 741c protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the front side from a position symmetrical with respect to a perpendicular drawn to 741b and rotatably supported by the upper rolling member 742 rotatably.

  The insertion plate portion 741 b is inserted into the rear rail portion 716 of the base member 710, so that the connecting member 740 is formed to be movable along the rear rail portion 716. Therefore, the tilting operation unit 600 pivotally supported by the pivot portion 741 a is also formed to be movable along the back rail portion 716.

  The rolling shafts 741c are formed in a pair at positions symmetrical with respect to a perpendicular drawn from the shaft support portion 741a to the insertion plate portion 741b. Therefore, when the pair of rolling shafts 741 c is in contact with the front rail portion 715 formed in an arc shape via the upper rolling portion 742, the load applied to the connecting member 740 from the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 ( The force in the normal direction of the arc passes through the shaft support 741a. Therefore, the pivoting protrusion 612 of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stably held by the connecting member 740.

  The upper rolling member 742 is rotatably supported by the shaft support portion 741 a and abuts on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 slides along the front rail portion 715, the upper rolling portion 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance generated when the connecting member 740 slides, and to suppress the driving force required for the sliding movement.

  The lower rolling member 744 has a lower half rotatably fitted to a lower portion of the front cover member 743, and an upper end abuts on a lower surface of the front rail portion 715. That is, when the connecting member 740 is slid along the front rail portion 715, the lower rolling portion 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Thus, it is possible to reduce the frictional resistance generated between the connection member 740 and the front rail portion 715 during the slide movement, and to suppress the driving force required for the slide movement.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the upper rolling member 742 rolls on the upper surface of the front rail portion 715 and the lower rolling member 744 rolls on the lower surface of the front rail portion 715. Thus, the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 can be held by the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744 of the connecting member 740 while suppressing the frictional resistance.

  Here, since the center of gravity of the tilting operation unit 600 is formed upward as described later, there is a risk of tilting in the front-rear direction. In this case, since the connecting member 740 sandwiches the upper and lower surfaces of the front rail portion 715 by the upper rolling member 742 and the lower rolling member 744, the tilt operation unit 600 is inclined in both forward and backward directions. , Can generate resistance. As a result, the attitude of the tilting operation unit 600 can be easily maintained.

  The front cover member 743 pivotally supports the upper rolling member 742 in a non-extractable manner by being pivotally supported from the front side of the rolling shaft 741 c of the connection member 740.

  The driving device 750 is fixed to the base member 710 and generates a driving force for sliding the column member 720, a driving gear 752 pivotally supported by the driving motor 751, and the driving gear 752 A shaft fixed gear 753 engaged with and meshed with the belt 755, and a shaft moving gear 754 disposed so as to be separated from the shaft fixed gear 753 and wound with the belt 755 and capable of sliding movement of the rotation shaft 754a. A belt 755 wound around the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 and moved by rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753, and a coil generating an urging force moving the shaft moving gear 754 in a direction away from the shaft fixed gear 753. The spring 756 is mainly provided.

  The shaft fixed gear 753 is a cylindrical member as a rotation shaft, and includes a fixed shaft portion 753a inserted into the shaft support hole 712 of the base member 710. The shaft moving gear 754 is a cylindrical member as a rotating shaft, and includes a moving shaft portion 754 a which is inserted into the slide shaft support hole 713 of the base member 710.

  The shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 are formed as gears of the same shape. The inner circumferential surface of the belt 755 is formed with a tooth profile that meshes with the gear teeth of the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754. Thus, slippage between the belt 755 and the shaft fixed gear 753 and the shaft moving gear 754 can be suppressed, and the amount of rotation of the shaft fixed gear 753 can be reliably transmitted to the belt 755.

  One end of coil spring 756 is fixed to a hook-like portion formed on slide shaft support hole 713n of base member 710 on the right in a rear view, and the other end is fixed to a case covering axial movement gear 754 . As a result, an urging force can be generated to move the shaft moving gear 754 to the opposite side of the shaft support hole 712, and an appropriate tension can be applied to the belt 755. It is possible to prevent the gear 754 from falling off.

  The back cover member 760 is a member that covers the drive device 750 on the back surface of the base member 710, and has a main body 761 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened and a fixed shaft 753a on the bottom of the main body 761. A recessed portion 762 which is a recess for receiving, a movable recessed portion 763 which is extended in the same shape as the slide shaft support hole 713 and is a recess for receiving the moving shaft portion 754a, and is extended in the lateral direction to receive the rolling portion 727 And a slide recess 764 which is a recess.

  The slide recess 764 is a recess in which the rolling portion 727 rolls on the upper and lower inner side surfaces. The frictional resistance of the sliding movement of the column member 720 is suppressed, and the tilting of the column member 720 in the front-rear direction is suppressed. That is, when the support member 720 is inclined in the front-rear direction, the rolling portion 727 is in contact with either the upper inner side surface or the lower inner side surface of the slide recess 764. Thereby, the inclination to the front-back direction of the support member 720 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, the tilting operation unit 600 will be described. FIG. 50 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600, and FIG. 51 is a rear exploded perspective view of the tilting operation unit 600.

  The tilting operation unit 600 includes a plate-like base member 610 fastened and fixed to the other end of the slide rail 730, and a box-like effect member 620 whose lower end is pivotally supported by the base member 610. A first drive device 630 for generating a driving force for swinging the effect member 620, a transmission member 640 for transmitting the drive force of the first drive device 630 to the effect member 620, and abut against the transmission member 640 for transmission A torsion spring 650 for generating an urging force for moving the member 640 and a second drive device 660 for generating a driving force for opening and closing the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 of the effect member 620 are mainly provided. .

  The base member 610 has a main body portion 611 which is fixed to the slide rail 730 and is formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a shaft support portion of a connecting member 740 which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the front side of the main body portion 611. A pivotally supporting projection 612 on which the shaft 741a is pivotally supported, and a circular hole bored in the front-rear direction vertically above the pivotally supporting projection 612, the pivotal shaft 626 of the effect member 620 is pivotally pivotally supported. A first shaft support hole 613 and a circular hole drilled in the front-rear direction vertically above the first shaft support hole 613, and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is pivotally supported. An insertion hole through which the drive shaft of the first drive device 630 is inserted, the biaxial support hole 614, the auxiliary member 615 formed on the rear surface of the main body 611 and slidably inserted into the slide hole 724 of the support member 720 616 and the lower end of the main body 611 Mainly provided with a wedge-shaped wedge-shaped portion 617 extending toward the surface side, and a tilt origin sensor 618 provided with a pair of light emitting portions and a light receiving portion disposed at the upper left rear portion of the main body portion 611 .

  The second axial support hole 614 includes a lower receiving plate portion 614a projecting in a circular arc shape in cross section from the lower edge to the front side. The rotation of the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 is guided by the lower receiving plate portion 614a. The lower support plate portion 614a is formed to have a left-right width substantially equal to the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 642 (see FIG. 53A).

  By inserting the auxiliary member 615 into the slide hole 724, the inclination of the base member 610 in the left-right direction can be suppressed, so that the base member 610 can be slid smoothly in the vertical direction.

  The flange portion 617 is a portion to which one end of the coil spring 728 is hung and a biasing force is loaded.

  The effect member 620 and the second drive device 660 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660. As shown in FIG. The sub display device 690 disposed inside the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to for the description of the effect member 620 and the second drive device 660.

  The effect member 620 is a box-like member in which the sub display device 690 is disposed, and extends from the top to the bottom of the main body member 621 of the rectangular plate and covers the main body member 621. Upper and lower cover members 622 which can be bent in a mode, and left and right cover members 623 which are plate members attached from both sides of the upper and lower cover members 622 and form a rectangular box shape whose front is opened with the upper and lower cover members 622; The first curtain member 624 which is a member for opening and closing the front opening and is moved by being coupled to the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660, and the member for opening and closing the front opening together with the first curtain member 624 The second curtain member 625 moved by being pulled by the first curtain member 624, and a cylindrical swinging shaft portion protruding from the lower rear surface of the main body member 621 26 and a position on the lower left side of the back surface of the main body member 621 so as to shield light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilting origin sensor 618 to the light receiving portion when the effect member 620 is disposed at the origin position The sensor shielding portion 627 is mainly provided, and the gravity center position G (see FIG. 53) is formed above (higher position) than the swing shaft portion 626. The center of gravity G is formed on a straight line passing through the slide shaft 621a and the swing shaft 626 (see FIG. 53) in the inverted state (see FIG. 53).

  The main body member 621 includes a columnar sliding shaft 621 a (see FIG. 51) which protrudes on the back side vertically above the swinging shaft 626. The sliding shaft portion 621a is slidably inserted into the sliding hole 643 of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 51).

  The upper and lower cover members 622 are members that accommodate the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 inside when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are opened by the driving force of the drive device 660. .

  The left and right cover member 623 is provided with a slide groove 623a formed in a groove shape on the inner side surface and in which the slide projection 625c of the second curtain member 625 can slide.

  The slide groove 623a is connected to a curved groove formed in an arc at upper and lower ends of a linear groove extending vertically. As a result, the second curtain member 625 slides in a manner such that linear movement and curvilinear movement sequentially occur along the shape of the slide groove 623a.

  The first curtain member 624 is a member pivoted up and down around the opening and closing shaft 664 of the second drive device 660, and a main body 624a having a shape in which a plate material is bent into a C-shaped cross section, and its main body A fitting portion 624b which protrudes in the left-right direction from an end portion of the 624a and is fitted to the fitting hole 665a of the second drive device 660 so as to be relatively non-rotatable, and one end portion is a main portion near the fitting portion 624b And 624 a pivotally pivotally supported at the other end of the second curtain member 625.

  The second curtain member 625 is a member which is pulled by the first curtain member 624 and moved in the vertical direction, and has a main body 625a formed in a plate shape having a C-shaped cross section and a C shaped cross-section of the main body 624a. A connection protrusion 625b which protrudes in the left and right direction from the end and is connected to the other end of the connection member 624c, and a slide groove of the left and right cover member 623 which protrudes outward in the left and right direction And a slide protrusion 625c that is inserted into the 623a.

  In the second drive device 660, a drive motor 661 fastened and fixed to the back side of the effect member 620, a drive gear 662 pivotally supported by the drive motor 661, and one gear engaged with the drive gear 662 An open / close shaft rotatably supported on the front side of the main body member 621 of the effect member 620 by a pair of transmission gears 663 rotated in opposite directions and a non-illustrated shaft support mechanism. A transmission member 665, which is fixed to both ends of the pair of opening and closing shafts 664 so as to be relatively non-rotatable, is mainly provided.

  The transmission member 665 includes a fitting hole 665a in which the fitting portion 624b of the first curtain member 624 is non-rotatably fitted. Thus, the first curtain member 624 is swung up and down with the open / close shaft 664 as an axis.

  Referring back to FIGS. 50 and 51, description will be made. The first drive device 630 includes a drive motor 631 in which a drive shaft is inserted into the insertion hole 616 of the base member 610 and fastened and fixed to the base member, and a worm gear 632 in a screw gear shape fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 631. , A worm wheel 633 in the form of a helical gear meshing with the worm 632.

  The worm 632 is formed by a double thread screw. In the present embodiment, since the number of teeth of the worm wheel 633 meshing with the worm 632 is approximately 20, the worm wheel 633 rotates once while the worm 632 rotates 10 times. Thereby, the rotation angle of the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be significantly reduced when the drive motor 631 is operated at the minimum unit of control resolution.

  The worm wheel 633 has a locking projection 633 a protruding from the center of the rotation shaft and inserted into the second shaft support hole 614 of the base member 610 and locked relative to the cylindrical portion 643 of the transmission member 640 in a non-rotatable manner. Prepare. Transmission of driving force between the worm 632 and the worm wheel 633 is structurally limited to one direction from the worm 632 to the worm wheel 633 (when the worm wheel 633 is actively rotated, the force is the worm). It takes about 632). Thereby, when stopping the worm wheel 633, the load which the drive motor 631 receives can be reduced. Further, the worm wheel 633 and the transmission member 640 can be stopped in a state where the power of the drive motor 631 is cut off, and the power consumption of the drive motor 631 can be suppressed.

  The transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a) and 53 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. In FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown by imaginary lines, and for the explanation of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650, refer to FIGS. Do. Further, FIG. 53 (a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and in this state, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 corresponds to that of the transmission member 640. Balanced in the swing direction. 53B, the transmission member 640 is pivoted by a predetermined amount in a counterclockwise direction in a front view from the upright state of FIG. 53A, and the effect member 620 is pivoted by a predetermined amount.

  The transmission member 640 is a member that is swung by the rotation of the worm wheel 633 (see FIG. 50), and has a main body portion 641 formed in the shape of a long rectangular bar, and one end of the main body portion 641 Of the cylindrical portion 642 extending in the direction to which the locking projection 633a of the first drive device 630 is engaged and a length extending in the axial diameter direction of the cylindrical portion 642 at the other end of the main body 641 A sliding hole 643 drilled as a hole, an abutting portion 644 spaced apart on both sides in the swing direction of the main body 641, and a connection between the abutting portion 644 and the front side of the main body 641 An arc-shaped front arc plate portion 645 having a width which is wide and an arc-shaped back arc plate portion 646 which connects the contact portion 644 and the rear side surface of the main portion 641 are mainly provided.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645 and the back arc plate portion 646 are disposed in a manner to surround the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650. This can prevent the torsion spring 650 from falling off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  The cylindrical portion 642 is pivotally supported by the second axial support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) of the base member 610, and is locked relative to the locking projection 633a (see FIG. 50) of the first drive device 630 so as not to rotate relative thereto. Ru.

  The slide shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is inserted through the slide hole 643. Thus, when the transmission member 640 is swung around the second shaft support hole 614 (see FIG. 50) by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50), the sliding shaft 621a of the effect member 620. Is slid on the slide hole 643 (slidingly moved in the axial radial direction), the effect member 620 is swung about the first shaft support hole 613.

  By swinging the effect member 620 in this manner, it is possible to suppress the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the drive motor 631 is rotated by the minimum unit of resolution of control of the first drive device 630. For example, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, a method of directly connecting a gear to the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor to the gear can be considered. However, in this case, the drive motor is shown at an angle P0 of the smallest unit of control resolution (see FIG. 53 (a), and in order to facilitate understanding, the angle is illustrated several times larger than the actual angle P0. The moving amount X1 by which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is shifted in the left-right direction from the inverted state increases as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 moves away from the swinging shaft portion 626. Therefore, as the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 separates from the swinging shaft portion 626, the position adjustment of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 becomes more difficult, and the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed right above the swinging shaft portion 626 It becomes difficult to stop the effect member 620 in the inverted position.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 is connected to the sliding shaft 621 a of the effect member 620. The length from the slide shaft portion 621a to the cylindrical portion 642 which is the swing shaft of the transmission member 640 is the length from the slide shaft portion 621a to the swing shaft portion 626 which is the swing shaft of the effect member 620. It is formed short compared to.

  Therefore, even when the effect member 620 is long in the radial direction of the swing shaft portion 626, the angle P0 of the minimum unit of resolution of control of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 53A, see also To make the first driving device 630 operate at an angle several times larger than the actual angle P0) and to suppress the movement amount X2 of the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 when operating the first drive device 630 Can. Therefore, it is easy to make the effect member 620 stand still in the inverted state in which the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed right above the swing shaft portion 626 which is the swing shaft.

  Further, as a method of swinging the effect member 620, gear teeth are formed on the arc centered on the swing shaft portion 626 in the effect member 620, and the gear meshed with the gear teeth is rotated by the drive motor. A method of swinging the effect member 620 can be considered. However, in this case, as the swing range of the effect member 620 increases, the range in which the gear teeth on the arc are formed needs to be larger in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Therefore, in the case where the effect member 620 is formed in a thin shape in the swing direction, the gear teeth on the arc protrude from the effect member 620, which hinders the effect. Therefore, the design freedom of the effect member 620 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission member 640 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 631 to the effect member 620 has a swing shaft portion 626 where the cylindrical portion 642 which is a swing shaft is a swing shaft of the effect member 620. And the swing shaft portion 621a at the center in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. Since the effect member 620 swings following the transfer member 640, the formation range of the transfer member 640 with respect to the swing range of the effect member 620 can be suppressed near the center in the left-right direction of the effect member 620. As a result, even if the effect member 620 is thin in the left-right direction, the transfer member 640 can be prevented from protruding from the effect member 620, and the design freedom of the effect member 620 can be improved.

  The lower surface of the slide shaft portion 621 a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640. As a result, the weight of the effect member 620 is loaded not only to the swinging shaft portion 626 but also to the transfer member 640. That is, a force opposing the weight of the effect member 620 can be generated not only from the swinging shaft portion 626 but also from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. Therefore, the effect member 640 can be supported at two points of the rocking shaft portion 626 and the cylindrical portion 642, and the radial force applied to the rocking shaft portion 626 and the cylindrical portion 642 can be suppressed. .

  Here, since the effect member 620 is in the normal state in the inverted state shown in FIG. 53A, it can be quickly returned to the inverted state after the transmission member 640 is rocked and rocked from the inverted state by a predetermined amount. Is desirable.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), when the transmission member 640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. Is rocked at a rocking angle φ2 (φ2 <φ1).

  That is, the swing angle of the effect member 620 is smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 640 which is swung by the driving force of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 50). Therefore, the effect member 620 can be easily returned to the inverted state (see FIG. 53A).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sliding hole 643 having a long hole shape is formed in the axial diameter direction of the transmission member 640, and the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is inserted into the sliding hole 643. The transmission axis of the transmission member 640 is different from that of the effect member 620, and the sliding radius of the transmission hole 640 of the transmission member 640 is shorter than that of the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620. The sliding shaft portion 621 a moves further away from the rocking shaft of the transmission member 640 as Therefore, a state in which the arm length R1 from the sliding shaft 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state (see FIG. 53A) is swung a predetermined amount from the inverted state ( As compared with the arm length R2 from the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 to the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640 in FIG. 54 (b)).

  That is, the arm length of the transfer member 640 is shortened as it approaches the inverted state, and the swing length of the effect member 620 when the transfer member 640 is swung by a predetermined angle is constant in arm length of the transfer member 640. Compared to the case, it can be made smaller as it approaches an inverted state. Therefore, the operating speed of the effect member 620 is increased near the predetermined stop position without changing the rotational speed of the drive motor 631 while the operating speed of the effect member 620 is decreased near the inverted state, and the effect member 620 is inverted. It can be made easy to stand still in a state (It can be made easy to stop control the effect member 620 in a state where the center of gravity of the effect member 620 is disposed vertically above the first axial support hole 613).

  Referring to FIG. 55, swing of effect member 620 with respect to the swing angle of transfer member 640 by changing the arm length from sliding shaft portion 621a of effect member 620 to cylindrical portion 642 of transfer member 640. The change in angle will be described.

  FIG. 55 is a schematic view schematically showing the swing angle of the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) with respect to the swing angle of the transmission member 640 (see FIG. 53A). In FIG. 55, a cylindrical portion 642 whose rotation axis M1 corresponds to the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 53A) which is the rotation shaft of the effect member 620 and whose rotation axis M2 is the swinging shaft of the transmission member 640. This corresponds to (see FIG. 53 (a)). The straight lines a1 to a4 schematically represent the arrangement of the transmission member 640, and are straight lines drawn radially from the rotation axis M2, and the straight line a1 passes through the rotation axis M1 and the straight lines a2 to a4 are straight lines a1 and Are formed sequentially in increments of 15 degrees. That is, the angles formed by the straight lines a1 to a4 adjacent to each other are 15 degrees each.

  An arc drawn with a radius equal to the arm length R1 (see FIG. 53 (a)) around the rotation axis M2 is illustrated by an arc SR1, and an arm length R2 around the rotation axis M2 (see FIG. 54 (b)) An arc drawn with a radius equal to is illustrated by an arc SR2. The arc SR0 is an arc drawn around the rotation axis M1, and is an arc of a radius of a length obtained by adding the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2 to the arm length R1.

  These arcs assume the locus of the connection position between the effect member 620 and the transfer member 640 (see FIG. 53A). In the present embodiment, a sliding shaft 621a (see FIG. 53A) as a connecting position is provided so as to protrude from the effect member 620, and the connecting position of the effect member 620 and the transfer member 640 moves along the arc SR0. . When the connecting position between the effect member 620 and the transfer member 640 moves along the arc SR1 or the arc SR2, a long elongated hole is formed in the axial diameter direction in the effect member 620, and from the transfer member 640 It is assumed that the shaft inserted into the long hole is provided in a protruding manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, an intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR0 is illustrated by an intersection point P10, an intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR1 is illustrated by an intersection point P11, and an intersection point of the straight line a1 and the arc SR2 is illustrated as an intersection point P12. It is illustrated by.

  Similarly, an intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR0 is illustrated by an intersection point P20, an intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR1 is illustrated by an intersection point P21, and an intersection point of the straight line a2 and the arc SR2 is illustrated by an intersection point P22. An intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR0 is illustrated by an intersection point P30, an intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR1 is illustrated by an intersection point P31, and an intersection point of the straight line a3 and the arc SR2 is illustrated by an intersection point P32. An intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR0 is illustrated by an intersection point P40, an intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR1 is illustrated by an intersection point P41, and an intersection point of the straight line a4 and the arc SR2 is illustrated by an intersection point P42. The intersection point P10 and the intersection point P11 are disposed at the same position, and the intersection point P40 and the intersection point P42 are disposed at the same position.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 55, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P10 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 is illustrated by an angle A10, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P11 The angle formed by the rotation axis M1 and the straight line passing through the intersection point P21 is illustrated by an angle A11, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P12 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 is illustrated by an angle A12. Be done.

  Similarly, an angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P20 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 is illustrated by an angle A20, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P21 and the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31. The angle formed by the straight line passing through is indicated by an angle A21, and the angle formed by the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P22 and the straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 is illustrated by an angle A22. An angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P30 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P40 is illustrated by an angle A30, and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P31 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P41 The angle formed by A is illustrated by an angle A31, and the angle formed by a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P32 and a straight line passing through the rotation axis M1 and the intersection point P42 is illustrated by an angle A32. Note that these angles correspond to the swing angle of the effect member 620.

  Here, the ratio of (the distance between the rotation axis M1 and the rotation axis M2: arm length R1: arm length R2) is set to (1: 2.32: 2.54) in the present embodiment. When the angle is measured, the angle A32 is 11.07 degrees, the angle A31 is 10.77 degrees, and the angle A30 is 11.37 degrees. That is, in the case of swinging the transfer member 640 between the straight line a4 and the straight line a3, the swing angle of the effect member 640 is largest when the transfer member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0. Thus, the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are formed along the arc SR2 to be connected (the angle A30 is closer to the angle A32 than the angle A31).

  The angle A22 is 10.87 degrees, the angle A21 is 10.59 degrees, and the angle A20 is 10.82 degrees. That is, in the case of swinging the transmission member 640 between the straight line a3 and the straight line a2, the swing angle in the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR2. It falls below the case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected. In this case, the difference between the angle A22 and the angle A20 is smaller than the difference between the angle A20 and the angle A21 (the angle A20 is closer to the angle A22 than the angle A21).

  The angle A12 is 10.78 degrees, the angle A11 is 10.50 degrees, and the angle A10 is 10.53 degrees. That is, in the case of swinging the transmission member 640 between the straight line a2 and the straight line a1, the swing angle when the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected along the arc SR0 is along the arc SR1. The case where the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 are connected is exceeded. In this case, the difference between the angle A12 and the angle A10 is larger than the difference between the angle A10 and the angle A11 (the angle A10 is closer to the angle A11 than the angle A12).

  From these, by making the locus of the connection position of the transfer member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) as the arc SR0, for example, when the transfer member 640 is swung at a constant speed, the effect member It can be seen that the freedom of adjustment of the angular velocity 620 can be improved. That is, when the transmission member 640 is disposed on the straight line a4, the locus of the connection position between the transmission member 640 and the rendering member 620 is closer to the angular velocity (high speed side) in the case of the arc SR2, and the transmission member 640 is The angular velocity at the time of arrangement can be made closer to the angular velocity (low speed side) in the case of the arc SR1 when the locus of the connection position between the transfer member 640 and the effect member 620 is circular.

  In addition, when the ratio of the respective angles is calculated, the angle A22 / the angle A32 is 0.98, and the angle A12 / the angle A22 is 0.99. The angle A21 / angle A31 is 0.98, and the angle A11 / angle A21 is 0.99. That is, when the locus of the connection position between the transfer member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arcs SR1 and SR2, the transfer member 640 is swung toward the inverted state at constant speed. The deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 in the case is as small as 1 to 2%.

  On the other hand, the angle A20 / angle A30 is 0.95, and the angle A10 / angle A20 is 0.97. That is, when the locus of the connecting position of the transfer member 640 and the effect member 620 (see FIG. 53A) is the arc SR0 (the arc centered on the rotation axis M1), the transfer member 640 is inverted at a constant speed. The deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 when it is swung toward the state can be set to 3 to 5%. That is, the deceleration ratio of the angular velocity of the effect member 620 can be increased as compared with the case where the locus of the connecting position is the arcs SR1 and SR2 (the arc centering on the rotation axis M2).

  As shown in FIG. 53A, the slide shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 is in contact with the lower end portion of the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 in the inverted state. In the inverted state, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is formed vertically above the swing shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 and the cylindrical portion 642 of the transfer member 640, so that the force by the weight of the effect member 620 is the swing shaft portion 626 and the cylindrical portion 642 are vertically lowered. Therefore, since the force of the component in the direction in which the effect member 620 is swung is not generated by the weight of the effect member 620, the posture of the effect member 620 is maintained in the inverted state even if the power of the first drive device 630 is cut off. Can. Thereby, durability improvement of the 1st drive device 630 can be aimed at.

  Further, since the force due to the weight of the effect member 620 is applied vertically downward to the swing shaft 626 and the cylindrical portion 642, the rotational resistance of the swing shaft 626 and the cylindrical portion 642 can be increased. It is possible to easily maintain the attitude of the effect member 620 in the inverted state.

  The torsion spring 650 is an elastic spring in which a biasing force is generated in a direction to rewind the coil portion 651 (direction to push back the transmission member 640) as the transmission member 640 swings. A coil portion 651 wound around the periphery, a biasing arm portion 652 extending along both swing direction side surfaces of the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640, an end portion of the coil portion 651 and an end of the biasing arm portion 652 And a connecting arm 653 that connects the parts through between the cylindrical portion 642 and the swinging shaft portion 626.

  The coil portion 651 is formed to have an inner diameter that is about three times the diameter of the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620. Therefore, when the biasing arm portion 652 is swung to generate a load that causes the coil portion 651 to reduce its diameter, a deformation amount of the coil portion 651 can be secured, and the biasing arm portion 652 or the connecting arm portion 653 is deformed. Concentration can be suppressed.

  The biasing arm portion 652 is surrounded by the main body portion 641 of the transmission member 640, the contact portion 644, the front arc plate portion 645, and the back arc plate portion 646. Thus, the biasing arm 652 can be prevented from coming off (disengaging) from the transmission member 640.

  Further, the biasing arm portion 652 is formed to be able to abut on the lower receiving plate portion 614 a on the swinging plane of the transmission member 640. Therefore, a biasing force for pushing back the transmission member 640 is generated from the biasing arm portion 652 disposed in the pivoting direction of the transmission member 640, and the biasing arm portion disposed on the opposite side of the pivoting direction of the transmission member 640 The reference numeral 652 is prevented from moving to the lower support plate portion 614a. Thus, the torsion spring 650 is formed to be capable of generating a biasing force in the direction of pushing back the transmission member 640 regardless of the swing direction of the transmission member 640.

  A bending portion 653a is formed at the connecting portion of the biasing arm 652 and the connecting arm 653 to be bent to the opposite side of the transmission member 640. In this case, as the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is pressed against the bending portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 as described later, the bending portion 653a is expanded (see FIG. 54 (b)). As a result, the contact position between the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the main body 641 of the transmission member 640 is far from the cylindrical portion 642 and the moment applied from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 is increased. Can.

  With reference to FIG. 54, a change in biasing force generated from the torsion spring 650 and pushing back the transmission member 640 will be described. 54 (a) and 54 (b) are front views of the transmission member 640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. In FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown by imaginary lines, and FIG. 53 is appropriately used to explain the change of the biasing force generated from the torsion spring 650. refer.

  Further, in FIG. 54 (a), from the state of FIG. 53 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in front view, and the biasing arm 652 on the left in front view is the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640. The state where it begins to be pressed against the inner surface is illustrated, and in FIG. 54 (b), the transmission member 640 is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 54 (a), and the bending portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pulled. The extended state is illustrated.

  In the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), a biasing force that pushes the transmission member 640 back is generated on the biasing arm 652 on the left side of the torsion spring 650 in a front view. The biasing force is the sum of the biasing force generated starting from the coil portion 651 and the biasing force generated starting from the bending portion 653a.

  That is, in the state of FIG. 53 (b), since the transmission member 640 is not pressed against the bending portion 653a disposed on the left in front view among the pair of bending portions 653a, the biasing arm on the left side of the torsion spring 650 in front view In the portion 652, only a biasing force originating from the coil portion 651 is generated as a biasing force for pushing back the transmission member 640.

  On the other hand, in the state of FIG. 54 (a), in addition to the biasing force starting from the coil portion 651, the biasing force is generated by the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 starting from the bending portion 653a. Therefore, the spring constant of the biasing arm 652 can be increased. The deformation of the biasing arm 652 starting from the bending portion 653 a is shorter in length than the deformation starting from the coil 651, so the unit deformation amount of the transmission member 640 It is possible to make the biasing force generated at the hit greater.

  In the state of FIG. 54B, the bending portion 653a of the torsion spring 650 is pushed by the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640, whereby the angle formed by the biasing arm 652 and the connecting arm 653 is widened. Thus, in the state of FIG. 54 (a), the contact position length L1, which is the distance between the contact position of the main body 641 of the transmission member 640 and the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the cylindrical portion 642. 54B, the same contact position length L2 in the state of FIG. 54 (b) is separated from the cylindrical portion 642 of the transmission member 640. That is, the contact position length is extended. As a result, since the arm length of the torsion spring 650 for pushing back the transmission member 640 is increased, the moment applied from the torsion spring 650 to the transmission member 640 can be increased.

  Therefore, for example, when the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 is substantially equal between the state of FIG. 54 (a) and the state of FIG. 54 (b), more load is applied to the transmission member 640 in FIG. 54 (b). Can be increased. Therefore, the transmission member 640 and the effect member 620 can be more easily pushed back.

  As shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 for pushing back the transmission member 640 is small within a small swing angle from the retracted position of the transfer member 640 (effect member 620), and the swing angle is large. The degree is increased elastically, and is increased more than the amount of elastic increase bordering on the state of FIG. 54 (a). Therefore, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 necessary when the effect member 620 is set to the maximum swing angle (see FIG. 54B) is determined, the torsion spring performs only an elastic increase. In the case where the swing angle is small, the biasing force can be set smaller (the soft spring can be used).

  Thereby, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the operation speed at the start of swinging of the effect member 620 is decelerated by the biasing force of the torsion spring 650, and the operation speed at the start of operation of the effect member 620 can be increased. .

  Further, since the biasing force is increased by an elastic increase or more at the boundary of the state of FIG. 54 (a), the swing angle of the effect member 620 is set to the state of FIG. 54 (a) or more, The decelerating acceleration of the effect member 620 can be increased. Thereby, between the swinging operations of the effect member 620, the timing at which the effect member 620 starts to be decelerated can be delayed. Therefore, the swing angle at which the effect member 620 can be swung at high speed can be enlarged, and the effect of the tilting operation unit 600 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the sliding operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 56 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the sliding operation unit 700. In FIG. 56, a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the tilting operation unit 600 is slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position is illustrated by a solid line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, a connecting member 740 for connecting the tilt operation unit 600 slidably formed in the vertical direction and the slide operation unit 700 is formed so as to be movable in the extending direction of the front rail portion 715. . Here, since the weight of the tilting operation unit 600 is loaded on the connecting member 740, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is gravity-followed along the front rail portion 715 by gravity. It is biased toward you. Therefore, in order to maintain the tilting operation unit 600 in the retracted position, it is conceivable to fix the drive device 750.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lever member 714 is formed so as to be vertically swingable, and when the lever member 714 is swung downward, the lever member 714 engages with the locking portion 725 of the support member 720. The sliding movement in the direction is restricted.

  As a result, since the tilting operation unit 600 can be mechanically maintained at the retracted position, the tilting operation unit 600 is stopped in a state where the drive device 750 is stopped when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position. It can be maintained at the retracted position. Therefore, the durability of the drive device 750 can be improved.

  In the state where the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position, the support member 720 can be moved by swinging the lever member 714 upward and operating the driving device 750, and the tilting operation unit 600 can be moved in the left-right direction. You can slide it.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the tilting operation unit 600 is disposed at the retracted position in the inverted state, the pivot portion 741a of the connecting member 740 is disposed vertically below the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600.

  Here, since the direction of sliding movement of the tilting operation unit 600 is along the front rail portion 715, in FIG. 56, movement of the tilting operation unit 600 is performed while being slid by a predetermined amount from the retracted position (see phantom line in FIG. 56). Has a vertical component at all times.

  Therefore, if the center of gravity G of the tilting operation unit 600 and the shaft support portion 741a of the connecting member 740 deviate in the vertical direction, a load may be applied from the connecting member 740 in the direction to rotate the tilting operation unit 600. The same applies to the case where the tilting operation unit 600 is slid in the reverse direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the pivot portion 741a of the connection member 740 is disposed vertically below the center of gravity G, the vertical component of the force applied to the tilting operation unit 600 from the connection member 740 and the center of gravity G are It is formed on the same line. As a result, the application of a load from the connecting member 740 in the direction to rotate the tilting operation unit 600 can be suppressed, and the posture of the tilting operation unit 600 can be stabilized.

  Next, referring to FIG. 57, the influence of the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the tilting operation unit 600 on the slide operation of the slide operation unit 700 will be described. FIG. 57 is a front view of the tilting operation unit 600 and the slide operation unit 700. FIG. In FIG. 57, a state in which the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is swung to the state of FIG. 54 (b) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 57, when the effect member 620 is swung in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is disposed to the left of the connecting member 740 in a front view. Therefore, the acceleration in the front view leftward applied to the connecting member 740 is increased.

  In this case, the driving force necessary to slide the tilting operation unit 600 from the retracted position can be suppressed, so the drive motor 751 of the driving device 750 can be miniaturized.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 is flat has been described. However, the tilting operation unit 2600 in the second embodiment includes the main body of the transmission member 2640. Reference numeral 2641 includes an abutting portion 2641 a that is in contact with the tip of the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  58 (a), 58 (b) and 59 are front views of the transmission member 2640 and the torsion spring 650 in the second embodiment. In FIGS. 58 (a), 58 (b) and 59, the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown by imaginary lines. Further, FIG. 58 (a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 2640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 58 (b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 58 (a). The transmission member 2640 is swayed by a predetermined amount counterclockwise in a front view from the front, and the state in which the lower surface of the abutment portion 2641a is in contact with the tip of the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 is shown in FIG. A state in which the transmission member 2640 is further pivoted counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 58 (b) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the transmission member 2640 is swung from the upside-down state (see FIG. 58A), the main body 2641 is pressed against the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body 2641 is The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that causes it to swing in the direction to return to the inverted state. When the transmission member 2640 is swung and the biasing arm 652 is deformed, the coil portion 651 is reduced in diameter by the connecting arm 653 connected to the biasing arm 652 on the deformed side. That is, as the diameter of the coil portion 651 is reduced, the urging force for swinging the transmission member 2640 in the direction of returning to the inverted state is increased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the contact position between the main body portion 2641 of the transmission member 2640 and the biasing arm portion 652 (the difference between the swing angles of the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 2640) The tip end position of the biasing arm 652 is changed by the swing of the transmission member 2640. That is, as the transmission member 2640 is swung, the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is moved to the tip end side of the main body portion 2641 (the side approaching the sliding hole 643).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58B, when the transmission member 2640 is further rotated counterclockwise in a front view in a state where the lower surface of the abutment portion 2641a is in contact with the tip end portion of the biasing arm portion 642. The biasing arm portion 642 is restricted by the abutment portion 2641 a from moving to the tip end side of the main body portion 2641.

  As shown in FIG. 59, when the transfer member 2640 is swung in a state in which the transfer arm portion 642 is restricted in movement by the abutment portion 2641a, the torsion spring 650 is deformed as a whole. That is, since the movement of the biasing arm 642 to the tip end side of the main body 2641 is restricted, the base side (the bending portion 653a side) of the biasing arm 642 is moved downward. Thus, the connecting arm 653 is moved in the direction of reducing the diameter of the coil portion 651 (the direction in which the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is increased).

  That is, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be increased when the transmission member 2640 is swung to the state shown in FIG. 59 as compared to the case where the abutting portion 2641a is not provided. Thereby, the degree of change in the urging force generated by the torsion spring 650 (the increase ratio of the urging force to the swing angle of the transmission member 2640) is increased in the state shown in FIG. 59 as compared to the state shown in FIG. Can. Therefore, when the swing angle of the transmission member 2640 is small, the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 is suppressed to increase the start speed of the transfer member 2640, and when the swing angle is large (see FIG. 59), It is possible to increase the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 nonlinearly (more than elastic change) and to obtain a biasing force sufficient to return the transmission member 2640 to the inverted state.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact surface of the main body 641 of the transmission member 640 with the torsion spring 650 has a constant width has been described, but the tilting operation unit 3600 in the third embodiment is the main body of the transmission member 3640 3641 includes an inclined side surface 3641a which is inclined in such a manner as to be wider toward the distal end side on the side surface that is in contact with the distal end portion of the torsion spring 650. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  60 (a) and 60 (b) are front views of the transmission member 3640 and the torsion spring 650 in the third embodiment. In FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 620 are shown by imaginary lines. 60 (a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 3640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the inverted state shown in FIG. 60 (a). The state in which the transmission member 3640 is swung a predetermined amount counterclockwise in a front view is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the transmission member 3640 is swung from the inverted state (see FIG. 60A), the main body portion 3641 is pressed against the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650, and the main body portion 3641 is The torsion spring 650 generates a biasing force that causes it to swing in the direction to return to the inverted state.

  When the transmission member 3640 is swung from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the difference in the swing angle between the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 and the transmission member 3640 The contact position between the main body 3641 of the transmission member 3640 and the biasing arm 652 (the tip position of the biasing arm 652) is changed by the swing of the transmission member 3640. That is, the distal end portion of the biasing arm portion 652 is closer to the distal end side of the main body portion 3641 (the side closer to the sliding hole 643) as the swing angle from the upside-down state (see FIG. 60A) of the transmission member 3640 increases. Moved to).

  Therefore, the tip end of the biasing arm 652 slides along the inclined side surface 3641 a of the main body 3641. That is, in the torsion spring 650, when the transmission member 3640 is swung, in addition to the deformation caused by the swing angle of the transmission member 3640, the deformation due to the width of the transmission member 3640 being expanded by the inclined side surface 3641a occurs. . In this case, the width of the transfer member 3640 is further expanded toward the tip end portion of the transfer member 3640. Therefore, the larger the swing angle from the inverted state of the transfer member 3640 (see FIG. 60A) As a result, the deformation of the torsion spring 650 due to the width of the transmission member 3640 is enlarged. Therefore, as the swing angle of the transmission member 3640 increases, it is possible to increase the rate of increase in the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 (change in the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 with respect to the swing angle of the transfer member 3640).

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 61 to FIG. 64, the tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact portion 644 of the transmission member 640 is fixed has been described, but in the tilting operation unit 4600 in the fourth embodiment, the transmission member 4640 is in addition to the contact portion 644 and the contact thereof A moving abutment member 4647 shorter in width than the portion 644 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  61 (a) is a rear perspective view of the transmission member 4640 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 61 (b) is a rear perspective view of the movable contact member 4647. In FIG. 61A, the movable contact member 4647 is not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the front arc plate portion 4645 of the transmission member 4640 is provided with a guide hole 4645a disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction at intervals shorter than the disposition interval of the contact portions 644. Prepare. The guide hole 4645a is a through hole which guides the pair of rear projection portions 4647b of the movable contact member 4647 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), the movable contact member 4647 has a main body 4647a formed in a long plate shape, and a pair of rear projections protruding from both end portions of the main body 4647a to the rear side. It mainly includes a portion 4647 b and a front projection 4647 c which is provided so as to project from the approximate center of the main portion 4647 to the front side in a tip hemispherical shape.

  One end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the opposite side of the front projection 4647c of the main body 4647a, and the other end of the coil spring 4648 is fixed to the main body 641b (FIG. 62 (c) and See FIG. 62 (d)). Also, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the coil spring 4648 is omitted in FIGS. 61 (a), 61 (b), 62 (a) and 62 (b).

  The rear projection 4647 b is a portion inserted from the front side into the guide hole 4645 a of the transmission member 4640 and has a sufficient length from the front arc plate 4645 (when in contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650). The possible lengths are formed in such a way that they are pushed out. The back projection 4647 b is formed so as to be inclined at an angle (see FIG. 64 (b)) in contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 at the surface (line). As a result, the load applied to the biasing arm 652 is reduced (stress concentration is suppressed) as compared with the case where the biasing arm 652 and the rear projection 4647 b are abutted at points. Durability can be improved.

  The front projection 4647c is a portion that is in contact with the main body member 4621 (see FIG. 63) of the effect member 4620, and from the relationship with the relief opening 4621a formed in the main body member 4621 The moving abutment member 4647 may be separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62C) or may be moved closer to the front arc plate portion 4645 (see FIG. 62D). In addition, since the tip of the front projection 4647c is formed in a hemispherical shape, the front projection 4647c can be easily run on the surface of the main body member 4621 from the escape opening 4621a.

  62 (a) and 62 (b) are rear perspective views of the transmission member 4640, and FIGS. 62 (c) and 62 (d) are top views of the transmission member 4640. In FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (c), the movable contact member 4647 is separated from the front arc plate portion 4645 in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (d). The state in which 4647 approached front arc board part 4645 is illustrated respectively.

  FIG. 63 is a schematic front view schematically showing the main body member 4621 of the effect member 4620. Note that the transmission member 4640 forming an inverted state with respect to the main body member 4621 is the central state 4640C, and the transmission member 4640 is swayed counterclockwise as viewed from the front view as the counterclockwise rocking state 4640L. A state in which it is swung clockwise as viewed from the front is illustrated by an imaginary line as a clock swing state 4640R. In addition, in central state 4640C, counterclockwise rocking state 4640L and clock rocking state 4640R, illustration of contact portion 644, front arc plate 4645 and back arc plate 646 is omitted to facilitate understanding. .

  The main body member 4621 is provided with a relief opening 4621 a drilled in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 63, the relief opening 4621a is a region (center state 4640C and counterclockwise) in which the front projection 4647c (see FIG. 62) moves when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in a front view. Between the motion state 4640L and the motion state 4640L).

  When the front projection 4647c of the transmission member 4640 overlaps the escape opening 4621a in a front view, the front projection 4647c is inserted into the escape opening 4621a, and the moving contact member 4647 is transmitted by the elastic force of the coil spring 4648. The main body 641 is separated from the main body 641 (see FIG. 62 (c)). On the other hand, when the front projection 4647c does not overlap with the relief opening 4621a (overlaps with the main body member 4621), the front projection 4647c abuts on the back side of the main body 4621 of the effect member 4620, and the moving abutment member 4647 is brought close to the main body 641 of the transmission member 4640 (see FIG. 62D).

  That is, the rear projection 4647 b of the movable contact member 4647 is projected to a position where it can be in contact with the biasing arm 652 of the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise as viewed from the upside. Be Therefore, the biasing arm portion 652 of the torsion spring 650 is generated when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise as viewed from the upside, as compared to when it is swung counterclockwise as viewed from the front. It is possible to increase the rate of increase of the urging force (the degree of increase of the urging force with respect to the swing angle).

  FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) are front views of the transmission member 4640 and the torsion spring 650. FIG. In FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the outlines of the base member 610 and the effect member 4620 are shown by imaginary lines, and the main body 4647a of the movable contact member 4647 for easy understanding. Illustration is omitted. Further, FIG. 64 (a) shows an inverted state in which the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 4640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and FIG. 64 (b) shows the inverted state of FIG. 64 (a). From the above, it is illustrated that the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise by a predetermined amount in a front view, and the biasing arm 652 on the left in a front view is abutted against the rear projection 4647 b.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (b), while the swing angle of the transmission member 4640 is small, the biasing arm 652 can be contacted from the opposite side (abutment portion 644 side) of the main body 641 of the transmission member 4640. By doing this, it is possible to increase the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 650 when the transmission member 4640 is rotated clockwise in a front view.

  Thus, it is possible to improve the biasing force when the transmission member 4640 is swung clockwise as viewed from the front while the start speed when the transmission member 4640 is swung counterclockwise in front view is increased. Can. Therefore, collision of the effect member 4620 with the inner side surface of the rear case 210 can be suppressed.

  That is, in the state where the tilting operation unit 4600 is disposed at the retracted position, when the effect member 4620 is in the inverted state, the inner side surface of the back case 210 approaches the effect member 620 (see FIG. 5). Here, if the effect member 4620 is vigorously swung toward the upside-down state from the state of swinging counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 57), the effect member 4620 can not be decelerated, and the rear case 210 There is a risk that the effect member 4620 may collide with the inner surface of the lens.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear projection 4647b is protruded at the timing when the effect member 4620 is swung clockwise in a front view from the upside state (see FIG. 62D). It can be increased. Thus, the directing member 4620 is sufficiently inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the upside state while maintaining the operation speed when the directing member 4620 is tilted in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the upside position. Can be slowed down.

  In addition, the direction in which the rear projection 4647b is pushed back at the contact point between the rear projection 4647b arranged on the opposite side of the swing direction of the transmission member 4640 and the biasing arm 652 (FIG. 64 (b) Bias is generated. Thus, the transmitting member 4640 is pushed with a larger urging force than in the case where the transmitting member 4640 is pushed back only by the urging arm portion 652 disposed on the side approaching the transmission member 4640 (right side in FIG. 64B). You can push it back. On the other hand, it is possible to improve the biasing force generated by the biasing arm portion 652 disposed on the side closer to the transmission member 4640.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 64, the distance from the position at which the abutting portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652 which are disposed on the opposite side to the side approaching the transmission member 4640 abuts on the lower receiving plate portion 614a. The distance from the lower support plate portion 614a to the bending portion 653a is shorter than the distance. In this case, it is easy to move the bending portion 653a by the force from the contact portion 644 with the lower receiving plate portion 614 as a fulcrum, but the opposite is difficult (the distance from the fulcrum to the action point is different Because there is).

  Therefore, the biasing force generated by the deformation of the biasing arm portion 652 in the front view left side generated by the abutment of the abutting portion 644 and the biasing arm portion 652 is generated by the deformation of the entire torsion spring 650. That is, when the biasing arm 652 on the left in the front view and the rear projection 4647b abut on each other, the bending portion 653a on the left in the front view with the lower receiving plate 641a as a fulcrum The deformation in the direction of narrowing causes deformation of the connection arm 653, the coil 651, and the biasing arm 652 in the right side in a front view. In this case, since the coil portion 651 is subjected to deformation to reduce the inner diameter, an urging force is generated on the coil portion 651 and the connecting arm portion 653 to increase the inner diameter of the coil portion 651. The biasing force of the biasing arm 652 on the side of the swing direction 4640 of the transmission member 640 can be improved.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, a combined operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68.

  In the first embodiment, when the pivoting arm member 550 is disposed at the overhanging position, the second non-transmission wall portion 553c has a shape along a circle centered on the rotation axis of the pivoting crank member 570. However, the pivoting arm member 5550 in the fifth embodiment includes the recessed portion 5556 in which the non-transmission wall portion 5553 c is recessed in the direction away from the pivoting crank member 570. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  65 to 68 are front views of a combined operation unit 5500 according to the fifth embodiment. Incidentally, in FIG. 65, the state in which the pivoting arm member 5550 is disposed at the extended position and the sliding projection 574 of the pivoting crank member 570 is disposed near the left end portion of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 65, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, and the sliding projection 574 is accommodated in the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c. In FIG. 67, the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state of FIG. 66 to the position where the sliding projection 574 is disengaged from the recessed portion 5556. From the state, the state where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding projection 574 is accommodated in the recessed portion 5556 of two surfaces from the left end of the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c is illustrated. Ru.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c of the combined operation unit 5550 includes a recessed portion 5556 recessed in a direction away from the rotating crank member 570.

  The recessed portion 5556 has a first wall portion 5556a having an arc shape (approximately 1⁄4 of a circular shape) formed on the left side in front view, and an arc shape (approximately 1⁄4 of a circular shape) formed on the right side The second wall 5556 b is mainly formed to allow sliding of the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570. That is, the recess depth from the second non-transmission wall 5553c of the recess 5556 is equal to or less than the radius of the sliding projection 574, and the connection between the recess 5556 and the second non-transmission wall 5553c is smooth. It is formed of a curved surface.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, a gap is generated between the sliding projection 574 and the second non-transmission wall 5553 c, The pivoting arm member 5550 is swung until it abuts on the sliding projection 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall 5556a of the first recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c is slid by the sliding projection 574 while being rotated. The movable arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 65 to the state shown in FIG. 66, the pivoting arm member 5550 is only swung by the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second drive device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not rocked. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, and the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, the sliding projection 574 is recessed first from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553 c. It is pressed against the second wall 5556 b of the setting portion 5556, and the pivoting arm member 5550 is swung again (pushed down) to the extended position. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 66 to the state shown in FIG. 67, since the second arm 5556b is pushed and moved by the sliding projection 574, the pivoting arm member 5550 is swung. The driving force of the second drive device 560 is transmitted to the pivoting arm member 5550 via the pivoting crank member 570.

  Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the second wall 5556b, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a transmission state.

  When the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, a gap is generated between the sliding projection 574 and the second non-transmission wall portion 5553c, The pivoting arm member 5550 is swung until it abuts on the sliding projection 574 by the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a. In this case, as the rotating crank member 570 is rotated, the first wall 5556a of the second recessed portion 5556 from the left end of the second non-transmission wall 5553c is slid by the sliding projection 574 while being rotated. The movable arm member 5550 is swung.

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 67 to the state shown in FIG. 68, the pivoting arm member 5550 is only swung by the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a, and is rotated by the driving force of the second drive device 560. The moving arm member 5550 is not rocked. Therefore, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view, and the sliding projection 574 of the rotating crank member 570 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a, the rotating arm member 5550 and the rotation The crank member 570 forms a non-transmission state.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, when the sliding projection 574 is disposed to face the first wall 5556a in a state where the rotating crank member 570 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view. When a non-transmission state is formed between the moving crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550, and the sliding projection 574 is disposed opposite to the second wall 5556b, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member A communication state is formed with 5550.

  If the rotation direction of the rotating crank member 570 is reversed, the relationship between the first wall 5556a and the second wall 5556b is reversed. That is, when the rotating crank member 570 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the rotating crank member 570 and the rotating arm member 5550 are arranged when the sliding projection 574 is disposed to face the first wall 5556 a. And when the sliding projection 574 is disposed to face the second wall 5556b, a non-transmission state is formed between the pivoting crank member 570 and the pivoting arm member 5550. Ru.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, in this embodiment, the pivoting arm member 5550 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 22) and the overhanging position without switching the pivoting direction of the pivoting crank member 570. In addition to the swinging motion swinging between them, the pivoting arm member 5550 has a small width near the overhanging position (a mode in which the lower end of the front plate member 546 is moved between the position U1 and the position U2) A rocking movement can be formed.

  As a result, it is possible to cause the pivoting arm member 5550 to produce a swinging motion that is difficult to form by switching the drive direction of the drive device 560. That is, to cause the swing arm member 5550 to perform a swing operation with a small width in the vicinity of the extended position can also be formed by repeatedly switching the drive direction of the drive device 560 at short intervals. However, in this case, the width of the rocking operation depends on the switching speed of the drive direction of the drive device 560. Further, even if the drive direction of the drive device 560 is switched in a state where the speed of the swinging motion of the pivot arm member 5550 is large, the inertia of the drive device 560 and the pivot arm member 5550 is large and the drive direction can not be switched instantaneously. The time required to switch the drive direction may be long.

  On the other hand, in the swinging operation near the extended position of the pivoting arm member 5550 in the present embodiment, there is no need to switch the rotation direction of the pivoting crank member 570, so the time required to switch the drive direction is unnecessary. can do.

  Further, the operation speed of the operation (the upward swinging operation) in which the pivoting arm member 5550 is pivoted clockwise in the front view depends on the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 517a, and the pivoting arm member 5550 is not The operating speed of the clockwise rocking movement (downward rocking movement) depends on the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570. Therefore, by increasing the biasing force of the torsion spring 517a and increasing the rotational speed of the rotating crank member 570, it is possible to increase the swinging speed in the vicinity of the extended position of the rotating arm member 5550.

  As a result, it is possible to achieve both the speeding up of the rocking operation in the vicinity of the extended position of the rotary arm member 5550 and the shortening of the switching time of the rocking direction.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, a combined operation unit 6500 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the pivoting arm member 550 of the combined operation unit 500 is integrally molded has been described, but the pivoting arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment is formed by connecting two members. . The relative swing of the two members changes the posture of the arc-shaped hole 554 formed at the other end. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  69 (a) and 69 (c) is a partial front view of the pivoting arm member 6550 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 69 (b) is a pivot in the direction of arrow LXIXb in FIG. 69 (a). FIG. 50 is a partial top view of an arm member 6550. 69 (a) shows a state in which the first attitude in which the tip of tip swing member 6556 is directed upward is formed, and in FIG. 69 (b), the tip of tip swing member 6556 is down. The state in which the second attitude to be directed is formed is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 69A, the pivoting arm member 6550 is connected to the main body portion 6551 pivotally supported by the third shaft portion 517 (see FIG. 71) and the other end of the main body portion 6551. A distal end swinging member 6556 and a switching device 6590 fixed to the upper surface of the other end of the main body portion 6551 to switch the attitude of the distal end swinging member 6556 are mainly provided. An arc-shaped hole 6554 is formed in the tip end swinging member 6556.

  The main body portion 6551 is provided with a shaft support hole 6551a which is bored in the other end portion in the front-rear direction and which becomes a swing center of the tip swing member 6556.

  The end swinging member 6556 is formed in such a manner that the end connected to the main body portion 6551 sandwiches the main body portion 6551 back and forth, and a shaft support hole 6556a drilled as a swing center of the tip swinging member 6556 A shaft support rod 6556b which is a rod inserted through the shaft support hole 6556a and the shaft support hole 6551a of the tip swing member 6556 and an extension provided extending from the shaft support hole 6556a to the opposite side of the arc-shaped hole 6554 The sliding shaft 6556c is mainly provided so as to protrude in the front-rear direction from the end of the portion and connected to the guide long hole 6591d of the switching device 6590.

  The arc-shaped hole 6554 is provided with a return portion 6554a protruding from the upper inner side surface. The return portion 6554a is a portion that slides on the protrusion 541b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540, and when sliding from the tip end side of the arc-shaped hole 6554, resistance is suppressed, while sliding in the opposite direction It is a projection of the left-right asymmetrical shape where sliding resistance is increased when moved.

  70 (a) and 70 (b) are front perspective views of the switching device 6590. FIG. 70 (a) shows a push-up state where the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed up from the switch member 6592, and FIG. 70 (b) shows a pressed-down state where the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed down to the switch member 6592. Is illustrated. Further, the push-up state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (c), and the push-down state corresponds to the state of FIG. 69 (a).

  The C-shaped member 6591 has an inner diameter equal to the inner diameter of a long plate-like main body 6591a in which a hole having an inner diameter through which the movable cylindrical portion 6592a can be inserted is bored at the center and a hole bored in the main body 6591a. And a cylindrical guide portion 6591b protruding in a cylindrical shape and having a groove formed on the inner peripheral surface, extending downward from both end portions in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6591a and opposingly disposed in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 6551 A pair of arm portions 6591c and a guiding long hole 6591d which is a long hole formed on the tip end side of the arm portion 6591c and to which the sliding shaft 6556c of the tip swinging member 6556 is guided are mainly provided.

  The groove processing formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591 b is a groove processing for forming a knock mechanism in relation to the movable cylindrical portion 6592 a of the switch member 6592. The C-shaped member 6591 is switched between the push-up state and the push-down state each time the C-shaped member 6591 is pushed in a direction to be pressed against the switch member 6592. In addition, illustration of other members, such as a spring member which forms an urging | biasing force required in order to form a knock mechanism, is abbreviate | omitted, In this embodiment, the cylindrical guide part 6591b is the pushing part 6541a of the expansion-contraction effect apparatus 6540 (figure 71)).

  In the switch member 6592, a movable cylindrical portion 6592a is inserted through the cylindrical guide portion 6591a, and a movable cylindrical portion 6592a is provided with a projection capable of moving the groove on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 6591a from the outer peripheral surface. And a fixing plate portion 6592b rotatably connected and fixed to the upper surface of the main body portion 6551 of the rotating arm member 6550.

  Here, in the knock mechanism, the relative position in the axial direction is switched while the cylindrical member and the cylindrical member guided on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical member are relatively rotated. That is, when the tubular member and the cylindrical member do not rotate relative to each other, it is difficult to switch the relative position in the axial direction.

  On the other hand, the movable cylindrical portion 6592a of the switch member 6592 is rotatably connected to the fixed plate portion 6592b. Therefore, when the C-shaped member 6591 is moved in the direction approaching the switch member 6592 (when pushed downward in FIG. 70A), the movable cylindrical portion 6592a can be relatively rotated with respect to the cylindrical guide portion 6591b. And the knock mechanism works.

  Therefore, it is possible to switch between the push-up state and the push-down state without relatively rotating the fixing plate portion 6592b fixed to the main body portion 6551 of the pivoting arm member 6550 and the C-shaped member 6591. Therefore, the state of the switching device 6590 can be switched between the push-up state and the push-down state while maintaining the state in which the slide shaft 6556c of the tip swing member 6556 is inserted into the guide long hole 6591d of the C-shaped member 6591. it can.

  71 (a) and 71 (b) are front views of the combined operation unit 6500. FIG. 71A shows a state in which the pivoting arm member 6550 is disposed at the overhanging position and the switching device 6590 is in the push-up state, and in FIG. K4, the pivoting arm member 6550 is disposed at the overhanging position and switched The device 6590 is shown in the depressed state. In FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is disposed at a position where it is swung to the left end of the swingable range.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the front view timepiece of the telescopic effect device 540 by switching the state of the switching device 6590 in the state where the pivoting arm member 6550 is disposed at the extended position. The maximum swing angle around can be switched.

  That is, when the switching device 6590 forms a push-up state (see FIG. 71A), the projection 541 b of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is in contact with the upper inner side surface of the arc-shaped hole 6554. The swing angle is limited.

  In this position, even if the inner surface of the circular arc shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554a function as a stopper and the swinging speed of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is high, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is arranged in the arrangement shown in FIG. A sudden stop can be made (the movement trajectory RI of the protrusion 541b is abutted on the return portion 6554a).

  On the other hand, when the switching device 6590 forms a depressed state (see FIG. 71B), the protrusion 541 b of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 does not collide with the arc-shaped hole 6554 and the return portion 6554 a (the protrusion 541 b The movement trajectory RI is not in contact with the return portion 6554a). Therefore, the protrusion 541 b of the expansion and contraction rendering device 6540 is moved along the arc-shaped hole 6554, and the protrusion 541 b is discharged to the outside from the tip end 554 a of the arc-shaped hole 6554.

  Therefore, the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 is swung clockwise as viewed from the front until the rotary plate 520 is abutted against the second stopper portion 518b (see FIG. 71 (b)). In this position, the second stopper portion 518b functions as a stopper, and even when the swinging speed of the expansion and contraction rendering device 6540 is high, the expansion and contraction rendering device 540 can be rapidly stopped.

  Thereby, a plurality of swing angles (two types in the present embodiment) can be formed when swinging the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 clockwise in a front view and causing the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 to stop sharply. The variation of can be increased. The state of the switching device 6590 is switched by swinging the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 counterclockwise in a front view, so that the cylindrical guide portion 6591b of the switching device 6590 moves from the front right upper portion of the main body member 6541a to the right. It is generated by being pushed by a push-in portion 6541a extended in the direction. Therefore, since the second drive device 560 for causing the swing of the expansion / contraction effect member 6540 is also used as a drive device for swinging the tip swing member 6556, the number of drive devices can be reduced.

  Further, in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the swing range of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be changed by slightly swinging the tip swing member 6556. In this case, since the rocking angle is slight, it is possible for the player to hardly notice the change.

  Here, if it is possible for the player to visually recognize the pivoting arm member 6550 (see FIG. 71), assuming that the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be grasped from the change in the state of the pivoting arm member 6550, The sense of expectation for the operation of the expansion and contraction producing device 6540 is weakened, and the degree of attention of the expansion and contraction producing device 6540 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to change the swing angle of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540, the angle at which the tip swing member 6556 is swung is small, making it difficult for the player to notice the change. it can. Thus, the sense of expectation for the operation of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be improved.

Seventh Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, a tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the slide hole 643 having a long hole shape is formed at the end of the transmission member 640, and the effect member 620 is supported by the slide hole 643 in a guideable manner. In the tilting operation unit 7600 in the embodiment, a pivot hole 7643 is formed at an end of the transmission member 7600, and the effect member 620 is pivotally supported by the pivot hole 7643. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, The description is abbreviate | omitted.

  72 (a) and 72 (b) is a front view of the tilting operation unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 72 (a) shows an inverted state in which the shaft support hole 7643 of the transmission member 7640 is disposed vertically above the cylindrical portion 642, and in FIG. 72 (b), the inverted state from FIG. 72 (b). A state in which the transmission member 7640 is swung counterclockwise by a predetermined angle is illustrated. In FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outline of the effect member 620 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the transmission member 7640 and the base member 7610 on the back side can be viewed. The illustration of the torsion spring 650 and the pivoting protrusion 612 is omitted.

  As illustrated in FIG. 72 (a), the base member 7610 is provided with a slide hole 7613 drilled in the front-rear direction vertically below the second shaft support hole 614 of the main body 611. The slide hole 7613 is a long hole through which the swinging shaft portion 626 of the effect member 620 is inserted, and the longitudinal direction of the long hole is formed along the vertical direction. The swing shaft portion 626 is slidably supported by the slide hole 7613.

  In the transmission member 7640, a shaft support hole 7643 is formed at an end opposite to the end where the cylindrical portion 642 of the main body 641 is formed. The shaft support hole 7643 pivotally supports the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620, and is bored with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sliding shaft portion 621a.

  The swinging operation of the effect member 620 is generated by the transmission member 7640 swinging about the second support hole 614 by the rotation of the drive motor 631 of the first drive device 630 (see FIG. 51).

  In the present embodiment, since the sliding shaft portion 621a is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 7643, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the sliding shaft portion 621a of the effect member 620 follows the swinging trajectory of the transmission member 7640. To move (the sliding shaft 621a does not move in the longitudinal direction of the main body 641). On the other hand, since the swinging shaft portion 626 is inserted into the slide hole 7613, when the transmission member 7640 swings, the swinging shaft portion 626 slides relative to the base member 7610.

  Here, the difference between the swing angle of the transmission member 7640 and the swing angle of the effect member 620 will be described. As shown in FIG. 72 (b), when the transfer member 7640 swings from the upside down by the transfer swing angle φ71, the effect member 620 swings by the effect swing angle φ72 (the effect swing angle φ72 <transfer shake Dynamic angle φ71). Therefore, when the transmission member 7640 is swung by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631, the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be smaller than the swing angle of the transmission member 7640. Thereby, the accuracy of the adjustment of the swing angle of the effect member 620 can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing angle of the effect member 620 when the transfer member 7640 swings from the upright state by the transfer swing angle φ 71 can be made smaller than that in the first embodiment. explain.

  The connection line J1 illustrated in FIG. 72 (b) is a line drawn from the sliding shaft 621a to the swinging shaft 626. When the imaginary connecting line J2 has a length equal to that of the connecting line J1 and the rocking shaft 626 is disposed above the sliding hole 7613 from the line drawn in the longitudinal direction of the main body 641 through the cylindrical portion 642 It is a line drawn to the center of the swinging shaft portion 626 (see FIG. 72 (a)). In the case where the first shaft support hole 613 of the first embodiment is formed in the upper portion of the slide hole 7613, the virtual angle φ 73 which is the swing angle of the virtual connection line J2 in the first embodiment. This corresponds to the swing angle of the effect member 620 which is swung as the transmission member 640 is swung by the transmission swing angle φ71.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (b), the effect swing angle φ 72 is smaller than the virtual angle φ 73, and according to the tilting operation unit 7600 of the seventh embodiment, the effect in the case of swinging the transmission member 7640 by a predetermined angle The swing angle of the member 620 can be made smaller as compared with the case of the first embodiment. Therefore, when swinging the transmission member 7640 by the minimum unit of resolution of the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 51), the swing amount of the effect member 620 can be made smaller than that, and the swing angle of the effect member 620 is adjusted. Accuracy can be improved.

<First control example>
Next, control examples in the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 134. In the first control example, control processing (processing related to control of a game such as display effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described. In this control example, control is performed so that the display image used at the time of power on is corrected and used at the time of normal rendering. As a result, since a common display image can be used at the time of power on and at the time of normal rendering, the capacity of the character ROM 234 (see FIG. 79) in the display control device 114 can be saved.

  In this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are displayed in the effect that a specific character (the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable). It is controlled to correct the contents of the effect to be played. Thereby, in the effect that a specific character moves, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to visually recognize, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing this, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to visually recognize the display content.

  In this control example, an inertia force is used to open the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit (falling object) 400. Specifically, although it will be described later, the open / close drive maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state in the effect that the open state of the door member 470 is formed after the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit 400 moves. Control (energization stop control) is performed so that the motor 466 is not excited. Then, when the door member 470 attached to the vertical movement unit (falling object) 400 is completely moved in the dropping direction, the door member 470 is opened by the inertia force generated on the door member 470. As described above, since the door member 470 can be opened without driving the opening / closing drive motor 466, power consumption can be reduced.

  In this control example, a notice effect that indicates an expectation that the variable display will be a big win in the variable display is displayed. The advance effect includes an effect including a display mode (countdown) of the same type as the above-described specific time effect indicating the gaming state. Specifically, a countdown notice effect is an effect in which an image (such as an image of a girl) showing the degree of anticipation to be a big hit after the countdown characters (“3, 2, 1...”) Are displayed is displayed. include. A specific time effect (countdown effect) that suggests a gaming state, which is an effect including such a similar display mode (countdown), and a countdown advance effect, which is one effect of an advance effect that indicates an expectation to be a big hit If duplicate execution is performed, the player may be confused.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the countdown advance announcement effect is executed (displayed) as the advance announcement effect that suggests the degree of expectation to be a big hit, the same type of display is performed until the fluctuation display for which the countdown advance announcement effect is executed is ended. It is limited (avoided) so that a specific time effect (countdown effect) which is an effect including a mode (countdown) is not performed. Thereby, when the countdown notice effect is executed in the time effect period, the effect is not performed (displayed) for a specific time effect (countdown effect) including the same display mode (countdown) as the countdown notice effect. Execution (display) can be restricted (avoided). As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem of causing a player to be confused by redundantly performing effects including the same display mode (countdown) in the time effect period.

  In this control example, the ball entering effect displayed based on the ball entering the winning opening is displayed in order in each of the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the interval at which the game ball enters the winning opening is short, the period for displaying the entering effect can be extended, and the gaming machine can easily recognize the entering effect for the player. be able to.

  The present control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by the pachinko machine 10 of any of the above-described embodiments, or the above-described embodiments are combined. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Control Example
First, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 102). The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203y of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, each of which consists of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640. Are stored respectively. Also, the RAM 203 is provided with an ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is common in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through the entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92) is executed, and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is stored. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 75 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the first random number counter C1 If the value matches the value of the jackpot random number set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first per random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state period) of special symbol and high probability when special symbol is more likely to be a big hit than low probability (special symbol special It can be divided into two types, one for the high probability state of the symbol). That is, the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 75A) is composed of the first hit random number table for the low probability time and the first hit random number table for the high probability time, and is included in each table. The number of random numbers to be jackpots is different. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The first random number table 202a for low probability of the special symbol and the first random number table 202a for high probability for the special symbol are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and at a timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is stored.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number to be a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number which is dislocated, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the disapproval of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that will be the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at 37 is the one at the time of the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a specific display mode when the big hit Become.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, when there is a low probability of a special symbol, there is one random number that will be a big win for the special symbol, and the random number "0" is the first random number table 202a for low probability. (See FIG. 75 (a)). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 1, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/400".

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is not a jackpot of a special symbol as a kind of a special symbol's deviation, the classification (small hit) in which the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened is provided. In this small hit, the opening and closing operation is closed twice after the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined time (0.2 seconds or until 10 balls are won). Repeated. That is, the same open / close operation as in the case of a big hit C (2R probability variation short hit or big hit) is performed. When the special symbol has a low probability, two “10, 11” are defined in the first random number table 202 a (see FIG. 75A) as random numbers (decision values) to be small hits. Among the total number of random number values is 400, since the total number of random number values to be a small hit is 2, the probability to be a small hit of the first special symbol is "2/400".

  In addition, since the small hit is a kind of out, the gaming state is not changed before and after the small hit. For example, if it becomes a small hit during the special symbol state of the special symbol, the definite symbol state of the special symbol continues even after the end of the small hit, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol) If the small hit in), the normal state continues even after the end of the small hit. As described above, this small hit is the same as the case where the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is the 2R probability variation non-short hit, so it becomes a small hit in the normal state and the opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. It can be expected that the player who has visually recognized the action has become a 2R probability variation time non-stop hit. Therefore, since it can be expected that it has transitioned to the special variation of the special symbol which is more advantageous than the normal state whenever the small hit in the normal state, it is prevented that the game in the normal state becomes monotonous ( Control). In addition, even if it does not become the jackpot of the special symbol, the player can increase the chance of winning the prize ball by configuring to execute the opening / closing operation of the specified winning opening 65a with a part (small hit) of the deviation. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) excessive disadvantage to the player due to the player having too few balls in the normal state or the like.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 10 random number values that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value “0 to 9” is the first hit random number table 202a for high probability (FIG. 75 (a )) Is stored. As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 400, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 10, so the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is "1/40". Further, as a random value (decision value) to be a small hit, only "10" is defined in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 75 (a)). Among the total number of random number values of 400, since the total number of random number values to be small per unit is 1, the probability to be a small per unit is "1/400".

  In addition, there is a large number of rounds at high probability of the special symbol that the probability of becoming a small hit at the high probability of the special symbol is lower than that at the low probability of the special symbol. The winning period of the special winning opening 65a is a long jackpot (16 R big hits where the action to be released until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won is repeated 16 times), and to obtain a large number of winning balls It is because it is only troublesome even if it becomes a small hit in order to play a game in expectation. That is, in a normal state, it may have become a 2R probability variation time non-zero hit by becoming a small hit (it may shift to an advantageous change state after the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a) If you are already in a state of definite variation, whether it is a small hit or a 2R positive or negative non-zero hit, you will hardly get a prize ball, and only the current state (a positive variation state) will be maintained. It is. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the probability of becoming a small hit may become low in the high probability state of a special symbol. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game in the high probability state of the special symbol.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75 (b)). Specifically, the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot) is selected when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 39", and the jackpot B (16R if it is "40 to 79". When "time-day big hit" is selected and "80 to 99", a big hit C (2R probability variation present time short hit) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot types set in the first collision type selection table 202b (see FIG. 75 (b)) are three types of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The above jackpot type may be selected, or two or less types, for example, only one jackpot type may be selected. In addition, the type and ratio of jackpot types to be respectively selected for the jackpot of special symbol 1 and the jackpot of special symbol 2 may be set to be different.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol stops at other than the reach symbol. Two stop (rendering) patterns are selected, for example, a range of 90 to 99, and a "completely out of range" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) where no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time to the first winning opening 64, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79 for low probability Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 102) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 76) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 There is.

  Here, the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the fluctuation pattern table 202d includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 76 (b)) and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 76 (c)). And at least a deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 76 (d)). In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the fluctuation pattern table etc. in time saving game state etc. are set besides this.

  First, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. As the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are set. For each fluctuation pattern, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set as a determination value.

  Specifically, “0 to 50” is the variation pattern of various types of normal reach (30 seconds), and “51 to 179” is the variety of special reach (90 seconds) for the variation patterns of various types of super reach (60 seconds). For the fluctuation pattern of), "180 to 198" are respectively set as the determination values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern for which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired is set as a big hit It is selected from the fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  FIG. 76 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the (normal) deviation pattern table 202d2 for disconnection. The off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern to be selected is set when the lottery result of the special symbol is out. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non reach) or out of reach (common in reach) from the stop type selection table not shown is a stop type It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", outreach is set.

  Here, if the variation pattern type is completely out of the range, a relatively short variation (7 seconds) of variation time and a long variation (10 seconds) of variation time are set. “0 to 98” is set for the short deviation (7 seconds), and “99 to 198” is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for the long deviation (10 seconds).

  In addition, for outreach, “0 to 149” for various outreach normal reach (30 seconds), “150 to 197” for outfall super reach (60 seconds), outlier special reach "198" is set as the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for various types (90 seconds).

  As described above, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out in the normal gaming state, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the type of stop and acquires it from the (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 for out-of-classification Based on the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, a variation pattern is selected from the out-of-range (normal) variation pattern selection table 202d2.

  FIG. 76 (d) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the out-of-order (probable variation) change pattern selection table 202d3. The disconnection (probability change) variation pattern selection table 202d3 is a data table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol to be disconnected when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. The deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d3 is different from the above-described deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern selection table 202d2 in the value of the set fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

  As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), complete removal is determined If it is in the range of "90 to 99", the outreach is determined.

  As described above, when the game is in the probability variation gaming state than in the normal gaming state, the probability of reaching when the game is out is set low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the fluctuation time of the deviation at the time of the definite change becomes long and the period until the big hit becomes long. Therefore, the game is postponed during the probability change gaming state where it is easy to win a jackpot, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player feels bored.

  Further, in the present control example, the time variation variation pattern selection table (not shown) is provided in the variation pattern table 202d. The time shortening variation pattern selection table is a data table for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the gaming state is the time shortening gaming state. The time shortening variation pattern selection table is defined so that a variation pattern of 0.6 seconds is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. The variation pattern of 0.6 seconds includes a period of 0.125 seconds in which symbols and the like are variably displayed, and a period of 0.475 seconds in which symbols and the like are stopped and displayed. Thereby, in the time saving game state, one variation display is ended in a short time (0.6 seconds), so it is possible to improve the game rotation rate (efficiency) in the time saving game state. Further, by setting the period in which the symbols are variably displayed to a very short period (0.125 seconds), it is possible to give the player an impression that the turnover rate (efficiency) of the game is very good.

  Referring back to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number corresponding to the normal symbol is set by the second random number table (refer to FIG. 75 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. When it matches the value of the random number which is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 75 (c)), it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for high probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit with normal symbol from low probability (general symbol It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (c), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the ball passes through the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The symbol change display is usually performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed ) And the second winning opening 640 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed ) And the second winning opening 640 is opened "one second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, the release period of the second winning opening 640 Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first winning opening 64. It should be noted that a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit, but the opening time is The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  Second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 102).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first collision type selection table 202b, a second random number table 205c, and a variation pattern table 202d. The contents of each table provided in the ROM 202 are as described above with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 74, the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d , Special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time-shortening counter 203h, big hit flag 203i, counter buffer 203y, and other memory area 203z at least doing.

  Special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1), and one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and the acquired data includes four holding areas (the first holding area). Among the vacant areas of the area to the reserved fourth area), the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins to the first winning opening 64 (start winning) and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol and Besides, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from each value of the acquired counters C1 to C3. Thus, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning combination From now on, it is described that the prediction is made by prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts yes or no, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as the special information 1 of the RAM 233 as the winning information. The special symbol 2 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the corresponding special symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. From this, various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning combination is predicted. In addition, this prediction (prefetching) is configured to refer to the jackpot determination value according to the gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variation gaming state) at the time when the variation corresponding to the start winning is started. . Thereby, it is possible to accurately predict the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a memory area dedicated to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), and the first winning opening 64 (special symbol 1) with respect to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a described above. Is the only difference in that it is changed to the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2), the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding first Among the vacant areas of area 4), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserve areas are the same as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserve ball storage area 203a. The shift process is performed to pack the data in the area 1 into a small reserved area of area number 1. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 (start winning). It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first winning opening 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases to 1 at maximum value 1 each time Are added (see S504 in FIG. 96). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 93).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 93 and S505 in FIG. 96). ). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display controlled by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the holding ball of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even if there is a deviation from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command received.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a counter for counting the number of holding balls of the second winning opening 640 (special symbol 2). The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d only in that the first winning opening (special symbol 1) is changed to the second winning hole 640 (special symbol 2). Since the other points are the same, detailed description will be omitted. Note that the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by one each by the processing of S510 of FIG. 96, and is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 93). Also, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 in FIG. 93, S511 in FIG. 96) reference).

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a holding ball number of the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 (waiting Is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 every time the ball passes through the normal entry hole (through gate) 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. It is incremented by 1 (see S804 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 98).

  When the ball passes through the ordinary entry (through gate) 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension display of the fluctuation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S805 in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the ordinary entrance (through gate) 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. (S803 in FIG. 99: No).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state (high probability state of special symbol) of the special symbol, and if the value of the probability change flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is a special symbol If the value of the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal status of the special symbol (the low probability status of the special symbol). The probability change flag 203g has its initial value set to off, and in the jackpot control process, the start timing of the jackpot effect (jacket game) based on the jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot) or the jackpot C (2R probability variation hour / time non-big hit) If it is determined that it is the end timing), it is set to ON (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state in the special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 95) or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 94) (S403 in FIG. 95, FIG. When the next jackpot game is started (see S303 of 94) (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (FIG. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (FIG. 94, S208) is executed, a lottery of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Fig. 95, S213) or the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Fig. 94, S208), the value of the probability change flag 203g is referred to, and if the value is on, the first for high probability While a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the random number table 202a per one, if the value of the probability change flag 203g is off, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the first random number table 202a for low probability It will be.

  The hour-time counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the special symbol, and when the value of the time-period counter 203h is larger than 0, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the special symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol if the value of the time counter 23h is 0. At this time, the counter 203h is set to 100 when the big hit B (16 R time short hit) is executed at the start timing of the ending effect (that is, the big hit game end timing) by the big hit control processing (FIG. 103). See S1215). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the time is short in the normal symbol variation process (see S708 in FIG. 98), and in the special symbol variation process, it is subtracted by one each time the variation time passes. (See S222 in FIG. 93). When the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is larger than 0 and the above-mentioned probability change flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state and time saving state of the special symbol.

  The jackpot flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not a jackpot has occurred. When the jackpot flag 203i is turned on, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state is executed by the jackpot control process (S1206 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  The small hit flag 203 j is a flag indicating the presence or absence of a small hit. When the small hit flag 203j is turned on, a small hit game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened by the jackpot control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed.

  The short time flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol short time state (normal pattern high probability state). If the value of the time saving flag 203k is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the special symbol, and if the value of the time saving flag 203k is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (normal symbol Low probability state). The short time flag 203k has an initial value set to off, and it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the start timing (end timing of the jackpot game) of ending effect based on the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot). , On (see S1214 in FIG. 103). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving state in the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 98) (see S708, S715, S719 in FIG. 98), and the next jackpot game is started In this case, it is set to off (see S1202 in FIG. 103).

  As described above, in the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving flag 203k are both set to ON, and the timing variation game is given along with the probability variation game. On the other hand, in the big hit C (2R probability variation present time non hit), although the probability variation flag 203g is set on, the time saving flag 203k remains off, and only probability variation game is given. The reason why the time saving flag 203k is provided separately from the time saving medium counter 203h is that the time saving state of the normal symbol applied by becoming the big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) continues at least until the next big hit. is there. That is, since the time-saving state varies according to the timing of the big hit, the time-short period is indeterminate, and the number of times can not be set for the time-saving counter 203h. Therefore, while the time saving state of the fixed number of times (100 times) set after the end of the big hit B is counted by the time saving medium counter 203h, the time saving state set after the end of the big hit A is set by the time saving flag 203g. It is configured. Thereby, the time saving state of the normal symbol can be more accurately determined.

  Here, the probability of becoming a big hit is set to a high probability by the lottery of the special symbol executed based on the entry to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 in the probability variation game (the probability variation state of the special symbol) It is difficult for the player to determine whether the current game is a normal game or a definite change game, unless it is suggested to change the presentation mode or the like to be a definite change game. . On the other hand, since the opening time and opening time of the electric role thing 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 are changed, it is easy to determine whether it is a normal game or a time saving game. .

  Therefore, the player can easily recognize that it is a probability variation game when a time variation game is awarded along with a probability variation game based on a jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), but a jackpot C (2R probability variation timed When only the probability variation game is awarded based on the jackpot), it becomes difficult to recognize that it is a probability variation game (so-called latent probability variation state). As a result, it is necessary for the player to guess which of the normal game and the odd game is the game state, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, a small winning is provided in which the opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a identical to that of the big hit C is performed. Is not necessarily the jackpot C. Therefore, every time the opening and closing operations of two rounds are performed, it can be expected that the jackpot is C, so that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  The other memory area 203z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and the MPU 201 Stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the control program and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (work area) where various flags, counters, and I / O values are stored. Have.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 102), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 101) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 100) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 at least stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and a ball entering effect selection table 222b.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 222a is already known and will be briefly described. However, the voice lamp control device 113 performs rough fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110. Further detailed fluctuation content is determined from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a based on the content (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, outlier, etc.)). Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode is determined from among a plurality of types by lottery.

  The ball entering effect selection table 222b is a table defining the contents of the effect of the ball entering effect executed based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 during the short time game. Here, the entry effect is an effect executed in a mode according to the number of changes until the jackpot, in order to indicate the expectation for the jackpot. More specifically, every time a winning information command is received from the main control unit 110 during the time saving game, the storage contents of the winning information storage area 223a updated based on the winning information command make a big hit in the holding ball. Whether or not there is a corresponding holding ball, and if there is a corresponding holding ball for a big hit, determine the number of changes until a big hit, and perform the rendering in a mode according to the number of changes until a big hit Be done.

  In addition, the ball entering effect of 1 is executed in one of the display areas of the third symbol display device 81 divided into four, and once the ball entering effect is started, the display contents of the previous ball entering effect Can be displayed in a different display area corresponding to the new ball entry. That is, every time the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the ball entering effect is sequentially displayed in the four display areas provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and at most four types. The ball entering effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simultaneously.

  The ball entry effect selection table 222b is defined in association with the number of changes until the effect contents of the ball entry effect becomes a big hit. The ball entry effect selection table 222b is referred to when the game ball is judged to have entered the second winning opening 640 during the short time game, in the ball entry effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later, It is used to select the content of the effect of the effect (see S2403 in FIG. 115).

  As a kind of entering effect, six kinds of entering effects are provided from level 0 entering effect to level 5 entering effect (refer to FIG. 78), and as the number of times of fluctuation until it becomes a big hit decreases, A high level entry effect is selected. As a result, the player can predict the number of times until the jackpot (presence degree to be the jackpot) can be predicted by determining the level of the ball entry effect, so it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  The display image of the entering effect in the present control example is a comment section for displaying a comment (for example, "hurry", "chance?", Etc.) according to the level, and a display of a predetermined symbol (for example, "star"). According to the number, it is comprised by the level suggestion part for suggesting the level of this time of ball entering production, and the display mode of each part (a comment part and a level suggestion part) is set according to the level of ball entering production. As a comment to be displayed in the comment section, a plurality of comments corresponding to the level of entering effect are defined, and are selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i. On the other hand, in the level indication portion, a number of "star marks" symbols are displayed according to the level of the ball entry effect (ie, the number of changes until the jackpot). For example, there are zero "stars" in the level 0 preview effect (see 81a in FIG. 89 (a)), and one "star" in the level 1 preview effect (see 81b in FIG. 89 (b)). In the level 2 preview effect, two "stars" are displayed (see 81c in FIG. 89 (b)). Thus, the player can easily determine the level of the ball entering effect being executed. On the other hand, in the comment section, a comment selected according to the value of the effect counter 223i is displayed, so that variations of the display mode in the ball entering effect can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved. Note that the level suggestion unit may not be provided, and the comment unit may be configured to indicate the number of times of fluctuation up to the big hit. Thus, the level of the entering effect can be estimated only from the display of the comment portion, so that the display content of the entering effect can be noticed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 78, the detailed content of the ball entering presentation selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ball entering presentation selection table 222b. As described above, in the ball entering effect selection table 222 b, the contents of the ball entering effect for suggesting the number of times of change until the big hit are defined in association with the number of times of change before the big hit.

  Specifically, when the number of times of change to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is greater than 4, that is, the lottery information corresponding to the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. If not, it is defined that a level 0 entry presentation is selected. In addition, when the number of times of fluctuation to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is four times, that is, the lottery result of the jackpot of the second special symbol is stored in the fourth hold of the prize information storage area 223a. In this case, it is defined that the level 1 entry effect is selected.

  Similarly, if the number of times of change to the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is 3, the entry effect of level 2 is 2, if it is 2 the entry effect of level 3 is 1 time In this case, it is defined that when the ball entering effect of level 4 is 0 times (if the variation results in a big hit), the ball entering effect of level 5 is selected respectively. As described above, the player can be made to predict the number of times of occurrence of the jackpot by performing different levels of ball entry effects according to the number of times of occurrence of the jackpot. Therefore, since the game can be made to pay more attention to the display effect, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. FIG. 77 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the RAM 223, a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a display area counter 223f, effects A time storage area 223g, an effect mode storage area 233h, an avoidance flag 233i, an effect counter 223j, a power-off flag 223y, and other memory areas 223z are provided at least.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first to fourth areas for special symbol 1 and first to fourth areas for special symbol 2), Winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is an area number among the vacant areas of four areas (first area to fourth area) of the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 The (first to fourth) small areas are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81) ), Which is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting count) of the variation effect of the special symbol 1 suspended in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by entering the ball to first winning opening 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol and is suspended. When the number of balls has been subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1607 in FIG. 107). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b is used for displaying the number-of-holding-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223 b, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Also, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is the same as the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, the number of holding balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect of the special symbol 2 being held in the main control 110 is at most 4 It is a counter that counts up to times. With special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, the number of holding balls is added by entering the second winning opening 640, and special symbol different from the display of the number holding ball number symbol of special symbol 1 in the third symbol display device 81 The difference is only in that it is used for displaying the number-of-retention balls number symbol of the symbol 2, and the others are the same, so the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 or the special symbol 2 holding ball The drawing of the image is controlled to display the number-of-holding balls number pattern corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is synchronized with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110. , Its value is changed. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 It can be changed while being Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on in the fluctuation pattern reception process executed when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1701 in FIG. 108), and the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the setting is made (see S1802 in FIG. 109). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1604 in FIG. 107), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1807 in FIG. 109). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the fluctuation effect is performed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

  The display area counter 223 f is used to specify a display area for displaying the above-described ball entering effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into four (the first area 81 a, the second area 81 b, the third area 81 c, and the fourth area 81 d). It is configured to be able to display different entering effects. The display area counter 223f determines a display area for displaying the current entering effect from among these four display areas (from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d, see FIG. 89 or FIG. 90). Used for The display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 when the voice lamp control device 113 starts up, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 1 to 4 in the ball entering effect setting process (see FIG. 115) described later.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, but when a new entering effect is selected, the third entering symbol effect corresponds to the value of display area counter 223f. It is controlled to be displayed for the display area of. Specifically, when the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, the display of the ball entering effect is set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. When the value is 2, it is set in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81, and when the value is 3, it is set in the first region 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and the value is 4 In some cases, it is controlled to be set in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. Since the value of the display area counter 223f is updated by 1 in ascending order, and is further updated after it becomes 4 after being the maximum value, it is configured to return to 1 so that a maximum of 4 ball effects are performed. Different display areas (a first area 81a, a second area 81b, a third area 81c, and a fourth area 81d) can be simultaneously displayed (see FIGS. 89 and 90). Since a plurality of different entering effects can be displayed simultaneously, the display effects can be diversified.

  The effect time storage area 223 g is an area for storing the start time of the time effect described above. Based on the start time of the time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223g and the current time acquired from the RTC 292, the time effect periodically performed (five minutes every hour), or the time effect A specific time presentation being performed for a specific time during execution (up to 5 minutes every 1 minute from the start of each presentation) is executed (see FIG. 91). The effect time storage area 223g is set by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) of the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Information indicating the start time of the time effect and the specific time effect is set relatively with reference to the power on time. Specifically, when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00, the first time presentation is first performed at 9:55 after 55 minutes from the power on time (9:00) It is set as information indicating the start time of. Then, the time every hour (10:55, 11:55...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. In addition, from the start time of each time effect until 5 minutes elapse every 1 minute (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57 ... ) Is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Furthermore, since the time effect period is 5 minutes, information indicating the time 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect (10:00, 11:00 ...) is that of the normal game period (effect mode A) It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

  In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be performed based on the time when the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The start time of (time effect, specific time effect) may be set. For example, hourly 00 minutes may be set as the start time of the time effect. Thereby, when turning on the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10, even if the power-on time is shifted, the time presentation start time does not shift, and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 synchronously execute the time production can do.

  The effect mode storage area 223 h is an area where information indicating the current effect period is stored, and an effect corresponding to the effect period is selected and executed (displayed) based on the information of the effect mode storage area 223 h . In the present control example, when it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit at the end of the time production period as well as the time production period described above as the presentation period (a fluctuation display in which the held prize information becomes a big hit or a big hit) Three presentation periods of a regular game period which does not correspond to any of a time effect period and a time effect period and a time effect period are set. In addition, in order to simplify the description below, the normal game period is described as effect mode A, the time effect period as effect mode B, and the time effect extension period as effect mode C. In the effect mode storage area 223h, when the effect mode A is set as information for identifying these three effect modes, "00H" which is a value indicating the effect mode A is the effect mode storage area 223h In the case where the effect mode B is set, “01H” which is a value indicating the effect mode B is stored, and when the effect mode C is set, the value indicating the effect mode C is used. A certain "02H" is stored. As described above, by storing information corresponding to the effect period (effect mode) in the effect mode storage area 223h, it can be easily identified which effect period the current effect period is.

  The avoidance flag 223i determines whether or not the countdown advance notice including the display mode of the countdown is executed (displayed) as the notice effect (time advance notice effect) to be executed (displayed) in the time effect period (effect mode B) Is a flag used to When the avoidance flag 223i is on, it indicates that the countdown advance announcement effect is executed (displayed) as time advance announcement effect, and when it is off, it indicates that the countdown advance announcement effect is not executed (displayed). When the avoidance flag 223i is on, it is limited (avoided) so that a specific time effect (countdown effect) which is an effect including the same type of display mode (countdown) is not performed (displayed). Thereby, when the countdown advance notice effect is executed as the time advance notice effect, the execution (display) of the effect can be restricted (avoided) so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not executed (displayed). As a result, it is possible to prevent the effects including the same type of display mode (counting down) from being performed redundantly in the time effect period, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is confused.

  The avoidance flag 223i is turned on when the countdown notice effect is selected as the notice effect (time notice effect) to be selected in the effect mode B (time effect period) in the notice selection process (see FIG. 111). It is set (see S2007 in FIG. 111). Then, when the variable display for which the countdown advance announcement effect is executed (displayed) is ended, it is set to OFF.

  Here, without providing such an avoidance flag 223i, effects of different display modes may be selected and executed between the normal advance presentation effect and the time advance presentation effect. Specifically, although the countdown notice effect is selected in the normal notice effect, the countdown notice effect may not be selected in the time notice effect. Thereby, it can be suppressed that effects including the same type of display mode (countdown) are performed redundantly in the time effect period.

  The effect counter 223 j is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for selection of various effects (variation pattern, advance notice effect, etc.), various lottery, etc., and although not shown, the main process of the sound lamp control device 113 ( 106) is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198.

  The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether a momentary power failure has occurred. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main control device 110, and is set to ON before the power-off process is performed (see S1518 in FIG. 106). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a predetermined time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 1308 in FIG. 104: Yes) in the startup processing (FIG. 104) of the audio lamp control device 113, the power-off flag 223y is set to on for a certain period of time. It is a case where the voice lamp control device 113 has started up before (100 milliseconds) elapse, that is, there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 is not erased, and unnecessary information (or information which is incomplete because only a part of the information is erased) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. Since there is a case, the information of the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S1309 in FIG. 104). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 107) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c while the address specified by the bus line 240 points to the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) executed after the boot process (see S2501 in FIG. 116) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  Furthermore, a correction information table 234a3 is provided in the NAND flash memory 234a (see FIG. 79). The correction information table 234a3 includes data (hereinafter referred to as correction) for correcting an image (hereinafter referred to as a power-on image) displayed on the display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690) when power is turned on. Information) is stored (see FIG. 80 (b)). In this control example, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is reduced by diverting and displaying the power-on image in effects other than power-on. However, when the power-on image is displayed by using the display mode (position, size) as it is in each effect other than power-on, the visibility of each effect may be impaired. Therefore, by using the correction information table 234 a 3, the power-on image is corrected to an appropriate display mode (position, size) in each effect other than power-on, so that the power is turned on without impairing the visibility of each effect. The time image is diverted and displayed.

  The power-on image is composed of three types of images, and it is possible to correct the display mode (position, size) for each of the various power-on images. Here, three types of images (hereinafter, referred to as various power-on images) constituting an image at power-on will be described. The power-on time image is an image for notifying the player etc. that the initialization process and the like are performed along with the power-on, and the power-on time main image and the first special symbol or the second special symbol The power-on fluctuation image, which is an image for notifying the lottery result of the game, and the power-on title image, which is an image for enabling the player etc. to easily identify the model of the pachinko machine 10 It is done. These various power-on images are displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub-display device 690) in a predetermined display mode (position, size) when the power is turned on. This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The correction information table 234a3 is referred to in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) or the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131), and the correction information corresponding to the effect currently being executed (displayed) is the correction information storage area 233m. Stored. The correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m is referred to when generating the drawing list (see FIG. 87) in the drawing process (see FIG. 134), and is used to set the display mode of various power-on images. The detailed information (displayability, display position (coordinates) or size (magnification ratio)) is corrected based on the correction information. This makes it possible to correct and display the display modes of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on variation image, and power-on title image).

  Here, the contents of the correction information table 234a3 will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the correction information table 234a3. The correction information table 234a3 stores correction information corresponding to each effect of various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on fluctuation image, and power-on title image), and correction for normal effects At least information, correction information for demonstration effect, correction information for moving the telescopic object, and correction information for moving the tilting object are provided.

  As correction information for each effect, correction information corresponding to display availability (on or off), correction information corresponding to coordinate correction amount, and correction information corresponding to magnification for each image type of power-on image And are prescribed. Correction information corresponding to displayability (on or off) is a value for determining whether or not to display the corresponding image, and when the value is on, the corresponding image is set to be displayed. It is set (corrected) so that the corresponding image is not displayed when the value is off. The correction information corresponding to the coordinate correction amount is for correcting the display position (coordinates) of the corresponding image, and from the position (coordinates) at which the corresponding image is displayed when the power is turned on, the coordinate correction amount is It is set (corrected) to be displayed at the moved position (coordinates) based on the corresponding correction information. Further, the correction information corresponding to the enlargement ratio is for correcting the size (magnification ratio) of the corresponding image, and this enlargement is performed in the lower right direction with the upper left corner of the corresponding image as the origin (reference point) It is set (corrected) so that the image is enlarged (or reduced in the upper left direction) based on the rate.

  The correction information for the normal effect is correction information used when the initialization process at the time of power-on ends and the normal game is performed in the pachinko machine 10. Further, the correction information for demonstration effect is correction information used when the demonstration effect is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for moving the telescopic combination is the correction information used when the moving effect (the telescopic scenario) of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is executed (displayed). Further, the correction information for tilting object movement is correction information used when a moving effect (inclination object scenario) of the effect member 620 in the tilting operation unit 600 is executed (displayed).

  Specifically, the correction information for the normal effect is such that the main image at power on and the title image at power on are set to off, and the fluctuation image at power on is set to on. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on fluctuation image is set to (−600, −450), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 1 (equal magnification). As a result, when the normal effect is executed, the power-on main image and the power-on title image are corrected so as not to be displayed, and the power-on fluctuation image is displayed at the time of power on (coordinates ) To (-600, -450) is corrected so as to be displayed at the same size in the moved position (coordinates). Specifically, although it will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, a normal effect is executed as a result of the power-on fluctuation image displayed on the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on. Is displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83 (a)).

  Further, as the correction information for demonstration effect, the main image at power on and the fluctuation image at power on are set to off, and the title image at power on is set to on. Then, the correction amount of the coordinates of the title image at power-on is set to (−700, 0), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 2 (double). As a result, when the demonstration effect is executed, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are corrected so as not to be displayed, and the power-on title image is displayed at power-on (coordinates (coordinates Is corrected to be displayed at a size twice as large as the position (coordinates) moved from (−700, 0) to (). Specifically, although described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, when the power-on title image displayed at the central portion of the sub display device 690 at the time of power-on is subjected to a demonstration effect by this correction. Is enlarged and displayed at the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 83 (b)).

  Here, the demonstration effect means that, even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped, the next variation effect accompanying entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is not started. , It is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, as the correction information for movable telescopic workpiece, the main image at power on and the title image at power on are set to off, and the fluctuation image at power on is set to on. The coordinate correction amount of the power-on fluctuation image is set to (200, −450), and the enlargement ratio is set to × 1 (equal magnification). As a result, when the effect (the telescopic object scenario) in which the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable is executed, the main image at power on and the title image at power on are corrected so as not to be displayed. The power-on fluctuation image is corrected so as to be displayed at the same magnification at a position (coordinates) moved by (200, -450) from the position (coordinates) displayed at power-on. Specifically, although it will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83, the power-on fluctuation image displayed in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal effect is executed by this correction is When the telescopic part scenario is executed, it is displayed in the upper left corner of the sub display 690.

  Further, the correction information for moving the tilt symbol object is set to the same information as the correction information for the normal effect. As a result, when the effect (inclination object scenario) in which the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved is executed, the display mode (position of various power-on images) as in the case where the normal effect is executed. , Size) is corrected.

  As described above, when effects other than when the power is turned on are executed, the display modes (positions and sizes) of various power-on images are corrected based on the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 corresponding to the effects. Is displayed. Thus, since images at the time of power on can be diverted and displayed for each effect other than at the time of power on, the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since various power-on images can be corrected and displayed in an appropriate display mode (position, size) in each effect, various power-on images can be diverted without impairing the visibility of each effect. Can be displayed.

  In addition, it may be corrected so that the position where the image is displayed at the time of various power-on is moved in conjunction with the operation of the accessory moved by each effect. Specifically, correction information of various power-on images corresponding to an elapsed time in one effect is defined. For example, when the effect that the power-on fluctuation image is displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81 is being performed, the effect that the tilting operation unit 600 slides (moves) gradually from the right to the left is performed To. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed by sliding to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600, and the power-on fluctuation image is displayed by sliding to a position not on the back of the tilting operation unit 600 As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the fluctuation image upon turning on the power becomes difficult to be recognized by the operation of the tilting operation unit 600. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the fluctuation image upon power-on. When the power-on fluctuation image is moved to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the image is moved to the sub display device 690 incorporated in the tilting operation unit 600. Coordinates may be set to be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to move and display the power-on fluctuation image without impairing the visibility of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The target to be moved and displayed is not limited to the power-on fluctuation image, and may be a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a holding symbol, or a symbol such as a character. It may be.

  Further, when moving various power-on images, the image may be moved so as to move back and forth between the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. In this case, when displaying images across the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, since the resolutions of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are different, the difference in resolution is known Adjustment (conversion) may be performed using a scaler (for example, a video scaler) or the like. As a result, it is possible to widen the range in which the images can be moved when various types of power are turned on.

  Further, the correction information may be set so that the images can be moved when various types of power are turned on when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to read the correction information used at the time of power on together with the program of the first program storage area which is read first at the time of power on. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an origin return operation is performed to move various types of goods to the home position when the power is turned on. Therefore, there is a timing at which it becomes difficult for the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 to be visually recognized because various kinds of prizes are moved by the return-to-origin operation. Therefore, by correcting the display position (coordinates) of the various power-on images according to the movable state of the various prizes, it is possible to easily view the various power-on images even during home return operation of the various prizes. It can be done.

  Next, the image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 87) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power on fluctuation image area 235b, a third symbol area 235d, and a power on title image area 235f are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and entry of the first winning opening 64 is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect.

  When power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 causes the character ROM 234 to turn on the main image at power on, the fluctuation image at power on, and the image data corresponding to the title image area 235 f at power on. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 so as to be transferred to 235a (see FIG. 116).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 81 to FIG. 83, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 and the power-on image displayed in the display area will be described. First, FIG. 81 is a schematic view schematically showing the relationship between the image drawn by the display control device 114 and the display areas of the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690. The pachinko machine 10 in this control example includes the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the images displayed on the respective display devices (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690) are constant. Control for updating for each period (for example, 20 milliseconds) is executed by the display control device 114.

  Specifically, the display control device 114 updates (draws) image data of 1200 pixels (pixels) × 600 pixels (pixels) in a horizontal direction (for example, every 20 milliseconds) for a predetermined period. By setting these image data in each display device, the image displayed on each display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690) is updated at regular intervals. The image data corresponding to each pixel (pixel) is composed of three data of data corresponding to R (red), data corresponding to G (green), and data corresponding to B (blue). There is. The data of each color is composed of, for example, 8 bits, and the gradation (level) of each color can be set in 8-bit steps (that is, 256 steps). That is, any of 256 levels from "00H" to "FFH" can be set as the setting value for each color.

  In each pixel provided in each display device, an area capable of emitting red, an area capable of emitting green, and an area capable of emitting blue are provided, and image data is set. Thus, the gradation (level) of each color can be set. In addition, each pixel (pixel) which comprises each display apparatus is minute enough, and the area which can develop red, the area which can develop green, and which can develop blue which comprise one pixel can be developed. It is difficult to distinguish the area with the naked eye. Therefore, with the naked eye, the color looks like a combination of these three colors.

  The image data set for each pixel will be described using a specific example. For example, if the R data is FFH (255 gradations) and the other color data is 00H (0 gradations), the pixel for which the image data is set has a maximum gradation (maximum level) red color. Is displayed (the pixel looks like a red of maximum gradation). In addition, if R data and G data are 80H (128 tones) and B data is 00H (0 tones), 128/255 tones of red and 128/255 tones of green As a result of combining, the pixel for which the image data is set is displayed with a yellow appearance of maximum gradation. Furthermore, if all R data, G data, and B data are FFH (255 tones), all three colors of R, G, and B are set to the maximum tones (255/255 tones). As a result of combining these three colors, the pixel for which the data is set is displayed with a white appearance. On the other hand, if all the three color data are 00H, all the three colors are not displayed. As a result, the pixel to which the data is set is displayed in black appearance.

  Thus, since the display color of each pixel (pixel) which comprises the display screen of each display apparatus can be expressed by each of R (red), G (green), B (blue) in 256 steps, each display A vivid image can be displayed on the device. In this control example, an area capable of emitting red color, an area capable of emitting green color, and an area capable of emitting blue color are provided in each pixel, but colors necessary for displaying an image are comprehensive It may be changed as far as it can be expressed. For example, instead of three colors of red, green and blue, three colors of yellow, cyan and magenta may be used. In addition to red, green, and blue, an area capable of emitting yellow may be provided in each pixel (pixel), and 8-bit data corresponding to yellow may be added to the image data. Color expression can be made more vivid by adding an area capable of emitting yellow. In particular, since it is possible to vividly express colors (for example, gold and the like) frequently used in display effects and the like, which contain a large amount of yellow components, it is possible to further improve the interest of display effects.

  As shown in FIG. 81, coordinate data is associated with display data of each pixel (pixel) constituting image data. Here, coordinate data is data for specifying a set position (set pixel) of data in each display device. In the present embodiment, a range of 0 to 1200 can be specified as horizontal coordinates, and a range of 0 to 600 can be specified as vertical coordinates.

  In the horizontally long rectangular area shown in FIG. 81, the coordinates of the position of the upper left corner are defined as origin coordinates (0, 0), and the coordinates of the position of the lower right corner are defined as (1200, 600). In addition, the image data specified in the rectangular area with four points of coordinates (0, 0), (800, 0), (0, 600), and (800, 600) as vertices is the third symbol display It is a region (a third symbol display device region) that defines an image to be displayed on the device 81. Each coordinate is set so that the arrangement of each pixel (pixel) data in this area and the position where the image data is actually set in the third symbol display device 81 coincide with each other.

  On the other hand, the image data defined in the rectangular area having four points of (800, 0), (120, 0), (800, 300) and (1200, 300) as apexes is sent to the sub display device 690. It is an area (an area for sub display devices) which defines an image to be displayed. Furthermore, the rectangular shaped area having the remaining four points of (800, 300), (1200, 300), (800, 600), and (1200, 600) as apexes is a spare area (unused area), The image data in this area is not used for display.

  As described above, the display control device 114 in the present control example draws the image data to be set in the third symbol display device 81 and the image data to be set in the sub display device 690 as one image data, Depending on the coordinates of the image data, whether to display on the third symbol display device 81 or to display on the sub display device 690 is changed. Thereby, it becomes easy to synchronize the image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690, and the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 (effect It is possible to suppress problems such as misalignment). In addition, it is not restricted to this, You may comprise so that the image data displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 and the sub display apparatus 690 may be drawn separately.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 by the display control device 114 when the power is turned on will be described. Here, the main image at power on is defined as image data of 450 pixels (pixels) × 200 pixels (pixels), and the fluctuation image at power on is 100 pixels (pixel) × 100 pixels (pixels) The power-on title image is defined as image data of 200 pixels (pixels) × 50 pixels (pixels) at power-on. In order to simplify the description of the display position (coordinates) of various power-on images, when showing the display position (coordinates) of various power-on images, the upper left corner of the image data of various power-on images It is assumed that the coordinates of a pixel (pixel) are representatively indicated (indicated). For example, the main image at power-on in FIG. 82 (a) is in a rectangular region having four points of (100, 50), (550, 50), (100, 250), and (550, 250) as vertices. Image data displayed on the screen. In this case, (100, 50), which is the coordinates of the pixel at the upper left corner of the image data of the main image at power on, should be representatively shown as the display position (coordinates) of the main image at power on. When the power is turned on, the display position (coordinates) of the main image is expressed as (100, 50).

  Immediately after power on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the title image at power on from the character ROM 234 to the title image area 235 f at power on. Next, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and then stored in the resident video RAM 235 The remaining image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the display control device 114 first causes the power-on title image to be displayed using the image data stored in the power-on title image area 235g. The display position (coordinates) of the title image at power on is (900, 100), and the title image at power on is displayed at the center of the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 82A).

  Next, the display control device 114 causes the main image to be displayed when the power is turned on. The display position (coordinates) of the main image at power-on is (100, 50), and the main image at power-on is displayed at the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 82A). While these displays are being performed, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

  Here, since the resolution of the display screen of the sub display device 690 is lower than that of the third symbol display device 81, the image data set for displaying the image on the sub display device 690 is the third symbol display device The amount of data is smaller than that of the image data for displaying an image for 81. Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image (title image at power on) to be displayed on the sub display device 690 with a small amount of data for displaying the image is first stored in the resident video RAM. It is possible to shorten the time from the input of the image to the display of the image.

  Thereafter, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the third symbol display device 81. Of the power-on variation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position (coordinates of (600, 450)) and the power-on variation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol Are alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period (see FIGS. 82 (b) and (c)). Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. Judge the result, if it is "big hit of the special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped the fluctuation production Displayed for a fixed period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images showing “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  In addition, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power-on When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately .

  Furthermore, when the power-on time fluctuation image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the game is being executed before the power failure when the power is once disconnected and restored due to a power failure or the like during the game execution. The player can feel the dissatisfaction felt by the player because the change or the result of the change can be confirmed immediately by a simple change effect.

  A simple character image or the like may be provided as an image displayed when the power is turned on, and may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to increase variations of the effect even in the simple change effects displayed when the power is turned on, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the simple character image used here may be a character image used in the sub display 690 at the time of normal rendering. As a result, since a character image with a small data volume displayed on sub display device 690 can be shared and used without newly providing a simple character image, the capacity of character ROM 234 can be saved and resident The transfer time of the image to the video RAM 235 can be shortened.

  Furthermore, the image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 sequentially from the image. As a result, even in the simple effect to be performed between the time the power is turned on and the normal game can be started, the variation of the effect can be successively increased, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Can.

  Also, when transferring the image to the resident video RAM 235, the image compressed so as to lower the resolution by a known image compression technique is transferred, and then the transferred image is decompressed to the resident video RAM 235 May be Then, when the compressed image is stored in the resident video RAM, the image may be displayed on the sub display device 690. As a result, even if the image is compressed to a low resolution, the sub display device 690 having a low resolution can display the image without discomfort, and the time from when the power is turned on until the image is displayed Can be shortened.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, display screens at the time of normal rendering and at the time of demonstration rendering will be described. FIG. 83 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of normal effect, and FIG. 83 (b) is a display of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of demonstration effect It is the model which showed the screen typically.

  At the time of normal rendering, the display coordinates of the power-on fluctuation image are displayed (-600, -450) based on the correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display coordinates of the power-on fluctuation image at power-on are (600, 450), the power-on fluctuation image is displayed at the position of (0, 0) at the time of normal rendering (FIG. 83 (a )reference). The power-on time variation image is used as an indication of the variation result of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) at the time of normal rendering.

  Further, at the time of demonstration effect, the display coordinates of the title image at power-on are displayed (-700, 0) based on the correction information table 234a3 described later. Since the display position of the title image at power on at power on is (900, 100), the title image at power on is displayed at the position of (200, 100) at the time of demonstration effect (FIG. 83 (b )reference).

  Referring back to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 despite the fact that the fluctuation effect is started. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the effect is not immediately started.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a correction information storage area 233m, a special effect correction flag 233n, a background image change flag 233p, and an effect mode flag 233r.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B Or if it is either of the jackpot C, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric winning symbol 640 a is opened as a normal symbol, and the ball is the second winning. When it becomes easy to enter the mouth 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined.

  When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time rendering) according to the back surface type, the player of the background is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as the drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified along with the passage of time.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the end address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 85) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 86 correspond to each other). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 86).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 86, In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display contents specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 86, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information specified at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main process (see FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2505 in FIG. 116). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S4805 in FIG. 132 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2801 in FIG. 118 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 118) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 118 (b) (see S2810) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are performed.

  Further, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S4701 of FIG. 132A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 132 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 57) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 87) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 87) described later (see FIG. 87) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 118 (b In step S2803), the pointer update process (see S4305 in FIG. 130) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. As shown in FIG. 87, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 87, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed ( Every time S2803 in FIG. 118 (b) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S4307 in FIG. 128). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  For all stored sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the stored image data discrimination flag 233j stores the image data corresponding to that sprite in the image storage area 236a of the ordinary video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233 j is generated by the initial setting process (see S 2502 in FIG. 116) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233 j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236 a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233 j is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S4913 in FIG. 133). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S4914 in FIG. 133). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is 1. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5002 in FIG. 134).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 118B) is executed (see S5002 of FIG. 134).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The correction information storage area 233m is an area in which the correction information of the above-described correction information table 234a3 is stored, and based on the correction information stored in the correction information storage area 233m, various power-on images (main at power-on) The display mode (position, size) of the image, the power-on fluctuation image, the power-on title image) is corrected and displayed. The correction information storage area 233 m is an initial value (display enable / disable is on, coordinate correction amount is (0, 0), enlargement ratio is × 1 (equal magnification) for all image types when the power of the audio lamp control device 113 is turned on. ) Is set, so when power is turned on, various power-on images are displayed at the initial position (see FIG. 82). Then, the correction information of the correction information table 234a3 is set according to the gaming state (displayed effect). For example, if the normal effect is being executed, the correction information for the normal effect in the correction information table 234a3 is set (see S4604 in FIG. 131).

  The special effect correction flag 233 n is correction information (telescopic object) corresponding to the movable effect (telescopic object scenario or tilting object scenario) of the telescopic effect device 540 (refer to FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (refer to FIG. 9) It is a flag for determining whether or not the movable information or the correction information for moving the tilting object is set in the correction information storage area 233 m. When the special effect correction flag 233n is on, it indicates that the correction information for the telescopic combination object movable or the tilt combination object movable is set in the correction information storage area 233m, and when the special effect correction flag 233n is off, the telescopic combination It indicates that the correction information for object movement or tilting object movement is not set in the correction information storage area 233 m. If the special effect flag 233n is on, correction information for normal effect or demonstration effect is not set in the correction information storage area 233m in the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (see FIG. 131). See S4602: No). Thereby, although the moving effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is being executed, the expansion / contraction object movable set in the correction information storage area 233 m It is possible to prevent the correction information for moving object or tilting character from being rewritten into correction information for normal effect or demonstration effect by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131). As a result, the display mode (position, size) of the various power-on images even though the moving effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is being executed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the display mode (position, size) corresponds to the normal effect or the demonstration effect and to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused.

  The special effect correction flag 233 n is set to ON when correction information for moving the telescopic object or for moving the tilting object is set in the correction information storage area 233 m in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121). (See S3205 in FIG. 121). Then, when the variable display (effect) is stopped, it is set to OFF (see S4101 in FIG. 126 (b)). That is, when the moving effect of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is stopped, the special effect correction flag 233 n is set to off. When the special effect correction flag 233n is set to OFF, it becomes possible to set correction information for normal effect or demonstration effect in the correction information storage area 233m by the effect information correction process (see FIG. 131) (see FIG. Refer to 131 S4602: Yes). As described above, since the correction information corresponding to the effect can be set in the correction information storage area 233m, it is necessary to correct and display various power-on images in a display mode (position, size) suitable for each effect. Can.

  The back surface image change flag 233p is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The rear image change flag 233p is set to ON when receiving a rear image change command or an effect mode change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4001 in FIG. 126A). Then, it is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S4909 in FIG. 133), and is set to off when the rear image changing process is executed (see S4910 in FIG. 133). As a result, it is possible to display a rear surface image corresponding to the rear surface image change command and the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The effect mode flag 233r is a flag that is set and referred to in order to determine the current effect mode (effect period), and the back image is changed based on the effect mode set in the effect mode flag 233r. The effect mode flag 233r is set based on the effect mode change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4002 in FIG. 126 (a)), and described later based on the set value of the effect mode flag 233r. In the normal image transfer setting process, rear image data is set (see S4911 in FIG. 133). Thereby, the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 can be changed according to the effect mode set by the audio lamp control device 113.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88 to FIG. 90, the ball entering effect executed during the time saving game of this control example will be described. This ball entry effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the variable display during execution (variation) will be a big hit, based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 640. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a timing chart when the ball entering effect is executed. In the time saving game in this control example, the variable display based on the second special symbol is 0.6 seconds (a period of 0.125 seconds in which symbols etc. are variably displayed, and a period of 0.475 seconds in which symbols etc are stopped and displayed. And end with. In this case, when the expectation of becoming a big hit is displayed in one display area based on the execution of the change production, the change production ends in a short time (0.6 seconds) (that is, the display of the expectation of becoming a big hit is Since the process ends in 0.6 seconds), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot.

  Therefore, in the present control example, the ball entering effect indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit is displayed in order in the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display device 81 in order. The next ball entering effect can be displayed in the second area 81 b while displaying the ball entering effect in the area 81 a. This makes it possible to extend the display period of the ball entering effect indicating the jackpot expectation, and to provide the player with an easily understandable gaming machine that easily recognizes the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, the ball entering effect indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit is that the game ball entered the second winning opening 640 even when the second winning opening 640 is suspended at the upper limit (4 in this control example). It is displayed based on it (so-called, the ball entering effect is displayed also at the time of overflow). As a result, even if the hold of the second winning opening 640 is at the upper limit (4), it is possible to make the player think that he wishes to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640 continuously. Can improve the interest of

  Furthermore, the entering effect which shows the degree of expectation which becomes a big hit is the production corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit. Specifically, although it will be described later, based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations before becoming a big hit, it is controlled so as to become a high winning entering presentation (high entering game with high level) to be a big hit. As a result, the level (the degree of expectation for becoming a big hit) of the ball entry effect gradually increases, so that the player can be made to foretell the arrival of the big hit gradually, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Specifically, this will be described with reference to FIG. First, after the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state shifts to the short time gaming state, and when the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is 4 during the jackpot game, the fluctuation based on the oldest winning among the holding balls A certain change 1 is started. Here, if there is no winning information of the big hit in the winning information of each holding ball, the remaining fluctuation number until the big hit is undecided (greater than 4). In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, level 0 entry effect is selected as entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when there is a first ball hit (the lottery result is missed) in the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the change 1, the entry effect of level 0 is the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. And the number of holding balls of the second special symbol changes to 4 (see FIG. 89 (a)).

  Then, when the change 1 is finished, the change 2 based on the holding ball is started, and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol becomes 3. If there is a second ball hit (the lottery result is a big hit) in the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the change 2, the number of remaining changes until the big hit is four. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, level 1 entry effect is selected as entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Accordingly, the ball entering effect of level 1 is displayed in the second area 81 b of the third symbol display device 81, and the number of balls reserved for the second special symbol changes to four.

  Then, when the change 2 is ended and the change 3 based on the holding ball is started, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit decreases to three. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, level 2 entry effect is selected as entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, if there is a third ball entry (the lottery result is out) in the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the change 3, the entry effect of level 2 is displayed in the third area 81c of the third symbol display device 81 (See FIG. 89 (b)), the reserved symbol of the second special symbol changes to 4. Furthermore, if there is a fourth ball hit (overflow) in the second winning opening 640 while the variation 3 is being executed, the number of remaining variations until the jackpot is three. In this case, the level 2 entering effect is selected as the entering effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, the ball entering effect of level 2 is displayed in the fourth area 81 d of the third display device 81.

  Then, when the change 3 is ended and the change 4 based on the holding ball is started, the number of holding balls of the second special symbol becomes 3, and the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot decreases to two. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, level 3 entry effect is selected as entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). However, if there is no entry into the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the change 4, the entry effect is not newly displayed, and the change 4 ends.

  When the change 4 ends, the change 5 based on the holding ball is started, and the number of holding balls in the second special symbol decreases to 2 and the number of remaining changes until the jackpot decreases to one. In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, level 4 entry effect is selected as entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the execution of the variation 5, the entry effect of level 4 is displayed in the first area 81a of the third display device 81 (see FIG. 90A). ), The number of holding balls in the second special symbol increases to three.

  Then, when the change 5 ends, the change 6 based on the holding ball of the winning information of the big hit is started, and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol decreases to 2 and the number of remaining changes to the big hit is 0 (the said The fluctuation is reduced to the jackpot). In this case, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640, level 5 entry effect is selected as entry effect based on the entry effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 78). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 while this variation 6 is being executed, the entry effect of level 5 is displayed in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 90 (b)) See also), the number of balls held in the second special symbol increases to three. After that, when the fluctuation of the fluctuation 6 ends, the jackpot game is executed.

  As described above, in the present control example, the type of the ball entering effect is changed in accordance with the number of remaining fluctuations up to the jackpot, so the player can not win the jackpot before the fluctuation based on the jackpot is executed. Can be recognized in advance, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, since the level of the ball entry effect gradually increases based on the decrease in the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot, it is possible to make the player gradually feel the arrival of the jackpot, and the player's interest is It can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the game rotation rate (efficiency) is improved by shortening (0.6 seconds) the fluctuation time of one fluctuation effect in the time saving game. However, since the fluctuation time is short, the fluctuation effect performed (displayed) in the fluctuation time is also short. As a result, if the game ball is not continuously entered into the second winning opening 640, the fluctuation effect is not continuously performed (that is, the period during which the fluctuation effect is not executed (displayed) becomes long, and the game is boring There is a risk of becoming So, in this control example, based on entering the ball to the second winning opening 640, it is configured to display the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit. This makes it possible for the player to cause the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 continuously so that the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening 640 continuously. It can be displayed continuously, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In this control example, the ball entering effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the big hit is performed, but it is not limited to this, the ball entering effect of the aspect in which the player can not easily recognize the number of remaining fluctuation until the big hitting The above-mentioned ball entry effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations up to the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to provide a case of becoming a big hit without foreseeing the arrival of the big hit, making it possible to give the game with unexpectedness and to improve the interest of the player.

  Moreover, in this control example, it is comprised so that the ball entering effect mentioned above may be displayed in order in each area | region of the 1st area | region 81a of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 to 4th area | region 81 d. As a result, the ball entering effect based on one ball entering will be continuously displayed until four game balls are newly hit to the second winning opening 640 thereafter, and the game ball to the second winning hole 640 Even when the interval for entering the ball is very short, it is possible to secure the time for which the ball entering effect is displayed, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player can not visually recognize (recognize) the ball entering effect. In addition, the area where the ball entering effect is not displayed may be determined and the area not displayed may be preferentially used for display. Thereby, the time for which the ball entering effect is displayed can be secured longer.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the hold of the second winning opening 640 is the upper limit, and further, when the game ball enters the second winning opening 640 (so-called, overflow), it is configured to perform the entering effect ing. As a result, even if the hold of the second winning opening 640 is at the upper limit, the entering effect is displayed based on entering the ball, so the holding of the second winning opening 640 for the player becomes the upper limit. Even if this is the case, it is possible to make the player want to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 640 continuously, and the player's interest can be improved. In addition, since the ball entering effect is displayed more than the number of times of the short game played, it is possible to make the player feel that a lot of the short game is given.

  In this control example, the ball entering effect is configured to be displayed in order (clockwise) in each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but is limited to this is not. For example, it may be configured to display in reverse order (counterclockwise) or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or change is executed, or when there is winning information on a big hit. This makes it possible to change the order of the ball entry effects to be displayed, to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to prevent the player from being bored early.

  Moreover, you may change the display order of the ball entering presentation displayed on each area | region (from the 1st area | region 81a to 4th area | region) of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 according to the expectation degree used as a big hit. For example, in the case where the degree of expectation for the big hit is low, the ball entering effect is displayed in the order (clockwise) in each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d. Will be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation in the display order of the ball effects displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area), and each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area) Since it is not necessary to see in detail the contents of the entering effect displayed on the screen, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player.

  Next, each effect period (each effect mode) set in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this control example, as described above, the normal gaming period (rendering mode A), which is a period during which normal effects are executed (displayed), and the effect period set periodically (five minutes every hour) At the end of the time presentation period (rendering mode B), which is a period during which a special aspect of the presentation (time presentation) according to the elapsed time is performed (displayed), and at the end of the time presentation period (rendering mode B) A time effect extension period (effect mode C) to shift to a case where it is determined that the jackpot will be subsequently made (when the winning prize information being held is the jackpot, or the variable display when the jackpot is in execution is in execution) is provided. .

  FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing each effect period (normal game period, time effect period, time effect extension period) in this control example. As described above, in this control example, information indicating the start time of the normal game period (rendering mode A) and the time rendition period (rendering mode B) is set in the rendition time storage area 223g. The effect time storage area 223g is an RTC 292 (time counting means) by the time setting process (see FIG. 105) in the start-up process (see FIG. 104) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Information indicating the start time of the normal game period (rendering mode A) and the time effect period (rendering mode B) is set based on the time information (information indicating the power on time) acquired from . Each effect period is set based on information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223g.

  Specifically, information indicating the time 55 minutes after the power-on time is set in the effect time storage area 223 g as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. As a result, a time rendering period (rendering mode B) is set 55 minutes after the power on time. The normal game period (effect mode A) is set for 55 minutes after the power is turned on. Since the time effect period is five minutes, information indicating the time 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect is set as information indicating the start time of the normal game period (effect mode A). As a result, when 5 minutes have passed from the start time of the time effect, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set. As described above, information indicating the start time of the effect time storage area 223 g is set so that the normal game period (55 minutes) and the time effect period (5 minutes) are repeatedly set, and 5 minutes every hour The time rendering period (rendering mode B) is set.

  Here, when five minutes of the time effect period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a special symbol stored at that point in time or a special symbol in change is set to be a big hit or not. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is set, the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is set as the time until the variation ends. In this case, when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is ended, the normal game period (effect mode A) is set.

  In addition, when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the third symbol display device 81 regardless of whether or not it shifts to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) thereafter. The display mode is switched to a precursor display mode that indicates the end of the time presentation period. By switching to this precursor display mode, the variable display (regardless of whether it is a big hit or off) of the third symbol that has been executed (displayed) up to that point is a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize It is variable. Specifically, the image is reduced and continuously changed and displayed at the lower right portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Then, regardless of the fluctuation display which has been executed (displayed) up to that point, the third symbol showing the disengagement is stopped and displayed at the central portion of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the third symbol showing the detachment apparently) The symbol is displayed). Here, the third symbol, which is pseudo-displayed in a pseudo-display manner in the prognostic display mode, is displayed with a slight shaking, thereby informing that the display has not been completely halted. In this manner, by switching to the precursor display mode and displaying it as if the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it seems as if the third symbol was stopped and displayed at the same timing with the other pachinko machines 10 as well. You can As a result, the display mode at the end of the time effect period can be made the same display mode with a plurality of pachinko machines 10, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, also when the fluctuation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed) when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the display mode similarly changes to the precursor display mode. It is switched. As a result, the display mode can be switched to the precursor display mode regardless of whether the variable display is being performed (displayed), so the display mode at the end of the time presentation period is the same as the display mode of the multiple pachinko machines 10 can do.

  In the precursor display mode, the display mode in which the variable display of the third symbol which has been executed (displayed) up to that point is variable, and which is difficult to be recognized by the player is not limited to the above. For example, the variable display of the third symbol may be changed into a state in which it is difficult to recognize that the player is displayed, or may not be displayed at all. As a result, it can be made difficult to recognize that the third symbol showing the detachment in a pseudo manner is displayed, and the effect of making the third symbol look as if it were stopped and displayed can be further strengthened.

  Furthermore, at the timing when the time rendering period (rendering mode B) is ended (that is, the timing of division of whether or not to shift to the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C)), it indicates that it is a time rendering period After the character "super fish school time", the character "end?" (Informing mode) is displayed. After that, when the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is set, the character “super fish school time extending !!” is displayed to notify that the transition has been made to the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C). Background image is displayed again. In addition, the effect performed (displayed) in the time effect extension period is called an extension effect.

  When the transition to the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is made, by switching to the precursor display mode, the variable display of the third symbol (which has been reduced) which has been changed to the display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize The display mode is changed (magnified) to a viewable (easily) display mode again (see FIG. 83). When the variation display of the third symbol is changed (expanded) to a visible (easily) display mode again, the player is informed (displayed) as if a new special symbol variation has been started. (Hereafter, it is called a re-variation effect). Thereby, the variable display of the third symbol (reduced) which is changed (reduced) to the display mode which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize in the precursor display mode is changed (enlarged) to the view which is visible again (easily). It can be changed (expanded) without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In addition, the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is a period until the fluctuation display that is a big hit is ended (that is, until the big hit game is started). In the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C), the remaining time (for example, 115 seconds) of the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the jackpot game is started) The remaining time until is displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

  In the present embodiment, when the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is set, a case in which a hold storage serving as a big hit is set or a change serving as a big hit is already started (during variation) ). Therefore, transition to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) means that a jackpot is notified to the player. Here, in the time effect period, the same effect is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and the effect of whether to shift to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) at the same timing is displayed . Thus, by shifting to the time effect extending period (rendering mode C), other (surrounding) players can also determine that the pachinko machine 10 will be a big hit (ie, a big hit against the surrounding players) Can be notified), so that other (surrounding) player's shooting feelings can also be heard.

  On the other hand, when the time effect period (effect mode B) ends and the normal game period (effect mode A) is set, the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) is reported. Characters are displayed. This display is displayed until, in the precursor display mode, the variable display of the third symbol changed to the display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize is stopped and displayed. Then, from the next change, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled, and the third symbol is changed and displayed in the normal size. By configuring in this manner, even in the case where the time effect period (effect mode B) is ended, and then the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is not transitioned to, it is difficult to visually recognize by switching to the precursor display mode. The changed variable display can be stopped without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  On the other hand, when the variation display of the third symbol is not executed (displayed) when the remaining time of the time effect period (effect mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the normal game period (effect mode A) is When set, the character of "Super fish school time end !!" is displayed for a predetermined time (three seconds) to notify the end of the time effect period (effect mode B). Then, from the next fluctuation, the third symbol is variably displayed in the normal size (see FIG. 83 (a)) without being displayed in a reduced size.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the condition for which the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C) is set is a big hit after that (a variable display in which the held winning information becomes a big hit or a big hit is being executed) In the above case, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to set a pending memory where a variation pattern to be a super reach is selected, or a lottery unrelated to the lottery of the special symbol is executed and a predetermined lottery result It may be configured to be set when As a result, it is possible to provide a case in which a jackpot does not occur despite the transition to the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C). As a result, since the player pays attention to whether or not a jackpot occurs in the time effect extension period (rendering mode C), it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  Here, in the time effect period (effect mode B), a specific time effect (countdown effect) is performed periodically (every minute) (see FIG. 91). Thereby, during the time effect period, it is possible to perform the same specific time effect (countdown effect) in synchronization with the pachinko machine 10 installed elsewhere (for example, next to), and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 have a sense of unity It is possible to further enhance the effect of time presentation aimed at providing a certain presentation.

  Further, in this specific time effect (countdown effect), the effect content changes based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a definite change state and it is not a short time state (so-called, a latent change state), the countdown character displayed in the countdown effect (“3, 2 , 1 ... ") is displayed in red (displayed in black if not latent change). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the gaming state is a definite change state and not a short time state (a so-called latent probability change state). Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the contents of the effect of the specific time effect, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, the alerting | reporting aspect alerting | reporting that it is a latent probability change state is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, a symbol (image) or a character may be displayed to notify that the state is latent latent change. In this case, the images may be corrected and diverted as various symbols (images) upon turning on the power. As a result, it is not necessary to separately prepare a symbol (image) for informing that the latent state is in the latent definite change state, so that the data capacity (the capacity of the ROM) can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, in addition to the above-described specific time effect (countdown effect), a countdown notice effect including the same display mode (countdown) is executed. This countdown notice effect is executed (displayed) based on entering the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. That is, it may be performed (displayed) at a timing different from the specific time effect (countdown effect) performed periodically (every minute). Therefore, a countdown notice effect including a display mode (countdown) of the same type as the specified time effect (countdown effect) may be executed at a timing different from that of the same type of pachinko machine 10 installed elsewhere (for example, next to) is there. As a result, the game can be given unexpectedness, and the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, after the characters for the countdown (“3, 2, 1,...”) Are displayed, a character pattern indicating the expectation for becoming a big hit is displayed, or the strike of the frame button 22 is repeated Depression is suggested, and this is an effect in which a symbol or a character is displayed that suggests an expectation of becoming a big hit based on continuous hitting (or depression) of the frame button 22.

  In this control example, it can be considered that the effect timing of the effect (countdown effect) for a specific time is reached during execution (display) of the countdown advance effect. In this case, the effects including the same display mode (countdown) may be overlapped (or overwritten) and displayed, which may result in a gaming machine that is difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, in the present control example, during execution of the countdown advance announcement effect, the above-mentioned avoidance flag 223i is set to ON (see S2007 in FIG. 111), and when this avoidance flag 223i is on, the specific time effect ( It is configured that the countdown effect is not performed (set) (see S2305 in FIG. 114: Yes). As a result, the occurrence of the above-described problem can be prevented (suppressed), and the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player.

  In this control example, the configuration for avoiding (restricting) that the effects including the aspect of the countdown are redundantly displayed is described by taking the aspect of the countdown as an example. However, the effect for avoiding (restricting) being displayed redundantly is not limited to the effect including the aspect of the countdown. Of the effects including the same type of aspect, the same applies to other effects that may be displayed in duplicate. For example, in the case where effects that suggest pressing of a button may be displayed in duplicate, it may be avoided (restricted) that effects that suggest pressing of a button are displayed in duplicate.

  In this control example, in order to prevent the effects (countdown effect, countdown notice effect) including the same kind of aspect (countdown) from being displayed redundantly, identification is performed when the countdown notice effect is executed (displayed). We avoided (restricted) the time effect (countdown effect) not to be executed (displayed). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and among the effects including the same type (countdown), one of the effect times may be adjusted (extended or shortened), or the start timing may be changed. For example, it is assumed that a countdown notice effect (usually, the effect time is 30 seconds) is executed (set) when a specific time effect (countdown effect) is executed after 20 seconds. In this case, it may be set by shortening (for example, shortening to 15 seconds) the presentation time of the countdown advance presentation effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that effects including the same type of aspect are redundantly displayed without hiding any one of the effects among the effects including the same type of aspect. As a result, more effects can be displayed, and the player's interest can be improved.

  Moreover, you may make it as follows by changing any one start timing among the production | presentation which includes the same aspect (countdown). For example, the start timing of the specific time presentation (countdown presentation) may be delayed until the countdown announcement presentation ends (or until the predetermined time elapses after the termination).

  Furthermore, in the case of delaying the start timing of the specific-time effect (countdown effect), a display (effect) aspect (that is, the start timing is not delayed) that would have been set (displayed) if not delayed From the display (effect) mode displayed on another pachinko machine 10, a specific time effect (countdown effect) may be configured to be started (displayed). Specifically, the case where the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed for 5 seconds will be described as an example. As described above, the specific time effect (countdown effect) is an effect in which the character of the countdown is counted down by one every three seconds from "3". Therefore, when the delay time is 5 seconds, the display (rendering) mode (display (rendering) mode displayed on the other pachinko machine 10) displayed when the delay is not delayed is “2” as the countdown character Is a display (effect) mode in which is displayed. In accordance with this, it is controlled to start from a display (rendering) mode in which “2” is displayed as the character of the countdown, for a specific time effect (countdown effect) which is started to be delayed by 5 seconds. Thereby, the specific time effect (countdown effect) whose start timing is delayed can be displayed in synchronization with the specific time effect (countdown effect) being executed (displayed) by the other pachinko machine 10. As a result, since the specific-time effect (count-down effect) performed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10 is performed (displayed) without deviation, it is possible to prevent (suppress) giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  As a method of delaying the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect), a means (clocking means) is provided for measuring a period during which the start timing of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, and based on the measurement result There is a method of setting a display (rendering) aspect of a specific time rendition (countdown rendition) which is delayed and started. Further, as another method, during a period in which a specific time effect (countdown effect) is delayed, a process (for example, a process of updating the display pointer of an image, etc.) of setting an effect display (effect) mode is executed as control processing. There is also a method of processing so as not to output an image and a sound related to a specific time effect (countdown effect) even if it is done (for example, mute only the sound related to the specific time effect).

<About control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 92 to FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 239), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, the start winning process is executed in association with the winning (start winning) on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (the fluctuation display in the special symbol) and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 2203d (number of holding N1 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) The number of holding times N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (that is, there is a holding storage of the special symbol 2) (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the process proceeds to the process of S208.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 (that is, there is no holding ball for the special symbol 2) in the process of S204 (S204: No), special It is determined whether the value (N1) of the symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (that is, the holding ball of the special symbol 1 is stored) (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (the holding ball of the special symbol 1 is not stored) (S209: No), the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 Since both are in the state without a holding ball, this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) A holding ball number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203e in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the process proceeds to the process of S208.

  In the process of S208, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, this process ends.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not it is (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is updated (S214), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the fluctuation time of the currently displayed fluctuation display has elapsed (S213: Yes), the stop setting process is executed (S215), and this process is ended. The stop setting process (S215) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery for "big hit of special symbol," "small hit of special symbol," or "out of special symbol" It is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 while performing the propriety determination.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not a definite change is in progress (S302).

  If it is in a definite variation (S302: Yes), whether the jackpot of the special symbol is based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability The first lottery result is obtained from the first random number table (see FIG. 75A) (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the ten random numbers set in the first random number table (see FIG. 75A). As described above, ten random numbers from "0 to 9" are set as random number values for the big wins of special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number values for these hits. If it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the determination value determined to be a big hit is the same, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and different random numbers may be used. By configuring in this manner, the random number value determined to be out of place in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the jackpot bias.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random number values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but not limited to that, it is determined to be a jackpot for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random numbers may be set differently. In this way, by configuring, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol of the higher jackpot probability, the player Can be expected to have a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is not definite (S302: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol, the first hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value and the first random number table for low probability (refer to FIG. 75 (a)), a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. As a random number value which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, one of “0” is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per the first and the random number value which becomes the hit match, the big hit of the special symbol It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is the jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is (S305: Yes), The display mode at the time of jackpot indicating the jackpot is set (S306).

  In the process of S306, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined jackpot type (either jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type in the stop manner, the jackpot type is set as the stop type. Next, based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined from the first hit type selection table (see FIG. 75 (b)) (S307). Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table. In this first hit type counter C2, the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "0 to 39" is the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), which is one of the values "40 to 79" The jackpot type in the case is a jackpot B (16R hour junior high perk), and the jackpot type in the case of any of “80 to 99” is a jackpot C (2R probability variation time short non-hit). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S310.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set according to the determined detachment. Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out-of-pocket is determined based on the current number of holding balls (S309). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S310.

  In the process of S310, the variation pattern command for notifying the determined each variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S310), the stop type command is set (S311), and then this process is ended and the special symbol Return to fluctuation processing.

  Next, the stop setting process (S215) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the stop setting process (S215). This stop setting process (S215) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92).

  In the stop setting process (S215), first, a display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S261). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S208) in FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C, the jackpot or the jackpot is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and when the big hit B, the red LED is turned on and the big hit C In case you turn on the yellow LED. In the case of a small hit, the purple LED is lit, and in the case of a small hit, the red LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation. In addition, as long as it is the lighting mode which can identify the classification of each big hit, the small hit, and the fluctuation | variation state not only in the display color and lighting mode of above-described LED, another lighting mode may be sufficient.

  After the process of S261 is completed, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (current lottery result) It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol (S262). If the lottery result this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S262: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S263), the start of the jackpot is set (S264), and then the process proceeds to S265.

  On the other hand, in the process of S262, if the current lottery result is not a big hit (S262: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S266). If the lottery result this time is a small hit (S266: Yes), the small hit flag 203j is set on (S267), the start of the small hit is set (S268), and then the process proceeds to S265.

  In the process of S266, if the current lottery result is out (S266: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 1 or more (S269). If it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203h is 0 (S269: No), the process proceeds to S265. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S269: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S270), and the process proceeds to S265.

  In the process of S265, a stop command is set (S265), and this process ends.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and determines whether or not the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has a winning (start winning), and the start winning Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing hold processing of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 96, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S501). Here, entry into the first winning opening 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, if it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S502) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S503).

  Then, whether there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S501: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (503: No), the process proceeds to the process of S507. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first winning opening 64 (S501: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S504). And a ball holding number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) which shows the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (5405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 102) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S505, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 holding ball storing area 203a is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S507 to S512, the same processing as that of the processing of S501 to S506 is also performed for the winning of the second winning opening 640. The process is different from the other in that the process of holding the second special symbol is executed with respect to the winning of the second winning opening 640, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640 in the process of S407 (S507: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S512 (S513). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a prefetch process (S513) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S513).

  In this pre-reading process (FIG. 97, S513), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning on the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601; No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, when there is a new winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state at the start of the change is a definite change (S602), the gaming state If the change is positive (S602: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for high probability (see FIG. 75A) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. In the process of S602, if the gaming state is not definite (S602: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for low probability (see FIG. 75 (a)) (S604). Move to processing. In the processing of S605, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result executed in the processing of S603 and S604 is set (S605), and this processing is ended. In this pre-reading process (S513), the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and the voice lamp control device 113 is determined by the winning information command by determining the type (outside reach, super reach, special reach, etc.) of the selected variation pattern. It may be configured to be notified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the motorized role associated with the second winning opening 640 It is a process for controlling the opening time of the object 640a and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation processing (FIG. 98, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current symbol is in the middle of a hit (second symbol) (S701). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device. The middle part is included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S701: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the process which shifts the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S 708).

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol (S 708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 709). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711.

  In the process of S 709, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the hit is a normal symbol is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 75 (c)).

  In the process of S708, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S708: No), the process proceeds to the process of S711. In the process of S711, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 is low. Based on the second random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is a normal symbol is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 75 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S710 or S711 is the hit of the normal symbol (S712), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S712: Yes) The display mode of the hit is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol time-short state (S714), and if the pachinko machine 10 is a regular symbol time-short state (S714: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S715). As a result of determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 715: Yes), the process proceeds to S 717. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. , And the number of times of opening of the motorized accessory 640a is set.

  In the process of S 715, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S 715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S716), and the process proceeds to the processing of S719. In the process of S614, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the process proceeds to the process of S717. In the process of S717, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the motorized jack 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is 0 While setting to 2 seconds, the number of times of release is set to 1 time (S717), and the process proceeds to the processing of S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is dislocated (S712: No), a display mode at the time of disengaging is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time shortening state of the normal symbol (S719: Yes), the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device Is set to 3 seconds (S720), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S721), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S722). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S720 or the processing of S721 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S722, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S723). In the process of S723, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device Is set as When the stop display is set by the processing of S723, the variation display on the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update processing (see S1107) of the main processing (see FIG. 102) is executed next. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S713 or the process of S718, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (this time lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 98, S106) is the ordinary symbol It is determined whether it is a hit or not (S724). If the lottery result this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S 724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the motorized winning object 640 a attached to the second winning opening 640 is set (S 725), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S725, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 102) is performed next. The opening and closing control is started, and the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S716 or S717 end. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 99, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S803).

  Whether the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes the normal symbol opening (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S805). In the process of S805, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 101, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1001). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if not stored (S1005: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If generation information of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1012. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1114 of the main process (FIG. 102). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process (S1013, S1014) of the RAM, the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to step S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1005: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1004) S1007: Yes, while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the occurrence information of the power-off (S1008). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S1010, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Here, when the special symbol in fluctuation is stored, the display control unit 114 causes the sound lamp control unit 113 to variably display the power-on fluctuation image (see FIGS. 82 (b) to (C)). You will be instructed to The change instruction may be executed, for example, in the initial setting (S1001) in the start-up process, or may be executed in another process. Then, the interruption is permitted (S1011), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a periodic process of 4 m second cycle, and the counter update process of S1110 and S1111 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing (see FIG. 102), first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 92), and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. In addition, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 93) and the start winning process (see FIG. 96) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 103) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or 1) A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 102), but may be performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 92). The details of the jackpot control process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a motorized product opening / closing process is performed to control the opening / closing of the motorized product 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 (S1105). In the motorized product opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 98), the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S716 or the process of S717 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at devices 37A, 37B. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device 37A, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94) ends. In the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 94), the variation symbol being executed in 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol display device 37A. , 37B stop display (lighting display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S723 of the normal symbol change processing (refer to FIG. 98), the variation executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S713 or the processing of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 98) ).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1109) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1109: No), the first main processing is performed until it reaches the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. (1) Updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1110, S1111).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1108, if the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1 As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 100 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S1112 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1113). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1108 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1101 to S1107, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1101. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1101. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 102), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, a specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 103, S1104), first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, the process of S264 of the stop setting process (see FIG. 95) is executed, and if the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1201, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201: Yes), both the probability change flag 203g and the short time flag 203k are set off (S1202), and an opening command is set (S1203), This process ends.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1204). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1204 (S1204: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1204 that the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1204: Yes), the process of S1205 is executed. In the process of S1205, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1205). In the process of S1205, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1206), and A round number command indicating the number of rounds to start is set (S1207), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1205 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1205: No), whether the closing condition of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied It discriminates (S1208). If the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1208: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1209), and then the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied in the process of S1208 (S1208: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when 15 rounds are finished and the open / close door 65f1 is closed and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment) which is the ball discharging time has elapsed. It is determined as If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1210: Yes), the jackpot flag 203i is turned off (S1211), and the ending command is set (S1212). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot type is A or C (S1213). In the process of S1213, if the jackpot type is not A or C (S1213: No), 100 is set in the time saving medium counter (S1217), and then the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot type is A or C in the process of S1213 (S1213: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is turned on (S1214), and it is determined whether the jackpot type is A (S1215). If the jackpot type is not A (S1215: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is A in the process of S1215 (S1215: Yes), the short time flag 203k is turned on (S1216), and then this process is ended.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 115, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 104, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1514 (see FIG. 80) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current start-up process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S1302). As described later with reference to FIG. 80, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (S1516 in FIG. 106: Yes), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1519. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1519 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1302: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power is turned off in S1514. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. ) Is judged to be data destruction of the RAM 223 (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1519 after an instantaneous power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. In the case where it is started to start, since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1302: Yes), the current start-up process is after an instantaneous power failure and during the execution of the power-off process of S1519, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1304 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1304, the storage area of the whole range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process of S1519 is executed (see S1519 in FIG. 106). That is, since the power-off flag 223 y is turned on before the power-off processing of S 1519 is performed, the process of S 1308 is performed at the moment when the current start-up processing is performed when the power-off flag 223 y is turned on. This is a case where the power failure process has started after the power failure process of S1519 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1309), and the power-off flag 223y is set to OFF (S1310) The initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1311). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set (S1312), time setting processing is executed (S1313), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The details of the time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1308 when the power-off flag 223y is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S1304 to S1306 is performed via S1308. Or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1311, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1312). Then (S1311), the time setting process is executed (S1313), and the process shifts to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1309 is that, when the process of S1308 is reached via the processes of S1304 to S1306, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the time setting process (S1313) executed in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 described above will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing time setting processing (S1313). This time effect setting process (S1313) is a process for setting, in the effect time storage area 223g, information indicating the start time when the normal game period (effect mode A) and the time effect period (effect mode B) are executed. .

  In the time setting process (S1313), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1401). As the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC 292 is a clock means having a battery inside, and when assembling the pachinko machine 10, the same current time is initially set to the pachinko machine 10 with a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operation time. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to determine the "date". Therefore, for example, on Christmas Day, it is configured to be able to control to change to a background image dedicated to Christmas, or to display a special character or the like such as Santa.

  Then, based on the time information (power on time) acquired in the process of S1401, the normal game period (render mode A), the time effect period (render mode B), and the start time at which the specific time effect is executed (set) They are respectively calculated and set in the effect time storage area 223g (S1402), and this processing ends.

  The information set in the effect time storage area 223g in the process of S1402 will be specifically described by taking as an example the case where the power of the audio lamp control device 113 is turned on at 9:00. In the effect time storage area 223g, 9:55 after 55 minutes from the power on time (9:00) is set as information indicating the start time of the first time effect. Then, the time every hour (10:55, 11:55...) From the start time of the first time effect is set for 24 hours as information indicating the start time of the time effect. In addition, every hour (9:56, 9:57, 9:58, 9:59, 10:56, 10:57 ...) every hour from the start timing of time production during time production It is set as information indicating the start time (start timing) of the specific time effect. Furthermore, since the time effect period is 5 minutes, information indicating the time 5 minutes after the start time of the time effect (10:00, 11:00 ...) is that of the normal game period (effect mode A) It is set as information indicating the start time (see FIG. 91).

  In this control example, each time effect (time effect, specific time effect) is set to be performed based on the time when the power is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. The start time of (time effect, specific time effect) may be set. For example, hourly 00 minutes may be set as the start time of the time effect. Thereby, when turning on the power of the plurality of pachinko machines 10, even if the power-on time is shifted, the time presentation start time does not shift, and the plurality of pachinko machines 10 synchronously execute the time production can do.

  In this control example, the RTC 292 is used as the clocking means, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a counter may be provided as clock means, and the following may be performed. When measuring (counting) the normal gaming period (55 minutes), count up (or count down) the value of the counter periodically (for example, every second) after the normal gaming period (55 minutes) starts. Measure (timekeeping) with. Then, when the value of the counter reaches a value indicating 55 minutes (for example, 3300), it is determined that 55 minutes have elapsed. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide the RTC 292, so the pachinko machine 10 can be configured more inexpensively.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1501 has been executed (S1501), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1501: No), the processing proceeds to S1511 without performing the processing of S1502 to S1510. In the process of S1501, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (rendering) in S1502 to S1510, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1511 and the variable display setting process of S1512 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1511 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S1512 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1501 (S1501: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1503 to S1512 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1502) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1508 described later (S1503), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1504). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be.

  In addition, at the time of recovery from a power failure due to a power failure or the like, a production permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power failure is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start processing (see FIG. 101) of the main control device 110. . The voice lamp control device 113 creates a variation pattern command for display in the power on notification process (S1504) based on the reception of the rendering permission command including the variation of the special symbol, and the display control device Send towards 114. In the display control device 114, the fluctuation start command of the power-on fluctuation image is determined by the simple command determination process (refer to FIG. 118 (b)), and based on the fluctuation pattern based on the received command, The variable display is performed (see FIG. 82 (b) or (c)). Since the display variation pattern command created here is for performing the variation display with the power-on variation image which is a simple image as described above, the variation pattern selection process described later (see FIG. 110) It is simpler than what is selected in). As a result, the processing load for creating the display variation pattern command can be reduced, and the power-on variation image can be displayed with good response when recovering from a power failure.

  Furthermore, after the effect permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the start processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the effect permission command The main controller 110 transmits a stop command for stopping the variable display to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received in the simplified command determination process (see 118 (b)), and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 82 (b) or (C) stop).

  Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1505 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1505, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1507). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 has been confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1508), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1509). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1509, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1510). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1508 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S1509 is also executed in time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1511). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to the process of S1512. In the process of S1512, the variable display setting process is executed (S1512). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the variation display setting process (S1512), next, a synchronous effect management process for executing a effect based on the effect mode of the pachinko machine 10 is executed (S1513), and the specific time in the time effect period (effect mode B) A specific time effect process for executing effects is executed (S1514). Then, the ball entering effect setting process for executing the ball entering effect based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1515), and the process shifts to the process of S1516. The details of the synchronization effect management process (S1513), the specific time effect process (S1514), and the ball entering effect setting process (S1515) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, FIG. 114, and FIG. 116, respectively.

  When the ball entering effect setting process (S1515) is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1516). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: Yes), the power-off flag 223y and the power-off process flag are both turned on (S1518), and the power-off process is executed (S1519). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1520), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1516 (S1516: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1517: No), the process returns to S1501, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1517: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the command determination processing (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S1511), first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is detected from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether a command has been received (S1601). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1601: Yes), fluctuation pattern reception processing (S1602) is executed, and the process returns to the main processing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the details of the fluctuation pattern reception process (S1602) will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern reception process (S1602). In this variation pattern reception process (S1602), variation patterns are extracted based on the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110, and various prizes (upper and lower operation unit devices ( This is processing for setting the operation of the falling object 400, the expansion / contraction effect device (extension / contraction object) 540, the tilting operation unit (tilting object) 600, and the like.

  In the fluctuation pattern reception process, first, the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1701), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1702). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a falling symbol scenario in the extracted variation pattern type (S1703). If it is determined in the process of S1703 that there is a falling character scenario (S1703: Yes), the vertical movement unit device (falling character) 400 is to be moved. A drop combination scenario for moving the (drop combination) 400 is set (S1704). The falling symbol scenario set in the process of S1704 defines the operation of the vertical movement unit device (falling symbol) 400 for the same time as the variation time of the variation effect set based on the variation pattern type. is there. By driving the vertical drive motor 431 based on the dropping combination scenario, the vertical movement unit device (dropping combination) 400 and the fluctuation effect can be moved synchronously (cooperatively).

  After the process of S1704 is finished, it is then determined whether or not there is an opening setting of the door member 470 of the vertical movement unit device (falling object) 400 (S1705). In the process of S1705, when it is determined that the door member 470 is set to be open (S1705: Yes), excitation of the opening / closing drive motor 466 is not performed (off) so that the door member 470 is opened. Set (power off control). As a result, the static torque (so-called detent torque) of the open / close drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is minimized, and the inertial force moves the vertical movement unit device (dropping object) 400 in the falling direction. Thus, the door member 470 is opened. Although illustration is omitted, when the door member 470 is not set to be opened, that is, when the door member 470 is kept in the closed state, the opening drive motor 466 is controlled so as to stop the opening and closing drive motor 466. . Thus, when the door member 470 is not set to be opened, the static torque of the opening drive motor 466, that is, the door member 470 is closed even if the vertical movement unit device (dropper) 400 moves in the falling direction. Since the torque (so-called holding torque) for maintaining in the state is excited to be maximum, the door member 470 is maintained in the closed state and is not opened. The torque (holding torque) for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state may not be maximized, and the door member 470 may move when the vertical movement unit device (dropping object) 400 moves in the falling direction. The torque may be such that the door member 470 is not opened by the inertia force generated in In this case, since the current for exciting the open / close drive motor 466 can be weak, power consumption can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1705 that there is no release setting of the falling combination (S1705: No), the process of S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1707, and it is determined that there is no falling scenario. In the case (S1703: No), the process of S1704 to S1706 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1707.

  When the process of S1703, S1705 or S1706 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a stretchable-object scenario (S1707). In the process of S1707, when it is determined that there is a telescopic part scenario (S1707: Yes), the drive motor 561 is moved so that the front plate member 546 of the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) can move to the lower position. A telescopic object scenario for excitation control is set, and the process proceeds to the process of S1709. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1707 that there is no stretchable-object scenario (S1707: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1709.

  In the process of S1709, it is determined whether or not there is a tilting object scenario (S1709). If it is determined in the process of S1709 that there is a tilting object scenario (S1709: Yes), the drive motor 631 is excitation-controlled so that the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) can move to the overhang position. The tilt role scenario is set (S1710), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1709 that there is no tilt product scenario (S1709: No), the process of S1708 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 107, the description will be continued. If the variation pattern command has not been received in the process of S1601 (S1601: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1603). When the stop type command is received (S1603: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1604), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1605). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1603: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1606). And when the ball holding number command is received (S1606: Yes), it is determined whether the received ball holding number command is the special drawing 1 holding ball number command or the special drawing 2 holding ball number command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of main controller 110 (number of holding N1 of variation display in special symbol), special symbol 2 holding ball of main controller 110 The value of the number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1607). Further, in the processing of S1608, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is set. After the process of S1607 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 holding ball number command or the special figure 2 holding ball number command, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (start winning), or, the lottery of the special symbol line Since it is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when it is detected, the special symbol 1 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 is processed by the processing of S1607 every time a start winning is detected or every time a drawing of a special symbol is performed. The values of the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110. Therefore, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when detecting start winnings or drawing special symbols. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. In addition, when the processing of S1607 is executed, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is It is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1606, if the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1606: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1608). If it is determined in the process of S1608 that the winning information command has been received (S1608: Yes), the winning information storage area 223a stores the winning information (such as the lottery result of the special symbol) based on the received winning information command. (S1609), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the prize information command is not received (S1608: No), it is determined whether or not the command regarding the jackpot has been received (S1610). In the process of S1610, when the command related to the jackpot is received (S1610: Yes), the process corresponding to the received command related to the jackpot is executed (S1611), and this process ends. Examples of jackpot commands include an opening command, a round number command, and an ending command. Further, as the process corresponding to the received command regarding the jackpot, there is, for example, a process of setting a display opening command, a display round number command, and a display ending command.

  If it is determined in the process of S1610 that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S1610: No), it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (S1612). If it is determined in the process of S1612 that the stop command has been received (S1612: Yes), the process of stopping the variable display being executed is executed (S1613), and the avoidance flag 223i is set to OFF (S1614), A display stop command is set (S1615), and this process ends.

  The display stop command set by the process of S1615 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1501) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , And sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop command, the display control device 114 stops the change effect being executed in a display mode based on the stop type set by the stop type command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1612 that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), it is determined whether or not other commands have been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. Then (S1616), the processing returns to the main processing. If the other command is a command used in the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed control device 114 Set the command to send to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the variable display setting process (S1512) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1512). This variation display setting process (S1512) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation presentation, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1801). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1801: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1806. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S1802), and then the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is selected. A variation pattern selection process for selection is executed (S1803).

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1803) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1803). In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern type corresponding to the rendering mode is selected based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the effect counter 223 j counted by the voice lamp control device 113. is there.

  In the variation pattern selection process, first, the value of the effect counter 223 j is acquired (S 1901). Next, it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902). The effect mode is determined with reference to the value of the effect mode storage area 223h. As described above, the value of the effect mode storage area 223h indicates that it is effect mode A if "00H", indicates that it is effect mode B if it is "01H", and if it is "02H" It indicates that the effect mode is C.

  If it is determined in the process of S1902 that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: Yes), it is extracted in the process of S1702 of the fluctuation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) The variation pattern of the corresponding normal game period (rendering mode A) is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the variation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901 (S1903), and this process is performed. finish. Based on the variation pattern selected here, it is set as a variation pattern command for display in the variation display setting process described later (see S1804 in FIG. 109).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1902 that the current effect mode is not the effect mode A (normal game period) (S1902: No), then the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) It is determined whether or not (S1904).

  When it is determined in the process of S1904 that the value of the effect mode storage area 223h is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S1904: Yes), extraction is performed in the process of S1702 of the fluctuation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108). Based on the changed fluctuation pattern type and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the fluctuation pattern of the corresponding time effect period (rendering mode B) is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a (S1905), and this process is performed. finish.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1904 that the current rendering mode is not the rendering mode B (time rendering period) (S1904: No), the current rendering mode is the rendering mode C (time rendering extension period) is there. In this case, based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S1702 of the variation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108) and the effect counter 223j acquired in the process of S1901, the corresponding time effect extension period (effect mode C) A variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S1906), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S1803), since the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the current effect mode is selected, the fluctuation display according to each effect period (effect mode) is executed (displayed) Can.

  Referring back to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. When the process of S1803 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S1803, and the command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. The setting is made (S1804). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started. After the process of S1804 is finished, next, a notice selection process for setting a notice effect (indicating a degree of expectation for becoming a big hit) based on the result of the judgment of success or absence is executed (S1805). Note that this advance notice selection processing is also configured such that the advance notice effect corresponding to the current effect mode is selected.

  Here, the details of the advance notice selection process (S1805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process (S1805). The advance notice selection process (S1805) is a process for setting advance notice effect based on the result of the determination of success or failure according to the current effect mode, which is executed in the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 109).

  In the advance notice selection process (S1805), first, the effect counter 223j is acquired (S2001), and it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002). If it is determined in the process of S2002 that the current effect mode (value of effect mode storage area 223h) is effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: Yes), it is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Based on the judgment result of each holding ball and the value of the effect counter 223j, the normal notice effect which is the advance notice effect of the normal game period is selected (S2003), and the process proceeds to the process of S2011.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2002, if it is determined that the current effect mode is not the effect mode A (normal game period) (S2002: No), then the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) It is determined whether or not (S2004).

  In the process of S2004, if it is determined that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2004: No), the result of determination of success or failure of each holding ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a Then, based on the value of the effect counter 223j, the time advance notice effect which is the advance notice effect of the time effect period is selected (S2005), and the process proceeds to the process of S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether the time advance notice effect selected in the process of S2005 is a notice effect (countdown notice effect) including a display mode of the countdown (S2006). If it is determined in the process of S2006 that the selected time advance presentation effect is the countdown advance presentation effect (S2006: Yes), the avoidance flag 223i is turned on in order not to execute the specific time presentation (countdown effect). Then (S2007), the process proceeds to S2011. By setting the avoidance flag 223i to ON by the process of S2007, it is possible to determine that the countdown notice effect is to be executed. If the avoidance flag 223i is on, control is performed so that a specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed in a specific time effect process (see FIG. 114) described later (S2305 in FIG. 114: Yes). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) duplicate effects (countdown notice effect, specific time effect (countdown effect)) including the same display mode (countdown), and to make the player puzzled. Can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, when the countdown notice effect is performed based on entering the second winning opening 640, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON and control is performed so that the effect is not performed for a specific time. It is not limited to For example, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the timing at which the countdown notice effect is executed based on entering the second winning opening 640 is read (estimated). That is, it pre-reads (estimates) the period in which the countdown notice effect is performed. Based on the pre-reading (guess) result, it may be set up so that a specific time production (countdown production) will not be performed redundantly in a period when a countdown notice production is performed. Thereby, the process for performing specific time presentation can be stopped before the timing when specific time presentation is started. As a result, preparation for executing the specific time effect (for example, transfer processing of image data) can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  Further, preventing (suppressing) duplication is not limited to only the display mode, and it may be possible to prevent (suppressing) duplication of sounds and music. Furthermore, the audio may be prevented (suppressed) from being different from the display mode. For example, it is prevented (suppressed) that a voice "Please press a button" is not output even if a message "Please press a button" is not displayed.

  Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to only preventing (suppressing) duplication of effects including the same type of display mode, and may prevent continuous (or frequent) execution of effects including the same type of display mode. Specifically, the avoidance flag 223i is set to ON so that the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed in the vicinity (for example, one minute before and after) of the period in which the countdown advance effect is executed. This makes it possible to provide the player with a more easily understood gaming machine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2006 that the selected time advance presentation effect is other than the advance presentation effect of the countdown (S2006: No), the process of S2007 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2011.

  In the process of S2004, if it is determined that the current rendering mode is not the rendering mode B (time rendering period) (S2004: No), then, is the current rendering mode the rendering mode C (time rendering extension period)? It is determined whether or not it is (S2008). If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the current rendering mode is the rendering mode C (time rendering extension period) (S2008: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the change determination result of the change is a win. (S2009).

  If it is determined in the process of S2009 that the change judgment result is a win (S2009: Yes), a super fish school notice effect that is a notice effect that indicates that the change will be a big win is selected ( The process proceeds to S2010) and S2011.

  When the process of S2003, S2006, S2007 or S2010 is finished, a notice command for display indicating the selected notice effect is set (S2011), and the process ends. The display notice command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent to the controller 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display preview command, the display control device 114 displays a preview effect corresponding to the command on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current rendering mode is not the rendering mode C (time rendering extension period) in the process of S2008 (S2008: No), or in the process of S2009, the determination result of the variation is out of order When it is determined that (S2009: No), since there is no advance notice effect to be executed, the present process is ended as it is. In the processes of S2003 and S2005, the advance effect may not be selected depending on the value of the effect counter 223j, and in this case as well, the process is ended without setting the advance notice command for display.

  In this control example, in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the specific time effect (countdown effect) executed periodically (every minute) in the time effect period (effect mode B) is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific time effect (countdown effect) may be performed as in the time effect period (effect mode B). In this case, the avoidance flag 223i may be used to perform control such that a specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed at a timing overlapping with the countdown advance effect, as in the time effect period (effect mode B). As a result, even in the time rendering extension period (rendering mode C), it is possible to suppress that the countdown notice rendering and the like are redundantly executed, and it is possible to provide the gaming machine which is easy to understand for the player. Moreover, the display mode of the specific time effect which is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C) may not include the display mode of the countdown. Thereby, even if the specific time effect is periodically executed in the time effect extension period (effect mode C), the effect including the same display mode (countdown) is not executed. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

  Referring back to FIG. 109, the description will be continued. After the process of S1805 is finished, it is then determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S1806: No), since the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S1806: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S1807), and then in the process of S1605 of the command determination process (see FIG. 107) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1808). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1809), and the process shifts to the processing of S1810. In the process of S1810, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1810). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a synchronous rendering management process (S1513) which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the synchronization effect management process (S1513). In this synchronous effect management process (S1513), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect showing it Execute the process to set the mode.

  In the synchronization effect management process (FIG. 112, S1513), first, time information of "hour, minute" is acquired from the RTC 292 (S2101). Then, it is determined whether a value ("00H") indicating effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2102). When it is determined that the value ("00H") indicating the effect mode A is set (S2102: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the transition timing (time effect period) to the effect mode B (time effect period) Whether or not it has become a period presentation period (step S2103). In the process of S2103, when it is determined that it is the transition timing to effect mode B (time effect period), that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of time effect (S2103: Yes), effect mode storage area 223h Set a value (“01H”) indicating effect mode B (time effect period) to (S2104), set a display effect mode change command based on effect mode B (time effect period) (S2105), and execute this process finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2103 that it is not a time presentation period, the processes of S2104 and S2105 are skipped, and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the value ("00H") indicating the effect mode A (normal game period) is not set (S2102: No), the effect mode B (display mode storage area 223h) It is determined whether a value (“01H”) indicating a time effect period is set (S2106). In the process of S2106, when it is determined that the value ("01H") indicating the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S2106: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S2101 is the end of time effect Then, it is determined whether it is within 3 seconds, that is, within 3 seconds until the end timing of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period) (S2107).

  In the process of S2107, when it is determined that it is within 3 seconds until the end timing of the time effect period (the start timing of the normal game period) (S2107: Yes), an extension effect for executing (displaying) the extension effect The setting process is executed (S2108). Thereafter, the processing returns to the main processing (see FIG. 106). The extension effect setting process (S2108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2107 that the acquired time data is not within 3 seconds from the end of time rendering, it is the case that it is longer than 3 seconds until the end timing of the time rendering period , And the process of S2108 is skipped, and the process ends.

  In the process of S2106, a value ("00H") indicating effect mode B (time effect period) is not set in effect mode storage area 223h, that is, the current effect mode is effect mode C (time effect extension period) If it is determined that there is (S2106: No), it is determined whether or not it is outside the time effect extension period, that is, whether or not it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (effect mode C) (S2109). If it is determined in the process of S2109 that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S2109: Yes), a value ("00H") indicating effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h. Then (S2110), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2111), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2109 that the acquired time data is not the end timing of the time rendering extension period (S2109: No), the processes of S2110 and S2111 are skipped, and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, an extension effect setting process (S2108) which is one process in the synchronization effect management process (see FIG. 112) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension effect setting process (S2108).

  In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 113, S2108), first, it is determined whether a jackpot game is in progress (S2201). If it is determined that a jackpot game is being played (S2201: Yes), a value ("00H") indicating effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223h (S2202). Then, a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S2203), and this processing ends.

  In the present control example, as described above, when the jackpot game is being executed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (rendering mode B) (S2201: Yes), usually after the end of the jackpot game Although control is made to shift to the game period (effect mode A) (S2202 and S2203), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), even if the big hit game is being executed, if the big hit game is ended before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B) The time effect period (effect mode B) may be set. In addition, if it is determined that the jackpot will be a jackpot even if a jackpot game is being executed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period (reproduction mode B) (if the held prize information is a jackpot) After the end of the jackpot game, it may be shifted to a time rendering extension period (rendering mode C). As a result, even when the jackpot game is being executed, extension effects and the like can be performed (displayed) three seconds before the end of the time effect period (effect mode B), so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the jackpot game is not being played (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204). In the process of S2204, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (effect mode B) (S2204: Yes), whether or not the re-change effect is set, that is, the extension effect is executed ( It is determined whether or not transition to the effect mode C is determined (S2205). If the re-variation effect is set, that is, if it is determined that the extension effect is executed thereafter (to shift to the effect mode C) (S2205: Yes), the effect mode is stored in the effect mode storage area 223h. The value ("02H") indicating C is set (S2206), a display effect mode change command based on the effect mode C is set (S2207), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the re-variation effect is not set (S2205: No), then it does not shift to the time effect extension period (render mode C), and the normal game period (render mode A) In order to shift to), the process shifts to the processing of S2202. As a result, when the time effect period (effect mode B) ends (S2204: Yes), when the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is not transitioned (S2205: No), the effect mode A (normal game period) occurs. (S2202 and S2203).

  If it is determined in the process of S2204 that the end timing of the time rendering period (rendering mode B) is not reached (that is, the time rendering is continuously executed) (S2204: No), the winning information storage area 223a is hit. It is determined whether or not the winning combination information as in the above case is stored, or whether the result of the change in the determination is a win (S2208). In the process of S2208, when it is determined that the winning information to be hit is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, or it is determined that the variation judgment is the winning (S2208: Yes), the variation to be winning ends The time until it is done is calculated, and it sets as production time (extension production time) of time production extension period (S2209). Then, the re-variation effect is set (S2210), and the process ends.

  Here, the re-variation effect is an effect to indicate to the player as if the change of the new special symbol was started while suggesting the transition from the time effect period to the time effect extension period. . Specifically, the display mode in which the display mode of the school of fish appears from the right is displayed, and the variable display of the third symbol (reduced) which is changed to the display mode which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize again It is changed (expanded) to the possible (easiness) mode. As described above, in the present control example, when the remaining time of the time rendering period (rendering mode B) is 3 seconds or less, the display mode is switched to the precursor display mode, and the second to the previous execution (display) The variable display of 3 symbols is changed to a display mode (reduced display) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. In the re-variation effect, when changing (reducing) the third symbol's variable display changed (reduced) to a display mode that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize, when changing (enlarged) the visual pattern again (easily). The display mode in which the display mode of the school of fish appears from the right is displayed. As a result, since the player pays attention to the display mode of the fish school, it is possible to change (enlarge) the variable display of the third symbol without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2208, when the winning information storing the winning information is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and it is determined that the result of the determination of success or failure during the change is out (S2208: No), S2209 and S2210 The process is skipped and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, a specific time presentation process (S1514) which is one process of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific time effect process (S1514). The specific time effect process (S1514) is a process for executing (displaying) the specific time effect in the time effect period (effect mode B).

  In the specific time effect process, first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S2301). Next, with reference to the effect mode storage area 233h, it is determined whether the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302). If it is determined in the process of S2302 that the current effect mode is not the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: No), it is not determined that the timing for performing the specific time effect is determined in the subsequent processing. , This processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the current effect mode is the effect mode B (time effect period) (S2302: Yes), then the time information (current time) acquired in the process of S2301; Based on the information indicating the start time of the specific time effect stored in the effect time storage area 223g, it is determined whether or not the specific time effect timing is reached (S2303). In the process of S2303, when it is determined that the specific time presentation timing is not reached (S2303: No), since it is not the timing to execute the specific time presentation, the present processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S2303 that the effect is for a specific time (S2303: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a demonstration effect is being executed (S2304). If it is determined in the process of S2304 that a demonstration effect is being executed (S2304: Yes), this process is ended as it is. In this way, during the demonstration effect, that is, when the player is not playing a game, it is an effect that suggests whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probability change gaming state (latency probability change state). The effect can not be displayed for a specific time, and it is possible to prevent (suppress) the suggestion of the gaming state to the player who is not playing the game.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the demonstration effect is not being executed in the process of S2304 (S2304: No), it is then determined whether the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305). In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the avoidance flag 223i is on (S2305: Yes), it is the case where the countdown notice effect is executed among the notice effects based on entering the second winning opening 640. Therefore, in order not to display the specific time effect (countdown effect) which is the effect including the display mode (countdown) of the same type, the processing is ended as it is (that is, the setting of the specific time effect (countdown effect) is not performed) ).

  If it is determined in the process of S2305 that the avoidance flag 223i is off (S2305: No), a display specific time effect command is set to execute effect for a specific time (countdown effect), and this process is performed. Finish.

  When the countdown notice effect based on the winning to the second winning a prize port 640 is executed during execution of the specific time effect by the processing of S2305 (when the avoidance flag 223i is on), the countdown according to the specific time effect It is controlled so that the effect is not executed (S2305: Yes). As a result, since the countdown notice effect and the specific time effect (countdown effect), which are effects including the same display mode (countdown), are not performed redundantly, it is possible to provide a game easy for the player to understand.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the ball entering effect setting process (S1515), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball entering effect setting process (S1515). The ball entering effect setting process (S1515) is a process for displaying the ball entering effect based on the game ball having entered the second winning opening 640 during the time saving game. In this ball entering effect, the type to be selected is changed according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the jackpot. In addition, the area where the ball entering effect is displayed is set in order from the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the ball entering effect setting process (S1515), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a time saving game (S2401). If it is determined in the process of S2401 that the time saving game is not being performed, the game entering effect is not executed (displayed) based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640, so this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that a time saving game is in progress (S2401: Yes), it is then determined whether the gaming ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402). In the present control example, a ball entry command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the game ball entering the second winning opening 640 in the main control unit 110 (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 stores the entry to the second winning opening 640 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 by receiving the entry command, and in the process of S2402, the second winning opening It is determined whether or not there is a ball entry to 640.

  In addition, it is not restricted to this, The voice lamp control device that the gaming ball entered the second winning opening 640 by providing the entering detection switch which detects that the gaming ball entered the second winning opening 640 The detection may be made at 113. Also, the ball entry detection switch may be used in combination with a switch that detects ball entry into the second winning opening 640 used in the main control device 110. Thereby, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the game ball has not entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the above-mentioned ball entry command is received from the main control unit 110 and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second winning opening 640 (S2402: Yes), the prize information storage Entry effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the area 223a and the entry effect selection table 222b (S2403). Then, based on the ball entering effect selected in the process of S2403 and the display area counter 223f, a ball entry for display effect command is set (S2404). The display ball game effect command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1502) of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221. , And sent to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ball game effect command, the display control device 114 displays the ball game effect in the display area (the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display device 81) corresponding to the command.

  When the process of S2404 is completed, the value of the display area counter 223f is incremented by 1 (S2405), and it is determined whether the value of the display area counter 223f obtained by the addition is 5 (S2406). If it is determined in the process of S2406 that the value of the display area counter 223f is 5 (S2406: Yes), the ball is entered into the fourth area 81d (see FIG. 89 or 90) in the ball entry effect setting process. Is set, and then the value of the display area counter 223f is initialized to 1 in order to set the area for displaying the ball entering effect to the first area 81a (see FIG. 89 or 90) (S2407), This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2406 that the display area counter 223f is not 5 (that is, any one of 2 to 4) (S2406: No), the value of the display area counter 223f needs to be initialized. Because there is not, the processing of S2407 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Here, the ball entering effect can be displayed in the area of the third symbol display device 81 according to the display area counter 223f by the process of S2404. Specifically, in the case where the value of the display area counter 223f is 1, it is in the first area 81a of the third symbol display device 81, and in the case of 2, the value is 3 in the second area 81b of the third symbol display device 81. In the case of being 4, the ball entering effect is displayed in the first region 81c of the third symbol display device 81, and in the case of being 4, it is displayed in the fourth region 81d of the third symbol display device 81. Then, the prize effect setting process (S1515) is executed by the processes of S2405 to S2407, and the value of the display area counter 223 can be updated each time the ball entry effect command for display is set, so the third symbol The ball entering effects can be displayed in order from the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the display device 81, and after displaying the ball entering effects in the fourth area 81 d, the ball entering effects are again performed from the first area 81 a It can be displayed in order. As a result, the ball entering effect based on one ball entering will be continuously displayed until four game balls are newly hit to the second winning opening 640 thereafter, and the game ball to the second winning hole 640 Even when the pitch of entering the ball is very short, it is possible to secure the time for displaying the ball entering effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a defect that the player can not visually recognize (recognize) the entering effect (or is difficult).

  In this control example, the ball entering effect is displayed in order (clockwise) in each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to display in reverse order (counterclockwise) or may be displayed randomly. Furthermore, the display order may be changed when a specific effect or change is executed, or when there is winning information on a big hit. This makes it possible to change the order of the ball entry effects to be displayed, to prevent the game from becoming monotonous, and to prevent the player from being bored early.

  Moreover, you may change the display order of the ball entering presentation displayed on each area | region (from the 1st area | region 81a to 4th area | region) of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 according to the expectation degree used as a big hit. For example, in the case where the degree of expectation for the big hit is low, the ball entering effect is displayed in the order (clockwise) in each of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d. Will be displayed in reverse order (counterclockwise). As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation in the display order of the ball effects displayed in each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area), and each area (the first area 81a to the fourth area) Since it is not necessary to see in detail the contents of the entering effect displayed on the screen, it is possible to reduce the burden on the player.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the ball entering effects are displayed in order from the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d of the third symbol display device 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display area of the third symbol display device may be further subdivided (for example, divided into six regions from the first region to the sixth region) and displayed in order, or the display of the third symbol display device The number of divisions of the area may be reduced (eg, divided into two areas from the first area to the second area) for display.

  Further, in this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to select in which of the display areas (the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d) of the third symbol display device 81 to display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display control device 114 may be configured to select. Thereby, the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 134. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, data of one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read out from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2501), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S2501) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2501) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S2601). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2602). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2601.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2602, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2602, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs and fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2603). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2604), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S2501 in FIG. 116) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S2502 in FIG. 116) (S2605), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2501) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 117, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2601 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S2602. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2603 to S2605 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2601 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S2601. And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2602, the processing of S2603 to S2605 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2603 to S2605 without performing the processes of S2601 and S2602. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2502). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2503). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2503, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2504). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2504, the simple image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S2505). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S4702 in FIG. 132A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, in the meantime, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 82), which are power-on images, are simply drawn. A command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and a simplified display setting process (see S2810 in FIG. 118B) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first winning opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is from the main control unit 110 by the voice lamp control device If it is via 113, that is, if a display variation pattern command is received, a power variation image (see FIG. 82) should be displayed immediately during the variation presentation period to perform a simple variation presentation Can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S2505, interrupt permission is set (S2506), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S2506, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (a), a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 118 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 118 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 87) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2801: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not the power-on image (see FIG. 82A), In order to display a normal effect image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2802) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2803) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2802), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127.

  In the display setting process (S2803), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2802) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2804). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2803) or the simple display setting processing (S2809) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  After the task processing, the effect information correction processing is executed (S2805). In this effect information correction process (S2805), among the images for one frame determined in the task process described above, various power-on images (displayed at power-on, power-on fluctuation when used for display at power on) Correct the presence / absence of display, display coordinate position, and enlargement ratio for sprites of images and power-on title images. The effect information correction process (S2805) may be configured to be executed in the task process (S2804).

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2806). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2807). In this drawing process, types of sprites constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2804) and the effect information correction process (S2805), and transfer setting process (S2806) The drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the above, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2808). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2808, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the “off” or “chance” is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2801: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2809) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2810) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 119 to 127, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2802) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 119, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2901), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S2901: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2803) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S2902). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2903).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2904), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2904: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2905), the process returns to S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 120 (a), details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2905) will be described. FIG. 120 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 3001).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S3001, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3001 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S3001 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3003). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3003. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3004), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 3005). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S3006), and the effect that the telescopic effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is moved is executed. Special effect correction processing for correcting the effect screen is executed (S3007). When the process of S3007 ends, the variation pattern command process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By performing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3005, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S3002. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the details of the special effect correction process (S3007) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the special effect correction process (S3007). This special effect correction process (S3007) is a display device (third symbol display device 81 or 81) when the effect of moving the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is performed. It is a process for correcting the display mode (position, size) of various power-on images displayed on the sub display device 690).

  In the special effect correction process (S3007), first, it is determined whether or not the effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command is the effect of moving the expansion / contraction effect device (the expansion / contraction object) 540 (whether or not there is an expansion / contraction object scenario) (S3201). If it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is an expansion and contraction role scenario (S3201: Yes), the front member 546 of the expansion and contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) moves to the lower position in the variation, and the third symbol It is a case where an effect in which the display device 81 is difficult to visually recognize (or invisible) is executed. In this case, the expansion / contraction object movable correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233 m from the correction information table 234 a 3 (S 3202), and the process proceeds to S 3205. By the process of S3202, the power-on fluctuation image (see FIG. 83A) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is corrected and displayed on the sub display device 690. Therefore, even when the front member 546 of the expansion and contraction device 540 moves to the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the player can easily visually recognize the fluctuation image upon power-on by looking at the sub display device 690. it can. Here, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the power-on time fluctuation image is a “o” symbol displayed on the upper right of the third symbol display device 81. In addition to the "o" symbol, the "x" symbol is also displayed as a variation image. This fluctuation image indicates that the special symbol (the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is being displayed in a variable manner by alternately displaying the "o" symbol and the "x" symbol. And, when the “o” symbol is stopped and displayed, the hit of the special symbol is notified, and when the “x” symbol is stopped and displayed, the removal of the special symbol is notified.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3201 that there is no expansion / contraction item scenario (S3201: No), then, the effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command is the effect of moving the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) It is determined whether or not (whether or not there is a tilting object scenario) (S3203). If it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is a tilt object scenario (S3203: Yes), the tilt operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 is moved in the variation, and the sub In this case, an effect that makes the display device 690 difficult to view is performed. In this case, correction information for moving the tiltable object is set in the correction information storage area 233m from the correction information table 234a3 (S3204), and the process shifts to the processing of S3205. Even in the case where the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) provided with the sub display device 690 is moved by the processing of S3204 and the effect that the sub display device 690 becomes difficult to view is executed, the player The power-on fluctuation image displayed on the symbol display device 81 can be easily viewed.

  Further, in the processing of S3202 and S3204 described above, the display is easy for the player to visually recognize by setting the information for correcting the display mode (position, size) of the power-on fluctuation image according to the effect to be executed. It is controlled to become an aspect. As a result, since it is not necessary to hold an image in a display mode that is easy for the player to visually recognize for each effect to be executed, the area of the ROM 234 can be saved.

  When the process of S3202 or S3204 is finished, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to ON (S3205), and the process ends. In the special effect correction process (S3007), the special effect correction flag 233n turned on in the process of S3205 is a display mode (position, size) of various power-on images upon execution of the expansion / contraction object scenario or the tilt object scenario. Is a flag indicating that the information for correcting the By setting the special effect correction flag 233n to ON, correction information for a normal effect is obtained despite execution of a variation based on an expansion / contraction product scenario or a tilt object scenario in the effect information correction process described later. Can be prevented (suppressed) from being stored in the correction information storage area 233 m. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3203 that there is no tilt product scenario (S3203: No), the present process ends.

  Note that, as described above, the tilting operation unit (tilting object) 600 includes the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 (see FIG. 50), and these curtain members are tilting operation units. The sub display device 690 provided in can be switched between an open state where the player can visually recognize, and a closed state where the player can not visually recognize the sub display device 690. Therefore, when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, the image displayed on the sub display device 690 may be corrected to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, whether or not the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, as in the case of determining the movement of the telescopic part or tilting part described above, in the part scenario in the corresponding effect It may be determined based on the origin point, and the origin position of the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 is determined by the origin sensor detecting, and it is determined that these curtain members are the origin position (closed state) When it is turned on, the display of the sub display device 690 may be switched to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, even when the first curtain member 624 and the second curtain member 625 are in the closed state, that is, in a state where visual recognition of the sub display device 690 becomes difficult due to a defect or the like, the display image of the sub display device 690 is corrected Can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

  Furthermore, in the above-described tilting operation unit (tilting combination) 600 and the expansion and contraction rendering device (extension and contraction combination) 540, the correction information is changed based on the determination result of the origin sensor that detects the origin position. It is also good. As a result, even in the case where the product or the like breaks down and the operation is different from the product scenario, the state is accurately detected, and various effects are played by the game of the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690. It can be displayed to a position where the person can see.

  In the present embodiment, the case has been described in which the expansion / contraction effect device 540 moves up and down and the tilting operation unit 600 tilts. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The tilting operation unit 600 slides the front side of the third symbol display device 81 When the operation scenario to operate is set, processing similar to the content executed in the special effect correction processing (S3007) may be executed. Even when the tilting operation unit 600 performs a sliding operation, a series of operation scenarios in which the sliding operation is performed is set by the audio lamp control device 113. In that case, since the display control variable pattern command notifies that the voice lamp control device 113 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the slide operation, slide operation correction information is set in the correction information storage area 233 m in that case. Here, the slide operation correction information is the power-on fluctuation image ("o" symbol (or "x" shown in FIG. 83 (a)) that is corrected and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the slide operation. The display coordinates are set so as to move to a position where the variation display on the symbol is not located on the back side of the tilting operation unit 600 in which the sliding operation is performed. In this embodiment, the fluctuation image (see FIG. 83 (a)) is displayed at the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, but in the case where it is displayed at the lower right, the tilting operation unit 600 is from the right When the slide operation is performed in the left direction, the slide operation (moving) is performed in the left direction gradually in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and the display setting is performed. Such coordinate information is set in the slide operation correction information. In the case where the display is slid to the left in accordance with the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 and moved to the area where the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, the tilting operation unit 600 is displayed. The coordinates may be set so as to move to and display on the sub display device 690 built in. By being configured in this manner, it is possible to easily display a fluctuation image (see FIG. 83A) indicating that the player is in the process of fluctuation of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, although the target to be moved and displayed is a variation image (see FIG. 83A), the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a holding symbol. It may be a symbol of a character or the like. The slide operation correction information described above is preset in the display control device 114 in accordance with the operation scenario of the slide operation set by the audio lamp control device 113, and coordinate information in accordance with the slide operation timing. Is set to be variable.

  Further, in the present control example, the display positions of the various power-on images are corrected. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 at the time of normal rendering You may make it correct | amend display positions, such as (, a change pattern).

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2904 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2904: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2906), If there is a display variation type command (S2906: Yes), a stop type command processing is executed (S2907), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2907) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, it corresponds to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, any chance eyes) indicated by the display stop type command A stop type table is determined (S3101), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 118 (b)) is executed. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S3102).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3103), and ends this type-of-stop command processing and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3102 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2804), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S3102 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S3103, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S3101, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S3102.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2906 that there is no display type command for suspension (S2906: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a jackpot related command among the unprocessed commands (S2908). When it is determined in the process of S2908 that there is a jackpot related command (S2908: Yes), the jackpot related command process is executed (S2909), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 122, details of the jackpot related command processing (S2909) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related command processing (S2909). This jackpot related command processing (S2909) is processing corresponding to various commands (opening command for display, number-of-round-display command, display ending command) for executing the jackpot effect received from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a process to execute.

  In the jackpot related command processing (S2909), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S3301). If it is determined in the process of S3301 that there is a display opening command (S3301: Yes), an opening command process (S3302) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3303.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S3302) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a). FIG. 123 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3401 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3403), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3404). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3405), the opening command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3404, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3401, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the process of S3402 while extracting the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is the character ROM 234 in advance As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Further, when the opening command processing is executed, an opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thus, while the opening effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81, the image data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to transfer image data used for the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, so the first round is shown. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display number-of-rounds command has been received, there will be a lot of waiting between the end of the opening effect and the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will occur and the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation is stopped.

  In addition, since the ending command for display instructing the start of ending effect is transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds) are finished, If image data required for ending effecting is transferred from character ROM 234 to video RAM 236 for ordinary use since the ending command for display is received, there will be a lot of waiting time before the ending effecting starts after the end of the rounding effect As a result, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or uncomfortable feeling as to whether the operation has stopped.

  Therefore, in the present control example, when the opening command for display is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and the variation display of the jackpot is finished in the third symbol display device 81 It controls so that transfer of data required for round production and ending production ends. Thereby, when the opening effect is finished in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for five rounds) The ending effect can be started immediately in the third symbol display device 81 when it is finished, so that the player does not feel uneasy or uncomfortable feeling that the operation is not stopped. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the stop type of the big hit, transfer of image data used in the opening effect is started from there. It is controlled so that transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is completed until the variation effect which becomes the big hit in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. As a result, when the third stage symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect to be a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 can immediately start the opening effect, so the player does not know whether the operation has stopped. And, I will not give a sense of incongruity. Thus, the player can be relieved.

  Referring back to FIG. 122, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S3301 that there is no display opening command (S3301: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3303), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S3303: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305.

  Here, details of the round number command process (S3304) will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (b). FIG. 123 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing (S3304). The round number command process (S3304) is to execute a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 3501). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3505), and the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot related command processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S3303 that there is no display round number command (S3303: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S3305), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S3305: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S3306), and the process returns to the command determination process. On the other hand, if there is no display ending command in the process of S3305 (S3305: No), the process of S3306 is skipped, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S3306) will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124 (a) is a flowchart showing the ending command process (S3306). The ending command process (S3306) is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined number of rounds display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display data table buffer 233d. It sets to (S3601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602).

  Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3601, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3604). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3605), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2908 that there is no jackpot related command (S2908: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a notice command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2910), the notice for display If there is a command (S2910: Yes), the advance notice command process is executed (S2911), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 124 (b), the details of the advance notice command process (S2911) will be described. FIG. 124 (b) is a flowchart showing the advance notice command process. The notice command process is a process corresponding to the notice command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the notice command processing, first, the notice effect display data table indicated by the display notice command is determined, and the determined notice effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S3701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702).

  Then, based on the notice effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3705), the advance notice command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By setting the display data table buffer 233 d based on the notice effect display data table by the notice command processing (S 2911), the notice effect set corresponding to the effect mode in the sound lamp control device 113 is the third symbol It will be displayed on the display device 81.

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2910 that there is no advance notice command for display (S2910: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a ball entry for display effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2912), If there is a ball entry effect command for display (S2912: Yes), a ball entry effect command process is executed (S2913), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

  Here, the details of the ball entering effect command processing (S2913) will be described with reference to FIG. 125 (a). FIG. 125 (a) is a flowchart showing the ball entering effect command processing (S2913). In this ball entering effect command process (S2913), a process corresponding to the display ball entering effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

  In the ball entering effect command processing, first, the ball entering effect display data table indicated by the display ball entering effect command is determined. Then, the determined ball entry effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed so as to be displayed in the display area (one of the first area 81a to the fourth area 81d) indicated by the command. The buffer 233d is set (S3801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802).

  Then, based on the entering effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3805), and the ball entering effect command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  The display data table buffer 233 d is set by the ball entry effect command processing (S 2913) based on the ball entry effect display data table and the display area indicated by the command, and thus the sound lamp control device 113 is selected. The ball entering effect is sequentially displayed on the display areas (the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d) of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the ball entering effects are sequentially displayed in the four display areas (the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d) provided on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering effects of up to four types are performed. Can be simultaneously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2912 that there is no ball entry effect command for display (S2912: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display specific time effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2914) ), If there is a display specific time effect command (S2914: Yes), execute a specific time effect command process (S2915), and return to the process of S2901.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 125 (b), details of the specific-time effect command process (S2915) will be described. FIG. 125 (b) is a flowchart showing the specific time effect command process (S2915). The specific time effect command process (S2915) is to execute a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the specific time effect command processing, first, the specific time effect display data table indicated by the display specific time effect command is determined, and the determined specific time effect display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It sets to buffer 233 d (S3901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 3902).

  Then, based on the specific time effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S3905), and the ball entering effect command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By setting the display data table buffer 233 d based on the specific time effect display data table by this specific time effect command processing (S 2915), the specific time effect (countdown effect) selected in the audio lamp control device 113 is 3 will be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2914 that there is no display specific time effect command (S2914: No), it is then determined whether there is a display effect mode change command among the unprocessed commands (S2916) ), If there is a display effect mode change command (S2916: Yes), effect mode change command processing is executed (S2917), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, the details of the effect mode change command processing (S2917) will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (a). FIG. 126 (a) is a flowchart showing effect mode change command processing (S2917). The effect mode change command process (S2917) is to execute a process corresponding to the display specific time effect command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the effect mode change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233p is set to ON (S4001), and the effect mode flag 233r corresponding to the effect mode type based on the received command is set to ON (S4002). Finish.

  Processing (S4910 to S4915) for changing the rear surface image in the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 133) described later is executed by the rear surface image change flag 233p which is set to ON in the processing of S4001. In addition, the effect mode flag 233r set to ON in S4002 is referred to in the process for changing the back image in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4911 in FIG. 133), and the effect mode flag 233r is displayed. The rear image is changed based on the set effect mode type. Thereby, the rear image can be changed in accordance with the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the rear image can be changed based on the effect mode being changed, and the player can be easily recognized that the effect mode has been changed.

  Referring back to FIG. 119, the description will be continued. When it is determined in the process of S2916 that there is no display effect mode command (S2916: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a display stop command among the unprocessed commands (S2918). If there is a stop command for use (S2918: Yes), a stop command process is executed (S2919), and the process returns to the process of S2901.

  Here, the details of the stop command process (S2919) will be described with reference to FIG. 126 (b). FIG. 126 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop command process (S2919). The stop command process (S2919) is to execute a process corresponding to the display stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop command process, the special effect correction flag 233n is set to off (S4101), and the process ends. As described above, the special effect correction flag 233n set to off in the process of S4101 is the expansion / contraction effect device in the special effect correction process (S3007) that is executed when the variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. The correction information corresponding to the correction information storage area 233 m when there is a telescopic symbol scenario in which 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable or in the case where there is a tilting pivotal object scenario in which the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable. The correction information of the table 234a3 is stored and set to ON.

  The stop command process is a process that is executed based on the stop command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 when each variation effect is stopped. Therefore, when the variable-effect production based on the telescopic part scenario or the tilting part scenario is stopped, the special presentation correction flag 233 n is turned off. Thereby, in the effect information correction process (see S2804) executed in the V interruption process (see FIG. 118B), the correction information for the normal effect or the correction information for the demonstration effect is set in the correction information storage area 233m. As a result, an image in which coordinates and the like displayed on the basis of the variation effects of the telescopic feature scenario or the tilt scenario are corrected to the original coordinates and the like and displayed.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2918 that there is no display stop command (S2918: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2920). For example (S2920: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2921), and the process returns to S2901.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2921) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S4201). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4201, the type of error generated is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S4202, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description will return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2920 that there is no error command (S2920: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2922), and the process returns to S2901.

  Other unprocessed commands include, for example, a rear image change command. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  If the back image change command has been received, the back image change command processing is executed (S2922). In this rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag 223p for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S4703) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command is set to on. Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 223p set by the back image change command process is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the set back image discrimination flag. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the current time is determined from the set back image discrimination flag The rear image type to be displayed in is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored The video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the rear surface image change command processing, when it is determined that two or more rear surface image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear surface image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the previously received rear surface image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the process of S2901 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2901: Yes ), The processing of S2902 to S2922 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2901 to S2922 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2901 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2809) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image (see FIG. 82), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 120 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 120 (b)) which are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed. With regard to the command of, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  In addition, when the power is cut off during fluctuation of the special symbol and then restored, the special transmitted in S1010 of the startup process (refer to Figure 101) executed by the above-mentioned MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on. In the process of S1504 of the main process (see FIG. 106) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, the voice control device 113 receives the effect permission command including that the symbol is changing, and the display control device The display control apparatus 114 receives the fluctuation start command (S1616 in S1616 of the command determination process (FIG. 107, S1511)) of the power-on fluctuation image to be output to 114 and the simplified command determination process (S2809). Start the variable display in the simplified display setting process (S2810) that is received and processed after that. Setting the display data table-on change image on the display data table buffer 233 d) is set. At the timing when the main control unit 110 outputs an instruction to start fluctuation of the power-on-time fluctuation image corresponding to the special symbol that was fluctuating at the time of power-off, the power-on fluctuation image is the power of the resident video RAM 235 Since it has been transferred to the insertion time fluctuation image area 235b, the start of the fluctuation display is immediately executed (display start) in the third symbol display device 81. In this case, power-on fluctuation images shown in FIGS. 82 (b) to 82 (c) are alternately displayed.

  It should be noted that after the presentation permission command based on the game being executed at the time of power off is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the startup process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 101), it is executed based on the presentation permission command The main controller 110 transmits a stop command for stopping the variable display to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 based on the reception of the stop command. The display control device 114 determines that the display stop command has been received in the simplified command determination process (see 118 (b)), and the power-on fluctuation image (FIG. 82 (b) or (C) stop).

  If the display control device 114 completes the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 before receiving the display stop command for stopping the power-on fluctuation image, only the power-on fluctuation image is received. Is displayed at the coordinate position (see FIG. 83 (a)) for the normal effect of the third symbol display device 81. Since the stop mode of the power-on fluctuation image is defined in the display stop command for stopping the power-on fluctuation image, the stop mode for the normal effect can not be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop mode may be determined and displayed in the display control device 114 based on the stop mode (big hit or removal) of the power-on fluctuation image. Thereby, even when the fluctuation of the power-on time change image is being executed, it is possible to switch to the normal effect from the time when the transfer to the resident video RAM 235 is completed, and it is possible to improve the player's interest .

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 120A) executed in this case, in the processing of S3001, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S3002, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130, details of the above-described display setting process (S2803) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 128, it is judged whether or not the new command flag is on (S4301), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S4301: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S4302 to S4304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S4302), S4303 to S4304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S4303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S4303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S4303: YES), warning image setting processing is executed (S4304).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 129, the details of the warning image setting process (S4304) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S4401).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S4304), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S4303 (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4305.

  At S4305, pointer update processing is executed (S4305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 4501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S4501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is the End information (S4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S4503). If it is the demonstration display data table (S4503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S4505), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S4506), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S4502: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 128, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S4306 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S4308: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S4308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S4309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S4309: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S 4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 4311). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4313). Then, after setting the decision display flag indicating that the decision display effect is on in the on state (S4314), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4315) Return to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2804), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S4315, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4309, if the finalized display flag is not on but off (S4309: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S4316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S4316: No), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table It is set in the buffer 233 d (S 4317), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4320), a demonstration display flag indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set on (S4321), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S4316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S4316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Also in the simplified display setting process (S2810) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 118B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simplified display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect due to the power-on time fluctuation image ends A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display 82) is set in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 131, details of the effect information correction process (S2805) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an effect information correction process (S2805). The effect information correction process (S2805) corrects the position at which various power-on images (power-on main image, power-on variation image, power-on title image) are displayed at the time of normal effect or demonstration effect. It is a process to use.

  In the effect information correction process (S2805), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4601). If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the simplified image display flag 233c is on (S4601: No), the simplified image is displayed when the power is turned on, so correction of presentation information is not performed, and the main image is displayed. End the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the simplified image display flag 233c is off in the process of S4601 (S4601: Yes), the transfer of the resident image is completed in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 132A) described later. Since the normal effect can be performed, it is then determined whether the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602).

  If it is determined in the process of S4602 that the special effect correction flag 233n is on (S4602: No), the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) is movable in the special effect correction process (see FIG. 121) described above. In this case, correction information corresponding to an effect based on an expansion / contraction product scenario to be performed or a tilt object scenario in which the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable is already stored in the correction information storage area 233 m. The present process ends without setting the correction information.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4602 that the special effect correction flag 233n is off (S4602: Yes), the demonstration display flag is off in order to set the correction information according to the effect currently being executed. It is determined whether or not (S4603).

  If it is determined in the process of S4603 that the demonstration display flag is off (S4603: Yes), the demonstration effect is not being executed, that is, the normal effect is being executed, so the correction information storage area The normal effect correction information is set to 233 m from the correction information table 234a3 (S4604), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4603 that the demonstration display flag is on (S4603: No), this is a case where demonstration effects are being executed, the correction information storage area 233m is demoted from the correction information table 234a3. The effect correction information is set (S4605), and the process ends.

  Thus, in the effect information correction process (S2805), according to the state of the pachinko machine 10 (power on, normal effect, demonstration effect, etc.), the correction information for correcting the display position of the various power-on images The setting is done. As a result, since effects can be performed using a common image in a plurality of states of the pachinko machine 10, the capacity of the ROM 234 can be saved. In addition, since the display mode such as the display position and the enlargement ratio is corrected, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to visually recognize according to each effect.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2806) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 132 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4701: YES), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4702) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S4701, that is, if it is off (S4701: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4703), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S4702) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 132 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S4702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S4801), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4801: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4802). In the process of S4802, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4802 (S4802: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4802: Yes), the process proceeds to S4803. Also, as a result of the process of S4801, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4801: No), the process proceeds to S4803.

  In the process of S4803, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S4803), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4803: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4804), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S4803, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S4803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S4805), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Accordingly, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 118B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2809 in FIG. 118B) and the simple display setting process (see S2810 in FIG. 118B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 119 to 127) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 128 to 130) are performed, drawing of an image in normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 133) (see S4701: No in FIG. 132A).

  The MPU 231 executes the resident image transfer setting process to remove the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, and the power-on title image, which have already been transferred in the main process, to the resident video RAM 235. All resident target image data to be resident can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Further, in this control example, in the normal effect, various display images (power main image, power fluctuation image, power title image) displayed when the power is turned on are corrected by the display position. Also configured to be available. As a result, there is no need to prepare images to be used respectively at the time of power-on and at the time of normal rendering, so the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be saved.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is treated as one image data, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the coordinates or the sub display device The display to 690 is controlled. Thereby, since it is not necessary to control separately (transfer etc.) the image displayed on the 3rd symbol display 81 and the sub display 690, control load can be reduced. In addition, you may make it provide not only this but the image data displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 and the sub display apparatus 690, respectively.

  Further, since the sub display device 690 has lower resolution than the third symbol display device 81, the data amount of the image displayed on the sub display device 690 is the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It will be less than the amount. Therefore, in the display control device 114, the image to be displayed on the sub display device 690 with a small amount of image data (title image at power on) is initially stored in the resident video RAM, so the power is turned on. The time from when the image is displayed to can be shortened.

  Here, the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 is configured by one image data as described above. Therefore, when displaying the power-on title image (see FIG. 82A), which is the power-on image, to the sub display device 690 at the time of power on, an area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 ( The 0 data may be set for the data shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When power is turned on, first, image data in which the image data to be displayed on the sub display device 690 matches the resolution of the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 81; image data of 400 × 300 pixels) May be used to display on the sub display device 690. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 and the image for display on the third symbol display device 690 (the power-on main image, the power-on fluctuation image, etc.) are stored in the resident video RAM 235 The display is switched to the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 using the image data (see FIG. 81, 1200 × 600 for display) to be displayed on the sub display device 690. This makes it possible to reduce the data amount of the image to be displayed on the sub display device 690 at the time of power on, so that the power on image (title image at power on) is displayed on the sub display device 690. You can shorten the time to

  Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a normal image transfer setting process (S4703) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2806) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S4703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4305) of the display setting process (S2803) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S4901). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S4902), and if it is transfer data information (S4902: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4903) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S4902 (S4902: No), the process of S4903 and S4904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4905. In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S4905), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S4905: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4906).

  In the process of S4906, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S4906 (S4906: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S4906: Yes), the process proceeds to S4907. Further, as a result of the processing of S4905, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4905: No), the processing proceeds to S4907.

  In the process of S4907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4907), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4907: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S4908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4903 is set as the transfer object image data, and then the process proceeds to S4913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4907: No), it is then determined whether the back image change flag 223p is on (S4909). Then, if the back image change flag 223p is not on but off (S4909: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change 223r flag is on (S4909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after the back image change flag 223p is set to off (S4910), it is provided for each back image type. Image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state among the back image determination flags is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S4911). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4912), and the process proceeds to S4913.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S4909, if the back image determination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S4913, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4913). The determination in the process of S4913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S4913 (S4913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4913 (S4913: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4914). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S4914, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S4915), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233 j sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on”, and the sub of the same image storage area 236 a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2807) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2804) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 87 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2806) (S5001). That is, in the process of S5001, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2804), for each sprite, the storage RAM type storing the image data of the sprite and the address are specified. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2806), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S5002). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S5002, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S5003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 k is performed by inverting the value, that is, by setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 118 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the first control example, control is performed so that the display image used at the time of power on is corrected and used at the time of normal rendering or the like. As a result, since a display image common to the time of power-on and the time of normal effect can be used, the capacity of the ROM can be saved.

  Further, in this control example, the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690 are used in the effect that a specific character (the expansion / contraction effect device 540 (see FIG. 9) or the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9) is movable). It is controlled to correct the contents of the effect displayed on the screen. Thereby, in the effect that a specific character moves, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 becomes difficult to visually recognize, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the sub display device 690. By doing this, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to visually recognize the display content.

  Furthermore, in the effect that the vertical movement unit 400 is movable and the door member 470 is opened, the opening / closing drive motor 466 for maintaining the door member 470 in the closed state is not excited when the door member 470 is dropped and moved. Control (power off control) is performed. As a result, even if the opening / closing drive motor 466 is not driven, the door member 470 is opened by the inertia force acting on the door member 470 when the door member 470 is dropped and moved, so that power consumption can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present invention, when a specific advance notice effect is executed based on entry to the winning opening in the time effect period periodically executed, the effect to be executed in the time effect period is limited. I'm in control. Thereby, when the countdown effect which is a specific advance notice effect is executed, the countdown effect performed in the time effect period can be limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress the trouble of perplexing the player by performing the countdown effect redundantly in the time effect period.

  Furthermore, the ball entering effect displayed based on entering the winning opening is displayed in order in each of the first area 81 a to the fourth area 81 d of the third symbol display area. As a result, even when the interval at which the game ball enters the winning opening is short, the period for displaying the entering effect can be extended, and the gaming machine can easily recognize the entering effect for the player. be able to.

  The present control example is not limited to the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment, and may be executed by the pachinko machine 10 of any of the above-described embodiments, or the above-described embodiments are combined. It may be executed by the pachinko machine 10.

<Second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 156, a second control example will be described. In the first control example described above, the ball entering effect performed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the time effect period (effect mode B) periodically executed (five minutes every hour), and the time effect period The effect of the player has been improved by executing various display effects such as a specific time effect which is executed during (the effect mode B). In the first control example, the time presentation period and the start time of the specific time presentation are set when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. As a result, each effect (time effect, specific time effect, etc.) can be started at the same timing for a plurality of pachinko machines 10 that have been simultaneously powered on at the same timing, so a plurality of pachinko machines 10 Can produce a sense of unity.

  In addition to this, in the second control example, a technique capable of suitably controlling the operation of the tilting operation unit 600 or the like will be described. Here, the goods such as the tilting operation unit 600 are driven by the drive motor constituted by a stepping motor or the like as described above. It is known that this drive motor is generally more susceptible to aging than to a display device (the third symbol display device 81 and the sub display device 690), as well as being more susceptible to individual differences. That is, when the image data is set to the display device, problems such as a delay in display hardly occur, but when the operation data is set to the drive motor, the driving speed decreases due to aging and the like. There may be problems such as (a reduction in torque) or a step out. That is, even if the same operation scenario is set, there is a possibility that the number of operation steps and the operation speed may vary, so that different operations may be performed in each pachinko machine 10.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the operating conditions of the tilting operation unit 600, the slide operation unit 700, etc. are checked every time the power is turned on, and if deterioration or the like occurs, the correction value for correcting the operation scenario It was configured to set. Thereby, in each pachinko machine 10, operation | movement of the various goods driven by a drive motor can be performed suitably.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the second control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in the configuration because the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed And the partial process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 136, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 for detecting the slide operation position of the slide operation unit 700 in the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in the base member 710 of the slide operation unit 700, the slide origin sensor 717 for detecting whether the support member 720 is at the origin position (retraction position) and whether it is at the overhang position A slide position sensor 718 for detecting is provided (see FIG. 49). Since these are configured by the same type of sensor, only the slide position detection sensor 718 will be described here, and the description of the slide origin detection sensor 717 will be omitted.

  FIG. 136 (a) shows the positional relationship between the light shielding plate 726a and the slide position detection sensor 718 in a state in which the slide operation unit 700 is sliding in the direction from the home position (retracted position) to the overhang position. FIG. As shown in FIG. 136A, the slide position detection sensor 718 is provided with a light shielding detection unit 718a. The light blocking detection unit 718a indicates both the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit described above, and the light blocking plate 726a is determined depending on whether the light emitted from the light emitting unit of the light blocking detecting unit 718a is received by the light receiving unit. It can be determined whether or not it is in the overhanging position.

  The example of FIG. 136 (a) shows a state in which the light shielding plate 726a is disposed in the right direction in a front view than the light shielding detection unit 718a. That is, a state in which the arrangement of the light shielding detection portion 718a and the light shielding plate 726a are shifted is shown. In this case, light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit because there is nothing to block between the light emitting unit of the light blocking detection unit 718a and the light receiving unit. While the light receiving unit receives light, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is in the L (low) state. The output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is received by the sound lamp control device 113, and if the output is L (low), it is determined that the support member 720 has not reached the extended position.

  On the other hand, when the left end of the light shielding plate 726a reaches the right end of the light shielding detection unit 718a, the light emitted from the light emitting unit starts to be shielded by the light shielding plate 726a (see FIG. 136 (b)). Then, as shown in FIG. 136 (c), when the light blocking plate 726a is disposed so as to completely overlap the light blocking detection portion 718, the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the light blocking detection portion 718a is completely blocked. . That is, the light receiving unit can not receive light. In this case, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is set to H (high). When the sound lamp control device 113 detects that the output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the support member 720 is in the extended position. Here, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high) or L (low) based on the voltage value of the output signal. That is, if the voltage output from the slide position detection sensor 718 is 5 V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is determined to be H (high), and if the voltage is 0 V, the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is L To determine.

  The slide origin sensor 717 has a similar configuration, so the output is set to H (high) if the column member 720 is at the origin position (retraction position), and the output is L if it is offset from the origin position (retraction position) Set to (Low). The voice lamp control device 113 merely determines whether the output of each sensor is H or L, and roughly arranges the support member 720 (in the origin position or in the overhang position, or in between) Can be easily grasped).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138, a tilting origin sensor 618 for detecting whether or not the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is at the origin position (inverted state) will be described. The tilt origin sensor 618 is configured of the slide origin detection sensor 717 described above and a sensor of the same type as the slide position detection sensor 718.

  FIG. 137 is a view showing the case where the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is at the home position (inverted state). As shown in the figure, when the effect member 620 is at the home position (inverted state), the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 side is the light emitting portion of the tilting origin sensor 618 provided on the base member 610 side. And the light receiving portion, the light emitted from the light emitting portion is blocked and does not reach the light receiving portion. That is, the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 is set to H (high). By outputting this H (high) signal to the audio lamp control device 113, it can be notified that the effect member is at the origin position (inverted state).

  FIG. 138A is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 when the effect member 620 performs tilting operation (swinging operation) in the left direction of the front view. 138B is a view showing the positional relationship between the tilting origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 when the effect member 620 performs the tilting operation (swinging operation) in the front view right direction. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), when the effect member 620 performs a tilting operation (swinging operation) in the left direction of the front view, the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 also interlocks with the effect member 620. Variable in the upper left direction. As a result, the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 shift, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilt origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving portion. As in the other sensors described above, while the light from the light emitting unit is received by the light receiving unit, the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 is set to L (low). By outputting this H (high) signal to the audio lamp control device 113, it can be notified that the effect member 620 is deviated from the home position (inverted state).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), when the effect member 620 performs tilting operation (swinging operation) in the right direction in the front view, the sensor shielding portion 627 provided on the effect member 620 also It interlocks and changes in the lower right direction. As a result, the tilt origin sensor 618 and the sensor shielding portion 627 shift, so that the light emitted from the light emitting portion of the tilt origin sensor 618 can be received by the light receiving portion. Therefore, also in this case, the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 is set to L (low), and the sound lamp control device 113 is notified.

  As described above, by using the tilt origin sensor 618, it is possible to easily detect whether the effect member 620 is at the origin position (inverted state) and to notify the sound lamp control device 113.

  In this control example, only the tilt point sensor 618 is used to determine whether the effect member 620 is at the home position, but the present invention is not limited to this. A sensor may be provided to detect whether the effect member 620 is at the maximum movable position when tilting (swinging) to the right and to the left. With this configuration, when the tilting movement (swinging movement) reaches the maximum movable position, the swinging movement is reliably stopped and the swinging direction is reversed in the reverse direction (origin direction). it can. Therefore, when the swinging operation is performed, the movement beyond the movable range of the effect member 620 can be prevented (suppressed), so that the possibility of occurrence of failure or abnormal operation can be reduced.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 142. First, FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in this control example, various sensors 230 are electrically connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. Specifically, the various sensors 230 are at least provided with the above-described tilting origin sensor 618, slide origin detection sensor 717, and slide position detection sensor 718. Besides these, various sensors such as a sensor for detecting an origin position of the vertical movement unit 400, a sensor for detecting an origin position of the combined operation unit 500, and the like are provided. The various sensors 230 can accurately grasp the operation status of each item, so that the operation of the item can be suitably controlled.

  Further, in this control example, as devices constituting the other device 228, the slide drive motor 751 for causing the slide operation unit 700 to perform the slide operation and the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the tilting operation unit 600 are performed. A tilting drive motor 661 is provided. These motors can drive each operation unit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140 (a), the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, an operation scenario table 222c and a swing area table 222d are added to the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. It is done.

  The operation scenario table 222c is a data table that defines the operation content in the case of executing the effect using each of the prizes. More specifically, it is a data table in which setting values (operating speed, operating step number, operating direction, etc.) to be set for various drive motors corresponding to each item are defined. The details of the operation scenario table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 and 142 (a).

  FIG. 141 (a) is a block diagram showing an operation scenario table 222c. In the operation scenario table 222c, data is stored for each type of actable (variable) role. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 141A, for example, when an effect for driving the slide operation unit 700 is set, a motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the slide drive motor 751 is used. When the slide operation table 222c1 that defines the setting value to be set for the effect and the effect for driving the tilting operation unit 600 are set, the setting is performed on the motor control IC (motor driver) corresponding to the tilting drive motor 661 A tilt operation table 222c2 or the like that defines the set values to be set is provided.

  These will be described more specifically with reference to FIGS. 141 (b) and (c). FIG. 141 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the slide operation table 222 c 1 described above. As shown in FIG. 141 (b), in the slide operation table 222c1, setting values to be set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n indicating the progress of setting based on the operation scenario (Operating speed, number of operating steps, and operating direction) are defined.

  Here, the operating speed indicates the frequency at which the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) for setting the operation of one step to the slide drive motor 751, and the signal output per second ( Expressed by the number of pulses) (pps, puls per second). For example, if the operation speed is 100 pps, this means that the motor driver outputs a signal (pulse) 100 times per second to the slide drive motor 751. That is, it means driving the slide drive motor 751 at a speed of 100 steps per second. The number of operation steps indicates the number of operations performed by the slide drive motor 751. In other words, a signal (pulse for setting one step operation from the motor driver to the slide drive motor 751) Indicates the number of times to output). For example, the operation step number 120 means that the operation of one step is set 120 times for the slide drive motor 751. Furthermore, the operating direction means the driving direction (rotational direction of the motor) of the slide drive motor 751, and two types of directions, a positive direction and a negative direction, can be set. In the slide drive motor 751, the direction from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhang position is a positive direction, and the direction from the overhang position to the retraction position (an origin position) is a negative direction. By setting these set values for the motor driver for driving the slide drive motor 751, the corresponding operation can be accurately performed.

  As shown in FIG. 141 (b), the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223n is an operation for sliding the support member 720 of the slide operation unit 700 from the retracted position (origin position) to the overhang position (outward movement Operation) is associated. Specifically, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 120 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the positive direction is defined as the operation direction. The setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to drive the slide operation unit 700 in effect.

  The 120 steps mean the design value of the number of steps up to the overhang position. That is, when the slide drive motor 751 is driven 120 steps in the operation as designed, it means that the support member 720 reaches the detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718 (see FIG. 136C). Here, with the operation as designed, various kinds of gears for transmitting the drive force of the motor to the support member 720 while the slide drive motor 751 accurately executes the same operation without step out or idling. Etc. means an operation when it is correctly rotated.

  The value “02H” of the movement pointer 223 n is associated with an operation (operation on the return path) for sliding the support member 720 of the slide movement unit 700 from the overhanging position to the retracted position (origin position). Specifically, 100 pps is defined as the operation speed, 120 is defined as the number of operation steps, and the negative direction is defined as the operation direction. The setting content is output (set) to the motor driver when it is time to move the slide operation unit 700 back to the home position (retraction position) in the effect. The timing of this evacuation is prescribed in advance according to the type of effect.

  Further, FIG. 141 (b) is a view showing the defined contents of the above-mentioned tilting operation table 222c2. Like the slide operation table 222c1, the tilt operation table 222c2 has set values (operation speed, operation step number, and operation direction) set for the motor control IC (motor driver) for each value of the operation pointer 223n. It is prescribed. The setting values for causing the effect member 620 to tilt (swing movement) in the left direction of the front view are associated with the values “01H” and “02H” of the movement pointer. That is, for the operation pointer value “01H”, the operation speed is 100 pps, the operation step number is 10 steps, and the operation direction in the positive direction is set values for tilting operation from the origin position (inverted state) to left direction in front view. It is prescribed. When this setting value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps in the left direction in a front view at an operation speed of 100 pps.

  In the operation pointer value “02H”, the operation speed 100 pps, the operation step number 10 step, the negative direction as a set value for returning the effect member 620 tilted to the left in front view to the origin position (inverted state) The direction of movement is defined respectively. When this setting value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps in the left direction in a front view at an operation speed of 100 pps. By setting the setting value corresponding to the movement pointer value “01H” and setting the setting value corresponding to the movement pointer value “02H” after the setting operation is completed, the effect member 620 is viewed from the origin position right in front view After performing 10 steps of tilting operation (swinging operation) in the direction, return operation to the home position (inverted state) is performed.

  Further, setting values for causing the effect member 620 to tilt (swing movement) in the right direction in a front view are associated with the values “03H” and “04H” of the movement pointer. That is, for the operation pointer value "03H", the operation speed is 100 pps, the operation step number is 10 steps, and the operation direction in the positive direction is set values for tilting operation from the origin position (inverted state) to the right in front view. It is prescribed. When this setting value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps in the right direction in a front view at an operation speed of 100 pps.

  In the operation pointer value “02H”, the operation speed 100 pps, the operation step number 10 step, the negative direction as a set value for returning the effect member 620 tilted to the left in front view to the origin position (inverted state) The direction of movement is defined respectively. When this setting value is set for the motor driver, the tilting member 620 operates 10 steps in the left direction in a front view at an operation speed of 100 pps. By setting the setting value corresponding to the movement pointer value “03H” and setting the setting value corresponding to the movement pointer value “04H” after the setting operation is completed, the effect member 620 is viewed from the origin position right in front view After performing 10 steps of tilting operation (swinging operation) in the direction, return operation to the home position (inverted state) is performed.

  As described above, by defining the setting contents for the motor driver in association with the value of the movement pointer 223n, the value of the movement pointer 223n is updated, and the setting value corresponding to the updated value is set. The operation of the effect member 620 can be easily set.

  In addition to the slide operation table 222c1 (see FIG. 141 (b)) and the tilting operation table 222c2 (see FIG. 141 (c)) described above, the movement scenario table 222c also includes an accessory (the vertical movement unit 400 or the like) to be driven. Dedicated data tables are defined (not shown) for each type of compound operation unit 500 etc.). By outputting the setting values to the corresponding motor driver with reference to the tables corresponding to the respective prizes defined in the operation scenario table 222c, the same operation can be executed every time in the corresponding effect.

  In addition, since the motor, the gear, etc. may have variation in operation due to individual difference or aged deterioration, etc., even if setting values defined in the operation scenario table 222c are set at the same timing, the target operation can be performed. It may not be possible. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, in order to absorb the influence of the above-mentioned variation, it is measured (analyzed) how much the operation of the item deviates from the design value when the power is turned on. Accordingly, the setting value of the slide operation is corrected (corrected). That is, a correction value for correcting an individual variation or the like is added (or subtracted) to a setting value defined in the operation scenario table 222c. Thereby, even under the influence of individual differences and aged deterioration, it is possible to execute the operation of the prize in each pachinko machine 10 without a sense of discomfort.

  Furthermore, in the operation scenario table 222c of this control example, an initial operation table 222c5 is defined in which the setting contents for the motor driver corresponding to each item are defined in the initial operation executed based on power supply to the pachinko machine 10. (See FIG. 141 (a)). By executing the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5, it can be determined whether or not each accessory operates normally. In addition, at the time of execution of the initial operation, the contents of the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the tilting operation unit 600 and the contents of the sliding operation of the sliding operation unit 700 are analyzed, and a correction value for correcting the operation according to the analysis result. Is identified. The details of the initial operation table 222c5 will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (a).

  FIG. 142 (a) shows the defined contents of the initial operation table 222c5. As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the initial operation table 222c5 is associated with the value of the operation pointer 223n, and is used to set the type of the item for which the operation is set and the motor driver corresponding to the item. The set values (operating speed, operating step number, and operating direction) are defined.

  More specifically, the slide operation unit 700 is associated with the value "01H" of the operation pointer 223n as the type of character, and an operation at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined as the operation content. The number of operation steps is not determined, and the slide operation is repeated in the forward direction (the direction of the overhanging position) until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 has become H (high). That is, the operation of one step is set, it is confirmed whether the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 is H (high), and if the output remains L (low), the operation of one step is set again The operation is repeated. The number of operation steps set until the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 becomes H (high) is counted by the correction counter 223w, and after the operation is completed, the number of operation steps from the origin position to the overhang position is designed The difference from the value of 120 steps is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the setting value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. Here, in the case of repeatedly setting the operation of one step, there is a delay of, for example, 10 milliseconds with respect to the operation of one step so that the same operation speed as in the case where the operation of plural steps is set in the normal game. It is set. That is, one step operation is set every 10 milliseconds (at an operation speed of 100 pps). Thus, the operation mode can be the same as that in the normal game, so that it is possible to prevent the user from misunderstanding that an abnormality has occurred from the appearance of the operation. Also in the following description, in the case of setting an operation to each type of sensor every one step, a delay is set so as to have the same operation speed as that in the normal game.

  The tilting operation unit 600 is associated with the values “02H” to “05H” of the movement pointer 223 n as the type of the role setting the initial movement. As the operation content corresponding to the value "02H" of the operation pointer 223n, an operation having 10 steps of operation steps at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value "03H" of the operation pointer 223n, an operation until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction is defined. Further, as the operation content corresponding to the value "04H" of the operation pointer 223n, an operation of 10 steps is defined at the operation speed of 100 pps in the negative direction, and the operation content corresponding to the value "05H" of the operation pointer 223n The operation is continued until the tilt origin sensor 618 is detected at an operation speed of 100 pps.

  To summarize the initial operation set for the tilting operation unit 600, when the slide operation unit 700 operates to the overhang position and the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the initial operation is updated to "02H", first, The effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 is operated in 10 steps in the left direction in a front view. Then, when the operation of 10 steps is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223 n corresponding to the initial operation is updated to “03H”, and the operation toward the origin (that is, the operation toward the right in front view) is set. . This operation is repeatedly performed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 has become H (high), similarly to the operation performed on the value “01H” of the operation pointer 223 n.

  Then, when it is detected that the output of the tilting origin sensor 618 becomes H (high), the value of the operation pointer 223 n is updated to “04H”, and the operation of 10 steps rightward in a front view (that is, the origin position) The movement in the direction of performing the tilting movement is set. When the operation of the ten steps is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223 n is updated to “05H”, and an operation toward the origin (that is, an operation toward the left in front view) is set. This operation is also repeatedly performed step by step until it is detected that the output of the tilt origin sensor 618 has become H (high), similarly to the operation performed on the value “03H” of the operation pointer 223n. By executing these operations, it is easy to determine whether the tilting operation (swinging operation) in the front view right direction and the front view left direction in which the effect member 620 can be driven in the normal gaming state can be properly executed. It can be confirmed.

  In the initial operation of the tilting operation unit 600, the number of operation steps until the effect member 620 separated from the origin position returns to the origin position again by performing the tilting operation (swinging operation) is the correction counter 223w. After being returned to the origin position, the difference from the design value is analyzed. A correction value for correcting the setting value of the slide operation is calculated according to the analyzed difference. That is, in the present control example, when it is determined that any one of the tilting operation and the sliding operation deviates from the designed operation, the set value (operating speed) for the sliding operation unit 700 is corrected. It is configured to

  The slide operation unit 700 is associated with the value "06H" of the operation pointer 223n as the type of the item, and an operation at an operation speed of 100 pps in the forward direction is defined as the operation content. The operation of one step is repeatedly set until it is detected that the output of the slide position detection sensor 718 has become H (high), similarly to the operation when the value of the operation pointer 223 n is “01H”.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the initial operation table 222c5, an initial operation corresponding to other products is also defined. By executing the initial operation using the initial operation table 222c5, it is possible to easily determine the presence or absence of a defect of the combination for which the rendering operation is performed in various effects when the power is turned on. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from being performed in the pachinko machine 10 in which the problem has occurred, so that the player can be made to play the game with peace of mind.

  In this control example, during execution of the initial operation based on the initial operation table 222c5, the initial operation is performed and a correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation table 222c1 is calculated. It is not necessary to define the slide operation table 222c1 in the operation scenario table 222c. Instead of calculating the correction value for correcting the movement speed, the movement scenario of the slide movement during the normal game is created based on the slide movement at the initial movement and the number of movement steps of the swing movement, It may be configured to be stored. In order to describe this modification more specifically, it is assumed that the number of operation steps up to the extension position of the slide operation is 125 steps in the initial operation and the number of operation steps required for one cycle of the swing operation is 45 steps. Assume that the case is determined. In this case, first, the actual number of operation steps up to the overhanging position determined by the initial operation is set as the number of operation steps of the slide operation. Then, as the operation speed during the normal game, the operation speed of the slide operation is for executing the swing operation (3 × 45 steps) of just 3 cycles (3 times) until the slide operation of 125 steps is performed. Set That is, 100 pps × 125 steps / (3 × 45 steps) = 93 pps are set as the operation speed. Then, when an effect in which the slide operation and the swing operation are combined and executed during the normal game is set, the number of operation steps 125 steps and the operation speed 93 pps calculated in the initial operation are It may be set each time for the slide operation. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably execute the specified number of times (three times) of the swinging motion until the strut member 720 slides to the extended position. Further, as compared with the case where the slide operation table 222c1 is defined in the ROM 222, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

  In this control example, the correction value is calculated based on the number of operation steps in the initial operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, a deviation from the designed operation time is determined, and a correction value for correcting the deviation is calculated. May be Moreover, in the said modification, although it was comprised so that the setting content of slide operation | movement might be calculated based on the operation | movement step number in initial stage operation, it is not restricted to this. For example, based on the operation time required for the slide operation and the operation time required for the swing operation, the number of operation steps of the slide operation to reach the extended position of the slide operation at the timing when the swing operation ends three times. And the operating speed may be determined.

  Referring back to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. The swing area table 222 d is a data table that is referred to when the effect member 620 of the tilting object 600 is tilted (swing movement), and defines a direction in which the tilting operation is possible. Here, in this control example, the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 are performed in conjunction with each other. More specifically, while the sliding movement of the column member 720 from the home position to the extended position is performed, the rendering member 620 performs a tilting operation (swing movement) for three reciprocations above the column member 720. It is controlled to be performed (the swing motion to the left and the swing motion to the right are alternately performed three times). That is, the position at which the effect member 620 executes the swinging operation is variable according to the transition of the sliding operation.

  In addition, as described above, the tilting operation unit 600 including the rendering member 620 is disposed under the area formed by the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 5). In the state of being in the position or the overhanging position, the effect member 620 and the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 212 are configured to be close to each other. Therefore, for example, the effect member 620 swings in the right direction in the front view in the vicinity of the origin position of the slide operation, or swings in the left direction in the front view in the vicinity of the extended position of the slide operation. When the operation is performed, the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 may collide with each other. Therefore, in this control example, a collision (interference) between the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 is prevented by defining an operation direction in which the effect member 620 can execute the swing operation in the swing area table 222 d. ing. When the sliding operation of the support member 720 and the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 are both normal operations (operations as designed), the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 The operation scenario is defined so that there is no risk of collision (interference). The swing area table 222 d is useful, for example, in the case of an irregular situation where the slide operation is stopped halfway or the operation speed changes halfway due to a failure.

  Here, first, for the operation mode when the tilting operation (swinging operation) of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 both perform normal operations (operations as designed), see FIG. 144. To explain. FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the number of operation steps of the swing operation of the effect member 620 and the number of operation steps of the slide operation of the support member 720. In this figure, the number of steps “0” indicates the origin position of each of the prizes (the effect member 620, the support member 720). Further, a range in which the number of steps of the swing operation is positive means that the effect member 620 is disposed on the left side in a front view with respect to the origin position, and a range in which the number of steps is negative is from the origin position. Means that the effect member 620 is disposed on the right side in a front view.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the leftward swinging motion is performed one step each time the sliding motion is performed one step until the sliding motion is performed 10 steps. That is, the swinging motion in the direction away from the outer wall portion 212 disposed on the right side of the origin position of the sliding motion is performed. Then, when the number of steps of the slide operation becomes 10 and the number of steps of the swing operation becomes 10 steps in the positive direction (refer to position a in FIG. 144), the direction of the swing operation is reversed and the negative direction Switch the direction of the swing motion to. The swing operation in the negative direction is performed beyond the origin position of the effect member 620. When the number of steps of the slide operation becomes 30 and the effect member 620 reaches a position advanced by 10 steps in the negative direction (right direction in front view) from the origin position (refer to position b in FIG. 144) Invert the direction of movement and switch to positive direction swing movement.

  Then, the slide operation is advanced while reversing the direction of the swing operation every 20 steps (see the positions c, d and e in FIG. 144). And while operation | movement step number of slide operation | movement becomes 120 steps (it reaches the overhang | projection position of slide operation | movement), it is operation | movement based on the effect member 620 having reached the origin position from the negative direction (right side of origin position). Is stopped. Also in the case of returning to the home position, the support post is returned to the home position of the sliding operation while maintaining the relationship shown in FIG.

  By performing the slide operation and swing operation shown in FIG. 144, the same swing operation can be performed each time without causing the effect member 620 to collide with other components. On the other hand, since the effect member 620 and the support member 720 are driven by the drive motor, even if the same operation scenario is set due to individual differences and aged deterioration of the drive motor and the gear, the correspondence in FIG. there is a possibility. In addition, there is also a possibility that the sliding operation and the swinging operation may be temporarily stopped due to the influence of a failure or noise. Also in this case, if the same set values (operating speed, operating step number, operating direction) as in normal operation are set, the effect member 620 may collide (interfere) with the outer wall portion 212, etc. May occur. Therefore, in this control example, by providing a swing area table 222d in which the movement direction in which the swing movement is possible is defined according to the number of steps of the slide operation, the problem that the effect member 620 interferes with other components is suppressed. To be configured.

  The details of the swing area table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (b). FIG. 142 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the swing area table 222d in this control example. In this control example, every time the effect member 620 reaches the origin position of the swinging motion, the swinging area table 222d is referred to, and the direction of the swinging motion is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the swing area table 222d, the direction in which the swing operation can be performed (the swing operation can be performed in association with the number of operation steps of the slide operation of the support member 720 (progress of the slide operation) The possible direction of swing is specified. Further, the relationship between the number of operation steps of the sliding operation and the swingable direction is the sliding operation in the direction (forward path) from the origin position to the overhang position, or the direction from the overhang position to the origin position (return path Is specified to distinguish whether it is a sliding motion).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (b), in the sliding operation on the forward pass (sliding operation corresponding to the value "01H" of the operation pointer), for the range of the number of operation steps "0 to 14" of the sliding operation. The swingable direction "left side" is associated. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range relatively close to the origin position of the slide operation (the number of operation steps is 0 to 14), the effect member 620 is viewed from the front Swinging movement to the right is prohibited (restricted). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the effect member 620 collides with a portion on the right side of the origin position of the sliding motion in the outer wall portion 212 and the outer wall portion 212 or the effect member 620 is damaged.

  Further, "both sides" are associated as the swingable direction with respect to the range of the number of operation steps "15 to 104" of the slide operation. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in the range of the number of operation steps “15 to 104”, the swing operation is performed without limitation to either the front right side or the front left side. It can be set. In the range of the number of operation steps, the outer wall portion 212 and the rendering member 620 are sufficiently separated, and there is no possibility of collision (interference) regardless of the operation direction.

  Furthermore, the swingable direction "right side" is associated with the number of operation steps "105 to 120" of the slide operation. That is, when it is detected that the effect member 620 has reached the origin position in an operation range (the number of operation steps is 105 to 120) relatively close to the overhanging position of the slide operation, the effect member 620 is fronted. Swinging motion to the left side is prohibited (restricted). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the effect member 620 collides with a portion of the outer wall portion 212 on the left side of the extension position of the slide operation and the outer wall portion 212 or the effect member 620 is damaged.

  On the other hand, in the forward path slide operation (slide operation corresponding to the value "02H" of the operation pointer), the swingable direction "right side" is associated with the range of the operation step number "0 to 14" of the slide operation. The number of operation steps "15 to 104" is associated with the direction in which the head can swing, "both sides", and the number of operation steps "105 to 120" is associated with the direction in which the head can swing "left side". By setting the movement direction of the swing movement with reference to these correspondences, the effect member 620 can be operated without colliding with the outer wall portion 212 even during the slide movement on the forward path.

  To summarize the swingable directions, as shown in FIG. 143, the 15 step area (0 step to 14 step) including the origin position of the slide operation (the detection position of the slide origin detection sensor 717) is the left side (front view) It is possible to set the swing motion only in the left direction). On the other hand, the area (steps 104 to 120 steps) for 15 steps including the projection position of the slide operation (the detection position of the slide position detection sensor 718) sets the swing operation only on the right side (front view right direction) It becomes possible. And in the area | regions other than the above, it is comprised so that a swinging operation | movement can be set without the restriction | limiting of a direction. As described above, by defining the direction of the swing operation in correspondence with the number of steps of the slide operation, interference with the other components of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented.

  Referring back to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example includes a step counter 223k, an operation scenario flag 223m, an operation pointer 223n, and a swing direction flag 223o, correction value storage area 223p, additional operation flag 223q, origin return flag 223r, initial operation flag 223s, slide standby flag 223t, swing standby flag 223u, swing counter 223v, correction Counter 223 w is added.

  The step counter 223k is a counter for counting the number of operation steps of each accessory driven by the drive motor. The reference of the count (the position where the number of operation steps is 0) is set at the origin position of each role. The step counter 223k is configured to be able to separately count the number of operation steps for each type of bonus. That is, the step counter 223 k is equal to the number of drive motors for driving the special effects, such as a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the effect member 620 and a counter for counting the number of operation steps of the support member 720. Separate counters are provided.

  The step counter 223 k is a type of drive motor that has output the execution signal every time it receives an execution signal indicating that one step operation has been performed from any of various drive motors provided in the pachinko machine 10. The corresponding counter value is updated one by one (see S1622 in FIG. 149). When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a home position return operation is performed to return various types of goods to the home position. However, when various types of goods return to the home position due to the home position return operation, the step counter 223k 0 is set to the value. By this origin return operation, the position where the value of the step counter 223 k becomes 0 can be reliably set as the origin position of each prize, so that the operating condition (drive position) of each prize can be accurately grasped. it can.

  The operation scenario flag 223 m is a flag indicating which operation scenario is set among the operation scenarios corresponding to the rendering operations of the respective prizes defined in the operation scenario table 222 c. The operation scenario flag 223 m is formed of, for example, 1 byte (8 bits), and the type of the operation scenario is associated with each bit. For example, the 0th bit of the operation scenario flag 223m corresponds to the slide operation table 222c1, and if this 0th bit is 1 (on), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is set as the operation scenario. If it is 0 (off), it means that the slide operation table 222c1 is not set. Similarly for the other bits, if the operation scenario corresponding to each bit is set, the corresponding bit is set to 1 (on), and the corresponding bit is 0 if the corresponding operation scenario is not set. It is set to (off).

  When the operation scenario is specified based on the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see FIG. 108), the bit corresponding to the scenario is set to 1 (on) (operation scenario flag 223m) (see FIG. 108). See S1704, S1708, and S1710 in FIG. In addition, each time the variation presentation in which the operation scenario is set ends, the bit corresponding to the set scenario is set to 0 (off). The type of operation scenario currently set can be easily determined by the operation scenario flag 223m.

  The action pointer 223 n is a pointer used to identify the progress of the set action scenario. As described above, in each data table constituting the operation scenario table 222c, the value of the operation pointer 223n and the operation content (operation speed, number of operation steps, operation direction) to be set are defined in association with each other. In this control example, the operation of the setting content of 1 is set to the drive motor, and when the operation according to the setting content is completed, the value of the operation pointer 223 n is updated.

  Also, the action pointer 223 n can update the pointer value separately for each set action scenario. That is, the action pointer 223 n is a generic name of different pointers provided for each action scenario. Each pointer constituting the motion pointer 223 has its value “01H” set by newly setting the corresponding motion scenario. After that, each time the operation content corresponding to the pointer value is completed, the pointer value is updated (S5312 in FIG. 150, S5411 in FIG. 151, S5505 in FIG. 152, S5710 in S154, and S5711 in FIG. 154). The action content corresponding to the pointer value is set. In addition, when the change effect setting in which the corresponding operation scenario is set is ended, the pointer value is reset to “00H”. By using this action pointer 223 n, it is possible to accurately grasp the set action scenario.

  The swing direction flag 223o is a flag indicating the direction of the swing motion. If the value of the swing direction flag 223o is on, it indicates that a swing operation in the forward direction (left direction in front view) is being performed, and if off, it is in the negative direction (right direction on front view) Indicates that the swing motion of is being performed. The swing direction flag 223o corresponds to the operation content indicated by the value of the updated operation pointer 223n when the value of the operation pointer 223n is updated when the operation scenario corresponding to the tilting operation is set. The value is updated (see S5507 in FIG. 152). That is, when the swing motion in the positive direction is set as the operation content, the swing direction flag 223 o is set to ON, and when the swing motion in the negative direction is set, the swing direction flag 223 o is set. Set to off. When the home position is reached in the swinging motion, the direction of the swinging motion is specified with reference to the swinging direction flag 223o. Then, it is determined based on the swing area table 222 d whether or not there is no problem even if the user passes the origin with the same direction of the swing motion.

  The correction value storage area 223p is a storage area for storing a correction value for correcting the variation in the movement of the accessory product due to the aged deterioration, the individual difference and the like. More specifically, the correction value for correcting the operation speed of the support member 720 in accordance with the actual operation of the effect member 620 is stored. The correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p is calculated during execution of the initial operation executed based on the power supply to the pachinko machine 10, and is stored in the correction value storage area 223p. (See S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151). The correction values are roughly classified into at least a correction value according to the actual swinging movement of the effect member 620 and a correction value according to the actual sliding movement of the support member 720. The number of steps of the slide operation can be corrected according to the correction value of.

  The correction value according to the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620 is the design value of the number of steps when the effect member 620 performs the swinging motion from the origin position in the right direction in front view and in the left direction in front view (Since the swing action of 10 steps forward and 10 steps backward is executed in the left and right directions, a total of 40 steps), the ratio of the number of steps actually required to return to the origin by setting a series of operations is there.

  On the other hand, the correction value according to the actual swinging movement of the support member 720 is the design value (120 steps) of the number of steps when the support member 720 slides from the origin position to the overhang position, and The sliding operation is the ratio to the number of steps required to move from the home position to the overhanging position in the sliding operation. By correcting the setting contents of the operation scenario with these correction values, it is possible to match the aspect of the sliding motion of the support member 720 with the aspect of the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620. That is, when the actual number of steps required for the swing operation is larger than the design value, it is necessary to set a larger number of steps than the design value, so that the execution period of the swing operation becomes longer. Even in this case, the correction value for delaying the operation speed of the slide operation is stored as the correction value in order to match the timing at which the three reciprocating movements are completed and the timing at which the slide position reaches the overhang position. It is stored in the area 223p.

  On the other hand, when the actual number of steps required for the swing operation is smaller than the design value, the swing operation is completed with a smaller number of steps than the design value, so the execution period of the swing operation is shortened mi. Even in this case, the correction value for increasing the operation speed of the slide operation stores the correction value in order to match the timing at which the three reciprocation swing operation is completed and the timing at which the slide position reaches the overhang position. It is stored in the area 223p.

  When setting the slide operation, the swing operation is performed by setting a value obtained by multiplying the operation speed defined in the slide operation table 223c1 by the correction value stored in the correction value storage area 223p as a new operation speed. The timing of completion and the timing of reaching the projection position of the slide operation can be matched. Therefore, the operation quality in the case of simultaneously operating the effect member 620 and the support member 720 can be improved.

  The additional operation flag 223 q is a flag indicating whether or not the additional operation period may be set after the number of operation steps defined in the operation scenario table 222 c is digested. Here, in this control example, although the number of operation steps defined in the operation scenario table 222c is digested, if the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high), the operation is additionally performed in the sensor direction Is configured to set. This additional operation is repeatedly set step by step until the output of the corresponding sensor becomes H (high). The period in which this additional operation is set is called an additional operation period. By setting this additional operation period, even if the number of steps to detect the sensor deviates due to aged deterioration, individual differences, etc., an error may not be notified immediately, and the sensor may be moved toward the sensor. it can. The additional operation flag 223 q is an abnormality detection process executed when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) even after the number of operation steps defined in the operation scenario table 222 c has passed (see FIG. 155). When it is detected that the output of the corresponding sensor has become L (low) by the additional operation, it is set to be off (see S 5604 in FIG. 153).

The home position return flag 223r is executing a home position return operation (operation for returning a character shifted from the home position to the home position) which is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is a flag indicating whether or not. If the in-home position return flag 223r is on, it indicates that the home position return operation is being performed, and if off, it indicates that the home position return operation is not in progress. The home position return flag 223r is used during home position return processing (see FIG. 146),
When the home position return operation is set, it is set to ON (see S5103 in FIG. 146). On the other hand, in the origin return operation, when it is determined that all the prizes have returned to the origin position, it is set to be off (see S5304 in FIG. 150). Whether or not the home position return operation is being performed can be easily determined by using the home position return flag 223r.

  The in-initial operation flag 223s is a flag indicating whether or not an initial operation to be executed to determine whether or not each item normally operates is being executed after the origin return operation is completed. . If the initial operation flag 223s is on, it indicates that the initial operation is being performed, and if off, it indicates that the initial operation is not being performed. The initial operation flag 223s is set to ON after completion of the origin return operation (see S5304 in FIG. 150), and is set to OFF when all operations defined in the initial operation table 222c5 are completed. . By using the initial operation flag 223s, it can be easily determined whether or not the initial operation is being executed.

  The slide standby flag 223t is an effect in which the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, the slide operation to the extended position of the support member 720 ends earlier than the swing operation of the effect member 620. It is a flag for determining whether or not it is a slide standby period set in the case of The slide standby period is a period for waiting the slide operation until the swing operation is completed, and the swing operation of the effect member 620 is performed when the operation of returning the slide operation from the overhanging position to the origin position is performed. And the sliding movement of the support member 720 are simultaneously started.

  If the slide standby flag 223t is on, it indicates that the above-mentioned slide standby period is in progress, and if it is off, it indicates that the slide standby period is not in progress. The slide standby flag 223t is set to ON when it is determined in the slide operation process (see FIG. 156) that the slide operation is completed and the swing operation is not completed (see S5909 in FIG. 156). ). On the other hand, when the slide operation and the swing operation are both completed and an operation for returning from the overhang position to the home position is set (S5706 in FIG. 154).

  In the swing waiting flag 223u, in the effect that the effect member 620 and the support member 720 operate in conjunction with each other, the swing operation of the effect member 620 ends earlier than the slide operation to the extended position of the support member 720. It is a flag for determining whether or not it is a swing standby period set in the event of a drop. The swing standby period is a period for causing the swing operation to wait until the slide operation is completed, and the swing of the effect member 620 is performed when an operation to return the slide operation from the overhang position to the original position is performed. The movement and the sliding movement of the support member 720 are set to start simultaneously.

  If this swing standby flag 223 u is on, it indicates that the above-mentioned swing standby period is being performed, and if it is off, this indicates that the swing standby period is not being performed. The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON when the swing operation (tilt operation) is completed and the slide operation is determined to be incomplete in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154). (See S5703 in FIG. 154). On the other hand, when the slide operation and the swing operation are both completed and an operation for returning from the overhang position to the home position is set (S5910 in FIG. 156).

  The swing counter 223s is a counter for counting the number of times of execution of the swing operation. In this control example, the swing operation is performed by 10 steps in the left and right direction from the origin position based on the tilting operation table 222c2, and then the operation to return to the origin position is repeated three times. However, if the same operation is defined three times for the tilting operation table 222c2, there is a risk that the capacity of the ROM 222 will be compressed. Therefore, in the present control example, only the operation content for one swing operation is defined in the tilting operation table 222c2, and one swing operation ends (that is, the operation pointer defined in the tilting operation table 222c2) Each time the operation corresponding to the values "01H" to "04H" of 223n is completed, the number of swings is counted using the swing counter 223s. When the number of counts is three, the swing operation is finished. When the number of counts is less than three, the value of the action pointer 223n is returned to "01H", and "01H" to "01H" are repeated. The operation corresponding to "04H" is set in order. This makes it possible to repeat the swing operation the same number of times (three times) each time while reducing the amount of data of the tilting operation table 222c2.

  The correction counter 223 w is a counter for counting the number of steps of the actual swinging motion of the effect member 620 and the number of steps of the actual sliding motion of the support member 720 in the initial operation. By comparing the number of steps counted by the correction counter 223 w with the design value of the number of steps, it is possible to analyze (determine) how much the actual operation deviates from the design value. That is, it is possible to analyze (determine) the effects of individual differences, aging deterioration and the like. A correction value for correcting the operation speed of the slide operation is calculated according to the number of steps of each bonus item counted by the correction counter 223w (see S5406 and S5409 in FIG. 151).

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 145 to 156, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. First, FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. The start-up process is a process performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, as in the first control example.

  Among the startup processes, in each process of S1301 to S1313, the same process as each process of S1301 to S1313 executed in the startup process (see FIG. 104) in the first control example is executed. The start-up process in the second control example is different in that an origin return process (S1321) is performed in addition to the start-up process in the first control example.

  This origin return processing (S1321) is executed after the processing of S1301 to S1312 is performed as in the first control example, and is processing for returning an accessory shifted from the origin position to the origin position. Then, after the origin return process (S1321) is performed, the time setting process (S1313) is performed, and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, the details of the above-described home position return process (S1321) will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an origin return process (S1321). The origin point return process (S1321) is a process for moving (moving), to the origin position, a character that is not at the origin position among the various kinds of prizes provided to the pachinko machine 10 at the time of power on.

  In the origin return process (S1321), first, whether there is an origin sensor (for example, slide origin detection sensor 717, tilt origin sensor 618, etc.) whose output is L (0 V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not blocked) It is determined whether or not it is (S5101). If it is determined in the process of S5101 that there is an origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5101: Yes), one of the prizes (the effect member 620 of the tilting operation unit 600 and the support member of the slide operation unit 700) (E.g., 720) is not at the origin position. Therefore, in this case, the processing shifts to the processing of S5102 in order to return (move) the accessory shifted from the home position to the home position.

  In the process of S5102, an operation (movable) in the direction of the origin is set for an accessory corresponding to a sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5102). Then, the origin return flag 223r is set to ON (S5103), and this processing ends. In the process of S5102, for example, an operation having a step number twice as many as the number of steps from the origin position to the overhang position in each combination is set so as to reliably return to the origin position.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that there is no origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5101: No), it means that all the prizes are already at the origin position when the power is turned on. Do. That is, since it is not necessary to return (move) the character to the home position, the processing of S5104 and S5105 for setting the initial operation of various characters is executed.

  In the process of S5104, the start of the initial operation is set for various types of prizes (S5104), the in-initial operation flag 223s is set to ON (S5105), and this process is ended. As described above, the initial operation is performed to check whether various items are operating normally. Since it can be checked every time the power is turned on whether various items work properly, abnormalities in various items can be detected early.

  By executing this origin point return process (S1321), it is possible to return (move) all the prizes to the origin position. Since the step counter 223k of the corresponding item can be reset to 0 in response to the return to the origin position, the number of operation steps of all the items can be accurately grasped after the return to the origin. Further, since the initial operation can be performed after the origin return, the same operation can be performed each time in the initial operation. Therefore, it can be easily determined from the appearance whether or not an abnormality occurs in the initial operation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing main processing. This main process is a process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113, as in the first control example.

  Among the main processing, in each processing of S1501 to S1520, the same processing as each processing of S1501 to S1520 executed in the main processing (see FIG. 106) in the first control example is executed. The main processing in the second control example is different from the main processing in the first control example in that a bonus game action setting processing (S1531) is executed.

  Similar to the first control example, the bonus item operation setting process (S1531) is performed after the processes of S1501 to S1515 are performed. Then, after the combination feature operation setting process (S1531) is performed, the processes of S1516 to S1520 are performed. The bonus item action setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the action of each bonus item based on the selected fluctuation pattern.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the details of the bonus game operation setting process (S1531) described above will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the bonus game action setting process (S1531). As described above, the bonus item operation setting process (S1531) is a process for setting the operations of various bonus items provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the bonus game action setting process (S1531), first, it is determined whether it is the action start timing of the bonus article (S5201). Here, the operation start timing of the item and the type of the item to be operated are defined for each variation pattern. In the process of S5201, it is determined whether or not the operation start timing has come based on the progress status of the fluctuation pattern.

  If it is determined in the process of S5201 that the operation start timing of the bonus is not reached (S5201: No), since it is not necessary to set the operation of the bonus, the present process is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5201 that it is the operation start timing of the bonus (S5201: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S5202 in order to set the operation of the bonus that has become the start timing.

  In the process of S5202, the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the operation to be started (slide operation, tilting (swing) operation, initial operation, etc.) is set to "01H" (S5202). Then, the action content corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223 n is read out from the table corresponding to the character to be operated this time in the action scenario table 222 c (S 5203). Next, it is determined whether the operation content read out in the process of S5203 is the sliding operation of the support member 720 (S5204).

  If it is determined in the process of S5204 that the read operation content is a slide operation (S5204: Yes), the operation speed (pps) of the read operation content is stored in the correction value storage area 223p. A value obtained by multiplying the correction value (both the correction value corresponding to the slide operation and the correction value corresponding to the swing operation) is set as the operation speed (S5205), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5206. As described above, this correction value is a value calculated based on the number of operation steps of the actual swing movement of the effect member 620 in the initial operation and the number of actual operation steps of the support member 720. By correcting the operation speed of the slide operation with this correction value, it is possible to make the end timing of the swing operation coincide with the operation end timing of the slide operation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the read operation content is not the slide operation in the process of S5204 (S5204: No), there is no need to correct the operation, so the process of S5205 is skipped to shift to the process of S5206. .

  When the process of S5204 or S5205 is completed, an operation command is set based on the read operation content (or corrected operation content) (S5206), and the process is ended. The operation command set by the process of S5206 is stored in a ring buffer (not shown) for command transmission provided in the RAM 223. Then, in the command output process (S502) of the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221, various motors (upper and lower drive motor 431, open / close drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, The signal is sent to a control IC (not shown) of the tilting drive motor 661). Control ICs (not shown) for various motors drive and control the various motors based on the received operation command. As a result, various types of prizes corresponding to various types of motors are moved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 147, the command determination process (S1511) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart of the command determination process (S1511). This command determination process (S1511) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 147) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, as in the first control example, and as described above, the main control device It is a process for determining the command received from 110 and executing the corresponding control.

  Of the command determination process (S1511), in each of S1601 to S1616, the same process as each process of S1601 to S1616 performed in the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example is executed. . The command determination process (S1511) in the second control example is different in that the processes of S1621 to S1623 are executed in addition to the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example. Hereinafter, the same parts as those of the command determination process (see FIG. 107) in the first control example are denoted with the same reference numerals, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the command determination process (S1511) in the second control example, first, the processes of S1601 to S1615 are executed as in the first control example. When it is determined in the process of S1612 that the stop command has not been received (S1612: No), various motors (vertical drive 431 and others, open / close drive motor 466, slide drive motor 751, tilt drive) It is determined whether an execution signal (execution command) output from a control IC (not shown) of the motor 661) is received (S1621). If it is determined in the process of S1621 that the execution command has not been received from the motor driver (control IC) corresponding to each item, the process of S1616 is executed, and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1621 that an execution command has been received from any of the motor drivers (control IC) (S1621: Yes), the motor driver (feature) that has output the operation command The step counter 223k is updated (S1622), and an execution command process for controlling the operation of each part according to the execution command (execution signal) is executed (S1623), and this process is ended. By updating (adding) the step counter 223k corresponding to the operation by the process of S1622, the state (the number of operation steps) of each operation (slide operation, swing operation, etc.) can be accurately determined.

  Next, the details of the execution command processing (S1623) described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 156. First, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing execution command processing (S1623. This execution command processing (S1623) includes various motors (drives for up and down 431, drive motor for opening and closing 466, drive motor for slide 751, tilt) This process is executed when the execution signal (execution command) transmitted from the control IC (not shown) of the drive motor 661) is received.

  In execution command processing (S1623), first, it is determined whether or not the return-to-origin flag 223r is on (S5301). If it is determined in the process of S5301 that the return-to-origin flag 223r is on (S5301: Yes), the return-to-origin process (see FIG. 145) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 described above (see FIG. 145) In FIG. 146), it means that an origin return operation is being performed. Therefore, in this case, it is determined whether or not there is an origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (that is, the light receiving portion of the sensor is not shielded) in order to determine whether the home position return operation has ended. It discriminate | determines (S5302).

  If it is determined in the process of S5302 that there is an origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5302: Yes), any one of the prizes deviates from the origin position (that is, it is in recovery (movable)) This is the case, and since the processing for returning (moving) the character to the home position is continued, the present processing ends. When a plurality of prizes are being returned to the origin, the operation stop is set in order from the prizes determined to have returned to the origin position in the processing of S5302. Also, when there is a character that does not return to the origin even after the set number of steps of the origin return operation, there is a high possibility that the drive motor is not operating normally due to a failure etc. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5302 that there is no origin sensor whose output is L (0 V) (S5302: No), all the prizes are at the origin position (that is, return (movable) is finished) Since this is the case, the processing for returning (moving) the character to the home position is ended, and the start of the initial operation of various characters is set (S5303). Then, the origin return flag 223r is set to OFF, and the initial operation flag 223s is set to ON (S5304), and this processing is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S5301 that the return-to-origin-point flag 223r is not on (S5301: No), then all of the prizes are returned to the origin position (movable), and then the initial operation is in progress. It is determined whether the flag 223s is on (S5305). In the process of S5305, when it is determined that the initial operation flag 223s is on (S5305: Yes), it means that the initial operation of various role products is being executed, so to perform the setting during the initial operation This initial operation process is executed (S5306), and this process ends. Details of the initial operation processing (S5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5305 that the initial operation flag 223s is off (S5305: No), it is then determined whether the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting operation (S5307). ). If it is determined in the process of S5307 that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the tilting (swing) operation (S5307: Yes), a tilting (swing) operation is executed (the tilting drive motor 661 is In order to drive), the tilting operation process is executed (S5308), and this process is ended. Details of the tilting operation process (S5308) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 152 to 155.

  If it is determined in the process of S5307 that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the tilting (swing) operation (S5307: No), then whether or not the received execution command is a command corresponding to the slide operation. It is determined (S5309). If it is determined in the process of S5309 that the received execution command is a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: Yes), the slide operation is performed to execute the slide operation (drive the slide drive motor 751). The processing of the process is executed (S5310), and this process ends. Details of the slide operation process (S5310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5309 that the received execution command is not a command corresponding to the slide operation (S5309: No), an execution command for another feature (operation) is received. In this case, it is determined whether the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the character has reached the set number of steps in order to determine whether the operation of the character corresponding to the received execution command has been completed. It discriminates (S5311). If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the set number of steps has not been reached (S5311: No), this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S5311 that the set number of steps has been reached (S5311: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the action pointer 223n (corresponding to the action) corresponding to the received execution command ( S5312). Then, the action content corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223n after the addition is read out from the action scenario table 222c (S5313), an action command is set based on the read action content (S5314), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, details of the initial operation processing (S5306) executed in the above-described execution command processing (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing (S5306). This initial operation process (S5306) is a process for executing the initial operation of various types of prizes.

  In the initial operation process (S5306), first, 1 is added to the value of the correction counter 223w (S5401). As described above, the correction counter 223 w is used to count the actual number of operation steps of the support member 720 in the initial operation and the actual number of operation steps of the effect member 620. That is, the number of operation steps of the initial operation for the slide operation performed while the value of the operation pointer 223 n is “01H” is counted, and the correction corresponding to the slide operation is made according to the ratio of the operation step number to the design value of 120. Used to calculate the value. In addition, the number of operation steps of the initial operation corresponding to the swing operation is counted, and the number of operation steps of one cycle of the swing operation is executed while the value of the operation pointer 223 n is executed between “02H” to “05H”. The ratio to the design value 40 is used to calculate the correction value corresponding to the swing motion.

  In this control example, the value of the correction counter 223 w is updated in each initial operation process (that is, even after the initial operation of the swing operation is finished). After the initial operation is completed and the calculation of the correction value is completed, the updating process (S5401) of the correction counter 223w may be skipped. Thus, the processing load in the initial operation processing (S5306) can be reduced.

  When the process of S5401 is completed, the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the initial action is read (S5402), the initial action table 222c5 is referenced based on the read value of the action pointer 223n, and the action of the corresponding role is completed It is determined whether the condition is satisfied (S5403). If it is determined in the process of S5403 that the completion condition of the operation of the corresponding character is not satisfied (S5403: No), an operation for one step is set for the corresponding character (S5404) , End this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5403 that the completion condition of the operation of the corresponding character is satisfied (S5403: Yes), then whether or not the value of the action pointer 223n read in the process of S5402 is 01H It is determined whether or not (S5405). If it is determined in the process of S5405 that the value of the action pointer 223n is 01H (S5405: Yes), it means that the sliding action of the forward path of the support member 720 is completed in the initial action (FIG. 142 (a )reference). Therefore, in this case, the ratio (the value of the correction counter 223w) to the ratio of the design value (120 steps) of the operation step number of the slide operation and the actual operation step number (count value of the correction counter 223w) is divided by 120 Value) is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value of the slide operation (S5406). Then, the value of the correction counter 223w is initialized (S5407), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5411.

  In the process of S5406, by initializing the correction counter 223w, it can be used to count the actual number of operation steps in the initial operation of the swing operation to be executed next. Therefore, the counter that counts the actual operation step number required for the slide operation and the counter that counts the actual operation step number required for the swing operation can be covered by the shared 1 counter (correction counter 223w). , And the capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5405 that the value of the action pointer 223n is not "01H" (S5405: No), then it is determined whether the value of the action pointer 223n is "05H" (S5406) ). In the process of S5406, when it is determined that the value of the action pointer 223n is 05H (S5408: Yes), the initial action of the swing action (the action corresponding to the values "02H" to "05H" of the action pointer 223n) Since it means that everything has been completed, processing is performed to calculate a correction value corresponding to the swinging motion. That is, the number of operation steps actually required for the oscillation operation in the initial operation (the value of “02H” to “05H” of the operation pointer 223n) 40 which is the design value of the operation step number in one cycle of the oscillation operation The value divided by the counted value of the correction counter 223w is stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value of the tilting (swinging) operation (S5409). Then, the value of the correction counter value 223w is initialized (S5410), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5411.

  If it is determined in the process of S5408 that the value of the action pointer 223n is not "05H" (ie, it is "06H" or more) (S5408: No), the process proceeds to S5411 as it is.

  When the process of S5407, S5408 or S5410 is finished, 1 is added to the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the initial action (S5411), and the action corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223n after addition is set (S5412) This process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the details of the tilting operation process (S5308) executed in the above-described execution command process (see FIG. 150) will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the tilting operation process (S5308). The tilting operation process (S5308) is a process for setting the tilting operation of the effect member 620 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 (see FIG. 9).

  In the tilting operation process (S5308), first, it is determined whether the additional operation flag 223q for the swinging (tilting) operation is on (S5501). As described above, the additional operation flag 223 q is directed to the sensor direction when the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H (high) although the number of operation steps defined in the operation scenario table 222 c is digested. It indicates whether it is an additional operation period in which an operation is additionally set.

  If it is determined in the process of S5501 that the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilting) operation is on (S5501: Yes), this means that the additional operation period of the effect member 620 is being performed, so the origin sensor The additional operation process (S5502) for executing the additional operation until the (tilt origin sensor 618) is detected is executed, and this process is ended. Details of the additional operation process (S5502) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5501 that the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilt) motion is off (S5501: No), then the tilt for causing the effect member 620 to tilt (swing) is performed. It is determined whether the number of steps of the drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (S5503). That is, it is determined whether the tilting (swinging) operation (forward movement or return movement) of the effect member 620 is completed.

  If it is determined in the process of S5503 that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has not reached the set number of steps (S5503: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5505 that the number of operation steps of the tilting drive motor 661 has reached the set number of steps (refer to the tilting operation table 222c2) (S5503: Yes), 1 of the operation pointer 223n Since the tilting (swing) operation (forward movement or return movement) of the rendering member 620 corresponding to the value is completed, next, the tilting (swing) movement of the rendering member 620 is the forward movement (opposite to the origin position) It is determined from the current value of the motion pointer 223n whether or not the motion in the direction (S5504). That is, it is determined whether the value of the action pointer 223 n is either “01H” or “03H”.

  If it is determined in the process of S5504 that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is an outward movement (operation in the direction opposite to the origin position) (S5504: Yes), then the operation for returning the effect member 620 is performed The processing (S5505 to S5507) for setting (a movable operation to the origin position direction) is executed.

  In the process of S5505, 1 is added to the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) action (S5505), and the action content corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223n after the addition is the action scenario table 222c (tilting action It reads out from the table 222c2) and sets it (S5506). Then, the value of the swing direction flag 223o is updated (reversed) to a value corresponding to the swing direction of the return path (S5507), and the process is ended. For example, when the processing of S5507 is executed in a state where the value of the swing direction flag 223o is 1 (the forward swing motion), the value of the swing motion flag 223o is updated (reversed) to 0 and the value is 0 When the process of S5507 is executed in the state of (the forward swing motion), the value of the swing motion flag 223o is updated (reversed) to one. As a result, since the swing direction flag 223o can be updated in accordance with the reversal of the motion direction of the swing motion, the motion direction can be accurately grasped.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5504, the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is the return operation (operation toward the home position) (the value of the operation pointer 223 corresponding to the effect member 620 is "02H", or When it is determined that “04H”) (S5504: No), since the effect member 620 is moved in the direction of the origin position, next, the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) corresponding to the effect member 620 Is determined to be H (5 V) (whether the effect member 620 is at the origin position) or not is determined (S5509).

  If it is determined in the process of S5509 that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is L (0 V) (S5508: No), the tilt drive motor 661 is not driven as set, rendering member In this case, there is a high possibility that an abnormality such as the number of steps is shifted due to aged deterioration or the like, in which the movement of the 620 is impeded, is highly likely to occur. Do. Details of the abnormality detection processing (S5510) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5509 that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) (S5508: Yes), the inclination direction setting process is executed (S5509). Finish.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, details of the additional operation processing (S5502) executed in the above-described tilting operation processing (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the addition operation process. In this additional operation process (S5502), the effect member 620 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152) is moved to the home position even after completing the operation of the set operation step number. It is a process for moving the effect member 620 to the origin position or for performing an error notification if it is not (if there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred) (S5508: No).

  In the additional operation process (S5502), first, it is determined whether or not the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) (S5601). If it is determined in the process of S5601 that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is not H (5 V) (S5601: No), the previous additional operation process (S5502) or the abnormal operation process described later (FIG. This means that the effect member 620 still deviates from the original position even after the one-step operation set in (see 155) is executed. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the tilting (swinging) operation is 10 or more (S5605).

  If it is determined in the process of S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is smaller than 10, the additional operation for one step is set again to move the effect member 620 to the origin position (S5606) , End this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5605 that the value of the step counter 223k is 10 or more (S5605: Yes), the additional operation process (S5502) is repeatedly executed to prevent returning to the origin position, and the process of S5606 In this case, the effect member 620 is not moved to the home position although the effect member 620 (tilt drive motor 661) is moved (added operation) by 10 steps or more. In other words, if within the range of the normal operation, it means that the operation of the number of operation steps that can sufficiently reach the origin position has been performed. Therefore, in this case, an error command is set (S5607), and the process ends.

  In addition, when setting an error command, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above, and the operation of the effect member 620 is a tilting (swinging) operation outside the normal movable (setting) range, and further makes the tilting operation (movable) If there is a risk of contact with another item or the like, an error command may be set to end the process.

  In addition, the number of operation steps for determining an error is not limited to 10, and may be arbitrarily determined according to the type of the character or the drive motor. For example, in the case of adopting a driving motor which is relatively easily deteriorated (the number of operation steps is easily deviated), the number of operation steps until it is determined as an error may be increased (for example, 15 times). Conversely, when a relatively accurate and long-lived drive motor is employed, the error may be determined with a smaller number of operation steps (for example, five times).

  If it is determined in the process of S5601 that the output of the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is H (5 V) (S5601: Yes), the process of S5606 executed in the previous additional operation process (S5502) (S5606) Alternatively, the effect member 620 is moved to the home position in the one-step operation set in the process of S5801 of the abnormality detection process. In this case, the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the tilting (swinging) action is updated (S5602), and the action content corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223n after updating is the action scenario table 222c (tilting action table 222c2) Are read out and set (S5603). Then, the additional operation flag 223 q for the swing (tilting) operation is set to OFF (S 5604), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the details of the tilt direction setting process (S5509) executed in the above-described tilt operation process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing tilt direction setting processing. This tilt direction setting process (S5502) is executed when the effect member 620 provided in the tilt operation unit 600 reaches the home position in the swing operation (S5508: Yes) in the above-described tilt operation process (see FIG. 152). Processing.

  In the tilt direction setting process (S5509), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (or larger than 3) (S5701). The value of the swing counter 223v is updated by the processing of S5714 described later, and each time the swing operation of the effect member 620 is executed once (considered once in the leftward reciprocation and the rightward reciprocation) Is incremented by one (see S5715). Therefore, when the value of the swing counter 223v is 3, the swing operation of the effect member 620 is performed three times.

  If it is determined in the process of S5701 that the value of the swing counter 223v is 3 (S5701: Yes), the swing (tilting) operation of the effect member 620 is completed a prescribed number of times (three times). Therefore, it is then determined whether the slide operation of the support member 720 provided in the tilting operation unit 600 is (or has been) going (S5702). In the process of S5702, when it is determined that the slide operation of the support member 720 is the return path (or the return path) (S5702: No), the swing operation of the effect member 620 is not performed thereafter, This processing ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the slide operation of the support member 720 is the forward path (is forward) (S5702: Yes), the neck of the effect member 620 is completed after the slide operation (forward operation) of the support member 720 is completed. In order to execute the swing operation, the process moves to the processing of S5703.

  In the process of S5703, it is determined whether the sliding operation (forward movement operation) of the support member 720 has been completed (S5703). More specifically, if the slide standby flag 223t is on, it is determined that the slide operation (forward movement) of the support member 720 is completed, and if the slide standby flag 223t is off, the slide operation of the support member 720 ( It is determined that the forward movement operation is not completed.

  In the process of S5703, if the slide standby flag 223t is on and it is determined that the slide operation is completed (S5703: Yes), the value of the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is set to 02H, and the tilt is made. The value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the (swing) action is set to 03H (S5705). Then, based on the value of the action pointer 223n set by the process of S5705, the action content is read out and set from the action scenario table (slide action table 222c1 and tilting action table 222c2) (S5706). By the process of S5706, the support member 720 of the tilting operation unit 600 is moved in the backward direction, and the effect member 620 is set to swing (tilting) operation (three reciprocations).

  When the process of S5706 is finished, the slide standby flag 223t is set to OFF (S5707), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5703, when it is determined that the slide standby flag 223t is off and the slide operation is not completed (S5703: No), in order to wait until the slide operation of the support member 720 is completed, The swing standby flag 223u is set to ON (S5704), the value of the swing counter 223v is initialized to 0 (S5708), and this process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S5701 that the value of the swing counter 223v is not 3 (less than 2) (S5701: No), the process proceeds to the process of S5709 in order to continue the swing (tilting) operation. .

  In the process of S5709, the swing direction before reaching the home position is specified based on the value of the swing direction flag 223o (S5709). Then, the swingable direction is specified based on the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation and the swing area table 222d (see FIG. 142) (S5710).

  After the process of S5710, the swing direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is specified from the swing direction before reaching the origin specified in the process of S5709, and the swing direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is It is determined whether or not it matches the swingable direction specified in the process of S5710 (S5711). In the process of S5711, if it is determined that the swing direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is not the direction in which the swinging is possible (S5711: No), the swing direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin is the swingable direction The value of the action pointer 223 n corresponding to the swing (tilting) action is updated three times (S 5712), and the process proceeds to S 5714.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5711 that the swing (tilt) direction (traveling direction) after passing the origin point is the swingable direction (S5711: Yes), the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is determined. The value is updated once (S5713), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5714.

  Here, the processes of S5712 and S5713 will be specifically described. When the tilt direction setting process (S5509) is performed, as described above, the effect member 620 is at the origin position. In this case, the value of the motion pointer 223 n corresponding to the swing motion is “02H” (if the swing direction is on the left) or “04H” (if the swing direction is on the right) . Therefore, if the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated three times, 01H (the swing direction is left) is set if 02H (the swing direction is the left) is set, 04H ( When the swing direction is set to the right, 03H (swing direction is set to the right) is set. That is, the value is updated to the value for forward movement in the same direction as the previously set swing direction. As a result, when the swing (advancing) direction after passing the origin point is not the swingable direction, the forward movement in the same direction is set again.

  On the other hand, when the value of the motion pointer 223n corresponding to the swing motion is updated once, 03H (the swing direction is the right) is set if 02H (the swing direction is the left) is set. If "04H" (swing direction is right) is set, "01H" (swing direction is left) is set. That is, the value is updated to a value that causes the forward movement in the direction opposite to the previously set swinging direction (the direction passing through the origin position). Thereby, when the swing (advancing) direction after passing the origin point is the swingable direction, it is set so that the forward movement is performed in the opposite direction), and the effect member 620 is set to the origin position. It can be swung (tilted) in the left and right direction as the center.

  In the process of S5711, the determination as to whether or not the swing (advancing) direction after passing the origin is the swingable direction is not limited to the above. For example, the position where the support member 720 is moved is read (guessed) until the effect member 620 reaches the home position next time, the swingable direction is specified, and the swingable direction is determined. Good. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the swingable direction more accurately. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the effect member 620 comes in contact with other components (other features, the outer wall portion 212, and the like).

  After the process of S5712 or S5713, the action scenario table (the tilting action table 222c2) is referred to based on the value of the action pointer 223n after the update, and the action content is read and set (S5714). Then, the value of the swing counter 223v is updated (S5715), and the process ends. The value of the swing counter 223v in the process of S5715 is incremented by one when the effect member 620 reciprocates leftward and rightward (when reciprocated leftward and then reciprocated rightward). The present invention is not limited to this, and one may be added whenever the effect member 620 is moved to the home position.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 155, details of the abnormality detection setting process (S5510) executed in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the abnormality detection process. In this abnormality detection process (S5510), when the return operation of the effect member 620 is completed in the above-described tilting operation process (see FIG. 152), that is, the movement to the origin position is completed, the origin sensor (tilt origin sensor 618) is a process executed when it is determined that the effect member 620 is displaced from the origin position.

  In the abnormality detection process (S5510), first, an operation command corresponding to the operation of one step is set for the character (in this case, the effect member 620) in which the abnormality is detected (S5801). Then, the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the character whose operation is set by the process of S5801 is reset to 0 (S5802), and the additional operation flag 223q for the swing (tilting) operation is set to ON (S5803) This process ends. By the processing from S5801 to S5803, in the above-described additional operation processing (FIG. 153), the additional operation for up to 10 steps is executed, and the effect member 620 is moved to the origin position (see S5606 in FIG. 153). Also, in the addition operation process (FIG. 153), if the effect member 620 is not moved to the origin position even if the addition operation for 10 steps is executed, an error notification is performed (see S5607 in FIG. 153). .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the details of the slide operation process (S5310) executed in the execution command process (see FIG. 150) described above will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing slide operation processing. In this slide operation process (S5310), in the above-mentioned execution command process (see FIG. 150), the execution command corresponding to the slide operation is received, ie, the operation for one step corresponding to the slide operation of the support member 720 is completed Is a process that is executed when the

  In the slide operation process (S5310), first, it is determined whether the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is on (S5901). If it is determined in the process of S5901 that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is ON (S5901: Yes), the return operation of the support member 720 is completed, that is, the movement to the home position is completed. Regardless of the case, it is determined that the support member 720 is not at the origin position by the origin sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717), and an additional operation of 10 steps is executed. In this case, the above-described additional operation process (FIG. 153) is performed on the slide operation part (post member 720) (S5902), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5901 that the additional operation flag 223q for the slide operation is off (S5901: No), then the number of steps set by the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation (slide operation table 222c1 It is determined whether or not it has reached (see S5903).

  In the process of S5903, when it is determined that the value of the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation has not reached the set number of steps (see the slide operation table 222c1) (S5903: No), the slide operation is continued. This process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5903, when the step counter 223k corresponding to the slide operation determines that the set number of steps has been reached (S5903: Yes), the strut member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position. It is. In this case, the corresponding sensor (slide origin detection sensor 717 or slide position detection sensor 718) is used to determine whether or not the support member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position. It is determined whether the output is H (5 V) (S5904).

  In the process of S5904, when the output of the corresponding sensor is L (0 V), that is, when it is determined that the support member 720 is not moved to the home position or the overhang position (S5904), the above-described abnormality detection processing This process is ended by executing (see FIG. 155) on the slide operation product (supporting member 720) (S5905).

  On the other hand, in the process of S5904, when it is determined that the output of the corresponding sensor is H (5 V), that is, the strut member 720 is moved to the origin position or the overhang position (S5904: Yes), Next, it is judged whether or not the value of the action pointer 223n corresponding to the slide action is 01H (forward pass action) (S5906).

  When it is determined in the process of S5906 that the value of the operation pointer 223n is "02H" (return operation) (S5906: No), the timing at which the slide operation of the column member 720 provided in the slide operation unit 700 ends. Since this is the case, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5906 that the value of the action pointer 223n is 01H (forward movement) (S5906: Yes), the process goes to the process of S5907 in order to cause the support member 720 to return.

  In the process of S5907, it is determined whether the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed (S5907). In the process of S5907, it is determined whether the tilting (swing) operation of the effect member 620 has been completed based on whether the swing standby flag 223u is on. Specifically, when the swing standby flag 223u is on, it is determined that the tilting (swing) operation of the effect member 620 is completed, and if the swing standby flag 223u is off, It is determined that the tilting (swinging) operation of the effect member 620 is not completed.

  In the process of S5907, if it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is off, that is, the tilting (swing) operation of the effect member 620 is not completed (S5908: No), the slide operation is completed To indicate that the slide standby flag 223t is turned on (S5908), and the process ends. The slide standby flag 223t set to ON by the process of S5908 is referred to when it is determined whether or not the slide operation is completed in the above-described tilting direction setting process (see FIG. 154) (see S5703 in FIG. 154). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S5907, when it is determined that the swing standby flag 223u is on, that is, the tilting (swing) operation of the effect member 620 is completed (S5908: Yes), the tilting operation unit 600. To return to the process of S5909.

  In the process of S5909, the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the slide operation is set to 02H (return operation), and the operation pointer 223n corresponding to the tilt (swing) operation is set to "03H" (swing start operation to the right) It sets (S5909). Then, the action content corresponding to the value of the action pointer 223 n after update is read out from the slide action table 222 c 1 and the tilting action table 222 c 2 and set (S 5910). Thereafter, the swing standby flag 223u is set to OFF (S5911), and the present process ends.

  As described above, in this control example, at the time of execution of the initial operation based on power-on, the actual number of operation steps of the swing operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 are analyzed and The difference is configured to be distinguishable. Then, by correcting the operation speed of the slide operation according to the difference from the design value, it is possible to make the timing when the tilt operation of the effect member 620 and the slide operation of the support member 720 end. That is, it is possible to end the operation content (three swing operations) of the predetermined effect member 620 until the slide operation is finished. Therefore, even if the slide operation is completed, only the swing operation is continuously performed, or even if the swing operation is completed, the slide operation is not completed, and the slide operation is continued in a state where the effect member 620 is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of variations in movement such as sagging. Therefore, when the swinging operation of the effect member 620 and the sliding operation of the support member 720 operate in combination, the operation quality can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the swingable direction in the swing operation is defined according to the number of steps of the slide operation. Then, when reaching the origin position of the swing motion during execution of the swing motion of the effect member 620, the number of steps of the current slide motion is determined, and the swing motion in the reverse direction is passed through the origin. It is configured to determine if it is feasible. Thus, even if the correspondence between the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the number of operation steps of the swing motion deviates from the correspondence shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the problem that the outer wall portion 212 and the like and the effect member 620 interfere (collide).

  In this control example, the actual operation step number of the slide operation and the actual operation step number of the swing operation are analyzed in the initial operation, and the correction value is calculated. The calculation timing is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the player is not playing a game (during demonstration effect), the actual number of operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation is analyzed to calculate the correction value. It is also good. As a result, even if the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation changes during the game, in the demonstration effect, it is possible to calculate the correction value according to the operation after the change, so the swing operation and the slide In the rendering operation that combines with the operation, the operation quality can be further improved. Also, for example, the slide movement operation scenario may be corrected during the execution of the effect in which the slide movement and the swing movement are performed in combination. More specifically, for example, when the swinging motion and the sliding motion are executed in combination, the number of steps required for the first cycle of the swinging motion is counted (or the operation time is counted). Every other, the number of remaining operation steps (or operation time) required to perform a total of three cycles (three times) of swing operation may be calculated. Then, based on the number of remaining steps for performing three cycles (three times) of swing operation (that is, for performing the remaining two cycles of swing operation) and the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation. , And may be configured to correct the operation speed of the slide operation. More specifically, for example, in the state where the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 70 steps, when the operation of one cycle of the slide operation is completed, 80 steps (two cycles) of the swing operation remain become. In this case, a value obtained by correcting the operation speed of the subsequent slide operation by multiplying the ratio between the remaining operation step number of the slide operation and the remaining operation step number of the swing operation (80 steps / 70 steps) The new operating speed may be set to × 100 pps). Furthermore, in the initial operation, the actual operation step number required for the swing operation and the actual operation step number required for the slide operation are determined in advance, and the correction value is calculated taking into consideration the determination result. May be Specifically, in this processing, it is determined whether or not the swing counter 223v is 1 (whether one cycle of the swing operation has ended) in the tilt direction setting process (see FIG. 154). When it is determined that one cycle has been completed, processing may be performed to determine the number of remaining operation steps of the slide operation and the swing operation. Then, the operation speed of the slide operation may be corrected according to the calculated remaining number of operation steps. As a result, the slide operation can be corrected each time the effect in which the slide operation and the swing operation are executed in combination is performed, so that it is possible to more reliably reach the extended position of the slide operation. A swing operation can be performed a prescribed number of times (three times). Furthermore, in the case described above, the slide operation table 222c1 may be eliminated. Then, based on the number of operation steps (or operation time) of the effect member 620 at the end of one cycle of the swing operation, the operation content of the support member 720 is calculated to fit the remaining operation of the effect member 620. It may be configured as follows.

  In this control example, the operation speed of the slide operation is corrected based on the correction value, but it is also possible to correct both the operation speed of the slide operation and the operation speed of the swing operation. good. Specifically, for example, the ratio of the actual operation step number of the slide operation to the design value is multiplied by the operation speed as the correction value of the slide operation, and the overhang position is reached when the operation as designed is executed. The time may be matched with the time to reach the overhang position in the actual operation. Specifically, for example, when the number of operation steps is 10% larger than the design value, the operation speed is increased by 10% to absorb (cancel) the increase in the number of steps at the operation speed, and the operation time as designed May be configured to reach the overhanging position. Similarly, the correction value may be calculated from the actual number of movement steps of the swing motion, and the time until the swing motion is reciprocated three times may be made to coincide with the operation at the design value. This makes it possible to end the action of the accessory with the same operation time each time, and to reliably execute the same number of swing movements.

  In this control example, when correcting the operation speed of the slide operation, the correction value is calculated by the ratio of the number of operation steps in design and the number of actual operation steps, but instead of calculating the correction value Thus, a plurality of operation scenarios may be prepared according to the difference between the design operation number and the actual operation step number. Then, the operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width may be selected by determining the deviation width between the design operation number and the actual operation step number. As a result, when performing the slide operation, it is not necessary to recalculate the operation speed from the correction value each time, and it is sufficient to read out and set the operation scenario corresponding to the deviation width, so the processing of the MPU 211 of the audio lamp control device 113 The load can be reduced.

  In this control example, the correction value for correcting the operation content of the slide operation is calculated, but a selectable correction value may be defined in advance in the ROM 222 or the like. Then, a correction value corresponding to the difference between the designed number of operation steps and the actual number of operation steps may be selected and used as a correction value when the slide operation is set. Thus, instead of the process of calculating the correction value, the correction value can be selected by a relatively light process of selecting the correction value corresponding to the deviation width, so the processing load of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reduced. be able to.

  In this control example, the correction value is calculated by the ratio of the actual number of steps required for the slide operation and the swing operation to the number of steps (Typ value) in design, but this is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the time required for the slide operation and the swing operation may be measured, and the correction value may be calculated by the ratio to the design operation time. For example, while the design operation time of the sliding operation from the home position to the overhanging position by the support member 720 is 1.2 seconds (120 steps ÷ 100 pps), 1 is actually required to reach the overhanging position. When it takes 5 seconds (when the required time is 1.25), 1.25 may be stored in the correction value storage area 223p as the correction value of the slide operation.

  In this control example, according to the number of steps of the slide operation of the support member 720, the swingable direction defined in the swing area table 222d is determined every time it becomes the origin position of the swing operation, and the origin point is reached. Although it has been configured to determine the swing direction, it is not limited to this configuration. For example, position coordinates of the effect member 620 in consideration of the slide position are calculated for each step of the swing motion, and it is determined whether the effect member 620 fits in the area between the origin position and the overhang position. You may configure it. More specifically, for example, when the effect member 620 performs the swing operation in the right direction in the front view, horizontal coordinates (coordinates in the slide operation direction) of the end point of the upper right end of the effect member 620 disposed on the rightmost side May be calculated for each step. Then, when the calculated horizontal coordinate matches the horizontal coordinate of the right end (10 cm from the origin position to the right) of the rendering member 620 when both of the rendering member 620 and the support member 720 are at the origin position, the right direction Alternatively, the swinging direction may be reversed in the direction of the origin (the left direction in the front view) by paying attention to the swinging motion. Similarly, when the effect member 620 performs the swing operation in the left direction of the front view, the horizontal coordinate (coordinate of the slide operation direction) of the end point of the upper end of the upper surface of the effect member 620 disposed on the leftmost side It may be configured to calculate each time. When the effect member 620 coincides with the horizontal coordinate of the left end of the effect member 620 (10 cm from the overhang position to the left) when the support member 620 is at the origin position and the support member 720 is at the overhang position, The movement direction may be reversed in the direction of the origin (right direction in front view) with attention to the operation.

  Hereinafter, the method of calculating horizontal coordinates will be described more specifically. In this modification, the width of the effect member 620 is 20 cm, the action radius of the swing operation is 15 cm, and the angle by which the effect member 620 performs the swing operation in one step of the effect member 620 is 6 degrees That is, the horizontal distance from the origin position to the overhang position is 60 cm (that is, one step 0.5 cm) by setting the angle to 60 degrees in 10 steps. In this case, when, for example, the 5-step effect member 620 is operated in the right direction, the effect member 620 rotates 30 degrees (6 degrees × 5 steps). As a result, the middle point of the top surface of the effect member 620 is variable 7.5 cm (15 steps as horizontal coordinates) in the front view right direction (15 cm × sin 30 °). The horizontal coordinate of the end point of the right end of the top surface of the effect member 620 is about 8.7 cm (18 steps as horizontal coordinates) to the right from the center of the top surface (10 cm × cos 30 °). That is, the right side of 33 steps corresponds to the coordinates of the right end of the effect member 620 as horizontal coordinates. Therefore, taking into consideration that the width of the right half of the effect member 620 at the origin position (inverted state) is 20 steps (10 cm), to the right when the number of operation steps of the slide operation is 13 steps or less from the origin position The swinging motion of should be broken and the swinging direction should be reversed to the left.

  In this manner, the number of operation steps of the slide operation and the number of operation steps of the swing operation are converted to horizontal coordinates, and compared with the threshold of the horizontal coordinates on the left and right (coordinates of the limit not to interfere with the outer wall 212). By varying V, even if the swinging motion and the sliding motion deviate from the designed motion, the swinging motion can be operated within the range that can prevent (suppress) the interference. As a result, it is possible to realize swing motion with a more dynamic feeling, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In this control example, the effect member 620 is provided above the support member 720, and the correction method of the operation scenario of the accessory in which the swing operation and the slide operation are integrally performed has been described, but the present invention can be applied. The features are not limited to this configuration. The present invention can be applied to any combination of works that operate in conjunction with one another. For example, the same members as the effect members 620 are provided on the right and left sides of the game board 13, respectively, and these do not slide. It may be configured to perform the swing operation in synchronization with each other.

  In this control example, the swingable direction is defined, and control is performed so that other components such as the effect member 620 and the outer wall portion 212 do not collide (interfere), but the swinging motion is changed during operation The conditions to do are not limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the timing of reaching the overhanging position by the slide operation and the timing of reaching the origin position from the right side of the effect member 620 are shifted. Then, when the timing is likely to be shifted, the operation content (setting value) of the swinging motion is corrected, and the timing when the sliding member reaches the overhanging position, and the effect member 620 reaches the origin position from the right side in front view It may be made to correspond with the timing to do. More specifically, for example, at a predetermined position between the origin position of the slide operation and the overhang position (for example, 10 steps before the overhang position), the number of remaining steps until the swing operation ends is determined. Do. Then, it may be configured to correct to the operation speed at which the swing operation is completed with the remaining number of steps. For example, when it is determined that only 5 steps remain to the origin position of the swing operation with the slide operation remaining 10 steps, by setting the operation speed of the swing operation to half (100 pps → 50 pps) The swing operation may be corrected to be performed just 5 steps while the slide operation is performed 10 steps. In addition, when the number of remaining steps of the swing operation is smaller than the slide operation, instead of changing the operation speed, a weight may be input. The weights may be inserted only once or divided into multiple times. On the other hand, conversely, if it is determined that 20 steps of swinging motion up to the origin position of the swinging motion are left with 10 steps of slide motion remaining, the operating speed of the swing motion is doubled (100 pps → By setting it to 200 pps, it may be corrected that the swing operation is performed just 20 steps while the slide operation is performed 10 steps. In addition, instead of determining the timing of correcting the operation content of the swing operation based on the number of operation steps of the slide operation, the slide position may be determined by a sensor or the like to determine whether or not the swing operation is corrected. . As described above, by matching the timing at which the slide operation ends with the timing at which the swing operation ends, the visual quality in the case where the rendering member 620 and the support member 720 operate in combination can be improved. it can. In addition, as an example of other conditions for changing the swinging motion in the middle of the motion, the position of the sliding motion (the number of remaining operation steps) and the number of swinging motions are determined in the middle of the sliding motion. It may be determined whether the predetermined number of swings (three times) can be completed by the number of steps. Then, if it is determined that the predetermined number of swings is not reached, the movement speed of the swing motion may be changed to be able to achieve an operation that can achieve the predetermined number of swings. As for the process of determining the number of remaining operation steps and the number of swings and the process of correcting the operation speed of the swing operation, the additional operation flag 223 q is the process of S5901 in the slide operation process (see FIG. 156). It may be executed after it is determined that the switch is off (S5901: No).

  In this control example, in the additional operation process (see FIG. 153), if the output of the corresponding sensor does not become H even if one additional step operation is performed in the sensor direction, an error command is set and an error is generated. Although the system is configured to notify, the method of notifying an error is not limited to this. For example, while displaying the image for notifying the occurrence of abnormality in the third symbol display device 81, it operates in the operation mode for exclusive use (for abnormality detection) for a fixed period (for example, 10 seconds) for the prize which detected the abnormality While continuing to make it do, you may comprise so that operation | movement of the accessory which has not detected other abnormality may be stopped. By configuring in this way, it can be easily determined from visual appearance which of the prizes the abnormality has occurred. That is, when an error is notified, a store clerk or the like in the hall can easily determine that some abnormality has occurred in the item that is continuing to operate.

  In the present control example, it is assumed that the accessory (the effect member 620 and the support member 720) operates in combination, but instead of or in addition to this, the support member 720 and other configurations and You may control in conjunction. For example, the support members 720 may be interlocked with the slide operation to switch the lighting patterns of the electrical decoration portions 29 to 33. In this case, a lighting pattern may be set in accordance with the sliding operation of the support member 720. Further, the lighting mode may be switched each time the support member 720 returns to the home position. For example, the lighting color of the electric decorative portions 29 to 33 may be switched as red → green → blue → red... Every time the original position and the overhang position are reciprocated by sliding operation. By configuring in this way, it is sufficient to store the lighting color that was set during the previous slide operation, and to switch according to the start of the slide operation, so the lighting control of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 is simplified. can do. Further, as compared with the case where the lighting pattern is switched according to the progressing state of the slide operation, it is possible to suppress the shift between the progressing state of the slide operation and the switching timing of the lighting pattern. Therefore, the visual quality at the time of the slide operation can be improved. In addition, since it is sufficient to switch the lighting color in response to the return to the original position, the drive motor for sliding the support member 720 is changed, or the mechanism such as the gear ratio is changed, etc. Even if the round trip time is changed, the lighting control data before the change can be used as it is. That is, since the process of changing the lighting pattern in accordance with the changed configuration can be omitted, the work of the designer can be reduced.

<Third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 157 to 173, the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described. In the first control example described above, when displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 or the sub display device 690 during the normal game, the capacity of the character ROM 234 is utilized by diverting various power-on images. The technology for reducing was explained.

  On the other hand, in the third control example, a control method which can further increase the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect which is one of the entertaining effects executed in the sub display device 690 will be described. In addition, although the details will be described later, the timing effect is an effect in which the timing at which the frame button 229 provided on the front frame 14 is pressed (operated) is suggested by the image displayed on the sub display device 690. It is a kind of entertainment effect performed while the variation display of the special symbol is executed. In this timing effect, points are added each time the timing suggested by the sub display device 690 matches the timing when the player actually operates the frame button 229, and the timing effect is obtained until the end of the timing effect. If the point is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference value (norm), it is an effect of providing a bonus to the player.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the third control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in the configuration in that a frame button 229 is provided instead of the frame button 22, the sound lamp control device 113 The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. is there. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the front view of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 157, the pachinko machine 10 in the present control example is provided with the frame button 229 on the left side in front view with respect to the ball rental operation unit 40 and the frame button 22 is deleted. The frame button 229 is composed of four types of button types: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. These four types of buttons are used for timing effects. That is, in the timing effect, the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 and the type of the button to be pressed (operating) are suggested (see FIGS. 163 and 164). And when the timing suggested by the effect and the type of the button both match, it is an effect that points are added.

  Next, a display mode of the timing effect will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 163 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the sub display device 690 when the timing effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 163, when the timing effect is executed, a plurality of display areas (display areas 901, 902, 903, 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, 905) are displayed on the sub display device 690.

  The display areas 904a, 904b, 904c, 904d, and 905 displayed in the lower half of the display area of the sub display device 690 suggest to the player the timing when the frame button 229 is pressed (operated) and the button type to be operated. It is a display area where display for the purpose is performed. As shown in FIG. 163, the display area 905 is composed of a vertically long rectangular pressing indication area 911a and four horizontally elongated rectangular scroll display areas 911b to 911e. The scroll display areas 911 b to 911 e are vertically arranged in this order and displayed.

  The scroll display areas 911 b to 911 e are configured to be able to scroll and display various images in the left direction of the front view (the direction of the pressing suggestion area 911 a). As various images to be scroll-displayed, for example, scroll bars 912a to 912e, continuous hitting bars 913a and the like are provided as shown in FIG. Points are added by pressing a button of the corresponding type at the timing at which various images to be scrolled are scrolled to a position where they overlap the pressing suggestion area 911a. The scroll bar is configured such that a corresponding button type (10 points or 50 points) is added by pressing the corresponding button type once at a timing overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a. On the other hand, the continuous hitting bar is configured such that the corresponding point (50 points) is added by pressing the corresponding button ten times while overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a.

  Above the pressing suggestion area 911 a, a balloon-shaped display area 901 pointing to the pressing suggestion area 911 a is displayed. In the display area 901, characters such as “Push buttons at the timing of overlapping bars and aim for 1000 points!” Are displayed. Depending on the display contents of the display area 901, points are added when the frame button 229 is pressed at the timing when various images scrolled and displayed in the scroll display areas 911b to 911e scroll to the position of the pressing suggestion area 911a. It can be easily understood by the player.

  In the upper right of the sub display device 690, a substantially rectangular display area 902 is displayed. This display area 902 is acquired when the type of an image that can be scrolled and displayed in each scroll display area 911b to 911e and the corresponding type of button at the timing when the image overlaps the depression suggestion area 911a (operation) The correspondence with possible points is displayed. Specifically, the white scroll bar is displayed at 50 points, the hatched scroll bar is displayed at 10 points, and the scroll bar is displayed with the characters "Continuous Strike !!" It is displayed that it is 50 points. By clearly indicating the correspondence between the image and the points in the display area 902, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being suspicious of the increase or decrease of the points, so the timing effect can be assured for the player. It is possible to play a game inside.

  Below the display area 902, a display area 903 having a horizontally long rectangular shape is displayed. The display area 903 displays the total points acquired in the present timing presentation and the quotas. In the example of FIG. 163 (a), although the norma is 1000 points, it shows a state in which 100 points have been acquired so far, so the character "Point: 0100/1000" is displayed in the display area 902. Is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the current point against the quota. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game aiming at the quota, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate.

  In this control example, when the norm is achieved in the timing effect, the present gaming state is notified as a benefit. In this control example, similarly to the first control example, a 2R probability variation jackpot is provided as a jackpot type. In addition, a small hit is provided as a kind of outlier with the same opening operation as the 2R probability variation big hit, and it is not possible to distinguish whether it has won a 2R probability variation jackpot or a small hit from the opening operation of the presentation or specified winning opening 65a. Is configured as. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the gaming state after the 2R opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is executed. Therefore, in the present control example, if the norm is achieved at the end of the timing effect, the current gaming state (whether it is a probability variation state of a special symbol or a low probability state) is notified as a benefit of timing effect. It is configured as follows. Thereby, a player who wants to know the current gaming state can be actively participated in the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, by making the bonus in case of success in the timing effect not to affect the game result (notification of the current gaming state), can the bonus be granted purely by the skill of the pressing (operation) timing of the player? You can decide if. On the other hand, if the result (for example, a big hit etc.) whose outcome is already decided at the start of fluctuation (before the timing effect starts) is set as a benefit, the timing effect will start Before, the result of the timing presentation (whether or not the mode for achieving the norm can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect of a mode in which the quota can not be achieved, there is a risk that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present control example, the privilege to be awarded when achieving the quota in the timing effect is set to "notification of the gaming state" which has no influence on the game result. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to award a benefit purely in accordance with the timing of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when a benefit is awarded, the player can more strongly feel that the player has acquired the benefit by himself. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved.

  On the left side of the display area 905, circular display areas 904a to 904d are displayed side by side vertically. The display areas 904a to 904d are displayed such that the vertical positions thereof are substantially the same as the scroll display areas 911b to 911e, respectively. Further, characters of “upper”, “right”, “left”, and “lower” are displayed inside the display areas 904 a to 904 d, respectively. With these characters, the player can easily recognize the button type corresponding to the scroll display areas 911 b to 911 e having substantially the same vertical position as the display areas 904 a to 904 d. That is, the scroll display area 911b whose vertical position is substantially the same as that of the display area 904a in which the character “upper” is displayed is recognized as a display area for suggesting the pressing (operation) timing of the upper button UB. Can. Similarly, the scroll display area 911 c indicates the pressing (operation) timing of the right button RB, the scroll display area 911 d indicates the pressing (operation) timing of the left button LB, and the scroll display area 911 e is the down button DB It is possible to easily recognize that the timing of pressing (operation) is suggested.

  By executing the timing effect, the frame button 229 can be operated with the aim of achieving the quota, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 163 (b) and FIG. 164 (a), the display mode when the operation of the frame button 229 is detected in the timing effect will be described. First, FIG. 163 (a) shows a display mode when the frame button 229 can be pressed (a point can be obtained) at the timing when the image scrolled and displayed in the timing effect overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. ing.

  FIG. 163 (b) shows the display content when the player presses the up button UB at the timing when the white scroll bar 912a scrolled and displayed in the slide display area 911b overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a. . As shown in FIG. 163 (b), when it is detected that the player has pressed the upper button UB, the display area 904a (corresponding to the upper button UB) to which the character "upper" is attached is turned on. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 normally detects the operation (pressing) of the player, so that the game with the timing effect can be performed more safely.

  In addition, on the left side of the display areas 904a to 904d, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has pressed (operated) the frame button 229 with good timing. Since the characters “GREAT” are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the operation timing of the frame button 229 is correct. Furthermore, below the display area 921, a character 922 indicating a point given as a result of successful pressing is displayed. By the character 922 "+50", it is possible to easily recognize the points acquired for the player. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated according to the acquired points (0100/1000 → 0150/1000). With these display contents, it is possible to make the player recognize that both the timing at which the frame button 229 is pressed and the button type match (the pressing is successful). In addition, the points earned (granted) and the total points so far can be easily confirmed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 (a), the display content in the case where the timing of pressing the button deviates from the suggestion display area 911a will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a diagram showing display contents when pressing of the upper button UB is detected before the scroll bar 912a reaches the pressing suggestion area 911a. Also in this case, the display area 904 a (corresponding to the upper button UB) to which the character “upper” is attached lights up to notify that the pressing of the upper button UB has been normally detected.

  In addition, on the left side of the display area 904a, a display area 921 is formed to indicate that the player has failed to press the frame button 229 (operation). Since the characters “BAD” are displayed in the display area 921, the player can easily recognize that the pressing (operation) timing of the frame button 229 is incorrect. Furthermore, below the display area 921 is displayed a character 924 indicating that a penalty has been imposed due to a pressing failure. The character “924” of “−10” makes it easy to recognize that the point has been subtracted due to the pressing failure. Therefore, since the frame button 229 can be operated more carefully, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect. In addition, the display of the display area 903 is updated in accordance with the subtracted point (0100/1000 → 0090/1000). These display contents allow the player to recognize that pressing of the frame button 229 has failed. Also, it is possible to easily confirm the points that have been subtracted and the total points so far.

  Next, an example of an aspect having different difficulty levels will be described. Although details will be described later, in the present control example, when the timing effect is executed, the difficulty level of the timing effect to be executed this time can be determined from among a plurality of difficulty levels. In addition, the determined difficulty level is not fixed, and may be reviewed during the presentation depending on the progress of the timing presentation, the player's participation in the timing presentation, and the like.

  FIG. 164 (b) is a diagram exemplifying an aspect of timing presentation with a high degree of difficulty. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), in this modification, the appearance ratio of the scroll bar (the scroll bars 915a to 915e to which 10 points are given when the pressing is successful) is high when the difficulty level is high. Become. That is, the quota can not be achieved unless the frame button 229 is pressed more times more accurately. In addition, when the degree of difficulty increases, the scroll speed is also increased. Thus, it is configured that it is difficult to match the timing of pressing the frame button 229. By providing the timing effect of the aspect in which the difficulty levels are different, it is possible to cope with a player who is good at pressing the frame button 229 at the same timing and a player who is not good at it. That is, the degree of difficulty can be varied according to the skill of the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the display mode when notifying the result of the timing effect will be described. FIG. 165 (a) is a display that is displayed on the sub display device 690 when the 1000 point which is the norm is achieved (for example, 1200 points are acquired) in the timing effect executed during the special symbol state of variation It is the figure which illustrated the contents. As shown in FIG. 165 (a), when it is determined that the timing effect is completed and the quota has been achieved, a notification region 916 for reporting the result of the timing effect is formed inside the display region 905. Be done. As a result, in the notification area, the characters “Norma achieved !! Current state is definite!” Are displayed. By this display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol. In the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, the characters "the current state is low ..." are displayed instead of the characters "the current state is definite!".

  On the other hand, FIG. 165 (b) exemplifies the display content displayed on the sub display device 690 when the timing effect does not reach the normative 1000 points (for example, only 600 points can be obtained). FIG. As shown in FIG. 165 (b), even when it is determined that the timing effect has ended and the quota has not been achieved, the result notification area 916 for notifying the result of the timing effect is displayed inside the display area 905. It is formed. As a result, in the notification area, characters such as "unsatisfied with unachieved ..." are displayed. That is, only notification that the quota can not be achieved by the timing effect is notified, and the current gaming state is not notified (a bonus is not given).

  In this way, by achieving the norm in the timing effect, the current gaming state is notified in the result notification area 916, so that the player who wants to know the current gaming state actively participates in the timing effect. Can.

  In this control example, notification of the gaming state is set as a benefit when the score is achieved, but the benefit in the timing effect is not limited to this. It is sufficient if it is a benefit which is not influenced by the game result determined before the execution of the timing effect is determined. For example, by achieving the quota, the display mode of the subsequent display effect (variation pattern effect) is special You may comprise so that it may change into an aspect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to actively participate in timing rendition in order to see the display rendition in a special mode.

  In this control example, when changing the degree of difficulty, the type and number of scroll bars, and the scroll speed are changed, but the method of changing the degree of difficulty is not limited to this. For example, the points of the norm may be configured to increase as the difficulty level increases. Also, for example, as the degree of difficulty increases, the type of button to be used may be configured to increase.

  In this control example, the point is added by detecting 10 pressings while the continuous hitting bar overlaps with the pressing suggestion area 911a, but the number of pressings is limited to 10 Absent. It may be set to less than 10 times, or may be set to more than 10 times. Further, the number of times of pressing may be changed according to the degree of difficulty, and for example, the number of times of pressing may increase as the degree of difficulty increases. In this way, it is possible to provide diversity in how to change the difficulty level.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 158 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 158, in this control example, a frame button 229 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113. The frame button 229 is provided with four types of buttons: an upper button UB, a right button RB, a left button LB, and a lower button DB. As described above, these four types of buttons are used in timing effects (see FIGS. 163 and 164).

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (a). In addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example, the ROM 222 in the present control example is provided with a timing effect selection table 222 d and a pressing period table 222 e.

  The timing effect selection table 222d is a data table in which an aspect of timing effect, which is a type of entertainment effect to be executed during variation display of a special symbol, is defined. When the timing effect is to be performed, the timing effect selection table 222d is referred to, and the display mode (the degree of difficulty) of the sub display device 690 during the timing effect is set. The degree of difficulty means the ease of matching the timing when the frame button 229 is pressed (operated) in accordance with the timing suggested by the sub display device 690 and the button type. As the degree of difficulty is higher, the timing at which the frame button 229 is pressed (operated) becomes more severe, or pressing of more button types (operation) is instructed in a short period (see FIG. 164B).

  In addition, the timing effect of this control example is divided into three types of periods (the early period, the middle period, and the late period), and is configured to be able to set the display mode at different timings for each period. . More specifically, at the start of the timing effect, the aspect of the early period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the early period of the timing effect is started. Then, at the end of the opening period, the mode of the middle period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d, and the middle period of the timing effect is started. Furthermore, the mode of the last stage period is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d at the end of the middle stage period, and the last stage period of the timing effect is started.

  The details of the timing effect table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 160, in the timing effect table 222d, the effect mode of the timing effect is defined in association with the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ indicating the difficulty level of the timing effect. More specifically, as an aspect of the opening period, the effect "5" for the difficulty level 5 is associated with the value "4" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the difficulty level 4 for the value "3" of the difficulty level 223 γ. An early stage effect is associated. Although illustration is omitted, similarly, the effect "3" for the difficulty level 3 is associated with the value "2" of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the value "1" for the difficulty level counter 223γ is for the difficulty level 2 The first stage effect is associated, and the first stage effect for difficulty level 1 is associated with the value “0” of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The larger the difficulty level, the higher the difficulty level. That is, the stage 5 stage effect for the degree of difficulty 5 is the mode with the highest degree of difficulty, and the stage stage effect for the degree of difficulty 1 is the embodiment with the lowest degree of difficulty.

  The aspect of the midfield period is likewise defined. That is, as an aspect of the middle stage period, the middle level effect for the difficulty level 5 is associated with the value “4” of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the middle level effect for the difficulty level 4 is corresponding to the value “3” of the difficulty level counter 223γ. Corresponding, the difficulty level 3 223 middle level effect is associated with the value “2” of the difficulty level counter 223 γ, and the difficulty level 2 middle level effect is associated with the value “1” of the difficulty level counter 223 γ, The effect level 1 for the difficulty level 1 is associated with the value “0” of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

  Furthermore, the aspect of the last stage period is similarly defined. That is, as an aspect of the middle stage period, the final stage effect for the difficulty level 5 is associated with the value “4” of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the final stage effect for the difficulty level 4 is corresponding to the value “3” of the difficulty level counter 223γ. The final stage effect for difficulty level 3 is associated with the value “2” of difficulty level counter 223γ, and the late stage effect for difficulty level 2 is associated with the value “1” of difficulty level counter 223γ, The final stage effect for the difficulty level 1 is associated with the value “0” of the difficulty level counter 223γ.

  Although the details will be described later, the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is updated as appropriate according to the game situation of the player. For example, when it is determined that the player has earned relatively few points (for example, less than 200) in the early stage period when setting the mode of the middle period, the value of the difficulty level counter is decremented by 1 and subtracted. The presentation mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the later value is set. In this way, the aspect of the middle stage period can be set to a mode in which the degree of difficulty is lower than that of the early stage period, so that the player can not obtain points and the state continues for a long time. It is possible to prevent (suppress) giving up. Conversely, if it is determined that the points obtained by the player in the early stage period are relatively large, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ. As a result, when a player who is good at timing effects plays a game, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the game from being extended because the mode with a low degree of difficulty for the player continues.

  As described above, since effects of different difficulty levels can be selected from the timing effect selection table 222 d according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223 γ, it is possible to diversify the aspect of the timing effect. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by setting different degrees of difficulty, it is possible to set the degree of difficulty that matches the skill of each player, so it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Referring back to FIG. 159 (a), the description will be continued. In the pressing period table 222e, when the frame button 229 is pressed, it is determined whether or not it is determined that an image such as a scroll bar is pressed at 911 timing overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a (success in pressing). Is a data table that is defined in association with the elapsed time since the start of. When one of the buttons (upper button UB, right button RB, left button LB, lower button DB) constituting the frame button 229 is pressed during execution of the timing effect, the pressing period table 222e is referred to and the current time It is determined whether the button press was successful or unsuccessful. Then, an effect in which points are added is executed if successful (see FIG. 163 (b)), and an effect in which points are subtracted (penalty is imposed) is performed if unsuccessful (FIG. 164 (a). )reference). The details of the pressing period table 222e will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162.

  FIG. 161 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pressing period table 222e. As shown in FIG. 161, a plurality of data tables according to the setting period and the degree of difficulty are defined as the pressing period table 222e. For example, as a table corresponding to the first stage effect for difficulty level 1 set in the first stage period, a table 222e1 for first stage difficulty level 1 is provided. When the first stage effect for the difficulty level 1 is set, the table 222e1 for the first stage difficulty level 1 is set as the corresponding pressing period table. Similarly, the same applies to the stage 2 stage effect for difficulty level 2 through the stage stage effect for level 5 difficulty, and tables for the stage 2 difficulty level 2 222 e 2 to the stage 5 for difficulty level 5 are defined as the corresponding pressing period tables. ing.

  Furthermore, the middle stage period is the same as the early stage period, and specifically, as a pressing period table corresponding to middle stage effect for difficulty 1 to middle stage effect for 5 difficulty, table 2226 for middle stage difficulty 1 to middle stage difficulty The five table 222e10 is provided.

  On the other hand, in the late stage period, the configuration is different from the early stage period and the middle stage period. That is, a plurality of pressing period tables are associated with the effect mode for the last period of one. Here, the plurality of pressing period tables mean tables having different ranges (length of period) in which the success is detected. Even if the effect for the final stage period of the same mode is displayed, the difficulty level can be made different by making the period detected as successful different. That is, since the degree of difficulty can be varied without increasing the display mode of the timing effect, the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be reduced.

  It should be noted that the selection of a table having a wide range of detection as success is made when it is determined that the player has acquired few points (for example, less than 600 points) before reaching the final stage period. If there are too few points acquired until the final stage period, there is a possibility that the player will give up on achieving the quota by the timing effect. Therefore, in the present control example, when setting the last stage period, it is determined whether or not the point is less than 600 points, and if it is less than 600 points, a pressing period table having a wide detection range as success is selected. It is configured. As a result, the player can acquire points more easily by widening the range of detection as success, and therefore, it is possible to participate in timing presentation without giving up until the end.

  On the other hand, selecting a table with a narrow detection range as success is when it is determined that the player has acquired many points (for example, 900 points or more) until reaching the final stage period. If there are too many points acquired until the final stage period, the player may feel a margin and the operation of the frame button 229 in the final stage period may be complicated. Therefore, in the present control example, by selecting a table in which the range detected as successful is narrow, it is possible to execute the operation of the frame button 229 while maintaining a sense of tension until the end of the timing effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  When the effect of the last stage period corresponding to the difficulty level 1 to the difficulty level 3 is selected, the range detected as success is a pressing period table of a normal size, and the range detected as success is a relatively wide pressing A period table may be selected. For example, when the last stage effect for difficulty level 1 is selected as the effect mode of the last stage period, one of the last stage difficulty level 1 normal range table 222e13 and the last stage difficulty level 1 wide range table 222e18 is selected as the pressing period table. It is selected.

  On the other hand, when the effect of the last stage period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 and the difficulty level 5 is selected, the range detected as success is a pressing period table of a normal size and the range detected as success In addition to a relatively wide pressing period table, a pressing period table may be selected which has a relatively narrow range of detection as success. For example, when the final stage effect for difficulty level 5 is selected as the effect mode of the final stage period, the final stage difficulty level 5 narrow range table 222e13, the final stage difficulty level 5 normal range table 222e17, and the final stage difficulty level as the depression period table There is a possibility that the 5 wide range table 222 e 22 is selected.

  In addition, only when the effect of the last stage period corresponding to the difficulty level 4 or the difficulty level 5 is selected, it is configured to select the pressing period table in which the range detected as successful is narrow. This is because there is a high possibility that the player who is skilled is playing a game. When the player who is good at the timing effect is playing a game, there is a possibility that the timing effect in the normal detection range may be felt too easy. Therefore, in this case, in addition to the display in a mode of high degree of difficulty, the range to be detected as success is narrowed, so that even a player who is good at timing rendition can enjoy it. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the timing presentation can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 162, specific prescribed contents of the tables constituting the pressing period table 222e will be described by taking the table for the third difficulty level 222e3 as an example. In accordance with the setting of the table 222e3 for the early stage difficulty level 3, the early stage effect for the difficulty level 3 is set as the effect mode, but the display mode for the early stage effect for the difficulty level 3 is shown in FIG. It becomes a display mode shown to). Therefore, in explaining the table 222e for the early stage difficulty level 3, the explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 163 as well.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table for the third difficulty level 222 e 3. As shown in FIG. 162, in the table 222e3 for the early stage difficulty level 3, the type of the pressing period (the value of the timing effect pointer 223δ periodically updated after the start of the timing effect) A success period, a failure period, and a continuous batting period are defined. Further, as the type of pressing period, the pressing period for the upper button UB, the pressing period for the right button RB, the pressing period for the left button LB, and the pressing period for the lower button DB are respectively defined.

  Specifically, a failure period is associated with the range of 0 milliseconds to 1499 milliseconds (1.499 seconds) after the start of the timing effect as the pressing period for all button types. . If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined as a failure. In addition, a success period is associated with the range of 1500 milliseconds to 1699 milliseconds as a pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is operated, it is determined that the operation is successful and points are added, and when another button is operated, it is determined that the operation is unsuccessful. As the display content of the sub display device 690 in this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912a in FIG. 163) displayed in the scroll display area 911b overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b A state in which the scroll bar scroll-displayed in 911e to 911e does not reach the pressing suggestion area 911a is displayed.

  In addition, a failure period is associated with the range of 1700 milliseconds to 2199 seconds as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined as a failure. A success period is associated with the range of 2200 milliseconds to 2399 milliseconds as the depression period for the lower button DB. On the other hand, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the down button DB is pressed, it is determined that the process is successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined that the process fails. As the display content of the sub display device 690 in this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912e in FIG. 163) displayed in the scroll display area 911e overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911a A state in which the scroll bar scroll-displayed at 911 d has not reached the pressing suggestion area 911 a is displayed.

  A failure period is associated with the range of 2400 milliseconds to 2999 seconds as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined as a failure. A success period is associated with the range of 3000 milliseconds to 3199 milliseconds as a pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the right button RB is pressed, it is determined to be successful and points are added, and when another button is pressed, it is determined to be failed. As the display content of the sub display device 690 in this period, only the scroll bar (scroll bar 912b in FIG. 163) displayed in the scroll display area 911c is overlapped with the pressing suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911b , 911 d, and 911 e, the scroll bar scrolled and displayed does not reach the pressing suggestion area 911 a.

  A failure period is associated with the range of 3200 milliseconds to 3799 seconds as a pressing period for all button types. If any button is pressed during this period, it is determined as a failure. Then, in the range of 3800 milliseconds to 4999 milliseconds in elapsed time, a continuous hitting period is associated as a pressing period for the upper button UB. On the other hand, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for other button types. Therefore, in this period, when the upper button UB is pressed ten times, it is determined that the operation is successful and points are added, and when another button is operated, it is determined that the operation is unsuccessful. As the display content of the sub display device 690 in this period, only the continuous hitting bar (continuous hitting bar 913a in FIG. 163) scrolled and displayed in the scroll display area 911b overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a, and the other scroll display area 911c A state in which the scroll bar scroll-displayed in 911e to 911e does not reach the pressing suggestion area 911a is displayed.

  A continuous hit period is associated with the range of 5000 milliseconds to 5199 milliseconds as a pressing period for the upper button UB, and a success period is associated with the pressing period for the right button RB. On the other hand, failure periods are associated as pressing periods for other button types. Therefore, in this period, it is determined that the upper button UB has been pressed a total of 10 times or the right button RB is determined to be successful and points are added, and the other buttons are determined to be failed. Ru. As the display contents of the sub display device 690 in this period, a continuous hitting bar scrolled in the scroll display area 911b (continuous hitting bar 913a in FIG. 163) and a scroll bar scrolled in the scroll display area 911d (figure While the scroll bar 912c) at 163 overlaps the pressing suggestion area 911a, the scroll bar scrolled in the other scroll display areas 911d and 911e is displayed as not reaching the pressing suggestion area 911a.

  Although illustration is omitted, a pressing period according to the button type is also defined for the subsequent elapsed time. By using the table 222e3 for the early stage difficulty level 3, the pressing period can be updated in synchronization with the display mode of the timing effect. The other tables defined in the pressing period table 222e have the same configuration, and thus the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the RAM 223 in this control example, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, a timing effect permission flag 223α, a latent probability change flag 223β, a difficulty level counter 223γ, a timing effect pointer 223δ, and a number-of-continuous-strokes counter 223ε, A continuous hit success flag 223ζ and a score counter 223η are provided.

  The timing effect permission flag 223α is a flag indicating whether or not it is possible to set the timing effect as the entertaining effect when selecting the mode of the variable display. If the timing effect permission flag 223α is on, it indicates that the timing effect can be set as the variation effect mode, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing effect can not be set.

  Here, as described above, in this control example, it is difficult to identify from the outside (with a player's point of view) whether the 2R probability variation jackpot or the small jackpot has been reached. That is, when the specific winning opening 65a performs the opening operation of 2R, it becomes a 2R probability variation jackpot or it shifts to a probability variation state of a special symbol, or it merely becomes a small hit, and the gaming state is not changed Can not identify the In other words, if the opening operation of the 2R by the specified winning opening 65a is not executed even once after the jackpot A or the jackpot B is finished, the current gaming state is clear to the player. Therefore, even if the timing effect is executed in this case, there is a possibility that the user does not want to obtain the benefit of notifying the gaming state, and does not participate in the timing effect. Therefore, in the present control example, when the opening operation of the 2R by the specified winning opening 65a is not executed at least once after the big hit A or the big hit B, the timing effect is set by setting the timing effect to off. It is configured not to be selected (see S1827 in FIG. 173).

  Further, this timing effect permission flag 223α is set to ON by becoming a 2R probability variation jackpot or a small jack (see S1824 in FIG. 173). Once the timing effect is executed, the timing effect permission flag 223α is reset to off (see FIG. 6412). Thereby, the opportunity for the timing effect to be executed can be limited to only one for the 2R opening operation by one specified winning combination opening 65a. Therefore, since the timing effect can be tackled more seriously, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved.

  The probability variation state flag 223β is a flag for determining whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. If this probability change state flag 223β is on, it indicates that the special symbol is in the probability change state, and if off, it indicates that it is not the probability change state. This probability change status flag 223β is set to ON when a variation pattern command corresponding to 16R probability variation jackpot (big hit A) or 2R probability variation jackpot (big hit C) is received (see S1823 and S1826 in FIG. 173) When the variation pattern command corresponding to the big hit (big hit B) is received, it is set to OFF (see S1826 in FIG. 173). In the case of achieving the norm in the timing effect and notifying the current gaming state, the gaming state is notified with reference to the probability change state flag 223β.

  The difficulty level counter 223γ is a counter for identifying the degree of difficulty of the effect set in each period of the timing effect (the beginning period, the middle period, and the end period). If the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 0, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 1 is selected. If the value is 1, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 2 is selected, if the value is 2. , And the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 3 is selected. If the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 4 is selected, and if the value is 4, the effect mode corresponding to the difficulty level 5 is selected.

  The difficulty level counter 223γ has an initial value set to zero. That is, it is reset to 0 at power on. Also, in the case of setting the effect mode in the middle period of the timing effect, when it is determined that the player has obtained a relatively large number of points (the difficulty level for the player currently playing is too low), One is added to the counter value (see S6203 in FIG. 170). Thus, the difficulty level can be made higher than that of the early stage period as the stage aspect selected in the middle period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the player has earned a small number of points (when the degree of difficulty for the player currently playing is too high), the counter value is decremented by one when setting the effect mode in the middle period. (See S6207 in FIG. 170). Thereby, the difficulty level can be made lower than the presentation aspect of the early stage period as the presentation aspect selected in the middle period. As described above, by using the difficulty level counter 223γ, the degree of difficulty can be varied according to the skill of the player, so that the degree of difficulty more suitable for the player can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  The timing effect pointer 223 δ is a pointer for indicating an elapsed time since the start of the timing effect, and is updated every one millisecond. During execution of the timing effect, the timing effect pointer 223δ is referred to, and the type of the pressing period is determined. The timing effect pointer 223δ is, for example, periodically updated in the main processing.

  The continuous hit number counter 223ε is a counter for counting how many times the corresponding button has been pressed in the continuous hit period of the timing effect. Whether or not the continuous hit is successful is determined according to the value of the continuous hit number counter 223ε. This continuous hit number counter 223ε is incremented by 1 each time the operation of the corresponding button is detected in the continuous hit period (see S6007 in FIG. 168), and is reset to 0 when the prescribed continuous hit number is reached in the continuous hit period (FIG. 168) See S6011). In addition, it is reset to 0 also at the end of the batting period. The number of consecutive hits can be accurately determined by the number of consecutive hits counter 223ε.

  The consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is a flag indicating whether or not the specified number of consecutive hits has been reached in the consecutive hit period, and indicates that the number of consecutive hits has been reached if it is on. On the other hand, if it is off, it indicates that the number of consecutive strikes has not been reached or it is not a period of consecutive strikes. The consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is set on when it is determined that the prescribed number of consecutive hits has been reached (see S6011 in FIG. 168), and is set off when the consecutive hit period is over. While the consecutive hit success flag 223 is on, control is performed so as not to be determined as a failure even if the button corresponding to the set consecutive hit period is continuously pressed more than a specified number of times. This makes it possible to cause the player to hit continuously without worrying about the number of hits.

  The score counter 223η is a counter for counting points (scores) obtained by the player in the timing effect of 1. At the end of the timing effect, the value of the score counter 223η is compared with 1000 points which is a norm, and it is judged whether or not the norm is achieved. The score counter 223 更新 is updated each time pressing of the frame button 229 is detected during the timing effect (see S6010, S6014, and S6016 in FIG. 168).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the time-dependent change of the display mode when the fluctuation pattern for which the timing effect is set is executed will be described. First, as a premise, the timing effect has a certain probability (for example, 10) when the timing effect permission flag 223α is on and a fluctuation effect (a fluctuation effect causing a reach) is selected with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more. It is an effect selected with a probability of%.

  As shown in FIG. 166, reach effect is generated in the third symbol display device 81 when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation effect with the timing effect set. Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the occurrence of the reach effect (when 15 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation), the effect mode of the early stage period is selected, and the timing effect of the selected effect mode is started in the sub display device 690 Be done.

  When 5 seconds have passed since the start of the timing effect (when 20 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation), the early stage period ends, and the effect mode of the middle period is selected, and the middle period is started based on the selected content . Furthermore, when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the middle period (when 25 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation), the middle period ends and the presentation mode of the last period is selected, and the last period is started based on the selected content . Then, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the last stage period, the last stage period ends, and notification of the result of the current timing effect (whether or not the quota has been achieved) is set. This notification is performed for one second.

<Electric Configuration of Audio Lamp Controller in Third Control Example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 167 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example.

  Among the main processing, in each processing of S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520, the same processing as each processing of S1501 to S1511 and S1513 to S1520 executed in the main processing (see FIG. 106) in the first control example is performed. Processing is performed. Further, in the main processing in the third control example, when the processing of S1510 ends, timing effect processing (S1541) for performing various settings during timing effect is executed, and the processing proceeds to S1511. In the process of S1511, the same process as the command determination process (S1511) in the first control example is executed, and then, instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 109) in the first control example, the variable display setting process 2 ( S1542) is executed. When the variable display setting process 2 ends, the processes after S1513 are executed as in the first control example.

  Here, details of the frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1507) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The frame button input monitoring and rendering process itself is also executed in the main process (see FIG. 106) in the first control example, but the detailed description thereof is omitted, so it will be described again.

  In the frame button input monitoring and effect process (S1507), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is in progress (S6001), and when it is determined that the timing effect is not in progress (S6001: No) finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing effect is being performed (S6001: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) is detected (S6002). Then, if it is determined that pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) has not been detected (S6002: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6002 that pressing of the operation button (frame button 229) is detected (S6002: Yes), the pressing period table 222e is read according to the type of button that has detected pressing (S6003). Thereafter, the pressing period type is specified based on the read pressing period table 222 e and the value of the timing effect pointer 223 δ (S 6004).

  If the processing of S6004 is quantified, it is next determined whether or not it is a continuous hitting period (S6005), and if it is determined that it is a continuous hitting period (S6005: Yes), then whether or not the continuous hitting success flag 223 is on or not (S6006). If it is determined that the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is on (S6007: Yes), it means that pressing of the frame button a predetermined number of times (10 times) has succeeded during the continuous hit period, and it is necessary to count the number of continuous hits Because there is no, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6006 that the consecutive hit success flag 223ζ is off (S6006: No), 1 is added to the consecutive hit number counter 223ε (S6007) whether the value after addition is 10 or more (S6008). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined number of times (10 times) of consecutive hits have been achieved in one consecutive hit period. If it is determined in the process of S6008 that the value of the consecutive hit number counter 223ε after the addition is smaller than 10 (S6008: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the consecutive hit number counter 223ε after update is 10 or more (S6008: Yes), this means that the predetermined number of consecutive hits has been achieved, so a display success effect command is set As a result (S6009), an effect corresponding to the continuous hit is set, and 50 is added to the score counter 223η as a point (score) corresponding to the continuous hit (S6010). Thereafter, the consecutive hit number counter 223ε is reset, and the continuous hit success flag 223ζ is set to ON (S6011), and the present process is ended.

  In the process of S6005, when it is determined that it is not the continuous hitting period (S6005: No), it is then determined whether it is the pressing success period (S6012) and it is not the pressing success period (the pressing failure period) When it discriminate | determines (S6012: No), the failure production | presentation command for display is set (S6013). The display failure command displays an effect notifying the player that the pressing timing of the frame button 229 has deviated from the timing suggested on the sub display device 690 (see FIG. 164A). By notifying the failure of the pressing, the player can be given the opportunity to correct the pressing timing of the frame button 229, and the next pressing can be performed more carefully. Thus, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. When the process of S6013 ends, 10 is subtracted from the score counter 223 η as a penalty for pressing failure (S6014), and the process ends. In the process of S6014, if the value of the score counter is already 0, point subtraction is not performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6012 that the depression success period is in progress (S6012: Yes), the display success effect command is set (S6015) to inform the player that the depression has succeeded (FIG. 163 (b)). Since the timing at which the player has succeeded can be recognized by this notification, the frame button 229 can be operated at the same timing next time. Thus, the player's willingness to participate can be improved. Then, a point (score) corresponding to the type of bar overlapping the pressing suggestion area 911a when the pressing is successful is added to the success score counter 223η (S6016), and the process ends.

  Next, the details of the timing effect process (S1541) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timing effect process (S1541) is a process for performing various settings during the timing effect as described above.

  In this timing effect process (S1541), first, it is determined whether or not the timing effect is set (S6101), and when it is determined that the timing effect is not set (S6101: No), the process is directly performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing effect is set (S6101: Yes), then it is determined whether 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (S6102), and it is determined that 15 seconds have elapsed. Since (S6102: Yes) means that it is the start timing of the timing effect, first, the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read out in order to determine the mode of the current timing effect (S6103).

  When the process of S6103 ends, next, an effect mode (degree of difficulty) corresponding to the read counter value is selected from the timing effect selection table 222d (see FIG. 160) (S6104). For example, if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 4, then the effect stage 5 effect is selected as the effect mode, and if the difficulty level counter 223γ is 1, the difficulty level 2 stage effect is selected. Then, a display early stage mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode selected in the process of S6104 is set (S6105). The display control device 114 starts timing presentation of the corresponding difficulty level in the sub display device 690 by receiving this display early stage mode command.

  When the process of S6105 ends, a table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ read in S6103 is read from the pressing period table 222e (S6106), and the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6107), This process ends. The pressing period storage area is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 (not shown). In the process of S6004 of the frame button input monitoring / presentation process (see FIG. 168), the pressing period table 222e stored in the pressing period storage area is referenced to determine whether the pressing of the frame button 229 is successful or not. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6102 that 15 seconds have not elapsed from the start of fluctuation (S6102: No), it is determined whether it is a timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation (S6108). That is, it is determined whether it is the timing to shift to the middle period of the timing effect. In the process of S6108, when it is determined that 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation (it is the timing to shift to the middle period) (S6108: Yes), the middle setting process for setting the mode of the middle period is executed (S6109), this processing ends. The details of the middle setting process (S6109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6108, when it is not determined that 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation (not the transition timing to the middle period) (S6108: No), then 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation. It is determined whether or not it is (S6110). That is, it is determined whether it is the transition timing from the middle stage to the last stage. If it is determined in the process of S6110 that 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change (S6110: Yes), the last stage setting process for setting the effect mode of the last stage period is executed (S6111), and this process is ended. The details of the final stage setting process (S6111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6110 that it is not time that 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation (S6110: No), it is then determined whether or not it is time to elapse 27 seconds from the start of fluctuation (S6112) . In other words, it is determined whether it is time to set a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect. In the process of S6112, when it is determined that it is the timing at which 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation (S6112: Yes), a notification mode setting process for setting a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect The process is executed (S6113), and the process ends. The details of the notification mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing at which 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (S6112: No), it is then determined whether it is the end timing of the continuous batting period (S6114). When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the continuous batting period (S6114: Yes), the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the continuous hitting period (S6114: Yes), the continuous hitting success flag 223ζ is set to OFF (S6115), and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the details of the middle setting process (S1507) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this middle setting process (S1507). In the middle setting process (S6109), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6201), and it is determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 600 (S6202).

  When it is determined that the read value is greater than 600 (S6202: Yes), a relatively large number of points can be obtained in the early stage period, which may make the difficulty level too easy for the player currently playing . Therefore, in this case, by adding 1 to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ (S6203), control is performed such that an effect having a higher degree of difficulty than the early stage period is set as an effect mode of the middle period. As a result, since it is possible to change to an effect mode (degree of difficulty) that matches the player's skill in the middle of the timing effect, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect. After the process of S6203 ends, the process proceeds to S6209.

  If it is determined in the process of S6202 that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or less (S6202: No), it is next determined whether the value of the read score counter 223η is smaller than 50 (S6204). If it is determined that the value read out is smaller than 50 (S6204: Yes), it indicates that the player has obtained extremely few points during the early stage period. That is, there is a possibility that the player may not keep up with the timing effect or may have abandoned the timing effect itself because the difficulty level of the timing effect in the early stage period is too difficult. In this case, by setting the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ to 0 (S6205), control is performed such that the effect mode with the lowest degree of difficulty is selected as the effect mode set after the middle period. As a result, the player who has difficulty in adjusting the pressing timing because the difficulty of the opening period is too high, and the impression that is likely to be difficult only by looking at the presentation mode of the opening period is abandoned, and the timing presentation is abandoned. It is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the timing effect for the player who has ended. When the process of S6205 ends, the process proceeds to S6209.

  If it is determined in the process of S6204 that the value of the read score counter 223η is 50 or more (S6204: No), it is then determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206). If it is determined in the process of S6206 that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 200 (S6206), the degree of difficulty is too high for the player, and the pace ends as it is with respect to the norm. It means that the possibility is high. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may give up participation in the timing effect by judging that the quota can not be achieved during the timing effect. Moreover, although the timing presentation of this time participated to the last, the acquisition point is too low with respect to the norm, and there is a possibility that it may give up participation to timing presentation from the next time. Therefore, in order to prevent these situations, the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is decremented by 1 in the process of S6207 (S6207). As a result, since the difficulty level after the middle period can be easily made, it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the timing effect for the player who can not obtain much points in the early period. When the process of S6207 ends, the process proceeds to S6209.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6206 that the value of the read score counter 223η is 200 or more (S6206: No), the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read (S6208), and the process proceeds to S6209.

  In the process of S6209, based on the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, the mode of the middle stage effect is selected from the effect selection table 222d (S6209), and the display starting stage mode command for notifying the display control device 114 of the selected mode Is set (S6210). Then, a data table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read out from the pressing period table 222e (S6211), the read table is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6212), and this processing is ended.

  By executing this middle setting process, it is possible to change the rendering mode after the middle period to a mode of the degree of difficulty that more closely matches the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player in the early stage period. The player's willingness to participate in the timing presentation can be improved.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 171, the details of the final stage setting process (S6111) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. The final stage setting process (S6111) is a process for setting the effect mode of the final stage period of the timing effect as described above.

  In the final stage setting process (S6111), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6301), and it is determined whether the value is larger than 900 (S6302). That is, it is determined whether 900 points or more have been acquired before the end of the middle stage. If it is determined that the value of the score counter 223η is greater than 900 (S6302: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is greater than 3 (S6303).

  If it is determined that the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less (S6303: No), a table in which the success period is in the normal range is read from the pressing period table 222e, and the process proceeds to S6309. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is larger than 3 (S6303: Yes), a table for narrow range with narrow success period corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e ( The process shifts to the processing of S6304) and S6309.

  As described above, setting the table in which the lengths of different success periods are different according to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is for matching the difficulty level to the player. That is, if the rendering mode with a relatively high degree of difficulty (degree of difficulty 4 and degree of difficulty 5) is set even after the middle period, it is highly likely that the player's skill is high. Then, the process shifts to the process of S6303 because it is a case where a relatively large number of points can be obtained, so there is a possibility that the current degree of difficulty may be too easy for the player. Therefore, for a player with high skill, the success range is configured to be narrower than the opening period and the middle period in order to set the difficulty more difficult. As a result, it is possible to provide a more difficult timing effect to a player with high skill, so it is possible to improve the player's interest in the timing effect.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to S6303 when the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 3 or less, there is a possibility that a large number of points have been acquired in spite of the relatively low skill. In this case, if the degree of difficulty is raised, there is a risk that pressing of the frame button 229 will fail continuously in the final stage, and there is a risk that a bad impression may be given to the timing effect. In particular, in spite of having exceeded the quota of 1000 points at the start of the late stage production, if it fails continuously in the late stage period and the norm is divided at the end of the stage by the accumulation of the penalty, the player's There is a possibility that the motivation for the timing effect may be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the present control example, when the difficulty level counter 223γ assumed to be low in skill is 3 or less, the range of the success period is maintained as normal even though relatively many points are obtained. doing. As a result, it is possible to improve the motivation for the timing effect for the player with low skill.

  If it is determined in the process of S6302 that the value of the score counter 223η is 900 or less (S6302: No), it is then determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6306). If it is determined in the process of S6305 that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600 (S6206: Yes), a wide range table corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read out from the pressing period table 222e (S6307) Transfer to the processing of S6309. If the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 600, it is likely that the degree of difficulty for the player is too high because the player has relatively few points acquired by the middle period. Therefore, in this case, by selecting the pressing period having a wide success period, the possibility that it is determined to be successful when the frame button 229 is pressed is increased. That is, the degree of difficulty can be matched to the player. In addition, by widening the success period in the final stage period, it becomes easy to succeed in pressing, and it is possible to make the player feel as if it is getting well (stuck). Therefore, even if it does not reach the quota, it can be imagined as if it is possible to earn more points next time from the response of the last stage period. Therefore, the willingness to participate in the next timing effect can be improved.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6306 that the value of the score counter 223η is 600 or more (S6305: No), the table for the normal range corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is read from the pressing period table 222e. Transfer to the processing of S6309. In the process of S6309 executed after any of the processes of S6104, S6105, S6107, and S6108, the data table read from the pressing period table 222e is stored in the pressing period storage area (S6308), and this processing is performed. Finish.

  By the final stage setting process, the range of the success period of the final stage period can be varied to an area that more closely matches the skill of the player according to the points acquired by the player by the end of the middle period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the details of the notification mode setting process (S6113) executed in the timing effect process (S1541, see FIG. 169) will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the notification mode setting process (S6113). As described above, the notification mode setting process is a process for setting a notification effect (notification mode) for notifying the result of the timing effect.

  In the notification mode setting process (S6113), first, the value of the score counter 223η is read (S6401), and it is determined whether the value is 1000 or more (S6402). That is, in the timing effect, it is determined whether 1000 points which is the norm have been achieved. When it is determined in the process of S6402 that the value of the score counter 223η is smaller than 1000 (that is, the norm can not be achieved in the current timing effect) (S6402: No), the display control device 114 is selected next. The notification mode at the time of failure (see FIG. 165) is set (S6403).

  When the process of S6303 ends, it is then determined whether the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404). If the value of the score counter 223η is 50 or less (S6404: Yes), the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is set to 0 (S6405), and the process proceeds to S6412. If the value of the score counter 223 以下 is 50 or less, there is a high possibility that the player has given up early just by visually recognizing the aspect of the early stage period. Therefore, in this case, in the next timing effect, the effect mode having the easiest degree of difficulty is selected, and it can be felt that the quota can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the next timing effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the score counter 223η is larger than 50 (S6404: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ (S6406), and the process proceeds to S6412. If the value of the score counter 223 50 is greater than 50, it means that after participating in the timing effect as appropriate, it does not meet the quota. Therefore, in this case, the player's willingness to participate can be improved by lowering the degree of difficulty selected in the next timing effect by one step.

  If it is determined in the process of S6402 that the value of the score counter 223η is 1000 or more (the timing effect norm is achieved), the probability change status flag 223β is read (S6407), and the present is a probability change status of the special symbol. Whether or not it is determined (whether or not the probability variation state flag 223β is on) is determined (S6408). Then, if it is determined that the state is a definite change state (S6408: Yes), a notification mode for notifying the positive change state to the display control device 114 is set, and the process proceeds to S6411. On the other hand, in the process of S6408, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a definite variation state (is the low probability state of the special symbol) (S6408: No), a notification for notifying the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol. The mode is set (S6409), and the process proceeds to S6411.

  In the process of S6411, 1 is added to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, and the process proceeds to S6412. When the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ is 4, which is the maximum value, the value is maintained at 4. In the process of S6412, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to OFF, it is set so that the timing effect will not be selected until the next 2R probability variation big hit or small hit (S6412), and the present process is ended. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing variation display setting processing 2 (S1542) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Of the variable display setting process 2 (S1542), the processes of S1801 to S1810 are the same as the processes of S1801 to S1810 executed in the variable display setting process (S1512, see FIG. 109) in the first control example. Processing is performed.

  Further, in the variable display setting process 2 (S1542) in the present control example, when the process of S1805 ends, it is determined whether or not the change pattern corresponding to the big hit C (2R probability change big hit) is notified by the change pattern command. It discriminates (S1821). In the process of S1821, when it is determined that it is a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit C (S1821: Yes), it means that it shifts to the probability variation status of the special symbol, so the probability variation status flag 223β is set on ( The process shifts to the processing of S1823) and S1824.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1821 that the variation pattern does not correspond to the big hit C (S1821: No), then it is determined whether the variation pattern corresponds to the small hit (S1822). If it is determined that the variation pattern is the corresponding one (S1822: Yes), the process proceeds to S1824. In the process of S1824, by setting the timing effect permission flag 223α to ON, it is set so that the aspect of the timing effect can be selected as the entertaining effect in the subsequent fluctuation effects (S1824), and the process shifts to the process of S1806.

  If it is determined in the process of S1822 that the variation pattern does not correspond to the small hit (S1822: No), then it is determined whether the variation pattern corresponds to the big hit A or the big hit B (S1825). If it is determined in the process of S1825 that neither the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit A nor the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit B (S1825: No), the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern corresponds to either the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S1825: Yes), the probability change state flag 223β is updated to a value according to the jackpot type (S1826). That is, if the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), the probability change state flag 223β is set to ON, and if the jackpot B (16R hour short-time jackpot), the probability change status flag 223β is set to OFF. Next, the timing effect rendering flag 223α is set to off (S1827), and the processing after S1806 is executed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example is configured to be able to execute timing effects capable of acquiring points by operating a plurality of types of buttons in a timely manner, and can achieve the present as a benefit when achieving the quota. It is comprised so that a game state may be alert | reported. Thus, the player who wants to know the current gaming state can be actively participated in the timing effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, by making the bonus in case of success in the timing effect not to affect the game result (notification of the current gaming state), can the bonus be granted purely by the skill of the pressing (operation) timing of the player? You can decide if. On the other hand, if the result (for example, a big hit etc.) whose outcome is already decided at the start of fluctuation (before the timing effect starts) is set as a benefit, the timing effect will start Before, the result of the timing presentation (whether or not the mode for achieving the norm can be displayed) is determined. If there is a timing effect of a mode in which the quota can not be achieved, there is a risk that the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect may be reduced. On the other hand, in the present control example, the privilege to be awarded when achieving the quota in the timing effect is set to "notification of the gaming state" which has no influence on the game result. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to award a benefit purely in accordance with the timing of pressing the frame button 229. That is, when a benefit is awarded, the player can more strongly feel that the player has acquired the benefit by himself. Therefore, the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the degree of difficulty can be varied in accordance with the player's point earning situation while the timing effect is being executed. That is, it is configured to determine the player's skill from the point earning status, and change it to the presentation mode of the difficulty level more matched with the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent that the degree of difficulty is too high, and conversely, the degree of difficulty is so easy that the desire to participate in timing presentation is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect.

  Furthermore, in this control example, when the timing effect is finished, the difficulty level of the next timing effect is configured to be changed to the difficulty level that matches the player more according to the player's point earning status. . By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in timing presentation.

  In this control example, when setting three types of periods, the early stage period, the middle stage period, and the late stage period, the effect mode is selected according to the player's skill and the participation status in the timing effect. However, the period is not limited to three. For example, the effect mode may be set for each of five types of periods. By increasing the period, it is possible to more accurately determine the player's skill and the like, and to provide an effect mode that matches the skill. Conversely, the period may be reduced. Thus, the number of processes for determining the player's skill and the like can be reduced, so that the processing load of the MPU 221 can be reduced.

  In this control example, when setting three types of periods, the early stage period, the middle stage period, and the late stage period, the effect mode is selected according to the player's skill and the participation status in the timing effect. However, the difficulty level of one or more periods may be fixed, and only the difficulty level of a partial period may be varied according to the player's skill or the like. More specifically, for example, the difficulty level of the early stage period may be set to a presentation mode that is relatively easy. This makes it possible for the player who has visually recognized the aspect of the opening period to have an impression that it is likely to easily achieve the quota by the timing effect, and therefore the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved. .

  In this control example, based on the fact that the frame button 229 was operated 10 times in the continuous hitting period, it was determined that the continuous hitting was successful and points were added, but whether the continuous hitting was successful or not The judgment criteria of are not limited to 10 operations. An arbitrary value can be set according to the length of the continuous hitting period and the length of the continuous hitting bar. Further, the number of times it is determined that the continuous hit is successful may be varied according to the set presentation mode. For example, in the case of the presentation mode where the degree of difficulty is low (for example, the degree of difficulty is 1), the number of times it is determined that the continuous hit is successful is set to a number less than 10 times (for example, 6 times) If the effect mode is relatively high (for example, with a difficulty level of 4 or 5), set the number of times it is determined that consecutive hits have been successful to a number greater than 10 times (for example, 15 times) May be As a result, the degree of difficulty can be differentiated not only by the display pattern of the scroll bar and the range of the success period, but also by the number of times that it is determined that the continuous hit is successful. Can be

  In this control example, based on the fact that the frame button 229 is operated a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the continuous hitting period, it is determined that the continuous hitting is successful and points are added, but other than continuous hitting You may be comprised so that it may discriminate | determine also from operation and continuous hitting. For example, by continuing to press the button of the corresponding type for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds or more) during the continuous hitting period, it is determined that the continuous hitting has succeeded similarly to the case where the continuous hitting is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) It is also good. As a result, even a player who is not good at continuous hitting can be determined to be continuous hitting simply by continuously pressing the frame button 229 (long press), and points can be earned, so the burden on the player can be reduced. . In this case, from the points awarded when the frame button 229 is kept pressed (long-pressed) simply in the continuous hitting period, the points given by performing the continuous hitting a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the continuous hitting period are simply given May be configured to increase. By configuring in this way, a high-skilled high-level player is actively hit in a row, and a low-skilled player (a player who is not good in double-row hitting) is held long to earn points You can That is, since it is possible to provide various participation methods for the continuous hitting period according to the skill of the player, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing presentation.

In this control example, a plurality of periods are provided as a period for setting the difficulty level of the timing effect, but instead, the difficulty level is set according to the number of times the frame button 229 has failed to operate and the number of successes. It may be configured to be fluidly variable. Thus, the player's operation status can be reflected on the difficulty level in real time.
Although the presentation mode of the early stage period is set to the presentation mode of the difficulty level corresponding to the value of the difficulty level counter 223γ, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during the opening period, the difficulty counter 223
In this control example, the notification of the gaming state is used as the benefit of the timing effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol may be notified by the timing effect. That is, the jackpot may be notified when the quota is achieved in the timing effect. In this case, when the special effect lottery is out and the timing effect is selected, the timing effect of the effect mode in which the quota can not be achieved may be selected. More specifically, for example, when the timing effect is executed in the case of a special symbol deviation, the total points that can be acquired by the scroll bar or the continuous hit bar scrolled between the early period and the late period is It may be configured to have a maximum of 900 to 990 points, and in the case of a special symbol hit, for example, may be configured to select a pattern that can obtain a maximum of 1000 to 1200 points. That is, as the presentation mode specified for the timing presentation selection table 222d, the presentation mode for the jackpot corresponding to each period and each difficulty level and the presentation mode for the removal may be separately defined. And when setting the presentation mode of each period in timing production processing (refer to FIG. 169) (S6104 in FIG. 169, S6209 in FIG. 170, S6104 in S of FIG. 171, S6105, S6107, S6108), It may be configured to determine the result of the fluctuation effect (whether it is a jackpot or a loss) to select the effect mode. By configuring in this manner, the difficulty level in the timing effect can be matched to the skill of the player, and therefore the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect can be improved. In addition, by changing the upper limit of points that can be acquired in the jackpot mode and the mode for outliers, it is possible to prevent achieving the quota despite the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol is out ( Can be suppressed. Therefore, the jackpot does not start despite the achievement of the quota, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted, and to participate in the timing effect with confidence.

  In this control example, the timing effect is not set unless the jackpot A or the jackpot B ends at least once after the end of the jackpot or the jackpot C, but the timing presentation execution condition is: It is not limited to this. For example, the selectability of the timing effect may be changed according to the number of balls held. Specifically, the timing effect may be configured to be more easily selected as the number of holding balls is larger, and may be more difficult to be selected as the number of holding balls is smaller. As described above, in the timing effect of this control example, it is necessary to press the plurality of buttons (upper button UB, right button RB, left button LB, lower button DB) constituting the frame button 229 with good timing. For this reason, it is difficult to participate in the timing effect with one hand, and it is configured that it is easier for the person who participated using both hands to succeed in pressing. That is, there is a possibility that the player who tries to achieve the quota by the timing effect may temporarily release the operation handle 51 to participate in the timing effect. Therefore, if you participate in the timing effect with a small number of holding balls, you can not increase the holding balls during the timing effect, so there is a risk that the lottery of the special symbol may be interrupted after the end of the fluctuation effect for which the timing effect is set. is there. That is, there is a possibility that the gaming efficiency may be deteriorated. Therefore, by configuring the timing effect to be difficult to be set in a situation where there are few holding balls, it is possible to make the player hit a ball in a situation where there are few holding balls, so it is easy to store the holding balls. Thus, the gaming efficiency can be improved. On the other hand, when the number of holding balls is large, holding balls may increase further by continuing to hit the ball during the change, and there is a possibility that the number of entering balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of holding balls is detected. is there. Therefore, in this case, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of holding balls from overflowing by raising the occurrence frequency of the timing effect which is easy to achieve the norm by participating with both hands.

  In this control example, an effect of pressing the plurality of buttons (the upper button UB, the right button RB, the left button LB, the lower button DB) constituting the frame button 229 as the timing effect is performed in a timely manner. However, the number of buttons is not limited to four. For example, an effect of pressing a single frame button with good timing may be executed as a timing effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to participate in the timing effect with the other hand while operating the handle 51 with one hand, so it is possible to participate in the timing effect without reducing the gaming efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the timing effect. In addition, by reducing the types of buttons operated in the timing effect, it is possible to make the game more easily understandable. On the other hand, more types of buttons may be operated than in this control example. As the number of buttons to be operated increases, the degree of difficulty of timing presentation can be increased, so that a player with high skill in timing presentation can be satisfied. Note that the player's skill may be determined from the point acquisition status, the total points obtained in the previous timing effect, and the like, and the number of buttons used may be increased or decreased according to the skill. That is, when it is determined that the skill is low or that the player has not participated at all in the previous time, for example, it is configured to execute the timing effect of the aspect in which the player can participate with one type of button. The mode of timing effect using four types of buttons may be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that the degree of difficulty has clearly decreased from the appearance, so that the willingness to participate in a player with low skill can be improved.

  In this control example, when the fluctuation effect with the timing effect set is executed, the timing effect is configured to be started 5 seconds after the reach occurs and configured to be executed for 14 seconds. However, the start period and the duration period of the timing effect are not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the timing effect may be performed using all the variation times. Even if the timing effect is executed in the sub display device 690, since the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, even if the fluctuation time is spent to execute the timing effect, the special symbol It is possible to prevent (suppress) missing a lottery result. Therefore, since the timing effect can be performed for a longer period, the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In this control example, the timing effect is executed during the execution of the fluctuation effect, but the execution period of the timing effect is not limited to this. For example, the timing effect may be executed during the jackpot (special game state). In this case, by achieving the norm by the timing effect, it may be configured to be notified that the transition to the definite variation state of the special symbol is made after the big hit ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the jackpot becomes a mere operation for acquiring the prize ball, and thus it is possible to improve the interest in the game during the jackpot. In this case, if the player can not achieve the quota despite the jackpot A (16R probability variation jackpot), for example, the low probability state of the special symbol is notified in the notification period of the timing effect, for example, after that It may be configured to perform reverse presentation at the end of the jackpot and to notify the probability change state of the special symbol. As a result, even when the timing effect can not achieve the quota, it is possible to play the game in anticipation of the occurrence of a reverse effect during the ending period, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. .

Fourth control example
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first control example described above, the control example in the case where each accessory performs variable operation independently or in combination is described. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, a preferable control method of the accessory which performs the combination of the variable operation and the lighting operation will be described.

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example in configuration is that the rotary lighting unit 800 is added as an accessory to perform effects that are movable in a fluctuation effect etc. Point, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example It is the point that is done. The other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are the first. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186, a front view of the game board 13 in this control example will be described. FIG. 185 is a front view of the game board 13 when the above-mentioned rotary lighting unit 800 is in the retracted position, and FIG. 186 is a front view of the game board 13 when the rotary lighting unit 800 is in the overhanging position. . When the rotation lighting unit 800 is out of the execution period of the effect for performing the variable operation, it is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the effect that the rotary lighting unit 800 performs the variable operation is set, the rotary lighting unit 800 is disposed at the overhang position shown in FIG. 186, and the operation according to the effect (rotation operation and lighting operation) Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 185, the retracted position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is the lower left of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view. As shown in FIG. 185, when the rotary lighting unit 800 is disposed at the retracted position, the upper right portion of the rotary lighting unit 800 is only slightly visible, and most are hidden by other components and can not be viewed from the front. Become. On the other hand, the overhanging position of the rotary lighting unit 800 is below the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. In this case, the player can visually recognize most of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the front.

  Next, the configuration of the rotary lighting unit 800 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 175 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rotary lighting unit 800 in the present control example, and FIG. 175 (b) is a side view of the rotary lighting unit 800 from the left side.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the rotary lighting unit 800 is provided with a substantially circular rotary member 820 rotatable on the front side about the rotary shaft 822 and lighting on and off is possible on the back side thereof. A device 810 is provided. The rotating member 820 is provided with six through holes 821a to 821f. The through holes 821a to 821f are all formed in a circular shape having the same diameter, and are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) on a circumference centered on the rotation shaft 822. Thus, each time the rotation member 820 rotates 60 degrees, the same shape (look) is obtained (six-fold symmetry). The rotating member 820 is made of a translucent material (for example, a PS material). Therefore, even when the through holes 821a to 821f are lit except for the back side, the rough lighting condition can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The lighting device 810 is provided with an insertion port 812 for inserting the rotation shaft 822 of the rotation member 810 (see FIG. 175 (b)). The rotary shaft 822 is physically connected to a drive motor for rotating the rotary member 810 through the insertion hole 812. That is, only the rotating member 810 is rotated by the drive motor, and the lighting device 810 does not rotate.

  The front side of the lighting device 810 is formed of a light guide plate, and the LED is provided on the back side of the light guide plate (inside the lighting device 810). By turning on the internal LED, the player can visually recognize the light of the LED through the light guide plate. Also, the LEDs are evenly disposed on the back side of the light guide plate so as to illuminate all of the front side, and by lighting all the LEDs, the front side of the lighting device 810 appears to be evenly lit.

  Further, on the front side of the lighting device 810, a plurality of regions capable of locally emitting light in a circular shape are provided. That is, six circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are provided. The shapes of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are formed by circles having substantially the same diameter as the through holes 821a to 821f. In addition, they are arranged at equal intervals (every 60 degrees) in a circumferential shape around the insertion hole 812. Since the circumference on which the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are arranged and the circumference on which the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged have substantially the same diameter, any of the rotation members 820 is rotated by rotation. When the through holes reach the front side of any of the circular lighting areas, all the through holes are configured to completely overlap on the near side of all the circular lighting areas.

  In addition, in order to cause the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f to emit light locally, for example, the light guide plate is divided with other areas at circumferential portions of the respective circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f A partition may be provided inside so that the light of the LED provided in the light does not leak to other areas. Then, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f may be separately controlled to be lightable. By configuring in this way, when all the LEDs are turned on, the front side of the lighting device 810 looks as if the entire lighting is on, while the LEDs provided in any of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are independent. By turning on and off, it is possible to make the area look circularly lit.

  Here, the LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are configured with red LEDs and white LEDs, and the LEDs provided in the other areas are configured with only white LEDs. . When lighting the lighting device 810 as a whole, it is possible to make the entire lighting device 810 look white by lighting all the white LEDs. On the other hand, when only a part or all of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are turned on, lighting of red LEDs provided in the corresponding areas is set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 to 178, a lighting control method of the lighting device 810 for each rotation speed of the rotating member 820 will be described. Here, first, an outline of the effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 will be described. In this control example, as an effect using the rotary lighting unit 800, each time the rotating members 820 rotate and the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f overlap with each other in the back and forth (that is, An effect is provided in which the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are turned on red one by one each time the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees. In this effect, the number of circular lighting areas in the red lighting state suggests an expectation of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation effect. For this reason, it is possible to make the player confirm the state of the rotary lighting unit 800 in expectation of lighting as many circular lighting areas as possible. During this period, the rotational speed of the rotary member 820 is relatively slow (for example, a rotational speed of 60 degrees per second) so that the player can easily visually recognize the number of circular lighted areas that are in the lighted state. ) Is set (the low speed rotation state is set).

  Further, the low speed rotation state described above continues until the rotating member 820 makes one rotation. When the rotary member 820 makes one rotation, the rotational speed is accelerated. Then, when the rotation speed becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined speed (for example, one rotation or more per second), the lighting device 820 is switched to the state of full lighting. The rotational speed is continuously accelerated even after the rotational speed is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed (for example, one or more revolutions per second). Then, when it is determined that the rotation speed has reached a relatively high speed (a speed of 3 rotations per second) (high-speed rotation state is reached), intermittent lighting of the front phase is set to the lighting device 810 (That is, all white LEDs are set to repeat lighting and extinguishing at a constant frequency). The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 178, but in the lighting frequency and lighting period of this intermittent lighting, the rotational direction of the rotating member 810 is so as to look like reverse rotation by so-called wagon wheel effect. It is set.

  Then, after the appearance of reverse rotation, after turning on, the number of circular lighting areas lit in the low speed rotation state is turned on again according to the lighting frequency of the intermittent lighting. Even in this high-speed rotation state, the number of lighting of the circular lighting area may be increased. Therefore, since the player can be made to confirm the effect until the end, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be improved.

  In this control example, only the rotation operation of the rotation member 820 is defined in the operation scenario as the operation of the rotation lighting unit 800. The lighting device 810 is configured to switch the lighting mode by determining the rotation speed from the actual rotation operation of the rotation member 820. More specifically, in the operation scenario corresponding to the effect of operating the rotary lighting unit 800, first, the operation to move the rotary lighting unit 800 from the retracted position (see FIG. 185) to the overhanging position (see FIG. 186) is It is prescribed. Then, as an operation when movement to the extended position (see FIG. 186) is completed (the sensor detects that the extended position has been detected), in the operation scenario, the rotating operation in the low speed rotation state of the rotating member 820 Is defined. In addition, as an operation when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) elapses after setting to the low speed rotation state, an operation for accelerating the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is defined. Then, as an operation to be set after the operation to accelerate the rotational speed, an operation to decelerate the rotational speed and stop the rotation of the rotary member 820 is defined when a predetermined period (for example, 6 seconds) elapses in the high speed rotation state. As the subsequent operation, an operation for moving the rotary lighting unit 800 to the retracted position is defined. Thus, only the operation of the rotary member 820 is defined in the operation scenario, and the lighting operation of the rotary member 820 and the lighting device 810 are made variable by varying the lighting mode of the lighting device 810 according to the speed of the rotary member 820. It is possible to suppress the difference between the lighting control and the lighting control. That is, since the lighting mode can be more reliably changed when the rotation speed of the rotation member 820 is changed, the appearance quality of the rotation lighting unit 800 can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177, a method of lighting control in the low speed rotation state (during the low speed operation) will be described. First, FIG. 176 is a diagram showing an example of lighting control in which the appearance quality is deteriorated in the low speed rotation state (in the low speed operation), and FIG. 177 is in the low speed rotation (in the low speed operation) in this control example. It is a figure showing an example of lighting control. That is, a control method for preventing the appearance as shown in FIG. 176 at low speed rotation (during low speed operation) and making the appearance as shown in FIG. 177 will be described.

  As described above, FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating lighting control in which the visual quality deteriorates in the low speed rotation state (during the low speed operation). In this example, in the low-speed rotation state, the case where the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees in a state in which two circular lighting areas are lit is shown.

  When the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f overlaps the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f become visible through the through holes 821a to 821f. FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the through holes 821e and 821f overlap with two circular lighting areas set to the lighting state.

  FIG. 176 (b) is a view showing a state in which the rotation member 820 is rotated and the arrangement of the through holes 821 a to 821 f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811 a to 811 f are deviated. In this bad example, the next lighting position is lighted before the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f matches the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, so the through holes 821a, 821e, and 821f are halfway through. The red light in the circular lighting area leaks out at one end. Therefore, the quality of appearance has deteriorated. This is because the through holes 821a to 821f continuously change in accordance with the amount of rotation of the rotating member 820, while the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f have a fixed position. That is, since the lighting positions of the respective circular lighting regions can not be made to follow the through holes 821a to 821f continuously, when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting regions 811a to 811f are deviated, The quality of appearance is degraded.

  In FIG. 176 (c), the rotating member 820 rotates 60 degrees while the lighting condition of each circular lighting area is maintained as shown in FIG. 176 (b), and the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and the circular lighting areas 811a to 811c It shows the case where the position of 811 f matches again. In this case, as in FIG. 176 (a), the arrangement of the two circular lighting areas set in the lighting state and the through holes 821e and 821f overlap, so the light from the circular lighting area is beautifully viewed from the front It can be viewed visually. As described above, when one or more circular lighting areas are turned on at a rotational position where the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f does not coincide with the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, the quality of appearance is deteriorated. (See FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, in the present control example, in order to improve the quality of appearance, lighting control is performed so as to be in the lighting state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a lighting control method in a low speed rotation state (during low speed operation) in the present control example. As shown in FIG. 177, in this control example, control is performed so that the corresponding circular lighting area is lit only when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f matches the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f. (See FIGS. 177 (a) and (c)), and at the other intermediate positions, all the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are set in the extinguished state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent one or more of the circular lighting areas from being lighted in a state where the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are shifted, and the halfway appearance is prevented. (Can be suppressed). Therefore, the apparent quality in the low speed rotation state (during the low speed operation) can be improved.

  In addition, it is comprised so that it becomes detectable by the rotation sensor which is not shown in figure whether arrangement | positioning of through-hole 821a-821f and the position of circular lighting area | region 811a-811f correspond. The rotation sensor is configured such that the output becomes H each time the rotation member 820 rotates 60 degrees. For example, even if the through hole 821a matches (overlaps) the position of the circular lighting area 811a or matches (overlaps) the circular lighting area 811b, it matches the circular lighting area 811c. Whether it matches (overlaps), matches (overlaps) the circular lighting area 811d, or matches (overlaps) the circular lighting area 811e, it matches the circular lighting area 811f. The output is also set to H in the same state (overlapping). On the other hand, when the arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f is deviated from the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, the output is set to L.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 178, a lighting control method in the high speed rotation state (during high speed operation) will be described. As described above, at the time of high speed rotation, lighting and extinguishing are set to be repeated at a constant frequency (24 Hz) for all white LEDs. In addition, one lighting period is configured to be extremely short (for example, ON DUTY 0.5%), and the length at which the arrangement of the rotating member 810 at the moment of lighting can be visually recognized (cannot be recognized as rotating) It is configured to be a period of

  As shown in FIG. 178, in the high-speed rotation state, the entire lighting device 810 instantly lights white (all lights up) every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees. In the high-speed rotation state, the lighting frequency is set to 24 Hz (24 times per second) while the rotating member 820 rotates 3 times per second (1080 degrees per second) (1080 degrees ÷ 24) = 45 degrees). On the other hand, since the lighting device 810 is turned off except during the momentary lighting period, the appearance of the rotating member 820 also becomes invisible. Therefore, in the player's line of sight, the rotating member 820 can not be viewed continuously, and it is recognized as an appearance like 24 Hz frame feed.

  When the lighting device 810 is momentarily lit in the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (a) to more specifically explain how the rotating member 820 looks from the player's point of view with reference to FIG. 178, FIG. 178 (a) ) Is recognized by the player, but since the lighting period is instantaneous (0.5% on duty), the player can only recognize the arrangement of the rotating member 820 and can not recognize the rotation direction. . Thereafter, the lighting device 810 is set in the extinguished state until the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees (see FIG. 178B), so the player can not visually recognize the shape of the rotating member 820 in this period.

  At the next 24 Hz period (that is, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 178 (b)), lighting device 810 is instantaneously fully lit again. Also in this case, since the lighting period is sufficiently short as in the arrangement of FIG. 178 (a), only the arrangement of the rotating member 820 can be recognized by the player. Then, turn off is set again until the next 24 Hz period (see FIG. 178 (d)), and when the next 24 Hz period is reached, all lighting is instantaneously set and the arrangement of FIG. 178 (e) is recognized by the player Be done. The arrangement of the rotating member 820 is recognized at 24 Hz by the same control as described above.

  Here, as described above, since the rotating member 820 is configured to have the same shape (appears six times) every time it rotates by 60 degrees, as shown in FIG. By recognizing only the arrangement of the rotating member 820, the direction of rotation can be misidentified. That is, actually, the arrangement of FIG. 178 (c) is reached by rotating the through holes 821a to 821f by 45 degrees clockwise (positive direction) from the arrangement of FIG. 178 (a). Regardless, the rotating member 820 can be recognized as if it has been turned 15 degrees counterclockwise. This is because the through hole 821a and the through hole 821f can not be distinguished from the appearance, so it is closest to the position where the through hole 821a was disposed in FIG. 178 (a) (different by 15 degrees), FIG. The through hole 821 f in the above can be recognized (misidentified) as the through hole 821 a.

  Similarly, by continuing to recognize that the visual rotation amount is rotating in the smallest direction, it is possible to reverse the original rotation direction and the rotation direction recognized by the player. As described above, the change in the rotational direction of the rotary member 820 can be omitted by configuring so that the rotational direction is changed to look like only by switching the lighting control. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (prevent) the application of an excessive load to the drive motor by performing a sudden stop or reverse to change the direction of rotation, thereby making the drive motor less likely to break down. it can. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 which can be operated longer and stably.

  In this control example, the lighting device 810 is set to full lighting every time the rotating member 820 rotates 45 degrees in the high-speed rotation state (that is, at 24 Hz), but the frequency for lighting the lighting device 810 is limited to this. It is not a thing. In the high-speed rotation state, the rotation angle of the rotation member 820 from full lighting of 1 to next full lighting is larger than 30 degrees (that is, half of 60 degrees which is the distance between adjacent through holes) and 60 degrees (In other words, the distance between adjacent through holes) It can be arbitrarily determined in a range smaller than this. That is, the angle when comparing the arrangement before rotation of one through hole with the arrangement after rotation of the through hole adjacent to the one through hole adjacent to the rotation direction (that is, the left side) is It is sufficient if the through hole of 1 is smaller than the angle actually rotated. By configuring in this way, it can be falsely recognized as having moved (rotated) in the direction in which the moving angle is small (the moving distance is small), so the lighting device 810 is penetrated every moment when it is set to full lighting. It can be seen as if the hole is moving to the position of the through hole adjacent to the opposite side. Therefore, it is possible to make it feel like it is rotating reversely only by the lighting control without changing the rotational speed and the rotational direction, so that an excessive load on the drive motor is prevented (suppressed). Thus, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 that can operate longer and stably.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Control Example
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this control example. As shown in FIG. 174, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example, the RAM 223 in this control example includes a lighting state counter 223θ, a lighting position storage area 223 ', a lighting setting completed flag 223223, and an initially identified flag 223λ. , A speed identification timer 223μ, a previous value storage area 223ν, and a speed storage area 223ξ are added.

  The lighting state counter 223θ is a counter that indicates the type of lighting state of the lighting device 810, and can indicate different lighting states according to the counter value. Specifically, “01H” means that it is a lighting state (see FIG. 177) for performing lighting control in a low speed rotation state (during low speed operation), and “02H” is a high speed rotation from a low speed rotation state Transition to the state, meaning that the lighting state (full lighting state) at the time of acceleration of rotational speed, "03H" is the lighting state in high speed rotation state (during high speed operation) (see Fig. 178) Means On the other hand, if the counter value is "00H", it means that the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is not performed. The lighting state counter 223θ is updated at the timing of switching the lighting state (see S6613 in FIG. 181, S6805 in FIG. 183, and S6909 in FIG. 184). The lighting state counter 223θ is referred to in the lighting control process (see FIG. 180) executed in the main process, and lighting control according to the counter value is set.

  The lighting position storage area 223 'is an area where information indicating the lighting state of each of the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f is stored. The lighting position storage area 223 'is formed of, for example, 1 byte, and the 0th bit to the 5th bit correspond to the circular lighting areas 821a to 821f, respectively. Each bit constituting the lighting position storage area 223 'indicates that the corresponding circular lighting area is in the lighting state if the value is 1 (on), and indicates the lighting off state if the value is off. The information stored in the lighting position storage area 223 'is an arrangement of the through holes 821a to 821f and a circle each time it is detected that the output of the rotation sensor becomes H in the low speed rotation state or the high speed rotation state. Each time the positions of the lighting regions 811a to 811f overlap, the values thereof are updated (see S6608 and S6610 in FIG. 181 and S6911 and S6912 in FIG. 184). In addition, all values are cleared at the timing when the effect using the rotary lighting unit 800 ends.

  The lighting setting completion flag 223κ is a flag indicating whether or not the lighting state has been updated based on the fact that the output of the rotation sensor has become H. If this lighting setting completion flag 223κ is on, it indicates that the lighting state has been updated based on the output of the rotation sensor being H, and if it is off, the lighting state is not updated. Indicates that. When the H output of the rotation sensor is detected with the lighting setting flag 223 が turned off, the lighting state is updated and the lighting setting flag 223 が is set to on (S 6612 in FIG. 181, and FIG. See S6913). In addition, after the lighting state is updated, when the L output of the rotation sensor is first detected, it is set to OFF (see S6604 in FIG. 181 and S6910 in FIG. 184). By performing control to update the lighting state with reference to the lighting setting completion flag 223 、, it is prevented that the lighting state is updated a plurality of times while the output of the rotation sensor is H. be able to.

  The initially identified flag 223λ is a flag indicating whether or not a reference value (value of the speed identification timer 223μ) has been acquired in order to identify the rotational speed of the rotary member 820. If this first identified flag 223 λ is on, it indicates that the reference value (value of the speed identification timer 223 μ) has already been acquired to identify the rotational speed, and if off, the reference value is not acquired Indicates that. If the initially identified flag 223λ is on, the rotational speed is calculated based on the reference value already acquired (see S6701 in FIG. 182). On the other hand, if the initially identified flag 223λ is off, after the reference value for identifying the rotational speed is acquired, the flag is set to on (see S6703 in FIG. 182). The rotational speed of the rotary member 820 can be accurately determined by using the initially identified flag 223λ.

  The speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the rotational speed of the rotating member 820. The speed identification timer 223μ is, for example, periodically (every 1 millisecond) updated in the main processing. The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is calculated by determining the time from when the output of the rotation sensor becomes H to the time when the output becomes H next based on the difference of the value of the speed identification timer 223μ.

  The previous value storage area 223ν is a storage area for storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ when the H output of the rotation sensor is detected. Next, when the rotation sensor becomes H output, the time taken to rotate 60 degrees by the difference between the value stored in the previous value storage area 223223 and the value of the current speed identification timer 223μ Is calculated. Based on the calculated time, the rotational speed is calculated (S6706 in FIG. 182). The data stored in the previous value storage area 223ν is calculated each time the rotational speed identification process (see FIG. 182) is executed, and then the current value of the speed identification timer 223μ is overwritten. .

  The speed storage area 223ξ is a storage area for storing information corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating member 820. The data stored in the speed storage area 223 'is overwritten each time the rotation speed is calculated in the rotation speed identification process (see S6706 in FIG. 182). The rotation speed of the rotating member 820 is determined based on the information corresponding to the rotation speed stored in the speed storage area 223 ', and lighting control of the lighting device 810 according to the rotation speed is performed.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Fourth Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 184. First, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example. In each of the processes of S1501 to S1520 in the main process, the same process as the process of each of S1501 to S1520 in the first control example is executed.

  Further, in the main processing in the present control example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management processing of S1510 ends, next, the speed identification timer 223μ is updated by adding 1 (S1551), and the processing proceeds to S1511. The speed identification timer 223μ is a timer used to calculate the speed of the rotating member 820 as described above.

  In addition, in the main processing in the present control example, when the ball entering effect setting processing of S1515 ends, next, lighting control processing for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 is executed (S1552). And after execution of lighting control processing (S1551), processing of S1516-S1520 is performed and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184, the details of the lighting control process (S1552) described above will be described. First, FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the lighting control process (S1552). The lighting control process (S1552) is a process for controlling the lighting state of the lighting device 810 in accordance with the speed of the rotating member 820.

  In the lighting control process (S1552), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the lighting state counter value 223θ is "01H" (S6501). When it is determined in the process of S6501 that the lighting state counter value 223θ is 01H (S6501: Yes), a low speed process for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low speed rotation state Is executed (S6502), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6501 that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not "01H" (S6501: No), then it is determined whether the value 223θ of the lighting state counter is "02H" (S6503). Then, if it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “02H” (S6503: Yes), the lighting state in the acceleration state during the transition of the rotating member 820 from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state is set The acceleration process is performed (S6504), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6503 that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not "02H" (S6503: No), it is determined whether the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is "03H" S6505). If it is determined in the process of S6505 that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is “03H” (S6505: Yes), high speed processing for setting the lighting state in the high speed rotation state of the rotating member 820 is executed. (S6506), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is not "03H" (S6505: No), the value of the lighting state counter 223θ is "00H" and there is no need to control the lighting device 810. , End this process.

  Next, the details of the low speed processing (S6502) described above with reference to FIG. 181 will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing low speed processing (S6502). The low speed process (S6502) is a process for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the low speed rotation state, as described above.

  In the low speed processing (S6502), it is first determined whether the output of the rotation sensor is H (high) (S6601), and the output is not H (output is L) (S6601) Next, it is determined whether the lighting set flag 223223 is on (S6602). In the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting set flag 223κ is off (S6602: No), the through holes 821a to 821f are disposed at positions deviated from the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f. Also, since this means that the lighting device 810 has already been set to the off state, the present processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6602, when it is determined that the lighting set completion flag 223κ is on (S6602: Yes), the position of the circular lighting area 811a to 811f in the state where any of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f is on Since it means that the through holes 821a to 821f are arranged at the shifted positions, all the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are turned off (S6603). This prevents the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f from shifting between the through holes 821a to 821f (see FIG. 176 (b)) in the state where the circular lighting area set in the lighting state exists. Since it can be (suppressed), the appearance quality can be improved. When the process of S6603 ends, the lighting setting completion flag is set to OFF (S6604), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6601 that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6601: Yes), it is determined whether the lighting set flag 223κ is on (S6605), the lighting set flag If it is determined that 223κ is on (S6605: Yes), since the lighting state has already been set, and it is not necessary to set the lighting state in an overlapping manner, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is not on (that is, off) (S6605: No), the position of the output of the rotation sensor is H (the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f and The position where the through holes 821a to 821f overlap with each other) means that the lighting state is not set yet. Therefore, in this case, first, a rotational speed identification process for identifying the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is executed (S6606). The details of the rotational speed identification process (S6606) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S6606 is completed, it is determined whether or not the rotation speed is higher than one rotation per second (S6607). If it is determined that the rotation speed is less than one rotation per second (S6607: No), the range of low speed rotation state In order to set the lighting state illustrated in FIG. 177, the data of each bit in the lighting position storage area 223 is first shifted to the upper bit side (S6608) and then the shifted data is selected. Among them, it is determined whether the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) matches the target value (the degree of expectation) of the present effect (S6609).

  When it is determined in the process of S6609 that the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) is smaller than the target value (S6609: No), one higher bit of the bits having a value of 0 (off) is 1 The bit set in is set to 1 (S6610), and the process proceeds to S6611. By the process of S6610, the number of circular lighting areas set in the lighting state can be increased by one. On the other hand, if the number of bits having a value of 1 (on) matches the target value (the degree of expectation), the process of S6610 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6611.

  In the process of S6611, the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the ON bit among the bits in the lighting position storage area 223 'is set to be lit in red, and the lighting set flag 223223 is set to ON. (S6611), this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S6607 that the rotation speed is higher than one rotation per second (S6607: Yes), the rotating member 820 is in an accelerating state during transition from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state. This means that all the white ED provided inside the lighting device 810 are set to the lighting state (S6612). Then, “02H” is set to the value of the lighting state counter 223θ (S6613), the first-time identification flag 223λ is set to OFF (S6614), and this processing ends.

  By performing the low speed processing, the lighting state described above with reference to FIG. 177 can be set in the low speed rotation state, so that the appearance quality can be improved.

  Next, the aforementioned rotational speed identification process (S6606) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The rotational speed identification process (S6606) is a process for identifying (calculating) the rotational speed of the rotating member 820, as described above. In this rotational speed identification process (S6606), first, it is determined whether or not the initially identified flag 223λ is on (S6701).

  If it is determined in the process of S6701 that the first identified flag 223λ is not on (ie, off) (S6701: No), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is stored in the previous value storage area 223ν In step S6702, the first-time identification flag 223λ is set to on (S6703), and the process ends. As described above, by storing the value of the speed identification timer 223μ in the previous value storage area 223ν, the time required for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees in the next rotational speed identification process can be easily calculated. be able to.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S6701 that the first identified flag 223λ is on (S6701: Yes), the value of the speed identification timer 223μ is read (S6704), and the read value and the previous value storage area The difference with the value stored in is calculated (S6705). This difference represents the time from when the output of the rotation sensor is H last time to this time H again. That is, it means the time taken for the rotating member 820 to rotate 60 degrees. When the process of S6705 is completed, the rotational speed of the rotating member 820 is calculated from the calculated difference (the time taken to rotate 60 degrees), and stored in the speed storage area (S6706), and the present process is ended. Do. An appropriate lighting state can be set according to the rotation speed of the rotation member 820 calculated by this processing.

  Next, the above-described acceleration process (S6504) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing acceleration processing (S6504). This acceleration process (S6504) is a process for setting the lighting state in the acceleration state during transition from the low speed rotation state to the high speed rotation state.

  In acceleration processing (S6504), first, it is determined whether the output of the rotation sensor is H or not (S6801), and if it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6801: No) ), This processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6801 that the output is H (S6802: Yes), the above-described rotation is performed to determine whether the rotation speed of the rotation member 820 has reached the high speed rotation speed. The speed identification process (S6802) is executed. Since this rotational speed identification process is only the same process as the rotational speed identification process described with reference to FIG. 182, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the process of S6802 ends, it is then determined whether or not the calculated rotational speed is 3 revolutions per second (S6803), and it is determined that the rotation speed is not 3 revolutions per second (one revolution or more but less than 3 revolutions per second). (S6803: No), since the high-speed rotation state has not been shifted, the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6803 that the rotational speed of the rotating member is 3 revolutions per second (S6803: Yes), this means that the high-speed rotation state has been transitioned. Switch. That is, a command for setting the lighting mode of the lighting frequency of 24 Hz and the on-duty of 0.5% is set for the LED driver of the lighting device 810 (S6804). Thereafter, "03H" is set as the value of the lighting state counter 223θ to indicate that the high-speed rotation state has been reached (S6805), the initially identified flag 223λ is set to off (S6806), and this processing is ended. Do. This acceleration process makes it possible to immediately identify the transition to the high-speed rotation state and switch the lighting state.

  Next, the high speed processing (S6506) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The high speed process (S6506) is a process for setting the lighting state when the rotating member 820 is set to the high speed rotation state, as described above. In this high speed processing, it is first determined whether or not the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), and if it is determined that the output is not H (that is, L) (S6901: No), then It is determined whether the lighting set flag 223κ is on (S6902).

  When it is determined in the process of S6902 that the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is off (S6902: No), the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6902 that the lighting set completion flag 223κ is on (S6902: Yes), the lighting state of the circular lighting area where the lighting of the red LED is set is canceled (extinguished) (S6903) ), And the lighting set flag 223κ is set to off (S6904), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6901 that the output of the rotation sensor is H (S6901), it is determined whether the lighting set flag 223λ is on or not, and the lighting set flag 223λ is on. For example (S6905), this means that the lighting state has already been set, and there is no need to set the lighting state in an overlapping manner, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lighting set flag 223λ is not on (ie, off) (S6906: No), then the lighting period in the high speed rotation state (24 Hz, on duty of 0.5% period) It is determined whether or not it is (S6906), and if it is not in the lighting period (S6906: No), the present processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S6906 that the lighting period in the high speed rotation state (24 Hz, on duty of 0.5% period) (S6906: Yes), then the high speed rotation state ends from the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 In order to determine whether or not the rotation speed identification process is executed (S6907). In this rotational speed identification process (S6907), the same process as the rotational speed identification process (S6606) described above with reference to FIG. 182 is performed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the rotational speed identification process (S6907) is completed, it is then determined whether the calculated rotational speed is less than three revolutions per second (S6908), and if less than three revolutions per second (S698: Yes), Since the high speed rotation state is ended based on the operation scenario, which means that the rotating member 820 starts to decelerate toward the rotation stop, the processing of S6909 to S6911 for setting the end of the lighting state is executed. That is, all the LEDs are set to be turned off (S6909), and "00H" is set to the lighting state counter 223θ, thereby indicating that the state of performing the lighting control of the lighting device 810 is ended (S6910). Then, the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is set to OFF, and all the data in the lighting position storage area 223 are cleared to 0 (S6911), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6908 that the rotation speed is not less than 3 revolutions per second (the rotation speed in the high speed rotation state is maintained) (S6908: No), first, the lighting position storage area The data of each bit of 223ι is shifted to the lower bit side (S6912). That is, the data is shifted in the opposite direction to the low speed rotation state. Then, with reference to the data after shift, the red LED provided at the lighting position (circular lighting area) corresponding to the bit having a value of 1 (on) is set to the ON state (S6913). Then, the lighting setting completion flag 223κ is set to ON (S6914), and this processing ends.

  By executing the process of S6913, the red LEDs provided in the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are controlled separately from the white LEDs controlled in the lighting state illustrated in FIG. The jackpot expectation can be displayed again. Further, since the red LED is a lighting period of the white LED and is turned on only when the output of the rotation sensor is H, the red LED is turned on every time the rotating member 820 rotates 180 degrees. It is set. The angle at which the rotary member 820 rotates in one cycle of lighting is 45 degrees, while the circular common areas are arranged every 60 degrees, so the least common multiple of these is 180 degrees. Here, as described above, when the rotary member 820 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in the high speed rotation state, the player's eyes look like it is rotated 15 degrees counterclockwise. Therefore, when the rotating member 820 rotates 180 degrees clockwise, it looks as if the player's eyes turned 60 degrees counterclockwise. Therefore, by performing the processing of S6912 and S6913, the turn-on position of the red LED is made to follow the player's appearance every time it looks as if the rotation by one circular lighting area has progressed counterclockwise. It can be moved around by one. Therefore, in the high-speed rotation state, it is possible to have an appearance as if the rotation direction has changed only by the lighting control, without changing the rotation direction or the rotation speed of the rotation member 820. Moreover, according to having become the appearance which began to rotate to the opposite direction, lighting production of red LED which shows an expectation can also be performed. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, the rotation lighting unit 800 that combines the rotation operation and the lighting operation is added to the configuration. The rotary lighting unit 800 includes a rotating member 820 that rotates and a lighting device 810 whose direction is fixed, and the circular shape of the lighting device 810 is provided through the through holes 821a to 821f provided in the rotating member 820. An effect of causing the player to visually recognize the red light emitted from the lighting areas 811a to 811f and notifying the degree of expectation for the jackpot by the number of light emitting portions is performed. However, when one or a plurality of circular lighting areas are lit in a state where the through holes 821a to 821f and the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f are shifted, there is a possibility that the appearance may be halfway. Therefore, in the present control example, the corresponding circular lighting area is controlled to light up only when the through holes 821a to 821f coincide with the positions of the circular lighting areas 811a to 811f, and the lighting device is shifted in position. It is comprised so that the whole of 810 may be light-extinguished. With this configuration, the visual quality of the rotary lighting unit 800 can be improved.

  Further, in this control example, the rotation speed of the rotating member 820 can be determined according to the detection frequency of the rotation sensor, and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 can be changed according to the rotation speed. Rather than setting the rotation control of the rotary member 820 and the lighting control of the lighting device 810 independently according to the elapsed time, the actual rotation speed of the rotary member 820 is determined to change the lighting control of the lighting device 810 By doing this, the lighting control matched by the actual operation of the rotary member 820 can be performed.

  In the present control example, the lighting device 810 is disposed on the back side of the rotating member 820, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the liquid crystal display device may be disposed on the back side of the rotation member 820, and an image indicating the expectation of the jackpot may be displayed for each through hole position. As a result, compared to the case of arranging the lighting device 810, it is possible to execute the rendering with a higher degree of freedom, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the present control example, the six through holes 821a to 821f are provided in the rotation member 820, but the number of through holes can be arbitrarily determined. Moreover, the structure which can visually recognize the lighting aspect of the lighting device 810 from the front side of the rotation member 820 is not limited to the through-hole penetrated to the back side. For example, in place of the through holes, a transparent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or the like may be disposed so that the lighting mode on the back side can be visually recognized. In addition, by reducing the thickness as compared with the other positions of the rotation member 820, the lighting mode on the back side may be more easily visible than the other portions.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

  Although the case where the front rail part 715 was formed from a single circular arc shape was demonstrated in said each embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the front rail portion 715 may be formed of a plurality of arcs, and the direction of the adjacent arcs may be reversed (wave shape). In this case, the slide movement speed of the effect member 620 is intermittently changed, and the posture of the effect member 620 is unstable. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of shaking the effect member 620.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the center of gravity G of the effect member 620 is vertically above the first shaft support 613 when the effect member 620 forms an inverted state has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the center of gravity may be disposed obliquely above the first shaft support 613.

  Although the case where the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 of the lower left plate member 320 is horizontal in the left-right direction has been described in the above embodiments, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the upper surface of the buffer rib 322 may be inclined downward as it approaches the width direction outer side. In this case, the velocity of the ball flowing into the upper surface of the lower left plate member 320 from the outer side in the board width direction can be decelerated by the acceleration in the gravity direction, and the deceleration time of the ball can be shortened.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the slide hole 643 of the transmission member 640 is formed as a long hole has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide hole 643 may be formed in a circular shape, and the positional deviation between the slide hole 643 and the slide shaft portion 621a may be adjusted by the transmission member 640 extending and contracting. In this case, the arrangement range of the transmission member 640 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the position of the contact part 644 can be switched by 2 positions was demonstrated in the said 4th Embodiment, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the position of the contact portion 644 may be continuously changed (moved). In this case, the rate of change of the biasing force of the torsion spring 650 can be continuously increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, although the case where the attitude of the tip end swinging member 6556 changes at two positions has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the posture change of the tip swinging member 6556 may be caused in a plurality of steps. In this case, the swing amount of the expansion / contraction effect device 6540 can be formed with a plurality of types, and variations of the effect can be increased.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Note that each of the above-described embodiments, each control example, or part of them may be combined. Furthermore, although it comprised with several control apparatus, you may comprise with one integrated control apparatus or several integrated control apparatuses.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<An example of the technical idea to change the driving force transmission by the deformed elongated hole 553 of the pivot arm member 550>
A crank member which is rotated about a first axis and has a projection projecting at a position eccentric to the first axis, and an insertion portion through which the projection is inserted, the first position and the first position are separated from each other An arm member movable between the second position and a drive device for generating a driving force for rotating the crank member about the first axis, the insertion portion being inserted The driving force is transmitted to the arm member by bringing the projection into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the insertion portion facing in the movement direction of the projection, and the arm member is moved to the first position and the second position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a transmission area movably formed between a position and a non-transmission area which is connected to the transmission area and in which transmission of the driving force is blocked. A1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the crank member includes a crank member provided with a protruding portion protruding from a rotational shaft and an arm member provided with an insertion portion into which the protruding portion of the crank member is inserted. There is a gaming machine in which an arm member operates in conjunction with rotation of a crank member (see, for example, JP-A-2009-000306). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the crank member and the arm member always interlock. Therefore, the arm member is driven from the start of the crank member, and the timing of the start of the crank member and the timing of driving the arm member can not be shifted. In this case, at the time of starting the crank member, a large force is required to overcome the inertia of the crank member and the arm member, and there is a problem that the drive device becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the insertion portion of the arm member includes the transmission region and the non-transmission region connected to the transmission region, the crank is inserted in the non-transmission region. By starting the member, it is possible to shift the timing for driving the arm member and the timing for starting the crank member. That is, even if the crank member is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the arm member until the projection intrudes from the non-transmission region into the transmission region. As a result, the driving force required for starting the crank member can be suppressed, and the drive device can be miniaturized.

  The arm member may be stopped or moved while the protrusion moves in the non-transmission area. For example, when an arm member is moved, the case where it moves by the elastic force etc. which gravity or the elastic spring for assistance generate | occur | produces is illustrated.

  In addition, as a penetration part, a hollow with a bottomed recessed part, a long hole penetrated etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A1, the crank member is formed so as to be able to rotate by one or more rotations, and the insertion portion becomes the transmission area by rotating the crank member in one rotation direction, while the crank member A game machine A2 comprising a selection area which becomes the non-transmission area by being rotated in another rotation direction opposite to the one rotation direction.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member can be changed according to the rotation direction of the crank member. In this way, by reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device without changing the rotational speed of the crank member, it is possible to form two speed modes of the arm member when the crank members are arranged in the same phase. The variation of the speed of the arm members can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A2, the insertion portion is separated from the projection and an inner circumferential surface of the insertion portion facing in the movement direction of the projection when the crank member is rotated in the one rotation direction. A game machine A3 characterized in that the selection area is formed by providing an extra portion.

  In the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2, the selection area is formed by providing the insertion portion with the extra portion, so that the other for changing the mode of transmission of the driving force to the arm member Parts can be eliminated and material costs can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3, at least one of the first position and the second position is formed as an end position of a movement range of the arm member, and the first position or the formed as an end position thereof. When the arm member is disposed at one of the second positions, the arm member directed to the other one of the first position or the second position formed opposite to the end position. A game machine A4 characterized in that a bound suppressing mechanism for suppressing movement is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, when the arm member is disposed at either the first position or the second position formed as the end position of the movable range of the arm member, It is possible to suppress the driving force that the driving device needs to generate in order to suppress the movement of the arm member toward the other side on the opposite side. Therefore, the durability of the drive device can be improved.

  In addition, when using the adsorption | suction force of a magnet as a bound suppression mechanism, when suppressing a motion with a claw-shaped member, and the load which the projection part of a crank member receives from an arm member faces an axial direction of a crank member, an arm The case where the penetration part of a member is formed, etc. are illustrated.

  In the case of adsorbing with a magnet, although the magnet is required as a separate member, it is possible to generate various magnitudes of adsorption force by the internal composition of the magnet, and the design freedom can be improved.

  In the case where the movement is suppressed by the claw-shaped member, a driving device for operating the claw-shaped member is necessary, but the movement of the arm member can be mechanically arrested by the claw-shaped member.

  When the insertion portion of the arm member is formed in such a manner that the load received by the projection of the crank member from the arm member is directed to the axis of the crank member, provision of a separate member for restraining movement of the arm member is unnecessary. Bounce of the arm member can be suppressed mechanically.

  In the gaming machine A4, when the arm member is disposed at at least one of the first position or the second position, an outline of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area is the external shape. A game machine A5 characterized in that the bound suppressing mechanism is formed by being substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centering on the rotation axis of the crank member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the bounce suppressing mechanism is formed by continuing the rotation of the crank member after the arm member is disposed at the first position or the second position. Thereby, the change from the movement state of an arm member to a stop state can be formed smoothly.

  Further, in the bounce suppressing mechanism, the load applied from the insertion portion to the projection is directed to the rotation shaft of the crank member, so that the load in the rotation direction of the crank member can be suppressed, and the load on the drive device is suppressed. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is disposed at the first position, an outline of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion near the connection position with the transmission area is the crank member. An urging force is applied to move the arm member from the first position to the second position, which is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centering on the rotation axis, and the non-transmission area of the insertion portion The side surface on the first position side is formed with at least one of an inner recessed portion protruding inside of the insertion portion or an outer recessed portion protruding outside of the insertion portion with a size that can accommodate the protrusion. A game machine A6 characterized by being

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, when the arm member is disposed at the first position, the outer shape in the vicinity of the connection position with the transmission area of the non-transmission area of the insertion portion. Is substantially the same as the circumscribed circle of the protrusion centering on the rotation axis of the crank member, and an urging force for moving the arm member from the first position to the second position is loaded on the arm member. In this case, the projection of the crank member is disposed in the non-transmission area of the insertion portion, whereby the movement of the arm member is prevented by the projection and the arm member is stopped. When the crank member is rotated and the projection moves in the non-transmission area, the arm member is moved when the projection and the inner recess or the outer recess are opposed to each other. That is, when the protrusion is disposed to face the inner recess, the inner recess is pushed out by the protrusion, and the arm member is moved to the opposite side of the crank member. Further, when the protrusion is disposed to face the outer recess, the protrusion is accommodated in the outer recess, and the arm member is moved to the crank member side.

  As a result, the projection of the crank member moves in the non-transmission area, whereby the movement of the arm member, which is different from the movement of the arm member caused when the projection moves the transmission area by rotating the crank member Can occur. Therefore, coexistence with the improvement of durability of a drive device and the change of the movement width of an arm member can be aimed at.

  That is, in order to change the movement width of the arm member, it is necessary to reverse the direction of the driving force of the drive device according to the movement width of the arm member. In this case, the control load of the drive device is increased, and it is difficult to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, the projection of the crank member is moved in the non-transmission area, and the projection and the inner hollow portion or the outer hollow portion are disposed opposite to each other, thereby forming the movement of the arm members having different moving widths. Ru. Therefore, the movement width of the movement of the arm member can be changed without reversing the direction of the driving force of the driving device. In addition, by narrowing the formation interval of the adjacent inward depressions or outward depressions, it is possible to cause the arm member to perform an operation with a small movement width such as vibration.

  In addition, the aspect which can accommodate a projection part may be an aspect in which the whole projection part is included in a recess, and the aspect in which a part of projection part is contained in a recess may be sufficient.

<An example of the technical idea of limiting the swing width of the expansion / contraction effect device 540 by the arc-shaped hole 554>
The movable member which can move along a predetermined movement trajectory and can be disposed at the first position and the second position which are different from each other, moves corresponding to the movable member, and abuts on the movable member to move the movable member. A stopper member for restricting the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the member and changing the movement width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is disposed at the first position or the second position; , A game machine B1 characterized by comprising.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a movable member formed movable and a stopper member for restricting the movement width of the movable member (for example, JP 2012-016623A). reference). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the stopper member is fixed immovably, so the stopper member is separately prepared for the case where the movable member is disposed at the first position and the case where the movable member is disposed at the second position. And the space for disposing the stopper member is wide.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the stopper member moves corresponding to the movable member, the movable member is arranged at the second position while the stopper member is arranged at the first position. It can also be used as a stopper in the case. Thereby, the space which arranges a stopper member can be controlled.

  In addition, since the stopper member changes the moving width of the movable member depending on whether the movable member is arranged at the first position or the movable member is arranged at the second position, the variation of the moving width of the movable member is increased be able to.

  The stopper member may be, for example, a protrusion projecting from the transmission member and coming into contact with the movable member, or an inner wall of a recess which is recessed in the transmission member and accommodates a part of the movable member.

  In addition, as a mode of movement, linear movement, curvilinear movement, meandering movement, vibration, rocking, rotational movement and the like are exemplified. Further, the movement width in each movement aspect means, for example, an actual movement distance or a linear distance between two points in the case of linear movement, curvilinear movement, meandering movement, vibration, etc. In the case of etc., it means the actual movement distance, movement angle, etc.

  In the gaming machine B1, the movable member includes an intermediate member pivotally supported by the first shaft so as to be swingable and extendable in the radial direction of the first shaft, and in the first position and the second position The expansion and contraction length of the intermediate member is different, the predetermined movement trajectory is formed in an arc shape centered on the first axis, and the stopper member is in a case where the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion and contraction state A game machine B2 extending along the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the movable member is pivotally supported so as to be pivotable about the first axis and is formed so as to be able to extend and contract in the radial direction of the first axis It has a member. Therefore, the curvature radius of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member centering on the first axis can be changed depending on the length of the intermediate member in the expansion and contraction direction.

  Here, the stopper member is extended along a predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion / contraction state (a curvature of the extension direction of the stopper member and the predetermined expansion / contraction state of the intermediate member) And the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member in the same case). In this case, when the intermediate member is in a predetermined expansion and contraction state, the movable member is moved along the stopper member, and the movable member can be moved in the extending direction of the stopper member. Therefore, the movement width (swing angle) of the movable member can be maximized.

  On the other hand, when the intermediate member is in an expansion / contraction state different from the predetermined expansion / contraction state, the curvature of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member and the curvature in the extending direction of the stopper member can be made different, and the predetermined movement of the movable member The track and the extending direction of the stopper member can be crossed. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be shortened. Therefore, the movement width of the movable member can be changed by changing the expansion and contraction state of the intermediate member.

  In the gaming machine B2, the movable member includes a protrusion protruding toward the stopper member, the stopper member includes an insertion portion through which the protrusion is inserted, and the protrusion is on the insertion portion. In the inserted state, the movable member and the stopper member interlock in the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member, and the movable member abuts on the insertion portion.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the movable member and the stopper member interlock in the expansion and contraction direction of the intermediate member by inserting the projection of the movable member into the insertion portion of the stopper member. The driving device for expanding and contracting the movable member and the driving device for moving the stopper member can be combined. Further, the insertion portion restricts the movement of the movable member by being in contact with the movable member. That is, the insertion portion of the stopper member has a function as a stopper for restricting the movement of the movable member, and a function for interlocking the movable member and the stopper member. This makes it possible to centralize the functions.

  In the game machine B3, the expansion and contraction operation of the intermediate member reverses the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the advantageous effects of the gaming machine B3, the arrangement of the first shaft with respect to the insertion portion is reversed between the inner circumferential side and the outer circumferential side by the expansion and contraction operation of the intermediate member. Thereby, the movement width of the movable member can be changed between the case where the first shaft is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion and the case where the first shaft is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion.

  That is, in the case where the first axis is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement locus of the protrusion in the case where the movable member is moved with a predetermined movement locus follows the shape of the insertion portion), The movement locus and the shape of the insertion portion are approximated, and the movement width of the predetermined movement locus of the movable member can be increased. On the other hand, in the case where the first axis is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the insertion portion (when the movement trajectory of the projection when the movable member is moved with a predetermined movement trajectory substantially reverses the shape of the insertion portion), the projection The angle formed by the movement trajectory of the movable member and the inner wall surface of the insertion portion is increased, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the insertion portion is formed so as to be changeable in posture while maintaining the extended state of the intermediate member, and the posture of the insertion portion changes the contact position of the movable member and the insertion portion. Is changed, and the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member is changed.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3 or B4, the contact position between the movable member and the insertion portion is changed by changing the posture of the insertion portion while maintaining the extended state of the intermediate member. In this case, the movement width of the predetermined movement trajectory of the movable member can be changed while maintaining the expansion and contraction state of the intermediate member.

  In any one of the game machines B3 to B5, the insertion portion includes a groove portion which allows the projection portion to move in and out along the movement path, and the projection portion is separated from the insertion portion through the groove portion. A game machine B6 that is capable of forming a state, and the movable member includes a positioning assisting portion that is engaged with the stopper member in the separated state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, it is possible to form a separated state in which the projection is separated from the insertion portion through the groove and the movable member is in the separated state. A positioning aid is engaged with the stopper member. Therefore, the formation range of the stopper member can be made smaller than the movement range of the movable member, and the material cost of the stopper member can be reduced, and the positional deviation between the movable member and the stopper member in the separated state It can be prevented. That is, even if the projection is separated from the insertion portion of the stopper member, the relative movement of the movable member with respect to the stopper member is suppressed by the positioning assisting portion, so that the projection can be returned to the insertion portion again.

<An example of the technical idea of supporting the effect member 620 supported in an inverted position at two points>
A base member, a movable member displaceably supported by a support formed on the base member and moving upward from a predetermined position, a drive device generating a driving force for displacing the movable member, and the movable member A transmission member for transmitting a driving force generated from the drive device to the movable member, wherein the transmission member is pivotally supported by a pivot portion formed on the base member, A game machine C1 characterized in that the length from the pivot support portion to the connection position of the movable member and the transmission member is shorter than the length from the support portion to the connection position of the movable member and the transmission member. .

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a movable member which is displaceably supported by a support portion formed on a base member and which moves upward from a predetermined position is driven by transmission of driving force by gears (for example, See JP 2011-120640 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the movement amount of the center of gravity of the movable member when operating the drive device in the minimum unit of control resolution of the drive device (for example, one step for a stepping motor) is the support of the movable member Is proportional to the length from the center of gravity of the movable member to the center of gravity of the movable member. Therefore, the position adjustment of the center of gravity of the movable member becomes more difficult as the center of gravity of the movable member moves away from the support in the radial direction.

  In addition, when the center of gravity of the movable member is shifted to one side from an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion, a driving force is generated to displace the movable member in the opposite direction, and the movable member is inverted. If the center of gravity is shifted to the other side by the driving force even if the state is maintained, the direction of the driving force coincides with the direction of gravity, and the movable member is largely displaced.

  Therefore, as the movable member becomes longer in the radial direction of the support portion, there is a problem that it becomes more difficult to stop the movable member in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the transmission member for transmitting the driving force of the drive device to the movable member to move the movable member upward is pivotally supported by the pivotal portion of the base member and connected to the movable member. The length from the connection position of the movable member and the connection member to the support portion is formed shorter than the length from the connection position of the movable member and the connection member to the support portion. Therefore, even if the movable member is long in the radial direction of the support portion, the movement amount of the center of gravity of the movable member in the case of operating the drive device at the minimum unit of control resolution of the drive device is suppressed. it can. Therefore, it is easy to make the movable member stationary in an inverted state in which the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed directly above the support portion.

  Note that as a mode in which the movable member is supported by the base member, a mode in which the movable member is pivotally supported by the base member in a pivotable manner, a mode in which the movable member is slidably supported by the base member, The combined aspect etc. are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1, the transmission member is characterized in that the arm length from the pivot support portion to the connection position with the movable member is shortened as the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the more the movable member displaced around the support portion moves upward from the predetermined position, the more the transmitting member from the pivot portion to the connecting position with the movable member The arm length is shortened. Therefore, compared with the case where the arm length of the transmission member is constant, the design freedom of the speed of the movable member can be improved.

  For example, when the rotation number of the drive device for rotating the transmission member operates at a constant speed, the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at a predetermined first length, and the arm length of the transmission member is the first It is assumed that the second length is shorter than the second length. When the number of rotations of the drive device is constant, the transmission when the transmission member is fixed at the first length is higher than when the arm length of the transmission member is fixed at the second length. The moving speed of the center of gravity of the movable member is increased when the member is placed in a predetermined phase.

  Here, the speed generated when the movable member is operated quickly at a speed that occurs when the transmission member has the first arm length near a predetermined position, and the speed that occurs when the transmission member has the second arm length near the inverted state Now consider the case where you want to move the movable member slowly. As a method for that purpose, although it is conceivable to change the rotation speed of the drive device halfway, this method can not be adopted when it is difficult to change the rotation speed of the drive device. In addition, even if it is possible to change the number of rotations of the drive device, in order to change the number of rotations on the way, a detection sensor for detecting the timing of the change is required, which increases the cost. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the arm length from the pivotally supported portion of the transmission member to the connection position of the transmission member and the movable member is a predetermined position of the transmission member. Is formed in such a manner as to be shortened as it moves upward from the Therefore, the transmission member can be set to the first arm length near the predetermined position, and the transmission member can be set to the second arm length near the inverted state, so that the design freedom of the speed of the movable member can be improved. .

  In addition, as a structure by which the arm length from the pivotal support portion to the connection position of the transmission member and the movable member is fixed, the case where the projection protruding from the transmission member is inserted into and coupled to the movable member is exemplified. Ru. In addition, as a configuration in which the arm length can be changed, a long hole is formed in the transmission member, and a protrusion protruding from the movable member is slidably inserted into the long hole of the transmission member, or movable The case where a long hole is provided in the part by which a member is supported by a support part, and the insertion shaft rod penetrated by the long hole from a base member is formed is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the movable member includes a protrusion projecting in a direction parallel to the support portion, and the transmission member is an elongated hole extending in the radial direction of the pivot portion. A game machine C3 comprising an insertion portion through which the projection is inserted.

  In the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the insertion portion is extended in the radial direction of the shaft support portion, and the transmission member and the movable member are inserted by inserting the projection of the transmission member into the insertion portion. As a result, the moving direction of the connecting position is restricted in the radial direction of the shaft support. Therefore, with the swinging of the transfer arm, it is possible to mechanically change the length from the support portion to the connection position of the transfer member to the movable member.

  In addition, as an insertion part, the long hole by which penetration formation is carried out, the recessed part formed as a hollow with a bottom, etc. are illustrated.

  In the game machine C3, the axis support portion is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed on a straight line connecting the support portion and the projection portion.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3, the center of gravity of the support portion, the shaft support portion, the projection portion and the movable member is the movable member when the projection portion is disposed vertically above the support portion. It is formed on the vertical line. In this case, the gravity applied to the center of gravity of the movable member is loaded vertically downward with respect to the support and the bearing. Therefore, since the force in the rotational direction is not loaded on the movable member, the posture of the movable member can be maintained even if the power of the drive device is cut off. Thereby, the burden on the drive device can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the drive device, and the rotation of the drive device is decelerated by the worm gear.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines C1 to C4, a worm gear is interposed between the transmission member and the driving device, and the rotation of the driving device is decelerated by the worm gear. The moving width of the movable member can be significantly reduced when operating with the smallest unit of resolution of In addition, since the transmission direction of the force through the worm gear is limited to one direction from the drive device side to the transmission member side, it is possible to prevent the worm gear from rotating with a load from the transmission member side. It is possible to reduce the load placed on the drive device at the time of stopping the vehicle.

  In any one of the game machines C1 to C5, an urging device for generating an urging force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member in both directions of displacement of the movable member is provided above the support portion, the urging force being A game machine C6 characterized in that the center of gravity of the movable member is balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state where the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed vertically above the support portion, and the movable member becomes larger as it is displaced from the inverted state.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the biasing device generates a biasing force for moving the center of gravity of the movable member above the support portion, and the biasing force is that the center of gravity of the movable member is It becomes so large that a movable member displaces from the state (inverted state) arrange | positioned vertically above a support part. That is, the biasing force can be minimized in the inverted state.

  Therefore, by increasing the biasing force when the movable member moves upward from the predetermined position, the load on the driving device for moving the movable member upward from the state in which the movable member is disposed at the predetermined position can be reduced.

  Also, the biasing force is generated in both directions of the displacement direction of the movable member, and balanced in the displacement direction in the inverted state. Therefore, when the movable member is moved upward from the predetermined position and the drive device is controlled to stop, the posture of the movable member is inverted by the biasing force even when the movable member does not reach the inverted state or passes by the inverted state. It can be turned to This makes it easy to stop the movable member in the inverted state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the movable member can form a first state until the center of gravity is displaced by a predetermined amount from above the support portion by a predetermined amount, and a second state displaced by the predetermined amount or more. A game machine C7 characterized in that the rate of change in biasing force in the case of the same displacement is larger in the second state than in the one state.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6, the movable member is larger than the predetermined amount from the inverted state than in the first state on the inverted state where the center of gravity of the movable member is disposed vertically above the support portion. In the second state to be displaced, the rate of change of the biasing force in the case of the same displacement is larger. In this case, when starting the movable member from the state where the movable member is disposed in the second state, it is possible to suppress the load at the time of starting the drive device. In addition, since the acceleration of the movable member can be reduced when the movable member is disposed near the inverted state, it is easy to stop the movable member in the inverted state.

<An example of a technical idea in which the spring constant of the torsion spring 650 changes in the middle of swinging>
A movable member movable between a first position and a second position, a drive device for generating a driving force for moving the movable member, and an urging force for returning the movable member to the first position In the gaming machine provided with an urging device for generating the movable member, the movable member is movable relative to a change ratio of the urging force generated when the movable member is disposed in the first urging region from the first position to the predetermined position. The rate of change of the biasing force generated when the member is disposed in the second biasing region which is a region connected to the first biasing region and is formed apart from the first position is formed large A game machine D1 characterized by

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine using an urging force by an urging device such as an elastic spring as an assisting force when moving a movable member by a driving force generated by a driving device (e.g. See -120640)). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the biasing force of the biasing device is proportionally increased by the displacement amount of the movable member, and it is difficult to change the purpose of the biasing device by the arrangement of the movable member. There was a problem that it was. That is, it has been difficult to make the movement of the movable member flexible by suppressing the urging force in a certain area, and to make the movement of the movable member sharper by improving the urging force in another area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the change ratio of the biasing force biased toward the first position indicates that the movable member has the second change ratio compared to the case where the movable member is disposed in the first bias region. The case where it is arranged in the pressure area is made larger. That is, for example, when the movable member stopped at the second position is started to the first position (the second urging region), a sufficient biasing force can be obtained by the biasing device, while the movable member is the first When the movable member is disposed in the urging region, the change in the urging force is suppressed, and the operation of the movable member can be made flexible (slowly).

  As a mode in which the rate of change of the biasing force of the biasing device is changed by the arrangement of the movable member, the number of biasing devices that cause the movable member to generate a biasing amount may increase during the process. The case where it is formed from an elastic spring and the spring constant of an elastic spring is changed by arrangement of a movable member etc. is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine D1, the biasing device is a pair of elongated members which are disposed on a pair of surfaces which intersect the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, one end of which is one end And the other end, which is an end opposite to the one end, is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed, the movable member being A main body portion sandwiched between a pair of elongated members, and an opposite side of the main body portion with respect to the pair of elongated members, and at least one of the pair of elongated members in the moving direction of the main body portion And a contact portion formed to be contactable, wherein the contact portion is connected and fixed to the movable member, and when the movable member is disposed in the first biasing region, the movable member is a pair of the pair Of the movable member among the long members The movable member is brought into contact with one of the long members on the side where the distance to the movable member is short and is given an urging force, and the movable member is brought into contact with the other long member and the contact portion to be urged. A gaming machine D2 characterized by being given.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the change timing of the changing ratio of the biasing force by the biasing device is shifted for each long member the contact timing of the movable member and the pair of long members. Can be formed by Therefore, it is unnecessary to change the biasing force of the biasing device by control or to prepare a separate member for improving the biasing force.

  That is, since the other end of the pair of long members is restricted in movement, one long member on the side where the distance to the movable member becomes short due to the movement of the movable member is pressed against the movable member and moves. The other long member on the opposite side receives no force from the movable member. Therefore, in the first biasing region, when the movable member moves, the other long member disposed on the opposite side of the moving direction of the movable member stays in place.

  On the other hand, in the second biasing region, the movable member is moved, whereby the other long member is in contact with the contact portion. As a result, the biasing force is also generated from the other long member. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the movable member in the second biasing region can be increased.

  In addition, a coil spring, a torsion spring, a leaf spring etc. are illustrated as an elastic spring.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing device is a pair of elongated members which are disposed on a pair of surfaces which intersect the moving direction of the movable member and sandwich the movable member in the moving direction, The other end of each of the two ends of the movable member is disposed opposite to the both side surfaces of the movable member, and the other end which is the opposite end of the one end is formed of an elastic spring whose movement is suppressed. A body portion sandwiched between the pair of elongated members, and at least one of the pair of elongated members formed on the opposite side of the body portion with respect to the pair of elongated members in the moving direction of the body portion And a contact portion formed to be contactable, the contact portion being connected and fixed to the movable member, and the movable member being disposed in the first biasing region, the movable member being Of the pair of elongated members, the movable member When the movable member is placed in the second urging region while being abutted against one long member on the side where the distance to the movable member is reduced by movement and the movable member is placed in the second biasing region, the one long member The game machine D3 characterized in that the middle part of the above is pressed against the contact part arranged on one long member side with respect to the main body part.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the change ratio of the biasing force is formed by pressing the middle part of one long member against the contact part. That is, the change ratio of the biasing force is changed by further deforming one long member already deformed by the movement of the movable member starting from the middle portion pressed against the contact portion. Here, in the deformation starting from the intermediate portion, the length of the portion subjected to the deformation becomes shorter compared to the deformation starting from the other end portion, so the ratio of the change of the biasing force to the moving amount of the movable member is Increase. Thereby, in the second biasing region, it is possible to increase the change of the biasing force with respect to the moving amount of the movable member. Therefore, the change ratio of the biasing force can be increased.

  In the gaming machine D3, the one long member includes a first bending point bent toward the opposingly disposed contact portion, and the one long member is the first bending point at the first bending point. A game machine D4 characterized in that it is pressed against the contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, one long member is in contact with the abutting portion disposed oppositely at the first bending point, so one long member is in contact It is stretched by contact with the part. Therefore, the tip end portion of the biasing device that applies the biasing force to the movable member can be separated from the other end portion of the long member serving as the starting point of the biasing force and the first bending point. Therefore, the moment the movable member is loaded from the biasing device in the second biasing region can be made larger.

  In the gaming machine D4, the movable member includes a tip enlargement area which is enlarged in the moving direction as it moves away from the other end of the long member, and one of the movable member and the long member is enlarged in the tip enlargement region. A game machine D5 characterized in that the end of the game machine is abutted.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D4, the movable member has a tip enlargement area, and the movable member and one end of the elongated member abut in the tip enlargement area. Therefore, when one long member is stretched by pressing one long member against the contact portion, the contact position between the movable member and the long member separates from the other end of the long member. As it is moved in the direction, the amount of deformation of the elongated member is increased. Therefore, the biasing force applied to the movable member from the biasing device can be increased.

  In any one of the game machines D2 to D5, the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is changeable.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D5, it is possible to increase the variation of the change in biasing force generated by the long members. That is, for example, when the arrangement interval between the contact portion and the main body portion is narrowed, the timing at which the rate of change of the biasing force of the long member increases can be set earlier.

<Example of a technical idea in which a plurality of out-ports are provided and the buffer rib 322 is formed on the lower plate 320>
Inside the game area where the ball is formed so as to allow flow-down, the board internal character placed in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the ball formed on one side in the width direction of the board internal character A first out port, which is an opening for discharging from the area, and a second out port, which is an opening for discharging balls from the game area, formed on the other side in the width direction of the board internal component opposite to the one width direction side In the gaming machine, the first out port and the second out port are provided with a lower plate portion extending from the lower side surface of the opening to the front and having a guiding surface on the upper surface, and the guide of the lower plate portion The surface is provided with a buffer rib extending like a rib toward the opening direction on the corresponding side in the first out port or the second out port, and is formed to be raised from the guide surface in the width direction outer side And the buffer rib has an aspect ratio directed outward in the width direction. Gaming machine E1, characterized in that it is formed smaller.

  Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a plurality of out-ports are arranged (see, for example, JP-A-9-192301). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is preferable to reduce the size of each out-port as the number of out-ports increases, because it is possible to secure the installation space for an attacker etc. There was a problem that discharge of the game ball might be overdue.

  For example, when the height at which the ball bounces up and down on the near side of the out-port becomes equal to or more than the vertical width of the out-port, the ball stays in front of the out-port. Also, for example, when the side surface is disposed on the side of the character at the side surface in the width direction of the out port and becomes a wall, the ball flowing from the width direction to the near side of the out port collides with the side surface of the character and rebounds in the width direction. At this time, when the amount of rebounding in the width direction becomes equal to or more than the width of the out port, the ball stays in front of the out port.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the buffer rib is formed on the guide surface formed in the lower plate portion, it is possible to suppress the bounce of the ball or to decelerate the ball. That is, when the ball collides in the vertical direction, the buffer rib becomes a cushion by bending deformation of the buffer rib, and it is possible to suppress ball rebound. In addition, when the ball collides from the left and right direction, the ball is braked by being fitted into the buffer rib.

  Here, the buffer rib extended in the opening direction is weak to the load from the left and right direction, and may be damaged by the collision of the ball from the left and right direction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, since the guide surface is provided with the step portion on the outer side in the width direction, the ball flowing down from the left and right direction toward the buffer rib falls from above the step portion to the buffer rib . In this case, the vertical component of the direction of the collision of the ball with the buffer rib can be increased, and breakage of the buffer rib can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the step portion has a function of stopping the ball moving in the left and right direction on the guide surface, it is possible to prevent the ball moving on the guide surface from bouncing back beyond the width of the out port.

  Since the buffer rib is formed higher toward the center in the width direction of the game area, a large rebound suppressing effect can be obtained near the center in the width direction of the game area where flowing balls are easily concentrated. Thereby, the ball can be discharged smoothly from the out port. Further, by aligning the lower curve of the game area with the lower surface of the buffer rib, the arrangement position of the out port can be corrected downward.

  Here, the higher the height at which the buffer rib is formed, the greater the effect of suppressing ball bounce, because the amount of deflection of the buffer rib is increased. That is, as the amount of deflection of the buffer rib is larger, the cushioning effect works sufficiently, and it is easy to suppress the bounce. Therefore, it is preferable to make the aspect ratio of the buffer rib constant in the left-right direction (to make the length in the vertical direction constant) for the effect of suppressing the rebound.

  On the other hand, when the aspect ratio of the buffer rib is made constant (the length in the longitudinal direction is made constant), it is necessary to increase the height at which the step is formed, and the path of the ball up to the step is also upward As a result, the game area is narrowed, which is not preferable in terms of space efficiency.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, on the outer side in the width direction of the game area where flowing balls are hard to concentrate, the aspect ratio (longitudinal length) of the buffer rib is reduced, and the width direction center of the game area where flowing balls are easily concentrated In the above, the aspect ratio (longitudinal length) of the buffer rib is increased. Thereby, coexistence with improvement of discharge efficiency of a ball, and securing of a game area can be aimed at.

  In addition, extending in the opening direction is not particularly limited, and means extending in the opening direction in a linear shape, a waveform, a mountain shape, or the like.

  In the gaming machine E1, a gaming surface E2 characterized in that the guide surface includes an outer inclined portion that is inclined downward and outward in the width direction of the gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the guide surface is provided with the outer inclined portion, so that the velocity of the ball flowing into the guide surface from the width direction outside can be decelerated by gravity acceleration. The deceleration time can be shortened.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a non-falling area in which a ball can not flow down is formed obliquely above at least one of the first out port or the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the flow of the ball flowing obliquely downward from the non-flowing area to the guide surface is restricted, so the flow of the ball to the guide surface The number of paths can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to narrow the rebounding direction of the falling ball. Thereby, the outer shape of at least one of the first out port or the second out port can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine E3, an opening / closing device which is disposed in the gaming area and which can be opened and closed to the front side is disposed above at least one of the first out port or the second out port. A game machine E4 formed on the front side of the opening / closing device;

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the non-flowing area is formed by the opening / closing device. Thereby, the space which arises by restrict | limiting the opening dimension of the direction to the non-flow area side of a 1st out port or a 2nd out port can be utilized as an arrangement | positioning space of a switchgear.

  In the closed state, the opening / closing device allows the ball flowing down the front of the opening / closing device to flow downward to the game area, and when the opening state is open, the ball flowing in front of the opening / closing device to the back of the game area Has the ability to drain. Therefore, the non-falling area can be formed more reliably than when the ball flows down irregularly due to collision with a nail or the like.

  In any one of the game machines E1 to E4, a game machine E5 including a direction adjustment rib extended in a rib shape in an opening direction on an upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port is provided with a direction adjusting rib extended in a rib shape in the opening direction. The resistance to the ball flowing down while colliding with the upper bottom surface of the first out port or the second out port can be suppressed.

<Features F group> (image used at power-on also during normal use)
Display means capable of displaying a predetermined display mode, display control means for causing the display means to display the display mode, and storage means for storing display data corresponding to the display mode displayed by the display control means And setting means for reading out the display data from the storage means and setting the display data as display data to be displayed on the display means by the display control means, and the storage means performs initial setting of the game. Initial display data corresponding to the initial image to be displayed when the display is displayed, and the setting unit reads out the initial display data from the storage unit in the initial setting and sets it as display data to be displayed on the display unit The display means for displaying the initial display data read out in the initial setting in the effect to be executed after completion of the initial setting Gaming machine F1, characterized in that it is to be used as display data to be displayed.

  Here, conventionally, in the gaming machine, various effect images are displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. In such a gaming machine, generally, image information of an image to be displayed on a display device is stored in advance in storage means, and when displaying an image, the corresponding image information is read out from the storage means and image processing is performed Then, the image is displayed on the display device (e.g., JP-A-2006-223598). However, with the above-described gaming machine, the increase in image information increases the amount of image data used in the gaming machine, and increases the load due to the increase in capacity of storage means for storing and the process of reading out the same. There was a problem. Due to such problems, improvement in image display control has been desired.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since the initial display data displayed at the time of initial setting is also used for effects after the completion of the initial setting, the display data can be made common, the amount of display data can be reduced, and the image display There is an effect that control can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, the display means comprises a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means, and the display control means comprises the first display means or the second display means. The display mode is displayed on the display unit, and the setting unit reads out the initial display data from the storage unit in the initial setting, and displays the display data on the first display unit and the second display unit. In the effect to be performed after the initial setting, the initial display data read out in the initial setting is set as display data to be displayed on one of the first display means and the second display means. A game machine F2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the display data can be made common to the display means constituted by the first display means and the second display means It has the effect of reducing the load.

  In the game machine F2, the initial display data is set such that the display area of the first display means and the second display means is one display area.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the first display means and the second display means can be set as one display data, so that the display control can be simplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the acquiring means for acquiring information, the discriminating means for discriminating the information acquired by the acquiring means, and the discrimination result discriminated by the discriminating means are shown based on the fulfillment of the acquisition condition. Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information, wherein the identification information is displayed by initial identification information displayed in the initial image and dynamic display after completion of the initial setting A game machine F4 characterized in that the game machine is composed of normal identification information.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the initial identification information displayed in the initial image and the normal identification information. Since it is configured, there is an effect that the player can recognize that it is the initial setting.

  In the gaming machine F4, the initial image is a display image including a display image including the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and a game information image indicating game content displayed on the second display means A game machine F5 characterized by at least an image.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F4, the initial image is composed of the initial identification information displayed on the first display means and the display image including the game information image displayed on the second display means Since the game content and the determination result can be simultaneously notified to the player during the initial setting, the player can be notified.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the initial identification information displayed during the initial setting on the first display means is configured by a smaller amount of data than the normal identification information. F6.

  According to the gaming machine F6, since the initial identification information is composed of display data smaller than the normal identification information, it is possible to reduce the control load at the time of initial setting and quickly read and display the initial identification information. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines F4 to F6, the second display means is configured by a display area smaller than the first display means, and the second display means is used when a game is not performed for a predetermined period. A game machine F7 characterized in that a display image including the game information image displayed as the initial image is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F4 to F6, when the game is not performed for a predetermined period, the display including the game information image in the second display means using the initial display data Since the image is displayed, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced and notification of the game content can be performed.

  In the gaming machine F7, when the game is not performed for the predetermined period, display data corresponding to the display image displayed on the first display means among the initial image is set to non-display A game machine F8 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F7, the initial image displayed on the first display means is set to non-display, so that different effects can be displayed on the first display means. is there.

  In any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, the setting means sets the initial display data read out in the initial setting to the first display means in the effect to be executed after the initial setting. In the case where display data corresponding to the second display means is set to non-display and set to the second display means, display data corresponding to the first display means is set to non-display A game machine F9 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, the first display means and the second display means independently perform display using initial display data. It has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine F9, in the effect executed after the initial setting, when setting the initial display data read in the initial setting to the first display means, the setting means A game machine F10 set so as to be displayed at different display positions.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F9, it is possible to show the player as if the display is different from the display displayed in the initial setting, and various kinds of initial display data may be used. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature G group> (Change the position of ○ and × depending on the contents of fluctuation with the shutter and the main liquid crystal)
The first display means capable of displaying identification information, the second display means different from the first display means, and the identification information displayed on the first display means or the second display means Dynamic display means for displaying, privilege giving means for giving a benefit that is advantageous to a player when specific identification information is displayed on the first display means or the second display means, and the dynamic A game machine G1 comprising switching display means for switching and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means to either the first display means or the second display means.

  Here, for example, a player is provided with a plurality of display means for effecting a game machine, and performing a variable effect or a jackpot effect on each display means to perform a synergistic effect using a plurality of display means. There is known a gaming machine for the purpose of improving the interest of the player (for example, JP-A-2004-081256). However, in the above-described gaming machine, improvement in convenience using a plurality of display devices has been desired. Due to such problems, improvement in convenience has been demanded.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the effect (dynamic display of identification information) displayed on the first display means or the second display means is switched to either the first display means or the second display means by the switching display means. It can be switched and displayed. As a result, the identification information can be displayed at a position where the player can easily view according to the state of the game, and the convenience can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G1, a first drive means capable of driving to a first position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually recognize the identification information dynamically displayed on the first display means, and a dynamic display on the second display means The second drive means that can be driven to the second position, which is a position that makes it difficult to visually identify the identification information, and the switching display means is such that the first drive means is at the first position Switch the display unit to display the identification information on the second display unit and switch the display unit to display the identification information on the first display unit when the second drive unit is at the second position. A game machine G2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the visual recognition of the identification information is impeded by the first driving means and the second driving means.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the second display means includes moving means capable of moving the front side of the first display means, and the switching display means is configured to move the second display means by the moving means. In this case, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the identification information is switched to be displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that the second display means prevents the identification information from being visually recognized.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the display data of the display mode displayed on the first display means and the second display means corresponds to the first display means as display data to be displayed on one display area. A game machine G4 characterized by comprising composite display data corresponding to the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the display data of the first display means and the second display means can be set as composite display data in any of the game machines G1 to G3. Therefore, the control load can be reduced. is there.

  In the gaming machine G4, coordinate information for setting display areas of the first display means and the second display means as one display area is set, and the composite display data is A game machine G5 comprising display data for displaying each coordinate in correspondence with the coordinate information.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4, there is an effect that display data to be displayed on the first display means and the second display means can be easily set.

<Feature H group> (fall control)
A game machine comprising: a movable member having a movable portion at least movable in a first position and a second position; and driving means for driving the movable member to a third position and a fourth position. The movable means is movable from the third position to the fourth position in a state where the restriction by the restriction means is released based on the restriction means which restricts the movement from the position to the second position and the satisfaction of the first condition. Driving the movable member from the third position to the fourth position in a state where the member is driven by the driving means and regulated by the regulating means based on the fulfillment of a second condition different from the first condition A game machine H1 having a drive control means driven by the means.

  Here, for example, the suggestion of the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit is performed by moving the movable part provided in the game machine. In such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed in which the interest of the player is improved by increasing the movable pattern of the movable combination (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-079687). In this case, it is necessary to use many drive devices (for example, a motor etc.) in order to increase the movable pattern of the movable part, and there is a problem that power consumption is increased. Due to these problems, it has been required to reduce power consumption.

  According to the gaming machine H1, by driving the driving means, the movable portion can be moved by the driving vibration or the like, so the power consumption is increased compared to the case where the movable portion is moved electrically or the like. Has the effect of being able to

  A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the gaming machine H1 includes movable means for moving the movable portion from the second position to the first position.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the movable member is moved to the fourth position by the driving unit, so that the movable member is moved to the second position. There is an effect that it can be returned to one position. In this case, the movable portion may be moved to the first position by an inertial force (acceleration) that drives the movable member from the fourth position to the third position without providing the movable means.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when the predetermined condition is established, the privilege giving means for giving a privilege that is advantageous to the player when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and the effect indicating whether the privilege is given by the privilege giving means is prescribed. The drive control unit is configured to execute the movable member in the third position when the movable condition is satisfied in a period in which the effect is executed by the effect execution unit. It is made to drive to the said 4th position, and when the effect which shows that the said privilege is provided by the said privilege provision means is performed, it is easy to drive in the state which cancelled | released the regulation by the said regulation means. A game machine H3 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1 or H2, in the effect that the privilege is easily given, the movable member is easily driven to the fourth position in a state where the regulation is released. There is an effect that the player can be expected to be provided with a benefit when moving to the position.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the drive control means is characterized in that the movable member is moved in the same operation in a state in which the restriction by the restriction means is released and in a state in which the restriction is restricted. A gaming machine H4.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress determination as to whether or not the movable member is restricted by the difference in the operation of driving. Here, the operation is a difference in speed or drive pattern, a difference in drive direction, or the like.

  In any one of the game machines H1 to H4, the drive control means is a position between the third position and the fourth position when the movable member is driven from the third position to the fourth position. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that it is temporarily stopped at an intermediate position for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H4, by temporarily stopping, the movable portion can be easily moved to the second position by the inertial force or the like when not excited. There is.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the fourth position is configured at a position lower than the third position, and the driving means reciprocates the third position and the fourth position. A game machine H6 characterized in that it is configured as possible.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in the advantageous effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, there is an effect that the movable portion can be easily moved by gravity which is lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the movable means is constituted by a stepping motor, and the regulating means is for energizing the stepping motor in a stopped state.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines H1 to H6, the movable means and the restricting means can be configured by the stepping motor, and the configuration can be simplified.

<Feature I group> (avoid executing similar renditions)
The specific period is set by the effect execution means capable of executing the effect, the specific period setting means for setting the specific period in which the specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, and the specific period is set by the specific period setting means And a specific condition determining unit configured to determine whether an executable specific condition is satisfied according to an execution period of the effect, the effect executing unit including the specific condition determining unit A game machine I1, characterized in that the specific effect is executed based on the fact that the specific condition is determined to be established.

  Here, for example, when a predetermined time has passed since the power of the gaming machine was turned on, the transition to a specific effect different from the normal general effect is made to occur, and a periodic effect periodically displayed is displayed, There has been proposed a gaming machine for the purpose of improving the interest of a player (e.g., JP-A-2007-252534). In this case, it is difficult to determine whether or not the regular effect is being performed, when the regular effect, which is periodically performed, is performed with a sound or an image similar to the regular effect. There was a problem that the player was puzzled. Due to such problems, there has been a demand for gaming machines that are easy for players to understand.

  According to the gaming machine I1, during the execution of the specific effect, whether the execution is possible or not is determined before the execution, so confusion of the player due to a defect in the execution timing of the effect can be suppressed, and the player can play the game easily It has the effect of being able to

  The gaming machine I1 has clocking means capable of clocking clocking information, and the specific period setting means starts the specific period based on the predetermined clocking information being clocked by the clocking means. A game machine I2 characterized by at least setting.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the start of the specific period is set based on the clocking of the predetermined time information, so the specific period is set at the same time in other gaming machines. There is an effect that it can be easily configured.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the effect executing means executes a normal effect other than the specific effect during the specific period, and the specific condition determining means performs the normal effect based on the normal effect being executed. A game machine I3 that determines whether a specific condition is established.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the establishment of the specific condition is determined based on the normal effect, so the specific effect is considered in consideration of the relationship between the specific effect and the normal effect. The effect is that it can be implemented.

  The gaming machine I3 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated, and at least one of the specific effect and the normal effect. An operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means, and the specific condition is satisfied when the operation effect of the specific effect and the normal effect are not synchronized. A game machine I4.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I3, it is possible to suppress the problem that the operation presentation of the specific presentation and the normal presentation is executed at the same time, so it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game effective.

  Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display of identification information based on the establishment of the start condition in any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4 and the specific identification which will provide the player with advantageous benefits The game includes special game state setting means for setting a special game state in which information is easily displayed, and the specific effect includes a suggestion effect indicating whether the special game state is set or not. Game machine I5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I4, it is possible to recognize that the special gaming state is set by a specific effect, and to make the specific effect have an interest Has the effect of

  In any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the specific period setting means sets the specific period for a predetermined period each time a predetermined time elapses after the power is turned on. The execution means executes the specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied for each predetermined period based on the setting of the specific period, and the specific condition is determined by the specific condition determination means. A game machine I6 having delay means for delaying the specific effect and executing the effect by the effect execution means when it is determined that the above is not established.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, a delay is given and a specific effect is executed even when a specific condition is not established, giving confusion by the player. Has the effect of being able to

<Feature J group> (0.125 second effect)
An information acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on establishment of acquisition conditions, a storage unit storing the information acquired by the information acquisition unit, and the storage unit based on establishment of the start condition In the case where a discrimination means for discriminating stored information, a display means on which identification information indicating the discrimination result discriminated by the discrimination means is displayed, and identification information indicating a specific discrimination result on the display means Before establishment of the start condition, based on the fact that information is acquired by a benefit giving means for giving a benefit advantageous to the player, a presentation mode output means for outputting a predetermined effect, and the information acquisition means A pre-determination unit that determines the acquired information, and a presentation execution unit that executes, to the presentation mode output unit, an output of a presentation based on the determination result of the prior determination unit; A plurality of output areas in which the output of the effect is set are set in the mode output means, and the effect execution means outputs the effect previously when the output of the new effect is executed. A game machine J1, characterized in that the output of the new effect is executed on the output area different from the area.

  Here, for example, in a pachinko machine, when the game ball wins to the starting opening and the number of pending storage increases, the random number information of the pending is determined (preread) in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined result (big hit Gaming machines intended to increase the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the variable display corresponding to the hold will be a big hit by executing an effect that suggests that the For example, JP-A-2012-16499). In such a gaming machine, when the fluctuation time is configured in a short time, if the efficiency of the game is increased, the rendering period such as the lottery result becomes short, and there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to understand. To address this problem, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand even when the fluctuation time becomes short.

  According to the gaming machine J1, a plurality of output areas are set in which effects (effects indicating the determination result of suspension) are output based on the determination result of the prior determination means, and the plurality of output areas are set first. The next effect is output to an output area different from the output area from which the effect is output. Thereby, even when the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is newly obtained during the execution of the rendition, the effect based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means is displayed in a different output area to perform the rendition being executed Without ending, it is possible to execute an effect based on the determination result of the new prior determination means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player is confused.

  In the gaming machine J1, a predetermined order is set in the plurality of output areas, and the effect executing unit is next to the output area which has previously output the effect when executing a new effect. The game machine J2 executes the output of the new effect to the output area in the order corresponding to.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the effects are sequentially output in the order set in the output area, so that the output area of the latest effect and the new effect overlap. There is an effect that it can control.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect mode output means is constituted by a display means for displaying a predetermined display mode as the predetermined effect, and the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of parts as the output area. A game machine J3 characterized in that a region is set.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exerted. That is, a plurality of effects can be simultaneously displayed by effectively using the display area. Therefore, there is an effect that the rendering period can be set longer.

  In the gaming machine J2 or 3, the storage unit is configured to be capable of storing the information up to a predetermined number determined in advance, and the information acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit when the acquisition condition is satisfied. If the information is less than the predetermined number, the information is acquired, and the effect executing means first achieves the acquisition condition and the information is not acquired by the information acquiring means. A game machine J4, characterized in that an output of effect is executed on the output area corresponding to the next order of the output areas that have been output.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2 or J3, there is an effect that the player can be reminded as if more information is acquired.

  In the gaming machine J3 or J4, when the information is acquired by the acquisition means, the contents of the effect to be executed by the effect execution means are determined based on the determination result by the prior determination means with respect to the information. When the acquisition condition is satisfied and the information is not acquired by the information acquisition means, the effect content determination to determine the effect contents to be executed by the effect execution means based on the determination result other than the specific determination result A game machine J5 characterized by having a means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J3, there is an effect that the player can be made to play a game as if the information had been acquired.

  In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determining means determines the effect period together with the effect contents, and the determined effect period elapses in the output area where the output of the effect is executed by the effect executing means. A game machine J6 having end means for forcibly ending the effect under execution when the effect which is not being performed is being executed.

  According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, it is possible to suppress the problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide the game in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

  In the gaming machine J5, the effect content determination means determines an effect period together with the effect contents, and the effect execution means performs the effect period in the output area for executing the output of the effect newly determined. A game machine J7 characterized in that, when the effect is not executed, the effect currently executed is overwritten to execute the newly determined effect.

  According to the gaming machine J7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, it is possible to suppress the problem that different effects are output in the same output area, and it is possible to provide the game in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

<Features K group> (Operate combined-effects product under one operation condition)
First movable means movable in a first movable range, second movable means movable in a second movable range, different from the first movable means, and first movable with respect to the first movable means The first movable setting means for setting a pattern, the second movable setting means for setting a second movable pattern for the second movable means, and the operation of the first movable means movable according to the first movable pattern And an operation condition corresponding to an operation of the second movable means movable by the second movable pattern, the operation condition is satisfied such that the operation condition is satisfied. Determining means for determining correction data for correcting at least one of the first and second movable patterns based on the correction data determined by the determining means; and correcting means for correcting at least one of the first and second movable patterns Gaming machine K1, characterized in that it comprises.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a variable member which is variable by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are some gaming machines capable of executing a wide variety of rendering operations by varying a plurality of variable members (for example, JP-A-2008-012194). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to set an operation appropriately. Further, among the gaming machines described above, there are some which combine and change a plurality of variable members in one effect, and there are some which can execute more various effect operations. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of variable members are combined and varied, the variable modes may be shifted from each other, which may deteriorate the operation quality.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, the first movable means is moved in the first movable range, and the second movable means different from the first movable means is moved in the second movable range. A first movable pattern is set by the first movable setting unit with respect to the first movable unit, and a second movable pattern is set by the second movable setting unit with respect to the second movable unit. The operation condition is satisfied when the operation condition corresponding to the operation of the first movable unit movable by the first movable pattern and the operation of the second movable unit movable by the second movable pattern is not satisfied. Correction data for correcting at least one of the first and second movable patterns is determined by the determination means. At least one of the first and second movable patterns is corrected by the correction unit based on the correction data determined by the determination unit.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation contrary to the operating condition, so that the first movable unit and the second movable unit can be suitably moved.

  The gaming machine K1 is provided with an effect execution means for executing a predetermined movable effect, and the first movable means and the second movable means are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. A game machine K2 to be played.

  According to the gaming machine K2, a predetermined movable effect is executed by the effect executing means. In addition, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

  Thus, it is possible to operate the first movable unit and the second movable unit which are moved in the predetermined movable effect in accordance with the operation condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the operation against the operation condition is performed in the predetermined movable effect, so that the operation quality of the first movable unit and the second movable unit in the predetermined movable effect can be improved. There is.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means, and is configured to be movable together with the first movable means.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1 or K2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means, and is moved together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation having a sense of unity can be performed by the operation of the second movable means.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a storage unit storing a plurality of different correction data determined by the determination unit, and the first movable unit and the second when the operation condition is not satisfied. Information determining means for determining information necessary for establishing the operation condition based on each movable position of the movable means, and the determining means is based on the information determined by the information determining means. A game machine K4, characterized in that the correction data is determined from the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, a plurality of different correction data determined by the determining means are stored in the storage means in any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3. When the operating condition is not satisfied, the information determining unit determines information necessary to establish the operating condition based on the movable positions of the first movable unit and the second movable unit, and the information is discriminated. Based on the information determined by the means, correction data is determined from the storage means by the determining means.

  As a result, since the movable pattern can be corrected by a process with a relatively light processing load in which the correction data is determined from the storage means when the operating condition is not satisfied, the processing load can be reduced. There is.

  In any one of the game machines K1 to K4, the correction means corrects the movable pattern of the second movable means such that the operation condition is satisfied when the operation condition is not satisfied. A game machine K5 characterized by determining data.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the correction data for correcting the movable pattern of the second movable unit is determined by the determination unit so that the operation condition is satisfied when the operating condition is not satisfied, the second movable unit is corrected. Therefore, the operation quality can be improved.

  The gaming machine K5 includes period setting means for setting an insertion period for confirming the operation content of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means based on power supply to the gaming machine, the determination means Is to determine the correction data for correcting the second movable pattern so that the operation condition is satisfied when the operation condition is not satisfied in the closing period, and the correction means is configured to A game machine K6 that corrects a movable pattern set after the insertion period has ended based on the correction data determined by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the insertion period for checking the operation contents of the first movable setting means and the second movable setting means is set by the period setting means based on the power supply to the gaming machine, and the operation condition is satisfied in the insertion period. If not, correction data for correcting the second movable pattern such that the operating condition is satisfied is determined by the determination means. Based on the determined correction data, the movable pattern set after the end of the closing period is corrected by the correction means.

As a result, after the closing period ends, it is possible to set the movable pattern corrected to the state in which the operating condition is satisfied. That is, there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be moved in the state in which the operation condition is satisfied in most of the time when the gaming machine is in operation.
<Feature L group> (Match the action of one of the prizes with the other)
First movable means movable in a first movable range, second movable means movable in a second movable range, different from the first movable means, first movable means and second movable means Moving control means for moving the second movement data based on predetermined movement data, wherein the first movement data corresponding to a first movement pattern predetermined for the first movement means is set to the first movement means. 1 movable setting means, determining means for determining movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means movable in the first movable pattern according to the set first movable data, and And a second movable setting unit configured to set the second movable unit to be movable by the movable control unit based on the movable data determined by the determination unit.

  Here, there is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine including a variable member which is variable by a motor or the like. Among such gaming machines, there are some gaming machines capable of executing a wide variety of rendering operations by varying a plurality of variable members (for example, JP-A-2008-012194). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the number of variable members is increased, it may be difficult to set an operation appropriately. Further, among the gaming machines described above, there are some which combine and change a plurality of variable members in one effect, and there are some which can execute more various effect operations. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a plurality of variable members are combined and varied, the variable modes may be shifted from each other, which may deteriorate the operation quality.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, the first movable setting means sets first movable data corresponding to the first movable pattern predetermined for the first movable means. Based on the set first movable data, movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means movable in the first movable pattern is determined by the determination means. The second movable setting means sets the second movable means so as to move the second movable means by the movable control means according to the movable data determined by the determination means.

  Thus, the second movable means can be moved by the operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means, so that there is an effect that the first movable means and the second movable means can be suitably moved.

  The gaming machine L1 is provided with an effect execution means for executing a predetermined movable effect, and the first movable means and the second movable means are movable at least in the predetermined movable effect. The game machine L2 to do.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine L1, the following effects can be achieved. That is, a predetermined movable effect is performed by the effect executing means. Then, the first movable means and the second movable means are moved at least in a predetermined movable effect.

  Thereby, the second movable means can be moved by the operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable means in the predetermined movable effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved in the predetermined movable effect.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured to be associated with the first movable means, and is configured to be movable together with the first movable means. .

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second movable means is configured to accompany the first movable means, and is moved together with the first movable means. There is an effect that an operation having a sense of unity can be performed by the operation of the second movable means.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the determining means is moved in the first movable pattern based on the end of the operation of the first movable means movable in the first movable pattern. A game machine L4 characterized in that movable data of the second movable means corresponding to the operation of the first movable means is determined.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the first movable pattern is movable based on the completion of the operation of the first movable means movable in the first movable pattern. Since the movement data of the second movable means corresponding to the movement of the first movable means is determined by the determination means, the movement data taking into consideration the movement of the series of first movable patterns can be determined. Therefore, since the second movable means can be operated in a mode adapted to the operation of the first movable means, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be further improved.

  The gaming machine L4 includes period setting means for setting an initial setting period for performing an initial setting based on power supply to the gaming machine, and the first movable setting means is based on the setting of the initial setting period. A game machine L5 characterized by setting the first movable data.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the initial setting period for performing the initial setting based on the power supply to the gaming machine is set by the period setting means. Then, based on the setting of the initial setting period, the first movable setting unit sets the first movable data.

  Thus, it is possible to determine movable data corresponding to the operation of the first movable means moved by the first movable pattern in the initial setting period. There is an effect that it can be moved by an operation corresponding to the moving means.

  In the gaming machine L5, when it is determined that the first movable means is moved by the movable judgment means for judging whether or not the first movable means is moved after the end of the initial setting period, and the movable judgment means. And specific movable setting means for setting specific movable data corresponding to a predetermined specific movable pattern, wherein the determination means is configured to set the operation corresponding to the specific movable pattern. A game machine L6 characterized in that the movable data of the means is determined.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L5, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is determined by the movable determination unit whether or not the first movable unit is moved after the end of the initial setting period, and it is determined that the first movable unit is moved by the movable determination unit. Specific movable data corresponding to the movable pattern of is set by the specific movable setting means. The movement data of the second movable means for setting the movement corresponding to the specific movable pattern is determined by the determination means.

  Thereby, since the second movable means can be moved by the operation corresponding to the specific movable pattern, there is an effect that the operation quality of the first movable means and the second movable means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the determining means is a timing at which the operation of the first movable means at least having the first movable pattern set ends, and a timing at which the operation of the second movable means ends. A game machine L7 characterized in that the movement data is determined in such a manner as to fit.

  According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the timing at which the operation of the first movable means for which at least the first movable pattern is set is ended, and the operation of the second movable means is ended Since the movable data is determined by the determination means so as to match the timing to be performed, the motion quality of the first movable means and the second movable means at the operation end timing which is one of the timings most noticed by the player There is an effect that it can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the operation judging means determines that the movable amount of the first movable means movable in the first movable pattern becomes a predetermined movable amount according to the set first movable data. Game machine L8 for determining the operation of the first movable means based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machines L1 to L3, the movable amount of the first movable means movable in the first movable pattern by the set first movable data has become the predetermined movable amount Since the operation of the first movable unit is determined by the operation determination unit based on the above, the operation of the second movable unit can be more finely matched to the operation of the first movable unit.

  In the gaming machine L8, the determination means may move the second movable means corresponding to an operation from when the movable amount of the first movable means becomes the predetermined movable amount until the first movable pattern ends. A game machine L9 characterized by determining data.

  According to the gaming machine L9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L8, the second movable means corresponding to the operation from the movable amount of the first movable means becoming a predetermined movable amount to the end of the first movable pattern Since the movable data of is determined by the determination unit, the operation of the second movable unit after the predetermined movable amount is obtained can be the operation corresponding to the operation of the first movable unit. Therefore, the operation quality of the first movable unit and the second movable unit can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L10, a second movable data corresponding to a second movable pattern predetermined for the second movable unit based on the setting of the first movable data by the first movable setting unit. A game machine L11 characterized by comprising movable setting means for setting.

  According to the gaming machine L11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L10, a second movable set in advance with respect to the second movable unit based on the setting of the first movable data by the first movable setting unit. Since the second movable data corresponding to the pattern is set by the movable setting means, the second movable means is operated with the second movable pattern even before the movable amount of the first movable means becomes a predetermined movable amount. be able to. Therefore, since the second movable means can be prevented from being in the stop state until the predetermined movable amount is reached, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Feature M group> (Lighting control of LED for character)
Movable means having a plurality of visible parts which are movable within a predetermined movable range and the light emission mode from the back side is configured to be visible from the front, and provided on the back side of the movable means, the back side of the movable means Further, the light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode, a movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means, and a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern movable by the movable control means When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determination means which can be determined and the movable pattern determination means, the movable part is positioned at a position where the visual recognition part faces the light emission part of the light emission means In response to the position, the light emitting unit emits light, and at least a specific light emission pattern which is turned off when the movable means is moved by a predetermined amount from the light emission position. Gaming machine M1, characterized in that it comprises a light emission controllable light emission control means.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Among such gaming machines, there are some gaming machines capable of executing a wide variety of rendering operations by operating a plurality of variable means (for example, JP-A-2008-012194). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, with the diversification of variable means, it may be difficult to suitably move each variable means in the complex variable means. In addition, among the above-described conventional gaming machines, there are machines in which the light emission mode of a light emitting device configured of an LED or the like is changed in accordance with the movement of the variable means. In such a gaming machine, by causing the light emitting device to emit light in accordance with the operation of the variable means, it is possible to execute a rendering operation with a higher impact. However, in this conventional gaming machine, the operation of the variable means may deviate from the light emission mode of the light emitting device. In such a case, the visual quality of the rendering operation may be degraded.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the movable means is moved within a predetermined movable range. The movable means is configured to have a plurality of visual recognition units in which the light emission mode from the back side is configured to be visible from the front. On the back side of the movable means, light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode is provided. The movable means is movably controlled by the movable control means, and a specific movable pattern is determined at least by the movable pattern determination means as a movable pattern moved by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determination means, the light emitting part is caused to emit light in response to the movable part being positioned at the light emitting position where the visual recognition part opposes the light emitting part of the light emitting means. The light emission of at least the light emission control means is controlled by a specific light emission pattern to be emitted when the predetermined amount of movement is made from the light emission position.

  Thus, it is possible to suppress the light emission of the light emitting unit in a state in which the visual recognition unit and the light emitting unit are shifted, so that the visual quality of the movable unit can be improved in the light emitting unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the light emitting means and the movable means can be suitably operated.

  In the gaming machine M1, the movable means is constituted by a rotating body rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M2, the movable means is constituted by a rotatable body rotatable about a predetermined rotation axis, so while the movable means is rotating, the light emitting position is And the arrangement other than the light emitting position are alternately repeated. Therefore, in the light emission position which may be arrange | positioned several times, there exists an effect that it can be operated with a good-quality appearance each time.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the movable pattern determination means can determine one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. A game machine characterized in that the light emission control means controls the light emission of the light emission means with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern when the predetermined movable pattern is determined. M3.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the movable pattern determination means, one movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determination means from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission control means controls the light emission of the light emission control means with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern.

  Thus, light emission control can be performed with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, so that the appearance of the movable means can be largely changed according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine from the appearance which movable pattern is moved.

  In the game machine M3, a game machine M4 characterized in that the predetermined movable pattern is set to have a higher movable speed than the specific movable pattern.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M3, the movable speed of the predetermined movable pattern is set faster than the specific movable pattern, so that the movable pattern of the movable means can be easily distinguished from the movable speed. Has the effect of

  In the game machine M3 or M4, the predetermined light emission pattern is a light emission pattern that causes the light emission means to emit light even when the movable means is located at a position other than the light emission position.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3 or M4, when the light emission is controlled by the predetermined light emission pattern, the light emission means emits light even when the movable means is positioned other than the light emission position. There is an effect that the player can more easily recognize the difference in the light emission mode of the light emitting means between the specific light emission pattern and the predetermined light emission pattern.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M5, the movable means is constituted by a rotating body rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis, and the visual recognition unit is on a predetermined circumference around the predetermined rotation axis. The movable means is provided at a plurality of places at equal intervals, the movable means has rotational symmetry corresponding to the number of places of the visual recognition part, and the light emitting part is the same as the number of places of the visual recognition part A gaming machine M6 characterized in that the number of points is provided.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines M2 to M5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the movable means is configured of a rotatable body that can rotate around a predetermined rotation axis. And the visual recognition part is provided in multiple places at equal intervals on the predetermined | prescribed circumference centering on the predetermined | prescribed rotation axis. In addition, the movable means has rotational symmetry corresponding to the number of parts of the visual recognition part. And the light emitting part is provided with the same number of places as the number of places of the visual recognition part.

  As a result, when the variable means is rotating, the light emitting position is set for each fixed rotation angle, so that the apparent quality before and after the fixed rotation angle can be improved in the specific movable pattern.

  In the gaming machine M6, the light emission control means may use, as the specific light emission pattern, more than the number of the light emitting portions that have been lighted when the light emitting position is reached last time, each time the rotating body reaches the light emitting position. A game machine M7 that is controlled to cause the light emitting unit of the number of places to emit light.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M6, the following effects are exerted. That is, as the specific light emission pattern, the light emission control means is operated so that the light emission parts having the number of places equal to or more than the number of places of the light emission part emitted when the light emission position is reached last time Controlled by

  As a result, it is possible to more easily recognize that the movable pattern or the light emission pattern has been switched according to the change in appearance.

  In any one of the game machines M3 to M7, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determination means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern, and the light emission control means When shifting from the predetermined movable pattern to the high-speed movable pattern, the game machine M6 controls the light emitting unit to emit light at each predetermined cycle.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines M3 to M7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the movable pattern determined by the movable pattern determination means includes a high-speed movable pattern in which the movable speed is set faster than the predetermined movable pattern. When transitioning from the predetermined movable pattern to the high-speed movable pattern, the light emitting unit is controlled to cause the light emitting unit to emit light at predetermined intervals.

  As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily recognize that the high-speed movable pattern has been obtained by the period in which the light emitting unit emits light.

  In the gaming machine M6, the predetermined cycle is shorter than the cycle in which the movable means for which the high-speed movable pattern is set is set to the light emitting position, and during the period from the light emitting position to the next light emitting position A game machine M7 characterized by being longer than the time to reach a point.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M7, the predetermined cycle is shorter than the cycle in which the movable means having the high speed movable pattern is set to the light emitting position, and moves from the light emitting position to the next light emitting position Since it is configured to be longer than the time to reach the middle point between the two rotations, rotation relative to the arrangement of the visual recognition unit before rotation as compared to the rotational angle at which the visual recognition unit moves by rotation during a predetermined cycle. The angle of the position at which the visual recognition unit adjacent on the opposite side to the direction is arranged by rotation during a predetermined cycle is smaller. That is, since the visual recognition unit adjacent to the side opposite to the rotation direction can be mistaken as the visual recognition unit recognized before the predetermined cycle has elapsed for each predetermined cycle, the rotation direction of the movable means has the appearance of reverse rotation can do. Therefore, since it can be made to look as if the rotation direction is changed without changing the operation of the variable means, it is possible to reduce the load of the variable means.

  In the game machine M7, the light emission control means causes the light emission means to emit light in a third light emission pattern which causes the light emitting portions to emit light in a predetermined order.

  According to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M7, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the light emitting means emits light by the light emission control means with the third light emission pattern in which each light emitting portion emits light in a predetermined order, light can be emitted in a more interesting manner. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K7, K1 to L11, L1 to L11, In any one of M1 to M8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  Game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K7, K1 to L11, L1 to L11, The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of M1 to M8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

Game machines A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C7, D1 to D6, E1 to E5, F1 to F10, G1 to G5, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J6, K1 to K7, K1 to L11, L1 to L11, In any one of M1 to M8, a gaming machine Z3 characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include variable means operated by a motor or the like in the configuration. Among such gaming machines, there are some gaming machines capable of executing a wide variety of rendering operations by operating a plurality of variable means (e.g., Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-012194).
However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, with the diversification of variable means, it may be difficult to suitably move each variable means in the complex variable means.
The present technical concept is made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably setting the operation of the variable means.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is movable in a predetermined movable range, and movable means having a plurality of visual recognition units configured so that the light emission mode from the rear side is visible from the front. A light emitting means provided on the back side of the movable means and having a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode from the back side of the movable means; movable control means capable of movably controlling the movable means; Movable pattern determination means capable of at least determining a specific movable pattern as a movable pattern movable by the movable control means, and the visual recognition unit is of the light emission means when the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determination means The light emitting unit emits light when the movable unit is positioned at a light emitting position facing the light emitting unit, and the movable unit is movable by a predetermined amount from the light emitting position. And at least emission controllable light emission control means in a particular emission pattern for turning off if it.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the movable means is constituted by a rotating body rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the movable pattern determining means includes the specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. The light emission control means is capable of determining one movable pattern from a plurality of movable patterns including at least the light emission control means, and when the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern It controls the light emission of the means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the movable means is moved within the predetermined movable range. The movable means is configured to have a plurality of visual recognition units in which the light emission mode from the back side is configured to be visible from the front. On the back side of the movable means, light emitting means having a light emitting portion capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode is provided. The movable means is movably controlled by the movable control means, and a specific movable pattern is determined at least by the movable pattern determination means as a movable pattern moved by the movable control means. When the specific movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determination means, the light emitting part is caused to emit light in response to the movable part being positioned at the light emitting position where the visual recognition part opposes the light emitting part of the light emitting means. The light emission of at least the light emission control means is controlled by a specific light emission pattern to be emitted when the predetermined amount of movement is made from the light emission position.
Thus, it is possible to suppress the light emission of the light emitting unit in a state in which the visual recognition unit and the light emitting unit are shifted, so that the visual quality of the movable unit can be improved in the light emitting unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the light emitting means and the movable means can be set suitably.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the movable means is constituted by a rotating body rotatable around a predetermined rotation axis. While is rotating, the light emitting position and the arrangement other than the light emitting position are alternately repeated. Therefore, in the light emission position which may be arrange | positioned several times, there exists an effect that it can be operated with a good-quality appearance each time.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, the following effects are achieved. That is, as the movable pattern determination means, one movable pattern is determined by the movable pattern determination means from a plurality of movable patterns including at least a specific movable pattern as the movable pattern and a predetermined movable pattern different from the specific movable pattern. When the predetermined movable pattern is determined, the light emission control means controls the light emission of the light emission control means with a predetermined light emission pattern different from the specific light emission pattern.
Thus, light emission control can be performed with different light emission patterns according to the movable pattern, so that the appearance of the movable means can be largely changed according to the light emission pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more easily determine from the appearance which movable pattern is moved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
113 voice lamp control device (part of effect execution means)

Claims (2)

Determining means for performing a predetermined determination;
Privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege based on the judgment result of the judging means being a specific judgment result;
Gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state to which the privilege is easily awarded and a second gaming state to which the privilege is less likely to be awarded than the first gaming state;
Effect execution means capable of executing effects;
It is a gaming machine having a specific period setting means for setting a specific period in which a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggested effect indicating that the first gaming state is set, while the specific effect is being executed.
The said suggestion is
It may be performed when the discrimination game based on the discrimination is being performed while the specific period is set,
When the effect performed by the state in which the said discrimination | determination game is not performed in the state in which the said specific period is not set, or the state in which the said specific period is set is continued is performed for a predetermined period , Not run,
The specific effect is not executed when the predetermined effect which is different from the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means in a state where the specific period is set. A game machine characterized by   2. A gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising display means for indicating the discrimination result of said discrimination means.

Images